Commentary on Daniel (fragments)
The whole work on one page. Select a passage number to open that passage with its notes, Scripture references, and citation.
Chapter 1
1.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Ἐν ἔτει τρίτῳ τῆς βασιλείας Ἰωακείμ. Ἄρχεται μὲν τῶν λόγων ὁ προφήτης ἐκ τῆς ἀποικίας ἑβραίων· οὐ τὴν ἅλωσιν τῆς πόλεως σκοπὸν ἔχων εἰπεῖν· ἱκανῶς γὰρ αὐτὴ δέδεικται ἔκ τε τῶν τοῦ προφήτου Ἱερεμίου λόγων· ἀλλ᾽ ἀφορμὴν ἑαυτῷ διδοὺς τῆς διδασκαλίας· οὐ γὰρ ἠδύνατο εἰπεῖν ἐν οἵοις γέγονε καὶ τί διεπράξατο κατὰ τὴν Βαβυλῶνα, μὴ πρότερον φήσας αὐτοῦ τὴν ἀποικίαν.
En etei tritǭ tēs basileias Iōakeim. Archetai men tōn logōn ho prophētēs ek tēs apoikias hebraiōn; ou tēn halōsin tēs poleōs skopon echōn eipein; hikanōs gar autē dedeiktai ek te tōn tou prophētou Hieremiou logōn; all᾽ aphormēn heautǭ didous tēs didaskalias; ou gar ēdynato eipein en hoiois gegone kai ti diepraxato kata tēn Babylōna, mē proteron phēsas autou tēn apoikian.
"In the third year of the reign of Jehoiakim." The prophet begins his account with the exile of the Hebrews, not aiming to tell of the capture of the city (for that has been shown sufficiently from the words of the prophet Jeremiah), but giving himself a starting point for his teaching; for he could not say in what circumstances he came to be and what he did in Babylon without first stating his exile.
1.2Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Ἰστέον δὲ ὡς δύο γεγόνασιν Ἰωακείμ, ὁ μὲν εἷς ὁ καὶ Ἰεχονίας λεγόμενος, ὁ δὲ δεύτερος ὁ καὶ Ἐλιακείμ· τοῦ δευτέρου βασιλεύοντος ἐγένετο ὑπὸ Ναβουχοδονόσορ ἡ ἅλωσις τῆς πόλεως.
Isteon de hōs dyo gegonasin Iōakeim, ho men heis ho kai Iechonias legomenos, ho de deuteros ho kai Eliakeim; tou deuterou basileuontos egeneto hypo Nabouchodonosor hē halōsis tēs poleōs.
One should know that there were two Jehoiakims: the first, who is also called Jechoniah; the second, who is also called Eliakim. It was while the second was reigning that the capture of the city by Nebuchadnezzar took place.
1.3Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Ἦλθε Ναβουχοδονόσορ. Οὐ τὴν παντελῆ πόρθησιν τῶν Ἰουδαίων μηνύει· οὔτε γὰρ Ἰωακεὶμ φαίνεται εἰς ἀποικίαν ἀπελθών· ἕνδεκα γὰρ ἔτη βασιλεύσας κατέστρεψε τὸν βίον, ὡς αἱ ἱστορίαι διδάσκουσι· καὶ οὔτε ἡ πόλις ἢ ὁ ναὸς δεινόν τι πέπονθεν· ἐπὶ γὰρ Σεδεκίου τὴν ἐσχάτην ὑπέστη καταστροφήν· ἀλλὰ τὸ ὑπόσπονδον εἶναι τῷ Βαβυλωνίῳ δηλοῖ· διὰ τοῦτο πρότερον φήσας ὅτι ἐπολιόρκει αὐτήν, τότε ἐπήγαγε, καὶ ἔδωκε κύριος ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ τὸν Ἰωακεὶμ βασιλέα, ἀντὶ τοῦ ὑπεξούσιος αὐτῷ γεγένηται.
Ēlthe Nabouchodonosor. Ou tēn pantelē porthēsin tōn Ioudaiōn mēnyei; oute gar Iōakeim phainetai eis apoikian apelthōn; hendeka gar etē basileusas katestrepse ton bion, hōs hai historiai didaskousi; kai oute hē polis ē ho naos deinon ti peponthen; epi gar Sedekiou tēn eschatēn hypestē katastrophēn; alla to hypospondon einai tǭ Babylōniǭ dēloi; dia touto proteron phēsas hoti epoliorkei autēn, tote epēgage, kai edōke kyrios en tę̄ cheiri autou ton Iōakeim basilea, anti tou hypexousios autǭ gegenētai.
"Nebuchadnezzar came." He does not indicate the complete destruction of the Jews; for Jehoiakim does not appear to have gone into exile, since he ended his life after reigning eleven years, as the histories teach; nor did the city or the temple suffer anything terrible, for it underwent its final overthrow under Zedekiah. Rather, it shows that it became tributary to the Babylonian. That is why, having first said that he besieged it, he then added, "And the Lord gave Jehoiakim the king into his hand," instead of "he became subject to him."
1.4Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Ἀπὸ μέρους τῶν σκευῶν οἴκου θεοῦ. Ἐπειδὴ μὴ ἐσχάτην ἅλωσιν κατὰ τοῦτον τὸν καιρὸν ὑπέστησαν.
Apo merous tōn skeuōn oikou theou. Epeidē mē eschatēn halōsin kata touton ton kairon hypestēsan.
"Part of the vessels of the house of God." Since they did not suffer their final capture at this time.
1.5Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Καὶ εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεὺς εἰσαγαγεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν τῆς αἰχμαλωσίας. Εἶτα εἰρηκὼς ὁποίους ἐκλεγῆναι προσέταξεν, ὅπως δὲ διακειμένους τά τε περὶ ψυχὴν καὶ κατὰ σῶμα, καὶ ἐπὶ τίνι τῇ αἰτίᾳ, καὶ ἐπὶ πόσῳ τῷ χρόνῳ, προστίθησι δὲ καὶ κατὰ τὴν δίαιταν τῶν νεανίσκων.
Kai eipen ho basileus eisagagein apo tōn huiōn tēs aichmalōsias. Eita eirēkōs hopoious eklegēnai prosetaxen, hopōs de diakeimenous ta te peri psychēn kai kata sōma, kai epi tini tę̄ aitią, kai epi posǭ tǭ chronǭ, prostithēsi de kai kata tēn diaitan tōn neaniskōn.
"And the king told him to bring in some of the sons of the captivity." Then, having said what kind of young men he ordered to be chosen, and how they were to be disposed both in soul and in body, and for what reason, and for how long a time, he adds also what concerned the young men's diet.
1.6Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Ἀπὸ τῶν φορθομμίν. Φορθομμὶν δὲ Ἰώσηππος μὲν ἀπὸ τῶν ἄλλων ἐθνῶν λέγει· τινὲς δὲ τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν ἡρμήνευσαν· παρὰ δὲ τῷ ἑβραίῳ τῶν εὐγενῶν κεῖται, ἀντὶ τοῦ τῶν ἐκ τοῦ βασιλικοῦ γένους.
Apo tōn phorthommin. Phorthommin de Iōsēppos men apo tōn allōn ethnōn legei; tines de tōn eklektōn hērmēneusan; para de tǭ hebraiǭ tōn eugenōn keitai, anti tou tōn ek tou basilikou genous.
"From the phorthommin." Josephus says phorthommin means "from the other nations"; some have translated it "of the chosen"; but in the Hebrew it stands for "of the nobles," that is, "of those of royal descent."
1.7Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Οἷς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτοῖς μῶμος. Ἀντὶ τοῦ ὥρᾳ τε τῶν λοιπῶν διαφέροντας, καὶ εὐεκτοῦντας τὸ λοιπὸν σῶμα.
Hois ouk estin en autois mōmos. Anti tou hōrą te tōn loipōn diapherontas, kai euektountas to loipon sōma.
"In whom there is no blemish." That is, surpassing the others in bloom of youth, and sound in the rest of the body.
1.8Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Καὶ γινώσκοντας γνῶσιν. Δυναμένους ῥᾷστα λαβεῖν τὰ μαθήματα.
Kai ginōskontas gnōsin. Dynamenous rhąsta labein ta mathēmata.
"And knowing knowledge." Able to take in their lessons most easily.
1.9Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Ἐγένετο ἐν αὐτοῖς ἐκ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰούδα Δανιήλ. Ὥστε δῆλον ὅτι κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον ᾐχμαλωτίσθησαν· προτέρα γὰρ αὐτῆς αἰχμαλωσία ὑπὸ τοῦ Βαβυλωνίου οὐ φαίνεται γενομένη· ὧδε οὖν ἐν τῷ τρίτῳ ἔτει τοῦ Ἰωακεὶμ ἀποικίσας τοὺς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν οἰκοῦντας, ἐκλεγῆναι τοὺς νεανίσκους· οὗτοί τε ἐξ ἁπάντων ἐλήφθησαν, εὔδηλον ὡς αἰχμαλωτισθέντες εὐθὺς καὶ δοκιμασθέντες εἰς τὰ βασίλεια εἰσήγοντο.
Egeneto en autois ek tōn huiōn Iouda Daniēl. Hōste dēlon hoti kata ton kairon touton ę̄chmalōtisthēsan; protera gar autēs aichmalōsia hypo tou Babylōniou ou phainetai genomenē; hōde oun en tǭ tritǭ etei tou Iōakeim apoikisas tous tēn Ioudaian oikountas, eklegēnai tous neaniskous; houtoi te ex hapantōn elēphthēsan, eudēlon hōs aichmalōtisthentes euthys kai dokimasthentes eis ta basileia eisēgonto.
"Among them, from the sons of Judah, was Daniel." So it is clear that they were taken captive at this time; for no captivity by the Babylonian earlier than this one appears to have taken place. So here, in the third year of Jehoiakim, having deported the inhabitants of Judea, he had the young men chosen; and these were taken from among all, evidently being brought into the palace as soon as they were captured and examined.
1.10Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Ἔθετο Δανιὴλ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ. Μολυσμὸν εἶναι κρίνων τὸ τοιούτων μεταλαμβάνειν, ἐπειδήπερ τοῖς εἰδώλοις θρησκεύοντες, τὴν ἐκεῖθεν αὐτοῖς ἀφωρισμένην μοῖραν εἰς εὐωχίαν ἐλάμβανον.
Etheto Daniēl en tę̄ kardią autou. Molysmon einai krinōn to toioutōn metalambanein, epeidēper tois eidōlois thrēskeuontes, tēn ekeithen autois aphōrismenēn moiran eis euōchian elambanon.
"Daniel resolved in his heart." Judging it to be defilement to partake of such things, since those who worship idols received from them the portion set apart for them for feasting.
1.13Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Ἀρχιευνοῦχον καλεῖ τὸν τῶν κατ᾽ οἶκον ἁπάντων ἀνημμένον τὴν ἐπιμέλειαν, καὶ πρὸς τὰς ἀναγκαίας χρείας διακονούμενον.
Archieunouchon kalei ton tōn kat᾽ oikon hapantōn anēmmenon tēn epimeleian, kai pros tas anankaias chreias diakonoumenon.
He calls "chief eunuch" the one entrusted with the care of the whole household and who serves its necessary needs.
1.14Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Ἔδωκεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν Δανιὴλ εἰς ἔλεον. Θαυμαστὸν πῶς εἶναι δοκεῖ τὸν νέον ὄντα τὴν ἡλικίαν καὶ ἄρτι ᾐχμαλωτισθέντα, τοσαύτης μετασχεῖν παρρησίας· οὐ κατεφρόνησε δὲ ὡς μειρακίου ὁ ἀρχιευνοῦχος, ἀλλ᾽ ἐθαύμασε τῆς ἀγχινοίας, καὶ ᾤκτειρε τὴν μεταβολὴν τῶν πραγμάτων, λογιζόμενος ὡς βασιλικοῦ γένους ὤν, τὴν τῶν θητευόντων ἔλαχε τάξιν· ἔοικε δὲ Δανιὴλ τὴν ὑπὲρ ἁπάντων ἱκετείαν ποιεῖσθαι.
Edōken ho theos ton Daniēl eis eleon. Thaumaston pōs einai dokei ton neon onta tēn hēlikian kai arti ę̄chmalōtisthenta, tosautēs metaschein parrēsias; ou katephronēse de hōs meirakiou ho archieunouchos, all᾽ ethaumase tēs anchinoias, kai ǭkteire tēn metabolēn tōn pragmatōn, logizomenos hōs basilikou genous ōn, tēn tōn thēteuontōn elache taxin; eoike de Daniēl tēn hyper hapantōn hiketeian poieisthai.
"God gave Daniel favor." It seems wonderful how one young in age and just taken captive shared in such boldness. Yet the chief eunuch did not despise him as a boy, but admired his shrewdness and pitied the reversal of his fortunes, reckoning that, though of royal descent, he had been allotted the rank of servants. Daniel seems to make the request on behalf of them all.
1.15Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Εἶπεν ὁ ἀρχιευνοῦχος. Ἐθέλειν μὲν ὑπακούειν καὶ πειθαρχεῖν τοῖς λεγομένοις, δεδιέναι δὲ τοῦ κρατοῦντος τὴν ἐξουσίαν· μήποτε οἷα φιλεῖ γίνεσθαι, εἰς δοκιμασίαν τῶν τρεφομένων ἐλθὼν ὁ βασιλεύς, εἶτα διάφορον τῆς εὐεξίας τῶν σωμάτων θεασάμενος, καὶ ἀκριβῶς ἀνακρίνας τὴν αἰτίαν, γνῷ τὴν τῶν βρωμάτων ὑφαίρεσιν, καὶ δίκας ἔμπροσθεν θέμενον τῆς βασιλικῆς εὐνοίας.
Eipen ho archieunouchos. Ethelein men hypakouein kai peitharchein tois legomenois, dedienai de tou kratountos tēn exousian; mēpote hoia philei ginesthai, eis dokimasian tōn trephomenōn elthōn ho basileus, eita diaphoron tēs euexias tōn sōmatōn theasamenos, kai akribōs anakrinas tēn aitian, gnǭ tēn tōn brōmatōn hyphairesin, kai dikas emprosthen themenon tēs basilikēs eunoias.
"The chief eunuch said." That he was willing to listen and obey what was said, but feared the power of the ruler: lest, as tends to happen, the king should come to inspect those being fed, then see a difference in the good condition of their bodies, examine the cause closely, learn of the withdrawal of the food, and he be punished for having put this before the king's goodwill.
1.16Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Πείρασον δὴ τοὺς παῖδας. Οὐχ ὡς προφήτης περὶ τῶν ἐσομένων ἀποφαίνεται· οὐ γὰρ εἶχε καιρὸν ἡ τοιαύτη παρρησία· ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ τέλους πιστοῦται τὰ λεγόμενα, ὅπερ εἰκὸς ἦν, καὶ τῷ ἀκούοντι εὐπαράδεκτον· ἀληθῆ τοίνυν τὰ παρὰ τοῦ δικαίου ἐγνωκώς, οὐκέτι ἐνεδοίαζεν εἰς τὸν μετέπειτα χρόνον.
Peirason dē tous paidas. Ouch hōs prophētēs peri tōn esomenōn apophainetai; ou gar eiche kairon hē toiautē parrēsia; apo de tou telous pistoutai ta legomena, hoper eikos ēn, kai tǭ akouonti euparadekton; alēthē toinyn ta para tou dikaiou egnōkōs, ouketi enedoiazen eis ton metepeita chronon.
"Test your servants." He does not declare the future as a prophet, for such boldness had no place then; but from the outcome he confirms what was said, which was likely and acceptable to the hearer. Having found, then, that the righteous man's words were true, he no longer hesitated for the time that followed.
1.17Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1
Ὡράθησαν αἱ ἰδέαι αὐτῶν. Ἀλλ᾽ ἣν τινὰ μὲν ἄρα γνώμην ἔσχον εἰς τὰ βασίλεια εἰσαχθέντες, ἐγνώρισεν ἡ θεία γραφή· σκοπῆσαι δὲ ἀκόλουθον ὅτου περ ἕνεκεν ἐξετράπετο τῆς βασιλικῆς τραπέζης μεταλαμβάνειν ὁ δίκαιος· εἰ μὲν γὰρ διὰ τὸ εἰδωλόθυτα εἶναι μόνον, ἐδύνατο πείσειν τὸν ἐπιτεταγμένον καθαρὰ μολυσμάτων δοῦναι αὐτοῖς ἐδέσματα· ἀμέλει καὶ πεῖσαι ἐξίσχυσαν τὸν ἐφεστῶτα, σπέρματα αὐτοῖς παρασχεῖν εἰς ἐδωδήν· ἄλλως τε καὶ ἄρτον μεταλαμβάνειν ἄνευ τινὸς μολυσμοῦ ἐξῆν, εἴ γε μόνον παρεφυλάττοντο· ἀλλ᾽ ἐνταῦθα μάλιστα δείκνυται τῶν δικαίων ἡ γνώμη. Καὶ μετ᾽ ὀλίγα. Ἐδικαίωσαν νηστεῦσαι, μετὰ νηστείας συντόνῳ τῇ πρὸς θεὸν χρήσασθαι ἱκεσίᾳ, ὡς καὶ τὴν αὐτοῦ ἰσχὺν δήλην ποιῆσαι Βαβυλωνίοις, καὶ τὴν περὶ αὐτοὺς δεῖξαι πρόνοιαν, καὶ καταισχῦναι τὴν ἀλαζονίαν τῶν ἐχθρῶν, ὃ δὴ καὶ γέγονεν.
Hōrathēsan hai ideai autōn. All᾽ hēn tina men ara gnōmēn eschon eis ta basileia eisachthentes, egnōrisen hē theia graphē; skopēsai de akolouthon hotou per heneken exetrapeto tēs basilikēs trapezēs metalambanein ho dikaios; ei men gar dia to eidōlothyta einai monon, edynato peisein ton epitetagmenon kathara molysmatōn dounai autois edesmata; amelei kai peisai exischysan ton ephestōta, spermata autois paraschein eis edōdēn; allōs te kai arton metalambanein aneu tinos molysmou exēn, ei ge monon parephylattonto; all᾽ entautha malista deiknytai tōn dikaiōn hē gnōmē. Kai met᾽ oliga. Edikaiōsan nēsteusai, meta nēsteias syntonǭ tę̄ pros theon chrēsasthai hikesią, hōs kai tēn autou ischyn dēlēn poiēsai Babylōniois, kai tēn peri autous deixai pronoian, kai kataischynai tēn alazonian tōn echthrōn, ho dē kai gegonen.
"Their appearance was seen." What intention they had when they were brought into the palace, divine Scripture has made known; but it follows to consider for what reason the righteous man turned away from partaking of the king's table. If it was only because it was offered to idols, he could have persuaded the one in charge to give them food clean of defilement; indeed they prevailed on the overseer to give them seeds to eat; and besides, they could have taken bread without any defilement, had they only been careful. But here above all the purpose of the righteous is shown. And a little after: They judged it right to fast, and with fasting to make earnest supplication to God, so as both to make his strength plain to the Babylonians, to show his providence for them, and to put to shame the boastfulness of their enemies; which indeed came to pass.
1.21Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):1-2
Ἐν πάσῃ γραμματικῇ. Γραμματικὴν δὲ λέγει τὴν ἐν γράμμασι σοφίαν· οὕτω γοῦν καὶ Ἀκύλας λέγει, ἐν παντὶ βιβλίῳ· ἵνα γὰρ μή τις νομίσῃ, ὅτι παρὰ Χαλδαίοις παιδευόμενοι, τὰ μαγικὰ ἐμάνθανον, καὶ ὅσα τῆς εὐσεβείας ἦν ἐκτός, ἀναγκαίως προσέθηκεν, ἐν πάσῃ γραμματικῇ καὶ σοφίᾳ· ἀντιδιαστέλλων τῶν κατὰ γοητείαν καὶ κατά τινα περιεργασίαν γινομένων, τὴν λοιπὴν τῶν γραμμάτων διδασκαλίαν. — Τὴν μὲν τῶν γραμμάτων εἴδησιν κοινῶς ἀνέθηκε τοῖς τέσσαρσιν· ἐξαίρετον δὲ τὸ περὶ τὴν διάκρισιν τῶν ἐνυπνίων ἔφη προσεῖναι τῷ Δανιήλ· νῦν γὰρ ὡς ἐν κεφαλαίῳ διηγεῖται τὰ πράγματα κατὰ τὸ τῆς γραφῆς ἰδίωμα.
En pasę̄ grammatikę̄. Grammatikēn de legei tēn en grammasi sophian; houtō goun kai Akylas legei, en panti bibliǭ; hina gar mē tis nomisę̄, hoti para Chaldaiois paideuomenoi, ta magika emanthanon, kai hosa tēs eusebeias ēn ektos, anankaiōs prosethēken, en pasę̄ grammatikę̄ kai sophią; antidiastellōn tōn kata goēteian kai kata tina periergasian ginomenōn, tēn loipēn tōn grammatōn didaskalian. — Tēn men tōn grammatōn eidēsin koinōs anethēke tois tessarsin; exaireton de to peri tēn diakrisin tōn enypniōn ephē proseinai tǭ Daniēl; nyn gar hōs en kephalaiǭ diēgeitai ta pragmata kata to tēs graphēs idiōma.
"In all learning." By "learning" (grammatikē) he means wisdom in letters; so too Aquila says "in every book." For lest anyone think that, being educated among the Chaldeans, they learned magic and whatever lay outside godliness, he necessarily added, "in all learning and wisdom," distinguishing from what is done by sorcery and by curious arts the rest of the teaching of letters. He attributed the knowledge of letters to the four in common, but said that the discernment of dreams belonged especially to Daniel; for now he narrates the events as in summary, according to the manner of Scripture.
1.22Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):2
Μετὰ τέλος τῶν ἡμερῶν. Τέλος μὲν οὖν ἡμερῶν λέγει τοὺς τρεῖς ἐνιαυτούς, μεθ᾽ οὓς ἐκρίθη αὐτοὺς παραστῆσαι ἐπίδειξιν τῶν μαθημάτων· σκοπῆσαι δὲ δεῖ ὡς πρὸ τούτου τοῦ χρόνου τῆς αὐτῆς σοφίας τὰς ἀποδείξεις παρέσχετο Δανιὴλ τῆς ἐξηγήσεως τοῦ ἐνυπνίου· ὡς ὀλίγῳ ὕστερον δείκνυσιν αὐτὸς ὁ ἱστοριογράφος.
Meta telos tōn hēmerōn. Telos men oun hēmerōn legei tous treis eniautous, meth᾽ hous ekrithē autous parastēsai epideixin tōn mathēmatōn; skopēsai de dei hōs pro toutou tou chronou tēs autēs sophias tas apodeixeis parescheto Daniēl tēs exēgēseōs tou enypniou; hōs oligǭ hysteron deiknysin autos ho historiographos.
"At the end of the days." By "the end of days" he means the three years after which it was decided to present them for a display of their learning. But one must observe that before this time Daniel gave the proofs of this same wisdom in the interpretation of the dream, as the historian himself shows a little later.
Chapter 2
2.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):2
Ἐν τῷ ἔτει δευτέρῳ τῆς βασιλείας Ναβουχοδονόσορ. Μετὰ τὸ κατακρατῆσαι τὸν Ναβουχοδονόσορ καὶ τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ τῆς Αἰγύπτου, ἑαυτὸν ἐξ ἐκείνου βασιλέα ἀριθμεῖσθαι ἠξίωσεν, ἀληθῆ βασιλείαν εἶναι κρίνας, ᾗ μηδὲν εἴη τὸ ἀνθιστάμενον· τοῦτο δὲ καὶ ἐν τῇ συνηθείᾳ ἐστὶν εὑρεῖν, τὸ τοὺς παρελθόντας τῷ χρόνῳ λήθῃ τρόπον τινὰ παραδοθέντας, ἐκ παραδόξων πραγμάτων ἢ προσώπων ἢ δοξῶν ἀπάρχεσθαι τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ. Καὶ μετ᾽ ὀλίγα. Θαυμάσαι δέ ἐστι πάσης σοφίας τὸν δεσπότην· οὐ γὰρ συνεχώρησε τὸν τριετῆ χρόνον διελθεῖν, ἐν ᾧπερ ἐπήχθησαν παιδεύεσθαι οἱ παῖδες, ἀλλ᾽ ἐνιαυτοῦ μόλις παρῳχηκότος δείκνυσι τὸ ἐνύπνιον· ὡς ἂν μὴ τῇ τῶν μαθημάτων ἀσκήσει ἐπιγράψῃ τῶν ῥηθέντων τὴν γνῶσιν· ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ εὐθὺς ἐν ἀρχῇ, ἵνα δοκιμασθῇ τῶν δικαίων ἡ γνώμη, καὶ ὀφθῇ κύριος μὴ ἄκριτον τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρέχων χάριν· δείκνυσιν οὖν τῷ βασιλεῖ τὴν ὄψιν ὁ θεός, οὐ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἐξουσίαν μόνον διδάσκων, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοὺς δικαίους περιφανεῖς ἐργαζόμενος.
En tǭ etei deuterǭ tēs basileias Nabouchodonosor. Meta to katakratēsai ton Nabouchodonosor kai tēs Ioudaias kai tēs Aigyptou, heauton ex ekeinou basilea arithmeisthai ēxiōsen, alēthē basileian einai krinas, hę̄ mēden eiē to anthistamenon; touto de kai en tę̄ synētheią estin heurein, to tous parelthontas tǭ chronǭ lēthę̄ tropon tina paradothentas, ek paradoxōn pragmatōn ē prosōpōn ē doxōn aparchesthai tou arithmou. Kai met᾽ oliga. Thaumasai de esti pasēs sophias ton despotēn; ou gar synechōrēse ton trietē chronon dielthein, en hǭper epēchthēsan paideuesthai hoi paides, all᾽ eniautou molis parǭchēkotos deiknysi to enypnion; hōs an mē tę̄ tōn mathēmatōn askēsei epigrapsę̄ tōn rhēthentōn tēn gnōsin; all᾽ oude euthys en archę̄, hina dokimasthę̄ tōn dikaiōn hē gnōmē, kai ophthę̄ kyrios mē akriton tēn heautou parechōn charin; deiknysin oun tǭ basilei tēn opsin ho theos, ou tēn heautou exousian monon didaskōn, alla kai tous dikaious periphaneis ergazomenos.
"In the second year of the reign of Nebuchadnezzar." After Nebuchadnezzar had conquered both Judea and Egypt, he thought fit to be counted king from then on, judging that to be a true kingdom which nothing opposed. This is found in common usage too: that those who in time past have, as it were, been handed over to oblivion begin their count from remarkable events or persons or reputations. And a little after: One must admire the Master of all wisdom; for he did not let the three-year period pass during which the youths were brought to be educated, but when scarcely a year had gone by he shows the dream, so that the king might not ascribe the knowledge of what was said to their practice in learning; nor yet at the very beginning, so that the purpose of the righteous might be tested and the Lord be seen not to give his grace without discernment. So God shows the king the vision, not only teaching his own authority but also making the righteous illustrious.
2.2Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):2
Ἐξέστη τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ. Πνεῦμα λέγει αὐτὴν τὴν φαντασίαν, ἀπὸ τοῦ μὴ ἀσφαλῆ τὴν ἐν τοῖς ἐνυπνίοις ὄψιν γίγνεσθαι, ἀλλὰ δίκην πνεύματος διαλύεσθαι· κεῖται γὰρ κατὰ ὑπόδειγμα χωρὶς τοῦ ὡς, κατὰ τὸ τῆς γραφῆς ἰδίωμα· διὸ καὶ ἀσαφὲς πως εἶναι δοκεῖ. — Εὔδηλον ἐντεῦθεν ὡς τὸ πνεῦμα τὴν μνήμην ἐκάλεσε· σαφῶς γάρ φησι, ἐξέστη τὸ πνεῦμά μου τοῦ γνῶναι· τὸ ἐξέστη ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀπέστη· ὁ δὲ Σύμμαχος, καὶ διηπόρει, φησί· λήθη οὖν τῆς ὄψεως ἔσχεν αὐτόν, ὡς ἀπορεῖν περὶ τὴν μνήμην ὧν εἶδε, μεμνημένον ὅτι ἑώρακεν· οἰκονομία δὲ θεοῦ, καὶ τὸ ὀφθῆναι τῷ ἀσεβεῖ βασιλεῖ τὰ μέλλοντα, ὧν ἐξηγητὴν ἔδει γενέσθαι τὸν προφήτην· καὶ τὸ ἐπιλαθέσθαι, ἵνα διὰ τοῦ προφήτου γνωσθῇ· ὡς ἂν οἵ τε ἐπαοιδοὶ μὴ ἔχωσιν ἕτερα ἀνθ᾽ ἑτέρων σοφίζεσθαι, τὸν βασιλέα τυχόντα σχεδιάζεσθαι· καὶ μετὰ τὸν ἔλεγχον τῆς ἐκείνων διανοίας δειχθῇ ἀπὸ τῆς θείας χάριτος εἰδὼς τὰ λανθάνοντα ὁ Δανιήλ· ἐπὶ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ Ἰωσήφ, ἐπειδὴ μὴ ἦσαν οἱ ἀνθιστάμενοι, ἤρκεσε τῶν ἐνυπνίων ἡ ἑρμηνεία· ἐνταῦθα δὲ ἐπειδὴ ὁ κρατῶν ἠλαζονεύετο, οἵ τε μάγοι τῇ προλήψει μεγάλην ἐκέκτηντο δόξαν, καὶ τρόπον τινὰ κρίσις ἦν τῆς τε τοῦ θεοῦ δυνάμεως καὶ τῆς τῶν δαιμόνων ἀπάτης, οὐχ ἁπλῶς οἰκονομεῖ λησθῆναι τὸ ἐνύπνιον· πρότερον τοὺς μάγους ἀπορῆσαι· ὡς ἂν ἡ σύγκρισις σαφῆ τῆς ἀληθείας ποιήσηται τὴν εἴδησιν.
Exestē to pneuma autou. Pneuma legei autēn tēn phantasian, apo tou mē asphalē tēn en tois enypniois opsin gignesthai, alla dikēn pneumatos dialyesthai; keitai gar kata hypodeigma chōris tou hōs, kata to tēs graphēs idiōma; dio kai asaphes pōs einai dokei. — Eudēlon enteuthen hōs to pneuma tēn mnēmēn ekalese; saphōs gar phēsi, exestē to pneuma mou tou gnōnai; to exestē anti tou apestē; ho de Symmachos, kai diēporei, phēsi; lēthē oun tēs opseōs eschen auton, hōs aporein peri tēn mnēmēn hōn eide, memnēmenon hoti heōraken; oikonomia de theou, kai to ophthēnai tǭ asebei basilei ta mellonta, hōn exēgētēn edei genesthai ton prophētēn; kai to epilathesthai, hina dia tou prophētou gnōsthę̄; hōs an hoi te epaoidoi mē echōsin hetera anth᾽ heterōn sophizesthai, ton basilea tychonta schediazesthai; kai meta ton elenchon tēs ekeinōn dianoias deichthę̄ apo tēs theias charitos eidōs ta lanthanonta ho Daniēl; epi men gar tou Iōsēph, epeidē mē ēsan hoi anthistamenoi, ērkese tōn enypniōn hē hermēneia; entautha de epeidē ho kratōn ēlazoneueto, hoi te magoi tę̄ prolēpsei megalēn ekektēnto doxan, kai tropon tina krisis ēn tēs te tou theou dynameōs kai tēs tōn daimonōn apatēs, ouch haplōs oikonomei lēsthēnai to enypnion; proteron tous magous aporēsai; hōs an hē synkrisis saphē tēs alētheias poiēsētai tēn eidēsin.
"His spirit was troubled." He calls the imagination itself "spirit," because the vision in dreams is not secure but dissolves like a breath; for it is put as an image, without "as," according to the manner of Scripture; and so it seems somewhat obscure. — It is clear from this that he called the memory "spirit"; for he says plainly, "my spirit departed from knowing it": "departed" (exestē) in the sense of "went away"; Symmachus says, "and he was at a loss." So forgetfulness of the vision seized him, so that he was at a loss about the memory of what he had seen, though he remembered that he had seen it. It was God's dispensation both that the future was shown to the impious king, of which the prophet was to become the interpreter, and that he forgot it, so that it might be made known through the prophet; so that the enchanters might not be able to make up one thing for another and improvise for the king as it happened; and that after their thinking had been exposed, Daniel might be shown to know hidden things by divine grace. For in Joseph's case, since there were none who opposed him, the interpretation of the dreams sufficed; but here, since the ruler was boastful, and the magi had acquired great reputation by prejudice, and there was in a way a contest between the power of God and the deceit of demons, he does not simply arrange that the dream be forgotten; first the magi had to be at a loss, so that the comparison might make the knowledge of the truth clear.
2.4Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):2
Καλέσαι τοὺς ἐπαοιδούς. Ἐπαοιδοὺς μὲν λέγει τοὺς μάντεις, ὥς τι προλέγοντας· μάγους δὲ τοὺς χαλδαίους κατά τινα περιεργίαν καὶ φαντασίαν ποιοῦντας· ὁ δὲ Σύρος συντόμως λέγει τοὺς σοφοὺς Βαβυλῶνος, τουτέστι τοὺς πεπαιδευμένους τὴν βαβυλωνίων ἐπιστήμην.
Kalesai tous epaoidous. Epaoidous men legei tous manteis, hōs ti prolegontas; magous de tous chaldaious kata tina periergian kai phantasian poiountas; ho de Syros syntomōs legei tous sophous Babylōnos, toutesti tous pepaideumenous tēn babylōniōn epistēmēn.
"To call the enchanters." By "enchanters" he means the soothsayers, as foretelling something; by "magi" the Chaldeans who practise curious arts and illusions; but the Syriac says briefly "the wise men of Babylon," that is, those trained in the learning of the Babylonians.
2.5Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):2
Καιρὸν ὑμεῖς ἐξαγοράζετε. Ἐοίκατέ φησι τὸν παρὰ πόδας ἔλεγχον φεύγειν· καὶ ἐπειδήπερ λέγειν τὸ ὀρθὸν οὐκ ἔχετε, ἀρκοῦσαν πρόφασιν εἰς ἀπολογίαν τοῦτο ἔχειν νομίζετε.
Kairon hymeis exagorazete. Eoikate phēsi ton para podas elenchon pheugein; kai epeidēper legein to orthon ouk echete, arkousan prophasin eis apologian touto echein nomizete.
"You are buying time." You seem, he says, to be fleeing the refutation at your feet; and since you cannot say what is right, you think this a sufficient pretext for your defense.
2.6Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):2
Ὁ λόγος, ὃν ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐπερωτᾷ, βαρύς. Οἰκονομεῖ ταῦτα λεχθῆναι παρὰ τῶν μάγων ὁ θεός, ἵν᾽ ὅταν Δανιὴλ λέγῃ τὰ ἀπόρρητα, κηρυχθῇ τοῦ παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ σεβομένου θεοῦ ἥ τε δύναμις καὶ ἡ ἐξουσία· εἰ γὰρ πρὸ τῶν ἐλέγχων τὸ μὲν ἐνύπνιον διελθὼν εἶπεν ὁ Δανιήλ, σοφίσασθαι ἄλλοτε ἄλλως ἠδύναντο οἱ μάγοι τὰ λεγόμενα.
Ho logos, hon ho basileus eperōtą, barys. Oikonomei tauta lechthēnai para tōn magōn ho theos, hin᾽ hotan Daniēl legę̄ ta aporrēta, kērychthę̄ tou par᾽ autou sebomenou theou hē te dynamis kai hē exousia; ei gar pro tōn elenchōn to men enypnion dielthōn eipen ho Daniēl, sophisasthai allote allōs ēdynanto hoi magoi ta legomena.
"The thing the king asks is hard." God arranges that the magi say this, so that when Daniel tells the hidden things, both the power and the authority of the God he worships may be proclaimed. For if Daniel had told the dream before they were exposed, the magi could have twisted what was said one way or another.
2.7Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):2
Τότε Δανιὴλ ἀπεκρίθη βουλήν. Τουτέστιν ἀταράχως προσῆλθε κοινωσόμενος αὐτῷ περὶ τῶν προκειμένων· οὐ καταπλαγεὶς μὲν τὸν θάνατον, θαρρήσας δὲ ταῖς πρὸς θεὸν ἱκεσίαις.
Tote Daniēl apekrithē boulēn. Toutestin atarachōs prosēlthe koinōsomenos autǭ peri tōn prokeimenōn; ou kataplageis men ton thanaton, tharrēsas de tais pros theon hikesiais.
"Then Daniel answered with counsel." That is, he came forward calmly to confer with him about the matter at hand, not terrified by death but trusting in his supplications to God.
2.8Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):2
Ἐπυνθάνετο αὐτοῦ. Ἀνάγγειλόν μοι ἀνθ᾽ ὅτου οὕτω παράνομος κατὰ πάντων ψῆφος ἐξενήνεκται παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦ κράτους· γνώμην γὰρ ἐκάλεσε τὴν κρίσιν τοῦ βασιλέως· ἀναιδῆ δὲ διὰ τὸ μὴ τοῖς νόμοις ἀκόλουθον εἶναι τὴν ἀπόφασιν.
Epynthaneto autou. Anangeilon moi anth᾽ hotou houtō paranomos kata pantōn psēphos exenēnektai par᾽ autou tou kratous; gnōmēn gar ekalese tēn krisin tou basileōs; anaidē de dia to mē tois nomois akolouthon einai tēn apophasin.
"He inquired of him." "Tell me why so lawless a sentence against all has been issued by the authority itself." For he called the king's decision a "decree"; and "shameless" because the sentence was not in accordance with the laws.
2.9Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):2
Ἐγνώρισεν ὁ Ἀριὼχ τὸ ῥῆμα. Δῆλον ὡς ἅπαντα κατὰ τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκονόμητο χάριν· οὐ γὰρ ἠγανάκτησεν ὡς καθ᾽ ὑπευθύνου, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπαινέσας τῆς συνέσεως τὸ μειράκιον, λόγον μετέδωκεν.
Egnōrisen ho Ariōch to rhēma. Dēlon hōs hapanta kata tēn tou theou ǭkonomēto charin; ou gar ēganaktēsen hōs kath᾽ hypeuthynou, all᾽ epainesas tēs syneseōs to meirakion, logon metedōken.
"Arioch made the matter known." It is clear that everything was arranged by the grace of God; for he was not angry as with one liable to punishment, but, praising the youth for his understanding, he gave him an account.
2.10Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):2
Εἰσῆλθε Δανιήλ. Πανταχοῦ μὲν φαίνεται ἡγούμενος τῶν πρακτέων ὁ Δανιήλ· ἴσως μὲν καὶ καθ᾽ ἡλικίαν πρεσβύτερος ὤν, τάχα δὲ καὶ θερμότερος ὢν περὶ τὴν εὐσέβειαν· οὐ μὴν οὐδὲ οἱ λοιποὶ ἀφυστεροῦσι τῇ περὶ τὰ καλὰ σπουδῇ.
Eisēlthe Daniēl. Pantachou men phainetai hēgoumenos tōn prakteōn ho Daniēl; isōs men kai kath᾽ hēlikian presbyteros ōn, tacha de kai thermoteros ōn peri tēn eusebeian; ou mēn oude hoi loipoi aphysterousi tę̄ peri ta kala spoudę̄.
"Daniel went in." Everywhere Daniel appears as the leader in what was to be done, perhaps because he was older in age, perhaps also because he was more fervent in godliness; yet the others too do not fall short in zeal for what is good.
2.11Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):2
Οἰκτιρμοὺς ἐζήτουν. Κοινὸν γὰρ κατόρθωμα κρίνοντες ἡγούμενοι τοῦ ἀπορουμένου τὴν εὕρεσιν, εἰς εὐχὴν ἐτράπησαν· εἰδότες ὡς τῶν ἀπορρήτων οὐδεὶς ἕτερος ἔσται διδάσκαλος, ἢ θεὸς μόνος· μυστήριον γὰρ ἐκάλεσε τοῦ ἐνυπνίου τὴν γνῶσιν, διὰ τὸ ἐν ἀπορρήτῳ κεῖσθαι. — Εὔδηλον μὲν οὖν ὡς τὴν αἰτίαν τῆς εὐχῆς ἔσχον τοῦ βασιλέως τὴν ἀπόφασιν· ἐμοὶ δὲ δοκεῖ, ὡς οὐ διὰ τοῦτο μόνον ἐπὶ τὴν ἱκεσίαν ἐτράπετο, ἀλλ᾽ ὥστε ἐκ παραλλήλου γνωσθῆναι τοῦ θεοῦ τὴν δύναμιν.
Oiktirmous ezētoun. Koinon gar katorthōma krinontes hēgoumenoi tou aporoumenou tēn heuresin, eis euchēn etrapēsan; eidotes hōs tōn aporrētōn oudeis heteros estai didaskalos, ē theos monos; mystērion gar ekalese tou enypniou tēn gnōsin, dia to en aporrētǭ keisthai. — Eudēlon men oun hōs tēn aitian tēs euchēs eschon tou basileōs tēn apophasin; emoi de dokei, hōs ou dia touto monon epi tēn hikesian etrapeto, all᾽ hōste ek parallēlou gnōsthēnai tou theou tēn dynamin.
"They sought mercies." Judging the finding of what was in doubt to be a common achievement, they turned to prayer, knowing that no one else would be the teacher of hidden things but God alone; for he called the knowledge of the dream a "mystery" because it lay hidden. — It is clear that the king's sentence was the cause of their prayer; but it seems to me that he turned to supplication not for this reason alone, but so that the power of God might be known by comparison.
2.12Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):2
Ὅπως μὴ ἀπόλωνται. Ἀντὶ τοῦ μετὰ τῶν ἀσεβῶν οἱ δίκαιοι, ὡς μηδένα ἔχοντες προστάτην, καὶ τὰ παράδοξα γνωρίζειν δυνάμενον· διὸ καὶ ὁ θεὸς ἐπαινέσας αὐτῶν τὴν γνώμην, παρέχει τὰ τῆς αἰτήσεως.
Hopōs mē apolōntai. Anti tou meta tōn asebōn hoi dikaioi, hōs mēdena echontes prostatēn, kai ta paradoxa gnōrizein dynamenon; dio kai ho theos epainesas autōn tēn gnōmēn, parechei ta tēs aitēseōs.
"So that they might not perish." That is, so that the righteous might not perish with the ungodly, as having no one to protect them, and no one able to make known wonderful things; therefore God, praising their purpose, grants what they asked.
2.15Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Τότε τῷ Δανιὴλ ἐν ὁράματι. Καίτοι γε τέσσαρες ἦσαν οἱ τὴν εὐχὴν ποιούμενοι· ἀλλ᾽ ἡγεῖτο, ὡς ἔφην, τοῦ προκειμένου Δανιήλ· διόπερ ὡς οἶμαι καὶ ὡς θερμοτέρῳ περὶ τὴν εὐσέβειαν, ἀποκαλύπτει τὸ κεκρυμμένον.
Tote tǭ Daniēl en horamati. Kaitoi ge tessares ēsan hoi tēn euchēn poioumenoi; all᾽ hēgeito, hōs ephēn, tou prokeimenou Daniēl; dioper hōs oimai kai hōs thermoterǭ peri tēn eusebeian, apokalyptei to kekrymmenon.
"Then to Daniel in a vision." Yet there were four who made the prayer; but Daniel, as I said, led in the matter at hand; therefore, I think, because he was also more fervent in godliness, he reveals to him what was hidden.
2.16Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Εὐλόγησε τὸν θεόν. Οὐκ εἰς ἡδονὴν ἐτράπη, ὥσπερ εὐημερεῖν τοὺς παλαιοτέρους κατὰ τὸν χρόνον μᾶλλον, ἀλλ᾽ εἰς ὕμνον ἐχώρησε τοῦ δεσπότου, ἐπειδήπερ αὐτῷ τὸ τοῦ σκοποῦ πέρας εἴληφε· προσφόρους δὲ τοὺς λόγους ποιεῖται τῇ προκειμένῃ ὑποθέσει.
Eulogēse ton theon. Ouk eis hēdonēn etrapē, hōsper euēmerein tous palaioterous kata ton chronon mallon, all᾽ eis hymnon echōrēse tou despotou, epeidēper autǭ to tou skopou peras eilēphe; prosphorous de tous logous poieitai tę̄ prokeimenę̄ hypothesei.
"He blessed God." He did not turn to pleasure, as people in former times were more inclined to do in good fortune, but went on to a hymn to the Master, since he had reached the goal of his aim; and he makes his words suited to the matter at hand.
2.17Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Εἴη τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ εὐλογημένον. Τουτέστιν ὕμνων ἄξιος ὁ ἡμέτερος θεός, ἀλλ᾽ οὐχ οἱ Βαβυλῶνος θεοί.
Eiē to onoma tou theou eulogēmenon. Toutestin hymnōn axios ho hēmeteros theos, all᾽ ouch hoi Babylōnos theoi.
"May the name of God be blessed." That is, our God is worthy of hymns, but not the gods of Babylon.
2.18Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Ἀπὸ τοῦ αἰῶνος. Τουτέστιν ὁ μήτε ἀρχὴν μήτε τέλος ἔχων, ὡς τῶν εἰδώλων ἐπινοηθέντων, καὶ ἀπολέσθαι δυναμένων.
Apo tou aiōnos. Toutestin ho mēte archēn mēte telos echōn, hōs tōn eidōlōn epinoēthentōn, kai apolesthai dynamenōn.
"From eternity." That is, the one who has neither beginning nor end, since the idols were invented and can perish.
2.19Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Ἡ σοφία καὶ ἡ σύνεσις καὶ ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτοῦ ἐστί. Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ οἱ Βαβυλώνιοι ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ μέγα ἐφρόνουν· ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ ἐπὶ δυνάμει, ὡς ἁπάντων περιγενόμενοι· πολλὰ ἔχων εἰπεῖν, μᾶλλον δὲ τῇ ἐννοίᾳ τῶν ῥηθέντων ἐν κεφαλαίῳ περιλαβών· τὸ γὰρ εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας ὕμνων ἄξιον εἶναι τὸ θεῖον, οὐδὲν ἕτερον ἦν κηρύττον, ὡς τὸ ἀΐδιον τὸ εὐεργετικόν· ᾧ δηλονότι συνεφαίνετο τὸ δημιουργικὸν καὶ μὴν καὶ τὸ ἀσώματον· οὐ γὰρ ἐνεδέχετο τὸν αἰώνων ποιητήν, σώματος ἀτέλειαν περικεῖσθαι.
Hē sophia kai hē synesis kai hē ischys autou esti. Epeidē gar hoi Babylōnioi epi sophią mega ephronoun; alla mēn kai epi dynamei, hōs hapantōn perigenomenoi; polla echōn eipein, mallon de tę̄ ennoią tōn rhēthentōn en kephalaiǭ perilabōn; to gar eis tous aiōnas hymnōn axion einai to theion, ouden heteron ēn kērytton, hōs to aïdion to euergetikon; hǭ dēlonoti synephaineto to dēmiourgikon kai mēn kai to asōmaton; ou gar enedecheto ton aiōnōn poiētēn, sōmatos ateleian perikeisthai.
"Wisdom and understanding and strength are his." For the Babylonians thought much of themselves for wisdom, and also for power, as having overcome all. He had much to say, but rather gathered it in summary in the thought of what he said; for that the divine is worthy of hymns for ever proclaimed nothing else than that what is beneficent is eternal; with which, clearly, its creative power appeared together, and indeed its incorporeality; for it was not possible that the maker of the ages should be clothed in the imperfection of a body.
2.20Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Αὐτὸς ἀλλοιοῖ καιρούς. Ἵν᾽ εἴπῃ ὅτι τῆς αὐτοῦ βουλῆς ἤρτηται τὰ πάντα· εἶναί τε τινὰς ἐν ἀγαθοῖς καὶ πάλιν ἐν συμφοραῖς, τὰ κατὰ ἰουδαίους αἰνιττόμενος· καὶ διδάσκων ὡς Βαβυλώνιοι οὐκ ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει περιγεγόνασιν Ἰουδαίων, ἀλλὰ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦτο βουληθέντος.
Autos alloioi kairous. Hin᾽ eipę̄ hoti tēs autou boulēs ērtētai ta panta; einai te tinas en agathois kai palin en symphorais, ta kata ioudaious ainittomenos; kai didaskōn hōs Babylōnioi ouk idią dynamei perigegonasin Ioudaiōn, alla tou theou touto boulēthentos.
"He changes times." To say that all things depend on his counsel, and that some are in good fortune and again in misfortune, hinting at what concerned the Jews; and teaching that the Babylonians did not overcome the Jews by their own power, but because God willed it.
2.21Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Καθιστᾷ βασιλεῖς καὶ μεθιστᾷ. Ἀμέλει φησὶν οἱ νῦν τὰ πάντα κατέχοντες, μικρὸν ὕστερον ἐπὶ τὴν ἑτέρων καταστήσονται ἀρχήν.
Kathistą basileis kai methistą. Amelei phēsin hoi nyn ta panta katechontes, mikron hysteron epi tēn heterōn katastēsontai archēn.
"He sets up kings and removes them." Certainly, he says, those who now hold all things will a little later come under the rule of others.
2.22Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Διδοὺς σοφίαν τοῖς σοφοῖς. Σοφοὺς ἐκάλεσε τοὺς τὸν θεῖον κεκτημένους φόβον· εἰδότας σύνεσιν ἔφη τοὺς πεπαιδευμένους τὸν νόμον, καὶ τῶν προφητῶν τὴν δύναμιν ἐπισταμένους.
Didous sophian tois sophois. Sophous ekalese tous ton theion kektēmenous phobon; eidotas synesin ephē tous pepaideumenous ton nomon, kai tōn prophētōn tēn dynamin epistamenous.
"Giving wisdom to the wise." He called "wise" those who possess the fear of God; and by "those who know understanding" he meant those trained in the law and who understand the power of the prophets.
2.23Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Ἀπόκρυφα ἐκάλεσε τὰ πᾶσιν ἄγνωστα· βαθέα δὲ τὰ φανερὰ μέν, οὐδέπω δὲ διακριθῆναι δυνάμενα· ἵνα εἴπῃ καὶ τὸ ἐνύπνιον, καὶ τοῦ ἐνυπνίου τὴν διασάφησιν.
Apokrypha ekalese ta pasin agnōsta; bathea de ta phanera men, oudepō de diakrithēnai dynamena; hina eipę̄ kai to enypnion, kai tou enypniou tēn diasaphēsin.
He called "hidden things" what is unknown to all; and "deep things" what is plain but cannot yet be interpreted: meaning both the dream and the interpretation of the dream.
2.24Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Τὸ φῶς μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐστι. Ἁπάντων γὰρ καὶ τῶν ἐν ἀφανεῖ κειμένων ἀκριβῆ κέκτηται τὴν εἴδησιν. — Τουτέστι τὴν ἁπάντων γνῶσιν ἔχει ἐν ἑαυτῷ, οὐ δεόμενος παρ᾽ ἑτέρου ταῦτα λαβεῖν.
To phōs met᾽ autou esti. Hapantōn gar kai tōn en aphanei keimenōn akribē kektētai tēn eidēsin. — Toutesti tēn hapantōn gnōsin echei en heautǭ, ou deomenos par᾽ heterou tauta labein.
"The light is with him." For he possesses exact knowledge of all things, even of what lies in obscurity. — That is, he has the knowledge of all things in himself, not needing to receive it from another.
2.25Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων μου. Τῶν προγόνων ἐμνήσθη, ἵνα τὴν ἄνωθεν δείξῃ τοῦ θεοῦ πρόνοιαν· καὶ ὡς οὐκ ἄν ποτε ταῦτα Ἰουδαῖοι ὑπέστησαν, εἰ μὴ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ἀναξίους τῆς θείας εἰργάσαντο χάριτος. Ὅτι σοφίαν, καὶ δύναμιν. Σοφίαν μὲν οὖν λέγει τὴν διασάφησιν τοῦ ἐνυπνίου· σύνεσιν τὴν γνῶσιν ἑαυτοῦ.
Theos tōn paterōn mou. Tōn progonōn emnēsthē, hina tēn anōthen deixę̄ tou theou pronoian; kai hōs ouk an pote tauta Ioudaioi hypestēsan, ei mē sphas autous anaxious tēs theias eirgasanto charitos. Hoti sophian, kai dynamin. Sophian men oun legei tēn diasaphēsin tou enypniou; synesin tēn gnōsin heautou.
"God of my fathers." He recalled his ancestors to show God's providence from of old, and that the Jews would never have suffered these things had they not made themselves unworthy of divine grace. "For wisdom and power." By "wisdom" he means the interpretation of the dream; by "understanding" his knowledge of it.
2.27Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Ἀπολέσαι τοὺς σοφούς. Οὐ περὶ τῶν καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν μόνον διελέχθη, ἀλλ᾽ ἐφρόντισεν ὅπως καὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς ἐξαρπάσῃ τοῦ κινδύνου.
Apolesai tous sophous. Ou peri tōn kath᾽ heauton monon dielechthē, all᾽ ephrontisen hopōs kai tous loipous exarpasę̄ tou kindynou.
"To destroy the wise men." He did not speak about his own affairs only, but took care to snatch the others too from danger.
2.28Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Εἰσήγαγε τὸν Δανιὴλ ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ· εὕρηκα ἄνδρα. Εὔδηλον οὖν ἐστιν ἐνταῦθα, ὡς ἡ σύνθεσις τῶν ῥημάτων οὐ κατὰ τάξιν κεῖται· οὐ γὰρ πρότερον εἰσήγαγε τὸν δίκαιον, εἶθ᾽ οὕτως τὴν εὕρεσιν ἀπήγγειλε τοῦ ἀνδρός· ἀλλὰ δῆλον ὡς ἀπαγγείλας, προστάξαντος τοῦ βασιλέως, εἰσήγαγε τὸν ἄνδρα.
Eisēgage ton Daniēl enōpion tou basileōs, kai eipen autǭ; heurēka andra. Eudēlon oun estin entautha, hōs hē synthesis tōn rhēmatōn ou kata taxin keitai; ou gar proteron eisēgage ton dikaion, eith᾽ houtōs tēn heuresin apēngeile tou andros; alla dēlon hōs apangeilas, prostaxantos tou basileōs, eisēgage ton andra.
"He brought Daniel in before the king and said to him, I have found a man." It is clear here that the order of the words is not sequential; for he did not first bring in the righteous man and then report finding him; but plainly, having reported it, he brought the man in at the king's command.
2.29Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Εἰ δύνασαί μοι ἀναγγεῖλαι. Φαίνεται ἀπιστεῖν περὶ τῶν ὑπισχνουμένων ἔτι· καὶ γάρ μοι φησὶ καὶ αὐτὸς κατὰ τοὺς μάγους τῶν χαλδαίων ἀπαιτήσῃς παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ μαθεῖν τὸ ἐνύπνιον· οὐ γὰρ ἔχω λέγειν· ἀλλὰ περὶ τῶν λεχθησομένων ἀλήθειαν πίστωσαι τῇ τοῦ ἀπορρήτου διηγήσει.
Ei dynasai moi anangeilai. Phainetai apistein peri tōn hypischnoumenōn eti; kai gar moi phēsi kai autos kata tous magous tōn chaldaiōn apaitēsę̄s par᾽ emou mathein to enypnion; ou gar echō legein; alla peri tōn lechthēsomenōn alētheian pistōsai tę̄ tou aporrētou diēgēsei.
"Can you tell me?" He seems still to doubt what was promised. "For do not you too," he says, "like the magi of the Chaldeans, ask to learn the dream from me, since I cannot tell it; but confirm the truth of what you will say by telling the hidden thing."
2.30Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Μυστήριον δὲ αὐτὸ ἐκάλεσεν, ἐν ἀπορρήτῳ τῆς θείας γνώσεως ὁμολογῶν κεκρύφθαι τὸ λεχθέν· οὐ τοίνυν φησὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα εἰδέναι ἐστὶ Βαβυλωνίων, κἂν τὴν ἄκραν ὦσι πεπαιδευμένοι σοφίαν.
Mystērion de auto ekalesen, en aporrētǭ tēs theias gnōseōs homologōn kekryphthai to lechthen; ou toinyn phēsi ta toiauta eidenai esti Babylōniōn, kan tēn akran ōsi pepaideumenoi sophian.
He called it a "mystery," confessing that what was said lay hidden in the secret of divine knowledge. So, he says, to know such things does not belong to the Babylonians, even if they are trained in the highest wisdom.
2.31Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Τοῦτό ἐστι. Ὁ πάντων γνώστης θεὸς οὐ μόνον τὸ ἐνύπνιον ἐδήλωσε τῷ δικαίῳ, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς ὄψεως τὴν αἰτίαν, καὶ τοῦ βασιλέως τὰ βουλεύματα· καὶ τὸ δειχθὲν προλαβών, λέγει καὶ ἃ πρὸ τοῦ ὕπνου διενοήθη, ἵνα ἀπὸ τοῦ ὁμολογουμένου ἀξιόπιστος γένηται καὶ περὶ τῶν ἀμφιβαλλομένων λέγων.
Touto esti. Ho pantōn gnōstēs theos ou monon to enypnion edēlōse tǭ dikaiǭ, alla kai tēs opseōs tēn aitian, kai tou basileōs ta bouleumata; kai to deichthen prolabōn, legei kai ha pro tou hypnou dienoēthē, hina apo tou homologoumenou axiopistos genētai kai peri tōn amphiballomenōn legōn.
"This is it." God, who knows all things, revealed to the righteous man not only the dream but also the cause of the vision and the king's thoughts; and, before what was shown, he tells also what he had thought before sleep, so that from what was admitted he might become credible when speaking also about what was doubted.
2.32Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Ἀποκαλύπτων μυστήρια. Οὕτω σοι φησὶ διακειμένῳ, ἔδειξε τὴν ὄψιν ἣν ἐπελάθου, γνωρίζων τὰ πολλαῖς ὕστερον ἐσόμενα γενεαῖς.
Apokalyptōn mystēria. Houtō soi phēsi diakeimenǭ, edeixe tēn opsin hēn epelathou, gnōrizōn ta pollais hysteron esomena geneais.
"He who reveals mysteries." To you, he says, so disposed, he showed the vision you forgot, making known what would happen many generations later.
2.33Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Καὶ ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν ἐμοί. Εἶτα ἀπωθούμενος ἑαυτοῦ τὸ θαῦμα, ἐπὶ δὲ τὸν θεὸν ἀναφέρων τοὺς ὕμνους, φησίν· οὐκ οἴκοθεν, οὐδὲ παρ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ εἰδέναι ταῦτα αὐχῶ, οὐδὲ ἀφ᾽ ὧν πεῖραν τῆς ἐπιχωρίου σοφίας εἴληφα.
Kai emoi ouk en sophią tę̄ ousę̄ en emoi. Eita apōthoumenos heautou to thauma, epi de ton theon anapherōn tous hymnous, phēsin; ouk oikothen, oude par᾽ emautou eidenai tauta auchō, oude aph᾽ hōn peiran tēs epichōriou sophias eilēpha.
"And to me, not by wisdom that is in me." Then, pushing the wonder away from himself and referring the praise to God, he says: I do not boast that I know these things of my own or from myself, nor from the experience I have gained of the native wisdom.
2.34Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Ἀλλ᾽ ἕνεκεν τοῦ τὴν σύγκρισιν τῷ βασιλεῖ γνωρίσαι. Θεὸς γάρ φησι, ὁ σοὶ διὰ τοῦ ἐνυπνίου τὰ πράγματα δείξας, ἐμοὶ τῶν σοὶ γνωρισθέντων τὴν σαφήνειαν δέδωκε· προσέθηκε δὲ καὶ τῶν σῶν βουλευμάτων τὴν εἴδησιν, ὡς ἂν ἔχοις περὶ τῶν λεγομένων ἀναντίρρητον τὴν γνῶσιν.
All᾽ heneken tou tēn synkrisin tǭ basilei gnōrisai. Theos gar phēsi, ho soi dia tou enypniou ta pragmata deixas, emoi tōn soi gnōristhentōn tēn saphēneian dedōke; prosethēke de kai tōn sōn bouleumatōn tēn eidēsin, hōs an echois peri tōn legomenōn anantirrēton tēn gnōsin.
"But in order to make the interpretation known to the king." For God, he says, who showed you the events through the dream, has given me the clear meaning of what was made known to you; and he added knowledge of your thoughts too, so that you might have an undeniable knowledge of what is said.
2.35Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Ὧι ὁ θεὸς τοῦ οὐρανοῦ βασιλείαν ἔδωκεν. Τοσούτων γὰρ οὐκ ἂν πώποτε περιεγένου, μὴ τοῦ θεοῦ τὴν ἰσχὺν δεδωκότος· αὐτὸς δὲ καὶ τοὺς οἰκείους ἁλῶναι πεποίηκεν ὑπὸ σοῦ. — Αἰνιττόμενος ὡς οὐκ ἂν τὴν Ἰουδαίαν κατέσχες, εἰ μὴ ὁ θεὸς ἐκδότους ἔδωκε τοὺς ἐνοικοῦντας.
Hōi ho theos tou ouranou basileian edōken. Tosoutōn gar ouk an pōpote periegenou, mē tou theou tēn ischyn dedōkotos; autos de kai tous oikeious halōnai pepoiēken hypo sou. — Ainittomenos hōs ouk an tēn Ioudaian katesches, ei mē ho theos ekdotous edōke tous enoikountas.
"To whom the God of heaven has given a kingdom." For you would never have overcome so many, had God not given you the strength; and he himself has caused his own people to be taken by you. — Hinting that you would not have held Judea had God not given up its inhabitants.
2.36Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Θηρία τὰ ἀγροῦ, καὶ πετεινά. Τοὺς ὀξεῖς κατὰ πόλεμον καὶ δυνατοὺς καὶ ῥωμαλέους τὸ σῶμα ὑπέταξέ σοι ὁ θεός, καὶ κατέστησε κύριον πάντων· ἀντὶ τοῦ οὐ μόνον σοι τὴν ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ νίκην, ἀλλὰ καὶ βεβαίαν ἐχαρίσατο τὴν ἐξουσίαν.
Thēria ta agrou, kai peteina. Tous oxeis kata polemon kai dynatous kai rhōmaleous to sōma hypetaxe soi ho theos, kai katestēse kyrion pantōn; anti tou ou monon soi tēn en tǭ polemǭ nikēn, alla kai bebaian echarisato tēn exousian.
"The beasts of the field and the birds." God has subjected to you those keen in war, powerful and strong of body, and made you lord of all: that is, he has granted you not only victory in war but also secure authority.
2.37Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):3
Ἀναστήσεται βασιλεία ἑτέρα ἥττων σου. Οὐκέτι ἐνταῦθα ἥττονα ἔφη, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῇ προσθήκῃ τῶν ῥημάτων δυνατωτέραν ἀνέφηνε τὴν ἐξουσίαν· κυριεύσει γὰρ πάσης τῆς γῆς· ὁ γὰρ Κῦρος πολλῷ μείζονα τοῦ βαβυλωνίου τὴν ἀρχὴν ἐκτήσατο, καὶ πολλοὺς πολέμους κατώρθωσε τῇ θείᾳ συμμαχίᾳ.
Anastēsetai basileia hetera hēttōn sou. Ouketi entautha hēttona ephē, alla kai tę̄ prosthēkę̄ tōn rhēmatōn dynatōteran anephēne tēn exousian; kyrieusei gar pasēs tēs gēs; ho gar Kyros pollǭ meizona tou babylōniou tēn archēn ektēsato, kai pollous polemous katōrthōse tę̄ theią symmachią.
"Another kingdom will arise, inferior to you." Here he no longer said "inferior," but by the addition of the words showed a more powerful authority: "it will rule over all the earth." For Cyrus acquired an empire much greater than the Babylonian, and accomplished many wars with divine help.
2.40Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Βασιλεία τρίτη. Μηνύει μὲν τὴν μακεδονικὴν ἀρχήν· γνωρίζει δὲ τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον.
Basileia tritē. Mēnyei men tēn makedonikēn archēn; gnōrizei de ton Alexandron.
"A third kingdom." He indicates the Macedonian empire, and makes known Alexander.
2.41Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Βασιλεία τετάρτη ἰσχυρὰ ὡς σίδηρος. Οὐ γὰρ μόνον τῶν λοιπῶν περιεγένετο, ἀλλὰ καὶ Πέρσας ὑπέταξεν ὀλίγῳ τῷ χρόνῳ, πάσης ἐλπίδος ὀξύτερον τὰς περιφανεστάτας καθελὼν δυναστείας· λεπτυνεῖ οὖν, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀσθενεῖς ποιήσει.
Basileia tetartē ischyra hōs sidēros. Ou gar monon tōn loipōn periegeneto, alla kai Persas hypetaxen oligǭ tǭ chronǭ, pasēs elpidos oxyteron tas periphanestatas kathelōn dynasteias; leptynei oun, anti tou astheneis poiēsei.
"A fourth kingdom, strong as iron." For it not only overcame the rest, but subjected the Persians in a short time, overthrowing the most illustrious dynasties more swiftly than anyone could have hoped. "It will crush," then, in the sense of "it will make weak."
2.42Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Καὶ ἀπὸ ῥίζης ἐν αὐτῇ. Καὶ διὰ τούτων τῆς μακεδονικῆς ἀρχῆς ἔτι κρατούσης· τὸ γὰρ ἐν αὐτῇ, τουτέστι τῇ ῥίζῃ· τὸν γὰρ Ἀλέξανδρον διεδέξαντο.
Kai apo rhizēs en autę̄. Kai dia toutōn tēs makedonikēs archēs eti kratousēs; to gar en autę̄, toutesti tę̄ rhizę̄; ton gar Alexandron diedexanto.
"And from the root, in it." By these words too he means the Macedonian empire still ruling; for "in it" means "in the root": for they succeeded Alexander.
2.43Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Συμμιγεῖς ἔσονται ἐν σπέρματι ἀνθρώπων. Συμμίγνυσθαι τὸ σπέρμα ἔφη τὴν πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἐπιμιξίαν τῶν μετὰ Ἀλέξανδρον διὰ τὰς ἐπιγαμίας αἰνιττόμενος· τό τε γὰρ ἀναμεμίχθαι οὐδὲν ἕτερον μηνύει ἢ τὴν ἀκριβῆ συγγένειαν· καὶ τὸ ἐν σπέρματι ἀνθρώπων σαφῶς τὸ εἰρημένον σημαίνει· ὥσπερ ἀκόλουθόν ἐστι τὸ καὶ ἔσονται προσκολλώμενοι· ὡσανεὶ πρότερον μὲν διῃρημένων τῶν γενῶν, συναφθέντων δὲ ἐκ τῆς πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἐπιμιξίας.
Symmigeis esontai en spermati anthrōpōn. Symmignysthai to sperma ephē tēn pros allēlous epimixian tōn meta Alexandron dia tas epigamias ainittomenos; to te gar anamemichthai ouden heteron mēnyei ē tēn akribē syngeneian; kai to en spermati anthrōpōn saphōs to eirēmenon sēmainei; hōsper akolouthon esti to kai esontai proskollōmenoi; hōsanei proteron men dię̄rēmenōn tōn genōn, synaphthentōn de ek tēs pros allēlous epimixias.
"They will be mixed in the seed of men." By "the seed being mixed" he meant the intermingling with one another of those who came after Alexander, hinting at their intermarriages; for "to be mingled" indicates nothing other than close kinship, and "in the seed of men" plainly signifies what was said; just as what follows also does, "and they will cling," as though the families were formerly divided, but joined by their intermingling with one another.
2.44Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Ἀναστήσει ὁ θεὸς τοῦ οὐρανοῦ βασιλείαν. Καλῶς τὸ ἀναστήσει, ὡς οὔσης μὲν τὴν ἀρχήν, οὐ φαινομένης δέ· ἦν γὰρ καὶ πρὸ τῆς ἐνσάρκου χριστοῦ παρουσίας ἡ θεία φύσις· τὸ οὖν ἀναστήσει, ἀντὶ τοῦ δείξει αὐτοῦ τὴν πρόνοιαν· οὐδὲ εἶπεν ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν βασιλέων ἐκείνων ἀναστήσεται βασιλεύς· οὐ γὰρ χρονικὴν ἔσχε τὴν βασιλείαν, ἀΐδιός τε τὴν ἐξουσίαν· ἀλλ᾽ ἀναστήσει ὁ θεὸς τοῦ οὐρανοῦ βασιλείαν, δεικνὺς τὴν περὶ ἡμᾶς τοῦ θεοῦ οἰκονομίαν.
Anastēsei ho theos tou ouranou basileian. Kalōs to anastēsei, hōs ousēs men tēn archēn, ou phainomenēs de; ēn gar kai pro tēs ensarkou christou parousias hē theia physis; to oun anastēsei, anti tou deixei autou tēn pronoian; oude eipen en tais hēmerais tōn basileōn ekeinōn anastēsetai basileus; ou gar chronikēn esche tēn basileian, aïdios te tēn exousian; all᾽ anastēsei ho theos tou ouranou basileian, deiknys tēn peri hēmas tou theou oikonomian.
"The God of heaven will raise up a kingdom." "Will raise up" is well said, as of a kingdom that existed from the beginning but was not apparent; for the divine nature existed even before the coming of Christ in the flesh. "Will raise up," then, means "will show his providence." Nor did he say, "In the days of those kings a king will arise"; for he did not have a kingdom in time, being eternal in authority; but "the God of heaven will raise up a kingdom," showing God's dispensation toward us.
2.45Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας οὐ διαφθαρήσεται. κ. τ. λ. Εἶτα τὸ διάφορον τῆς βασιλείας ταύτης δεικνύς, πρὸς τὰς ἤδη ῥηθείσας φησίν, ἥτις εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας οὐ διαφθαρήσεται, ὡς ἐκείνων μὲν ἀπολλυμένων, ταύτης δὲ εἰς ἀπέραντον τὸν χρόνον μενούσης. — Τουτέστιν, οὐδεὶς ἔσται μετ᾽ αὐτόν, τῆς ἐξουσίας αὐτοῦ παυθησομένης, ἀλλ᾽ αὐτός τε διαμενεῖ, καὶ τὸ κράτος ἕξει ἀτελεύτητον. — Οὐ μόνον φησὶν ἀρχὴν ἕξει, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ἀνθισταμένων ἁπάντων περιέσται· καὶ ὁ κύριος λέγει, ἐπὶ ταύτῃ μου τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ πύλαι ᾅδου οὐ κατισχύσουσιν αὐτῆς.
Eis tous aiōnas ou diaphtharēsetai. k. t. l. Eita to diaphoron tēs basileias tautēs deiknys, pros tas ēdē rhētheisas phēsin, hētis eis tous aiōnas ou diaphtharēsetai, hōs ekeinōn men apollymenōn, tautēs de eis aperanton ton chronon menousēs. — Toutestin, oudeis estai met᾽ auton, tēs exousias autou pauthēsomenēs, all᾽ autos te diamenei, kai to kratos hexei ateleutēton. — Ou monon phēsin archēn hexei, alla kai tōn anthistamenōn hapantōn periestai; kai ho kyrios legei, epi tautę̄ mou tę̄ petrą oikodomēsō mou tēn ekklēsian, kai pylai hądou ou katischysousin autēs.
"It will never be destroyed," and so on. Then, showing the difference of this kingdom from those already mentioned, he says that it will never be destroyed, since they perish, but this remains for endless time. — That is, there will be no one after him so that his authority would cease, but he himself remains and will have power without end. — Not only will it have rule, he says, but it will also prevail over all who oppose it; and the Lord says, "On this rock I will build my church, and the gates of Hades will not prevail against it."
Chapter 3
3.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Εἱστήκεισαν ἐνώπιον τῆς εἰκόνος. Ἀναμένοντες τοῦ προστάγματος τὸ σύνθημα· τοῦτο δὲ ἦν τὸ παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως παράγγελμα· ἐδήλωσε δὲ τῶν συναχθέντων τὸ πλῆθος, ἔθνη μὲν τὰς καθ᾽ ἑκάστην μηνύων πατρίδας· φυλὰς δὲ τοὺς κατὰ φρατρίαν συναχθέντας· λαοὺς δὲ τοὺς ἐκ διαφόρων πατρίδων μυριάδας· σάλπιγγας δὲ καὶ σύριγγας καὶ κιθάρας λέγει διάφορα ὄργανα μουσικά· καὶ σαμβύκης καὶ ψαλτηρίου εἶδος δηλονότι λέγει ὀργάνου. Δηλοῖ ὡς οὐχ ἁπλῶς οὐδὲ ὡς ἔτυχεν ἦχον τοῖς φθόγγοις, ἀλλὰ κατά τινα τάξιν καὶ εὐρυθμίαν ἀπετέλουν τὸ μέλος· ὥστε καὶ ἡδονήν τινα παρέχειν τοῖς ἀκούουσιν.
Heistēkeisan enōpion tēs eikonos. Anamenontes tou prostagmatos to synthēma; touto de ēn to para tou basileōs parangelma; edēlōse de tōn synachthentōn to plēthos, ethnē men tas kath᾽ hekastēn mēnyōn patridas; phylas de tous kata phratrian synachthentas; laous de tous ek diaphorōn patridōn myriadas; salpingas de kai syringas kai kitharas legei diaphora organa mousika; kai sambykēs kai psaltēriou eidos dēlonoti legei organou. Dēloi hōs ouch haplōs oude hōs etychen ēchon tois phthongois, alla kata tina taxin kai eurythmian apeteloun to melos; hōste kai hēdonēn tina parechein tois akouousin.
"They stood before the image." Waiting for the signal of the command; this was the king's order. He indicated the multitude of those gathered: by "nations" meaning their respective homelands, by "tribes" those gathered by clan, by "peoples" the multitudes from various homelands. By trumpets, pipes, and lyres he means various musical instruments; and by sambuca and psaltery he plainly means kinds of instruments. He shows that they did not make the sounds simply or at random, but performed the melody with a certain order and rhythm, so as to give some pleasure to the hearers.
3.3Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Πίπτοντες πάντες οἱ λαοί. Ἵν᾽ οἱ μὲν ἀνοίᾳ, οἱ δὲ φόβῳ τῶν ἀπειληθέντων ὑπακούσωσι τῷ προστάγματι. — Τῶν λοιπῶν δουλοπρεπῶς θωπευόντων, οἱ παῖδες κατὰ τὸν Μωσέως νόμον οὐδενὶ χειροποιήτῳ προσκυνεῖν ἠξίουν· τῷ μὲν γὰρ βασιλεῖ τὴν ὀφειλομένην ἀπεδίδοσαν τιμήν, ὡς θεῷ δὲ προσκυνεῖν παρῃτοῦντο· τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἦν τὴν πρέπουσαν φυλαττόντων τάξιν· τὸ δέ, τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ λατρείας ὑπερορώντων.
Piptontes pantes hoi laoi. Hin᾽ hoi men anoią, hoi de phobǭ tōn apeilēthentōn hypakousōsi tǭ prostagmati. — Tōn loipōn douloprepōs thōpeuontōn, hoi paides kata ton Mōseōs nomon oudeni cheiropoiētǭ proskynein ēxioun; tǭ men gar basilei tēn opheilomenēn apedidosan timēn, hōs theǭ de proskynein parę̄tounto; to men gar ēn tēn prepousan phylattontōn taxin; to de, tēs tou theou latreias hyperorōntōn.
"All the peoples, falling down." So that some from folly and others from fear of the threats might obey the command. — While the rest flattered servilely, the youths, according to the law of Moses, would worship nothing made by hands; for they gave the king the honor due to him, but refused to worship him as God: the one was the part of those who keep the fitting order, the other of those who disregard the worship of God.
3.4Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας ζῆθι. Τουτέστι διαμένοις κρατῶν, τῶν πραγμάτων συμμαρτυρούντων τῇ δυναστείᾳ· τοῦτο μὲν ἔχει κολακείας ἔνδειξιν, τὸ δὲ ἑπόμενον φθόνου.
Eis tous aiōnas zēthi. Toutesti diamenois kratōn, tōn pragmatōn symmartyrountōn tę̄ dynasteią; touto men echei kolakeias endeixin, to de hepomenon phthonou.
"Live for ever." That is, may you remain in power, with events bearing witness to your rule. This shows flattery; what follows, envy.
3.5Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Ἔστι γὰρ θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐν οὐρανῷ, ᾧ ἡμεῖς λατρεύομεν. Ἐκ μὲν τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ μνήμης καὶ τοῦ φάσκειν αὐτὸν εἶναι ἐν οὐρανῷ, ἐπὶ τὸν δημιουργὸν τῶν ὅλων χειραγωγοῦσι τὸν ἀκούοντα· ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς λατρείας αὐτοῦ, παλαιῶν ὑπομιμνήσκουσι θαυμάτων· ὥσπερ γὰρ Βαβυλώνιοι ἐκ τῆς αὐτῶν ἀποικίας ἐλέγχειν ἐπειρῶντο τοῦ θεοῦ τὴν δύναμιν, οὕτως οἱ ἅγιοι ἔκ τε τῆς κτίσεως, καὶ τῶν περὶ αὐτοὺς γεγονότων πάλαι, τὸν ἑαυτῶν κρατύνειν ἐβούλοντο λόγον· οὐ μὴν σαφῶς αὐτὰ καὶ λέγουσιν· οὐ γὰρ διδασκαλίας ἦν ὁ καιρός, ἀλλ᾽ εὐθυνῶν καὶ κρίσεως· διδασκάλου μὲν γάρ ἐστι τὸ μετ᾽ ἐξουσίας λέγειν, κρινομένου, μετρεῖν τῷ καιρῷ τοὺς λόγους.
Esti gar theos hēmōn en ouranǭ, hǭ hēmeis latreuomen. Ek men tēs tou theou mnēmēs kai tou phaskein auton einai en ouranǭ, epi ton dēmiourgon tōn holōn cheiragōgousi ton akouonta; apo de tēs latreias autou, palaiōn hypomimnēskousi thaumatōn; hōsper gar Babylōnioi ek tēs autōn apoikias elenchein epeirōnto tou theou tēn dynamin, houtōs hoi hagioi ek te tēs ktiseōs, kai tōn peri autous gegonotōn palai, ton heautōn kratynein eboulonto logon; ou mēn saphōs auta kai legousin; ou gar didaskalias ēn ho kairos, all᾽ euthynōn kai kriseōs; didaskalou men gar esti to met᾽ exousias legein, krinomenou, metrein tǭ kairǭ tous logous.
"For there is our God in heaven, whom we serve." By mentioning God and saying that he is in heaven, they lead the hearer by the hand to the Creator of all things; and by speaking of his worship they recall ancient wonders. For just as the Babylonians tried to refute God's power from their deportation, so the saints wished to strengthen their own argument from creation and from what had happened to them of old. Yet they do not say these things plainly; for it was not a time for teaching but for an account and a trial; for it belongs to a teacher to speak with authority, but to one on trial to measure his words to the occasion.
3.6Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Δυνατὸς ἐξελέσθαι ἡμᾶς. Ἡμεῖς μὲν οὖν γινώσκομεν σαφῶς ὡς οὐδὲν πεισόμεθα δεινόν, νικώσης πᾶσαν μηχανὴν τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ προνοίας· εἰ δὲ ἄρα καὶ δοκιμάσει τοῖς δεινοῖς ἡμᾶς ἐκδοῦναι, τοσαύτην περὶ αὐτὸν κεκτήμεθα ἀγάπην, ὥστε ἡμᾶς αἱρεῖσθαι μᾶλλον ἀποθανεῖν μετ᾽ εὐσεβείας ἢ ζῆν τῶν θείων νόμων ἐκτός.
Dynatos exelesthai hēmas. Hēmeis men oun ginōskomen saphōs hōs ouden peisometha deinon, nikōsēs pasan mēchanēn tēs tou theou pronoias; ei de ara kai dokimasei tois deinois hēmas ekdounai, tosautēn peri auton kektēmetha agapēn, hōste hēmas haireisthai mallon apothanein met᾽ eusebeias ē zēn tōn theiōn nomōn ektos.
"He is able to deliver us." We know clearly that we shall suffer nothing terrible, since God's providence overcomes every device; but if he should decide to hand us over to terrible things, we have such love for him that we choose rather to die with godliness than to live outside the divine laws.
3.7Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Ἐνέπεσον ἐν μέσῳ. Οὐκ εἶπεν εἰσῆλθον, ἀλλ᾽ ἔπεσον· δεικνὺς ὡς τὸ ἐπιτεταμένον τῆς φλογὸς οὐδὲ προσιέναι τινὶ συνεχώρει, οὐδὲ ὀργάνοις τισὶν ὠθεῖν τοὺς νεανίσκους, καθάπερ τὰς εἰωθυίας ὕλας ἐπὶ τῶν τοιούτων εἰσπέμπειν φίλον· ἀλλ᾽ ὥσπερ ἐκ περιωπῆς τινος πρὸς τὸ βάθος ῥίπτουσι τοὺς παῖδας, ὡς ἐφ᾽ ὁμολογούμενον θάνατον.
Enepeson en mesǭ. Ouk eipen eisēlthon, all᾽ epeson; deiknys hōs to epitetamenon tēs phlogos oude prosienai tini synechōrei, oude organois tisin ōthein tous neaniskous, kathaper tas eiōthuias hylas epi tōn toioutōn eispempein philon; all᾽ hōsper ek periōpēs tinos pros to bathos rhiptousi tous paidas, hōs eph᾽ homologoumenon thanaton.
"They fell into the midst." He did not say "they went in" but "they fell," showing that the intensity of the flame did not allow anyone to approach, nor to push the young men in with any tools, as one usually feeds fuel into such fires; but as from some height they throw the youths into the depth, as to certain death.
3.8Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4
Καὶ περιεπάτουν. Οὐχ ἁπλῶς εἶπεν ὕμνουν, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι περιπατοῦντες ὕμνουν· καὶ ἐπιτείνων τὸ παράδοξον τοῦ γιγνομένου· οὐ γὰρ μόνον αὐτῶν οὐχ ἥψατο, ἀλλὰ καὶ πρὸς τὴν τῶν δεσμῶν λύσιν ὑπηρετήσατο τὸ πῦρ· ὅρον τῆς ἑαυτοῦ ἐνεργείας ἐσχηκὸς τοῦ σιδήρου τὸν ἀφανισμόν.
Kai periepatoun. Ouch haplōs eipen hymnoun, all᾽ hoti peripatountes hymnoun; kai epiteinōn to paradoxon tou gignomenou; ou gar monon autōn ouch hēpsato, alla kai pros tēn tōn desmōn lysin hypēretēsato to pyr; horon tēs heautou energeias eschēkos tou sidērou ton aphanismon.
"And they walked about." He did not simply say "they sang hymns," but that they sang hymns while walking about, heightening the wonder of what happened; for the fire not only did not touch them, but served to loose their bonds, having as the limit of its working the destruction of the iron.
3.9Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):4-5
Εὐλογεῖτε πάντα. Εἰδέναι δὲ δεῖ, ὡς οὗτος ὁ ὕμνος οὐ κεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἑβραϊκοῖς ἢ ἐν τοῖς συριακοῖς βιβλίοις· λέγεται γὰρ ἀπὸ τῶν εἰρημένων παρά τινων μετὰ ταῦτα συντεθεῖσθαι· διόπερ καὶ αὐτὸς τὴν καθ᾽ ἑκάστην αὐτῶν ἑρμηνείαν παρείς, τῆς ἑρμηνείας μόνον ἐχόμενος τῆς βίβλου.
Eulogeite panta. Eidenai de dei, hōs houtos ho hymnos ou keitai en tois hebraïkois ē en tois syriakois bibliois; legetai gar apo tōn eirēmenōn para tinōn meta tauta syntetheisthai; dioper kai autos tēn kath᾽ hekastēn autōn hermēneian pareis, tēs hermēneias monon echomenos tēs biblou.
"Bless, all." One must know that this hymn is not found in the Hebrew or in the Syriac books; for it is said to have been composed afterwards by certain people from what had been said. Therefore I too pass over the interpretation of each part of it, keeping only to the interpretation of the book.
3.11Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):5
Ναβουχοδονόσορ βασιλεὺς πᾶσι τοῖς λαοῖς. Ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν πραγμάτων ἐπαιδεύθη τὸ ἀληθές· διόπερ εἰς κοινὸν ἅπασι τοῖς ὑπηκόοις ἐκτίθεται τὸ δόγμα· ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ἔμελλον καὶ σύγκρισιν τῶν θεῶν ποιούμενοι εἰς ἀδυναμίαν ἔσκωπτον τὸν ἰουδαίων προϊστάμενον, ὡς οὐ δυνηθέντα ἐξαρπάσαι τῆς πολεμίου χειρὸς τοὺς ὑπ᾽ αὐτῷ τεταγμένους, παρεγγυᾷ μηκέτι τοῖς αὐτοῖς κεχρῆσθαι ῥήμασιν, ὡς αὐτίκα μάλα δώσοντας δίκην ἐπὶ τῇ βλασφημίᾳ. — Αὐτὰ τὰ πράγματά φησι πάσης φωνῆς λαμπρότερον ἐβόα τὴν ἀλήθειαν· οἱ μὲν γὰρ παρὰ τῶν λοιπῶν προσκυνούμενοι οὐ μόνον τῶν προφανῶν κινδύνων ἐξαρπάζειν οὐ δύνανται, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ τὸ τυχὸν παρέχειν· ὁ δὲ καὶ τὸ πᾶσιν ἀνέλπιστον καὶ ἐπ᾽ ἔργου ἐπέδειξεν.
Nabouchodonosor basileus pasi tois laois. Ex autōn tōn pragmatōn epaideuthē to alēthes; dioper eis koinon hapasi tois hypēkoois ektithetai to dogma; epeidē gar emellon kai synkrisin tōn theōn poioumenoi eis adynamian eskōpton ton ioudaiōn proïstamenon, hōs ou dynēthenta exarpasai tēs polemiou cheiros tous hyp᾽ autǭ tetagmenous, parengyą mēketi tois autois kechrēsthai rhēmasin, hōs autika mala dōsontas dikēn epi tę̄ blasphēmią. — Auta ta pragmata phēsi pasēs phōnēs lamproteron eboa tēn alētheian; hoi men gar para tōn loipōn proskynoumenoi ou monon tōn prophanōn kindynōn exarpazein ou dynantai, all᾽ oude to tychon parechein; ho de kai to pasin anelpiston kai ep᾽ ergou epedeixen.
"Nebuchadnezzar the king to all the peoples." He was taught the truth by the events themselves; therefore he sets out the decree publicly to all his subjects. For since they were inclined, comparing the gods, to mock the protector of the Jews as powerless, as unable to snatch those under him from the enemy's hand, he charges them no longer to use such words, as they would at once pay the penalty for the blasphemy. — The events themselves, he says, cried out the truth more brightly than any voice; for those worshipped by the others not only cannot snatch anyone from open dangers, but cannot give even the slightest help; but he showed in deed what was beyond all hope.
Chapter 4
4.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):5
Ἄκουσον τὴν ὅρασιν. Οὐ τὴν δειχθεῖσάν φησι τὴν ὄψιν ἀπαιτῶ λέγειν, καθάπερ ἤδη πρότερον· δήλη γὰρ αὕτη· ἀλλὰ τῆς ὁμολογουμένης τὴν σαφήνειαν· ἐν ἴσῳ γάρ μοι τοῦτο ἀπορεῖται τῆς ἀγνοουμένης ὄψεως.
Akouson tēn horasin. Ou tēn deichtheisan phēsi tēn opsin apaitō legein, kathaper ēdē proteron; dēlē gar hautē; alla tēs homologoumenēs tēn saphēneian; en isǭ gar moi touto aporeitai tēs agnooumenēs opseōs.
"Hear the vision." I do not ask you, he says, to tell the vision that was shown, as before, for it is clear; but the clear meaning of what is agreed; for this is as much a puzzle to me as the unknown vision.
4.2Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):5
Πάντες οἱ σοφοὶ οὐ δύνανται. Ἠλέγχθησαν δέ φησι πάντες οἱ ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ φρυαττόμενοι· σὺ δὲ δύνασαι, ὅτι πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἅγιον ἐν σοί· τουτέστι κατὰ θείαν ἀποκάλυψιν, καθὰ καὶ τὸ πρότερον, πάντα λέγεις.
Pantes hoi sophoi ou dynantai. Ēlenchthēsan de phēsi pantes hoi epi sophią phryattomenoi; sy de dynasai, hoti pneuma theou hagion en soi; toutesti kata theian apokalypsin, katha kai to proteron, panta legeis.
"All the wise men are not able." All, he says, who prided themselves on wisdom were exposed; but you are able, "because the holy Spirit of God is in you": that is, you tell everything by divine revelation, as before.
4.3Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):5
Ἀπηνεώθη ὡσεὶ ὥραν μίαν. Τουτέστιν ἐξεπλάγη ἐπὶ τῷ παραδόξῳ τῶν δειχθέντων, καὶ σύννους ἐγένετο.
Apēneōthē hōsei hōran mian. Toutestin exeplagē epi tǭ paradoxǭ tōn deichthentōn, kai synnous egeneto.
"He was dumbfounded for about an hour." That is, he was astonished at the wonder of what was shown, and became thoughtful.
4.4Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):5
Καὶ οἱ διαλογισμοὶ αὐτοῦ συνετάρασσον. Τουτέστιν εἰς φόβον κατέστη, λογιζόμενος τοῦ δεσπότου τὴν δύναμιν, καὶ ὡς οὐδὲν τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων βέβαιον, ὅταν μὴ τὴν ἄνωθεν ἔχῃ ῥοπήν.
Kai hoi dialogismoi autou synetarasson. Toutestin eis phobon katestē, logizomenos tou despotou tēn dynamin, kai hōs ouden tōn anthrōpinōn bebaion, hotan mē tēn anōthen echę̄ rhopēn.
"And his thoughts troubled him." That is, he was afraid, reckoning the power of the Master, and that nothing human is secure unless it has the weight of support from above.
4.5Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):5
Τὸ δένδρον ὃ εἶδες. Οὐκ αὐτοῦ τὸ πρόσωπον λέγων μόνον, ἀλλὰ τὴν πᾶσαν βασιλείαν· αὐτὸν δὲ εἶπεν ὡς τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων ἁπάντων ἐν ἐκείνῳ τεθεωρημένων, καὶ συμπληρούντων τὴν βασιλικὴν φαντασίαν· μηνύει τοίνυν τὸ μὲν δένδρον, αὐτόν· τὰ δὲ φύλλα, τὸν περὶ αὐτὸν στρατόν· εὐθαλῆ δὲ διὰ τὸ ἀξιοπρεπεῖς εἶναι ὑπό τε εὐταξίας καὶ τῆς τῶν λοιπῶν περιουσίας· καρπὸν δὲ τοῦ μὲν δένδρου λέγει τὰς ἐτησίους παρὰ τῶν ὑπηκόων πεμπομένας ὁμολογίας· τὸ δὲ τὰ ὄρνεα καὶ τὰ θηρία τρέφεσθαι, τὸ παρὰ βασιλέως τοῖς τε ἄρχουσι καὶ τοῖς τάγμασι χορηγούμενον σιτηρέσιον αἰνίττεται· πετεινὰ δὲ καλεῖ τοὺς ἐν τέλει, ὡς ὑπερέχοντας τῶν λοιπῶν· θηρία δὲ τὰ ὑποτεταγμένα ἔθνη· καὶ τὸ τὰ μὲν ὑπὸ τὰ δένδρα κατοικεῖν, τὰ δὲ ἐν τοῖς κλάδοις κατασκηνοῦν, τὸ ὑπὸ τοῖς αὐτοῦ νόμοις ζῆν ἅπαντας· πᾶσι δὲ τοῖς εἰρημένοις ἔφη ἐκεῖθεν χορηγεῖσθαι τὴν ἀφθονίαν, ὡς τῶν μὲν ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τρεφομένων, μισθὸν τῆς λειτουργίας λαμβανόντων· τῷ δὲ βασιλικῷ νομίσματι τάς τε ἐμπορίας καὶ τὰ συναλλάγματα ποιουμένων· ὁ δὲ προφήτης τὴν κατὰ μέρος ἐξήγησιν παρῆκεν ἴσως μὲν ὡς καὶ εὐσύνοπτον, καὶ μάλιστα τότε τῶν κινουμένων, οὐδεμίαν δυσχέρειαν ἐμποιούντων πρὸς τὴν τῶν ὅλων κατανόησιν· καὶ ἵνα δὲ ἔχων σκοπόν, τῇ διηγήσει τῶν κατ᾽ αὐτόν, σωφρονέστερον αὐτὸν ποιῆσαι· ἦν δὲ πρὸς τοῦτο περιττὴ ἡ τῶν λοιπῶν ἐξήγησις.
To dendron ho eides. Ouk autou to prosōpon legōn monon, alla tēn pasan basileian; auton de eipen hōs tōn hypotetagmenōn hapantōn en ekeinǭ tetheōrēmenōn, kai symplērountōn tēn basilikēn phantasian; mēnyei toinyn to men dendron, auton; ta de phylla, ton peri auton straton; euthalē de dia to axioprepeis einai hypo te eutaxias kai tēs tōn loipōn periousias; karpon de tou men dendrou legei tas etēsious para tōn hypēkoōn pempomenas homologias; to de ta ornea kai ta thēria trephesthai, to para basileōs tois te archousi kai tois tagmasi chorēgoumenon sitēresion ainittetai; peteina de kalei tous en telei, hōs hyperechontas tōn loipōn; thēria de ta hypotetagmena ethnē; kai to ta men hypo ta dendra katoikein, ta de en tois kladois kataskēnoun, to hypo tois autou nomois zēn hapantas; pasi de tois eirēmenois ephē ekeithen chorēgeisthai tēn aphthonian, hōs tōn men hyp᾽ autou trephomenōn, misthon tēs leitourgias lambanontōn; tǭ de basilikǭ nomismati tas te emporias kai ta synallagmata poioumenōn; ho de prophētēs tēn kata meros exēgēsin parēken isōs men hōs kai eusynopton, kai malista tote tōn kinoumenōn, oudemian dyschereian empoiountōn pros tēn tōn holōn katanoēsin; kai hina de echōn skopon, tę̄ diēgēsei tōn kat᾽ auton, sōphronesteron auton poiēsai; ēn de pros touto perittē hē tōn loipōn exēgēsis.
"The tree that you saw." Not speaking of his person alone, but of the whole kingdom; but he said "you" because all his subjects were seen in him and filled out the royal image. The tree, then, indicates him; the leaves, the army about him; "flourishing" because they were splendid in their good order and their abundance of everything else. By the tree's fruit he means the yearly tributes sent by the subjects; the birds and beasts being fed hints at the allowance of provisions supplied by the king to the officials and the regiments. He calls "birds" those in authority, as being above the rest, and "beasts" the subject nations; and some dwelling under the tree, others nesting in the branches means that all live under his laws. He said that abundance was supplied from there to all those mentioned, since those fed by him receive wages for their service, and they carry on trade and contracts with the royal coinage. The prophet passed over the detailed interpretation, perhaps because it was easily grasped, especially since the things then in motion caused no difficulty for understanding the whole; and also because he had in view, by the account of what concerned the king, to make him more sober; for this purpose the interpretation of the rest was superfluous.
4.7Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):5
Ὅτι ἐμεγαλύνθης. Τουτέστιν ἀπὸ μικροῦ μέγας ἐγένου, διὰ τῆς ἐν τοῖς πολέμοις νίκης· τὸ δὲ ἴσχυσας, ὅτι οὐδὲ μετὰ ταῦτα ἔσχες ἀντίστασιν.
Hoti emegalynthēs. Toutestin apo mikrou megas egenou, dia tēs en tois polemois nikēs; to de ischysas, hoti oude meta tauta esches antistasin.
"Because you have grown great." That is, from small you became great through victory in wars; and "you have grown strong," because afterwards too you met no resistance.
4.8Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):5
Καὶ ἡ μεγαλοσύνη σου ἐμεγαλύνθη. Τουτέστιν ἐφυσήθης τὴν διάνοιαν, καὶ μέχρι τοῦ δεσπότου τῶν ὅλων ἐξέτεινας τὸ φρόνημα· μεγαλοσύνην μὲν γὰρ αὐτὴν ἐκάλεσε τὴν ἐξουσίαν· τὸ δὲ μεγαλυνθῆναι λέγει διὰ τὸ τῶν λογισμῶν ὑπέρογκον.
Kai hē megalosynē sou emegalynthē. Toutestin ephysēthēs tēn dianoian, kai mechri tou despotou tōn holōn exeteinas to phronēma; megalosynēn men gar autēn ekalese tēn exousian; to de megalynthēnai legei dia to tōn logismōn hyperonkon.
"And your greatness has grown great." That is, you became puffed up in mind and stretched your pride even to the Master of all; for he called authority itself "greatness," and says it "grew great" because of the swelling of his thoughts.
4.9Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):5
Καὶ ἡ κυρεία σου εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς γῆς. Τοῦτο δέ φησι γέγονεν, ὅτι πανταχοῦ τῆς γῆς ἐκτείνας τὴν ἀρχήν, οὐχ ἵστης ἐπὶ τῶν ὅρων τῆς φύσεως.
Kai hē kyreia sou eis ta perata tēs gēs. Touto de phēsi gegonen, hoti pantachou tēs gēs ekteinas tēn archēn, ouch histēs epi tōn horōn tēs physeōs.
"And your dominion to the ends of the earth." This happened, he says, because, extending your rule everywhere on earth, you did not stop at the limits of nature.
4.10Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):5
Καὶ ὅτι εἶδεν ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶρ. Τὸ μὲν εἶρ ἐστὶν ἑβραϊκὴ λέξις· σημαίνει δὲ τὸ ἄγρυπνον, καὶ ἄγγελον· διὸ καὶ ἅγιον καλεῖ, οἷον ἐξαίρετόν τινα παρὰ πάντας τοὺς ἀνθρώπους κεκτημένον τὴν φύσιν.
Kai hoti eiden ho basileus eir. To men eir estin hebraïkē lexis; sēmainei de to agrypnon, kai angelon; dio kai hagion kalei, hoion exaireton tina para pantas tous anthrōpous kektēmenon tēn physin.
"And that the king saw a watcher (eir)." Eir is a Hebrew word; it means "the wakeful one," and "angel"; therefore he also calls him "holy," as possessing a nature set apart above all men.
4.12Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Πλὴν τὴν φυήν. Οὐ μὴν φησὶν ὁλόκληρον κατεδίκασε τὴν τοῦ βασιλέως ἀπώλειαν.
Plēn tēn phyēn. Ou mēn phēsin holoklēron katedikase tēn tou basileōs apōleian.
"But the stump." He did not condemn the king to complete destruction, he says.
4.13Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Καὶ ἐν δεσμῷ σιδηρῷ. Διὰ τούτου τὸν τρόπον μηνύει τῆς καταληψομένης αὐτὸν συμφορᾶς.
Kai en desmǭ sidērǭ. Dia toutou ton tropon mēnyei tēs katalēpsomenēs auton symphoras.
"And in a band of iron." By this he indicates the manner of the misfortune that would overtake him.
4.14Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Καὶ ἐν τῇ χλόῃ. Ἐν τοιαύτῃ ἔσται καταστάσει ὥστε χλόην σιτεῖσθαι καὶ τὴν μετὰ θηρίων ἀσπάζεσθαι δίαιταν.
Kai en tę̄ chloę̄. En toiautę̄ estai katastasei hōste chloēn siteisthai kai tēn meta thēriōn aspazesthai diaitan.
"And in the grass." He will be in such a condition as to eat grass and to embrace a life with the beasts.
4.15Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Ἕως οὗ ἑπτὰ καιροί. Σημαίνει δὲ ἔτη τρία καὶ ἥμισυ, τοῦ καιροῦ ἢ εἰς χειμῶνα ἢ εἰς θέρος λαμβανομένου· ἐπειδήπερ καθολικῷ τινι λόγῳ εἰς δύο ταῦτα διαιρεῖται τὸ ἔτος, τοῦ ἔαρος καὶ μετοπώρου ἐν ἑκατέρᾳ τούτων ὥρᾳ παραλαμβανομένου· ἐπείπερ καὶ ἀρχαὶ τῆς ἀκρότητος, τὸ μὲν ἔαρ τοῦ θέρους, τὸ δὲ φθινόπωρον τοῦ χειμῶνος· συνελὼν δὲ τῇ διηγήσει, τὸν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ κατελθόντα, τὴν ἀπόβασιν ἀποφάσεως, τὸ εἶδος τῆς σωτηρίας, τὴν ἐλπίδα τῶν ἐσομένων, τὸ βέβαιον, καὶ τῆς συμφορᾶς τὸν χρόνον ἐπάγει.
Heōs hou hepta kairoi. Sēmainei de etē tria kai hēmisy, tou kairou ē eis cheimōna ē eis theros lambanomenou; epeidēper katholikǭ tini logǭ eis dyo tauta diaireitai to etos, tou earos kai metopōrou en hekaterą toutōn hōrą paralambanomenou; epeiper kai archai tēs akrotētos, to men ear tou therous, to de phthinopōron tou cheimōnos; synelōn de tę̄ diēgēsei, ton ex ouranou katelthonta, tēn apobasin apophaseōs, to eidos tēs sōtērias, tēn elpida tōn esomenōn, to bebaion, kai tēs symphoras ton chronon epagei.
"Until seven times." It means three and a half years, a "time" being taken as either a winter or a summer; since, in a general way, the year is divided into these two, spring and autumn being included in each of these seasons; for they are also the beginnings of the extremes, spring of summer and autumn of winter. Summing up in the account the one who came down from heaven, the outcome of the sentence, the form of the deliverance, the hope of what was to come, its certainty, he adds also the time of the misfortune.
4.16Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Τοῦτο ἡ σύγκρισις αὐτοῦ βασιλεῦ. Καθολικῷ τινι λόγῳ τὰ πάντα περιλαβών, ἐπειδὴ καὶ σύντομον ἔδει τὴν διδασκαλίαν ποιήσασθαι, τῶν μὲν ὁμολογουμένων ἀφιστάμενος, τῶν δὲ ἀμφιβόλων τὴν λύσιν ἐκτιθέμενος.
Touto hē synkrisis autou basileu. Katholikǭ tini logǭ ta panta perilabōn, epeidē kai syntomon edei tēn didaskalian poiēsasthai, tōn men homologoumenōn aphistamenos, tōn de amphibolōn tēn lysin ektithemenos.
"This is its interpretation, O king." He gathered everything in a general way, since the teaching had to be brief, leaving aside what was agreed and setting out the solution of what was doubtful.
4.17Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Καὶ σύγκριμα ὑψίστου. Σύγκριμα δὲ λέγει τὴν ἑρμηνείαν, ὅπερ ἀνωτέρω ὁ Ναβουχοδονόσορ ἔφη, διὰ συγκρίματος εἶρ ὁ λόγος καὶ ῥῆμα ἁγίων τὸ ἐπερώτημα· ὁ γάρ σοι τὴν ὄψιν δείξας, γνωρίσας τε αὐτὴν τοῖς ἐρωτήσασι, κἀμοὶ νῦν σαφηνίσαι τὸ κεκρυμμένον ἔδωκεν.
Kai synkrima hypsistou. Synkrima de legei tēn hermēneian, hoper anōterō ho Nabouchodonosor ephē, dia synkrimatos eir ho logos kai rhēma hagiōn to eperōtēma; ho gar soi tēn opsin deixas, gnōrisas te autēn tois erōtēsasi, kamoi nyn saphēnisai to kekrymmenon edōken.
"And a decree of the Most High." By "decree" (synkrima) he means the interpretation; which Nebuchadnezzar said above: "by the decree of the watcher is the matter, and the word of the holy ones the question." For he who showed you the vision and made it known to those who asked, has now given me too to make plain what was hidden.
4.18Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Ὃ ἔφθασεν. Τῆς ἐκβάσεως τῶν δειχθέντων τὸ ἀναντίρρητον λέγει· τὸ γὰρ ἔφθασεν, ἀντὶ τοῦ φθάσει λέγει, κατὰ τὸ ἰδίωμα τῆς γραφῆς.
Ho ephthasen. Tēs ekbaseōs tōn deichthentōn to anantirrēton legei; to gar ephthasen, anti tou phthasei legei, kata to idiōma tēs graphēs.
"Which has come." He means the certainty of the outcome of what was shown; for he says "has come" instead of "will come," according to the manner of Scripture.
4.19Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Καὶ μετὰ θηρίων ἀγρίων ἔσται ἡ κατοικία σου. Φασὶ γὰρ αὐτὸν εἰς μανίαν περιτραπῆναι· οἱ δὲ καὶ ὑπὸ δαίμονος διοχλούμενον· ἡνίκα οἱ περὶ τὰ βασίλεια αἰσχυνόμενοι τὴν βασιλέως κατάστασιν, πρότερον μὲν καθεῖρξαν, ὡς ἂν μὴ εἰς προὖπτον ἔλθοι τὸ γεγονός· καὶ κατεῖχον ὡσεὶ πέδαις τισὶ καὶ ἁλύσεσι φυλάσσοντες, ὅπερ ὁ δεσμὸς τοῦ σιδήρου μηνύει· οὐ γὰρ ἀνθρωπίνη ἰσχὺς ἤρκει πρὸς τοιαύτην ἀνθρώπου κατάστασιν· ἐπὶ πολὺ μὲν οὖν ἀφανῆ φρουρεῖν διεγίνωσκον· ὡς δὲ πάντα ἦν δεύτερα τῆς μανίας, ἀνθρώπων τε ἰσχὺς καὶ σιδηρίου δύναμις, καὶ ποικίλων ἐργατῶν ἐπίνοια, τότε οὐκ ἀφίεσαν μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὡς πόρρω συνέβαινεν ἡ μετὰ τῶν θηρίων διαγωγή.
Kai meta thēriōn agriōn estai hē katoikia sou. Phasi gar auton eis manian peritrapēnai; hoi de kai hypo daimonos diochloumenon; hēnika hoi peri ta basileia aischynomenoi tēn basileōs katastasin, proteron men katheirxan, hōs an mē eis proupton elthoi to gegonos; kai kateichon hōsei pedais tisi kai halysesi phylassontes, hoper ho desmos tou sidērou mēnyei; ou gar anthrōpinē ischys ērkei pros toiautēn anthrōpou katastasin; epi poly men oun aphanē phrourein dieginōskon; hōs de panta ēn deutera tēs manias, anthrōpōn te ischys kai sidēriou dynamis, kai poikilōn ergatōn epinoia, tote ouk aphiesan monon, alla kai hōs porrō synebainen hē meta tōn thēriōn diagōgē.
"And your dwelling will be with the wild beasts." For they say that he was turned to madness, and others that he was troubled by a demon; when those at the palace, ashamed of the king's condition, first shut him up, so that what had happened might not become known; and they held him guarded as with fetters and chains, which the band of iron indicates; for no human strength sufficed against such a condition of a man. For a long time, then, they decided to guard him out of sight; but when everything gave way before the madness, the strength of men, the power of iron, and the devices of various craftsmen, then they did not merely let him go, but his life with the beasts took place far away.
4.20Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Καὶ χόρτον ὡς βοῦν ψωμιοῦσί σε. Σαρκοφαγεῖν μὲν γὰρ οὐκ ἐδύνατο· οὐ γὰρ καὶ τὴν τῶν θηρίων ἔσχε φύσιν, καὶ τὴν κατάστασιν, τῷ μεγέθει τῶν τριχῶν, καὶ τῇ αὐξήσει τῶν ὀνύχων, καὶ τῇ λοιπῇ ἀγριότητι· ἐχλοηφάγει δὲ τὴν αὐτόματον ἐκ γῆς ἀναδιδομένην τροφὴν σιτούμενος.
Kai chorton hōs boun psōmiousi se. Sarkophagein men gar ouk edynato; ou gar kai tēn tōn thēriōn esche physin, kai tēn katastasin, tǭ megethei tōn trichōn, kai tę̄ auxēsei tōn onychōn, kai tę̄ loipę̄ agriotēti; echloēphagei de tēn automaton ek gēs anadidomenēn trophēn sitoumenos.
"And they will feed you grass like an ox." For he could not eat flesh, since he did not have the nature of the beasts, though he had their condition in the length of his hair, the growth of his nails, and the rest of his wildness; but he grazed, eating the food that the earth yields of itself.
4.21Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Καὶ ἑπτὰ καιροὶ ἀλλαγήσονται. Τουτέστιν ἀμείψεις τὸ χρῶμα· εἰ γὰρ ἡ τῶν ἡλικιῶν ἐναλλαγὴ μόνη πλείστην τῶν χαρακτήρων τὴν διαφορὰν ἐργάζεται, πολλῷ μᾶλλον τῆς τε τροφῆς τὸ ἀσύνηθες καὶ ὁ κατεσκληκὼς βίος τοῦτο ἔδειξεν ἄν.
Kai hepta kairoi allagēsontai. Toutestin ameipseis to chrōma; ei gar hē tōn hēlikiōn enallagē monē pleistēn tōn charaktērōn tēn diaphoran ergazetai, pollǭ mallon tēs te trophēs to asynēthes kai ho katesklēkōs bios touto edeixen an.
"And seven times will be changed." That is, you will change your complexion; for if the change of age alone works a very great difference of features, much more would the unaccustomed food and the hardened life have shown this.
4.23Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Ἕως οὗ γνῷς. Οὐ παντελῆ δέ σου ἀπώλειαν κατεψηφίσατο ὁ θεός· οὐ γὰρ ὀργῇ τὸ πάθος ἐπάγει, ἀλλὰ κηδεμονίᾳ προμηθούμενος τὴν ἐπὶ τὸ κρεῖττον μεταβολήν, καὶ πάντων τῶν λυπηρῶν ἀπαλλάττει, ὅταν εἰσαῦθις εἰς τὸ οἰκεῖον ἀποκαταστήσει ἀξίωμα. — Ἵνα γνῷς ὡς οὐδὲν τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων βέβαιον· ἅπαντα δὲ τῆς ἄνωθεν ἐξουσίας ἤρτηται.
Heōs hou gnǭs. Ou pantelē de sou apōleian katepsēphisato ho theos; ou gar orgę̄ to pathos epagei, alla kēdemonią promēthoumenos tēn epi to kreitton metabolēn, kai pantōn tōn lypērōn apallattei, hotan eisauthis eis to oikeion apokatastēsei axiōma. — Hina gnǭs hōs ouden tōn anthrōpinōn bebaion; hapanta de tēs anōthen exousias ērtētai.
"Until you know." God did not decree your complete destruction; for he does not bring the suffering in anger, but in care, providing for a change for the better, and he will free you from all your troubles when he restores you again to your own dignity. — So that you may know that nothing human is secure, but all things depend on authority from above.
4.24Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Ἡ βουλή μου ἀρεσάτω σοι. Ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν φησὶ φειδοῖ ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἀγριότητι τὴν δίκην ἠπείλησεν ὁ θεός, δέξαι τὴν ἐμὴν συμβουλήν.
Hē boulē mou aresatō soi. Epeidē toinyn phēsi pheidoi all᾽ ouk agriotēti tēn dikēn ēpeilēsen ho theos, dexai tēn emēn symboulēn.
"Let my counsel please you." Since, then, he says, God has threatened the penalty with sparing and not with savagery, accept my counsel.
4.25Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Ἐν ἐλεημοσύναις λύτρωσαι. Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ οὐδένα οἶκτον πρὸς τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους λαμβάνων, ἀφειδῶς ἅπασιν ἐκέχρητο, ὡς καὶ τοὺς ἐν εὐγενείᾳ καὶ πάσῃ τραφέντας ἀφθονίᾳ εἰς οἰκτρὸν καταστρέψαι τέλος, ἀναγκαίως ἡμερότητα αὐτῷ παραινεῖ, ὡς μὲν τῆσδε ὠμότητος εἰς ὀργὴν κινούσης τὸ θεῖον.
En eleēmosynais lytrōsai. Epeidē gar oudena oikton pros tous aichmalōtous lambanōn, apheidōs hapasin ekechrēto, hōs kai tous en eugeneią kai pasę̄ traphentas aphthonią eis oiktron katastrepsai telos, anankaiōs hēmerotēta autǭ parainei, hōs men tēsde ōmotētos eis orgēn kinousēs to theion.
"Redeem by almsgiving." Since he took no pity on the captives but treated all unsparingly, so as to bring to a pitiable end even those raised in nobility and every abundance, he necessarily urges gentleness on him, since this cruelty moved the divine to anger.
4.26Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Ἴσως ἔσται μακρόθυμος. Θαυμάσαι ἐστὶ τὸν προφήτην, ὅπως οὔτε ἀνέλπιστον αὐτῷ τῶν ἀγαθῶν τὴν προσδοκίαν ἐποίησεν, ὡς ἂν μὴ ἀπογνοὺς ὅλως τῆς χείρονος γένοιτο μοίρας· οὔτε ἀναντίρρητον εἰργάσατο. — Ἀλλ᾽ ἡ μὲν τοῦ προφήτου φησὶ συμβουλὴ τοιαύτη, ἀρκοῦσα τὴν ἐπηρτημένην ἀποκρούσασθαι δίκην, οὐδὲν δὲ ἄμεινον διετέθη, κρείττων τῆς τοῦ προφήτου συμβουλῆς γενόμενος· διόπερ καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀποφάσεως εἰς πέρας ἤχθη.
Isōs estai makrothymos. Thaumasai esti ton prophētēn, hopōs oute anelpiston autǭ tōn agathōn tēn prosdokian epoiēsen, hōs an mē apognous holōs tēs cheironos genoito moiras; oute anantirrēton eirgasato. — All᾽ hē men tou prophētou phēsi symboulē toiautē, arkousa tēn epērtēmenēn apokrousasthai dikēn, ouden de ameinon dietethē, kreittōn tēs tou prophētou symboulēs genomenos; dioper kai ta tēs apophaseōs eis peras ēchthē.
"Perhaps he will be patient." One must admire the prophet, how he neither made his expectation of good things hopeless, lest in despair he should fall altogether to a worse lot, nor made it certain. — But though the prophet's counsel, he says, was such as to be able to ward off the penalty hanging over him, he was in no way better disposed, being above the prophet's counsel; therefore the terms of the sentence too were carried out to the end.
4.27Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Ταῦτα πάντα ἔφθασεν. Τὴν μὲν οὖν συμφοράν φησιν ἠπείλησεν ὁ θεός· οὐ μὴν παρὰ πόδας ἤγαγε τῶν δεινῶν τὴν πεῖραν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐνιαυτὸν συνεχώρησεν ὅλον, μετανοίας διδοὺς καιρόν· ὁ δὲ ἐπειδὴ οὐδὲν τῶν ἀπειληθέντων ἐπὶ τῶν ἔργων ἑώρα, τὸν παραυτίκα φόβον τῆς διανοίας ἐκβαλὼν τῆς αὑτοῦ, διανοούμενος ἁπάντων τῶν κατορθωμάτων τὸ μέγεθος· ὅπερ ὁ προφήτης σημαίνειν βουλόμενος, οὐ τοῦ χρόνου μόνον ἐμνημόνευσεν, ἀλλὰ τῆς πράξεως καὶ τῶν ῥημάτων, πρὸς σαφεστέραν διδασκαλίαν τῆς τοῦ βασιλέως διανοίας.
Tauta panta ephthasen. Tēn men oun symphoran phēsin ēpeilēsen ho theos; ou mēn para podas ēgage tōn deinōn tēn peiran, all᾽ eniauton synechōrēsen holon, metanoias didous kairon; ho de epeidē ouden tōn apeilēthentōn epi tōn ergōn heōra, ton parautika phobon tēs dianoias ekbalōn tēs hautou, dianooumenos hapantōn tōn katorthōmatōn to megethos; hoper ho prophētēs sēmainein boulomenos, ou tou chronou monon emnēmoneusen, alla tēs praxeōs kai tōn rhēmatōn, pros saphesteran didaskalian tēs tou basileōs dianoias.
"All these things came." God threatened the misfortune, he says, but did not bring the experience of the evils at once; he allowed a whole year, giving time for repentance. But the king, since he saw none of the threats in action, cast the immediate fear out of his mind, thinking over the greatness of all his achievements. Wishing to indicate this, the prophet mentioned not only the time but also the action and the words, to teach more clearly the king's state of mind.
4.28Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Ἐπὶ τῷ ναῷ τῆς βασιλείας. Ναὸς δὲ βασιλείας αὐτὰ καλεῖται τὰ βασίλεια· πάντα δέ φησι ἐπεσκόπει τά τε δημόσια οἰκοδομήματα καὶ ὅσα πρὸς βασιλικὴν ἠσκεῖτο φαντασίαν.
Epi tǭ naǭ tēs basileias. Naos de basileias auta kaleitai ta basileia; panta de phēsi epeskopei ta te dēmosia oikodomēmata kai hosa pros basilikēn ēskeito phantasian.
"On the temple of the kingdom." The palace itself is called the "temple of the kingdom"; he surveyed, he says, all the public buildings and whatever was made for royal display.
4.29Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6
Οὐχ αὕτη ἐστὶ Βαβυλών; Τουτέστι ποῦ εἰσὶν ἐκεῖναι αἱ ἀποφάσεις αἱ κατ᾽ ἐμοῦ; ποῦ τοῦ θεοῦ ἡ τιμωρία; ἰδοὺ γὰρ πέπονθα δεινὸν οὐδέν, ἀλλὰ τήν τε Βαβυλῶνα ταύτην, τοὺς προτέρους τῆς ἀρχῆς ἐξελάσας, ἤγειρα εἰς ὕψος, οὐδὲν ὑπ᾽ οὐδενὸς πεπονθώς· καὶ τά τε τῆς δυναστείας ἐβεβαιώθη, καὶ τὰ τῆς δόξης ἐπὶ τὸ μεγαλοφυέστερον κεχώρηκεν, οὐδενὸς χρόνου δυνηθέντος ἐλέγξαι τὴν ἰσχύν.
Ouch hautē esti Babylōn? Toutesti pou eisin ekeinai hai apophaseis hai kat᾽ emou? pou tou theou hē timōria? idou gar pepontha deinon ouden, alla tēn te Babylōna tautēn, tous proterous tēs archēs exelasas, ēgeira eis hypsos, ouden hyp᾽ oudenos peponthōs; kai ta te tēs dynasteias ebebaiōthē, kai ta tēs doxēs epi to megalophyesteron kechōrēken, oudenos chronou dynēthentos elenxai tēn ischyn.
"Is not this Babylon?" That is: where are those sentences against me? Where is God's punishment? See, I have suffered nothing terrible; but I have raised this Babylon on high, having driven out those who ruled before, and have suffered nothing from anyone; the power of my dynasty has been confirmed, and my glory has advanced to greater magnificence, no length of time having been able to refute my strength.
4.30Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):6-7
Ἔτι τοῦ λόγου κ. τ. λ. Ἐπὶ τῇ μεγαληγορίᾳ εὐθὺς ἡ ταπείνωσις· οὐ τοῦ παραχρῆμα ῥήματος ἕνεκα τοσοῦτον, ὅσον τῆς ὅλης ὑπερηφανίας· ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα δειχθῇ σημεῖον τοῦ ῥήματος, τὸ κολαζόμενον φρόνημα.
Eti tou logou k. t. l. Epi tę̄ megalēgorią euthys hē tapeinōsis; ou tou parachrēma rhēmatos heneka tosouton, hoson tēs holēs hyperēphanias; all᾽ hina deichthę̄ sēmeion tou rhēmatos, to kolazomenon phronēma.
"While the word was still," and so on. Humiliation came at once upon the boasting; not so much because of the word spoken at the moment as because of his whole arrogance; but so that the pride being punished might be shown as a sign of the word.
4.31Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Ὁ λόγος συνετελέσθη. Συνέβη γὰρ αὐτῷ πάντα τὰ εἰρημένα. Ὡς γὰρ ἀμεταμέλητα τὰ ὄντα, εἰσεπράξατο δίκην· εὔδηλον δὲ ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ θηριωδέστερον ἔσχε τοῦ σώματος τὴν κατάστασιν· τοῦ μὲν λοιποῦ σώματος εἰς ἑτέραν ὄψιν καταστάντος, τῶν δὲ τριχῶν ἐπὶ τὸ ἀγριώτερον μεταβληθεισῶν, καὶ τῶν ὀνύχων πέρα τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης φύσεως εἰς ἐπίδοσιν ἐλθόντων.
Ho logos synetelesthē. Synebē gar autǭ panta ta eirēmena. Hōs gar ametamelēta ta onta, eisepraxato dikēn; eudēlon de hōs epi to thēriōdesteron esche tou sōmatos tēn katastasin; tou men loipou sōmatos eis heteran opsin katastantos, tōn de trichōn epi to agriōteron metablētheisōn, kai tōn onychōn pera tēs anthrōpinēs physeōs eis epidosin elthontōn.
"The word was fulfilled." For everything that was said happened to him. Since he remained unrepentant, the penalty was exacted; and it is clear that his body took on a more beastlike condition, the rest of his body changing to another appearance, his hair turning wilder, and his nails growing beyond human nature.
4.32Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς μου εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνέλαβον. Τῆς μανίας φησὶν ἀπαλλαγείς, καὶ τῶν λογισμῶν μοι ἠρεμησάντων, τοῦ σώματος τὸ θηριῶδες ὁρῶν, καὶ τοῖς παροῦσι παρεξετάσας τὴν παλαιὰν εὐημερίαν, τήν τε προτέραν τῆς διανοίας νόσον, τήν τε ἄνωθεν κομισθεῖσαν ἀπόφασιν, καὶ τῶν εἰρημένων τὸ πέρας, γνοὺς τὸ ὡς οὐδὲν τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων βέβαιον, εἰς ὕμνους ἐτράπην τοῦ δεσπότου.
Tous ophthalmous mou eis ton ouranon anelabon. Tēs manias phēsin apallageis, kai tōn logismōn moi ēremēsantōn, tou sōmatos to thēriōdes horōn, kai tois parousi parexetasas tēn palaian euēmerian, tēn te proteran tēs dianoias noson, tēn te anōthen komistheisan apophasin, kai tōn eirēmenōn to peras, gnous to hōs ouden tōn anthrōpinōn bebaion, eis hymnous etrapēn tou despotou.
"I lifted my eyes to heaven." Freed from the madness, he says, with my thoughts calmed, seeing the beastlike state of my body, and comparing my former prosperity with my present state, the earlier sickness of my mind, the sentence brought from above, and the fulfilment of what had been said, and knowing that nothing human is secure, I turned to hymns to the Master.
4.33Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Ὅτι ἐξουσία αὐτοῦ ἐξουσία αἰώνιος. Καὶ τοῦτό φησιν ἐποίησα οὐχ ἁπλῶς ἀλλ᾽ ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν πραγμάτων μαθὼν ὡς ἀΐδιον ἔχει τὴν φύσιν, οὐ δεχόμενος τῆς ἀρχῆς τὴν μεταβολὴν καθάπερ ἄνθρωποι.
Hoti exousia autou exousia aiōnios. Kai touto phēsin epoiēsa ouch haplōs all᾽ ex autōn tōn pragmatōn mathōn hōs aïdion echei tēn physin, ou dechomenos tēs archēs tēn metabolēn kathaper anthrōpoi.
"For his authority is an eternal authority." And this, he says, I did not do lightly, but learning from the events themselves that he has an eternal nature, not admitting change of rule as men do.
4.34Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Ἐπὶ τὴν βασιλείαν μου ἐκραταιώθην. Τουτέστιν οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ χρόνου καὶ τῶν μεταξὺ γεγονότων ἐβλάβην. — Εἰ δὲ δεῖ, φησί, καὶ τὸ ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν, μείζονα τὴν ἐξουσίαν ἔσχον.
Epi tēn basileian mou ekrataiōthēn. Toutestin oude apo tou chronou kai tōn metaxy gegonotōn eblabēn. — Ei de dei, phēsi, kai to alēthes eipein, meizona tēn exousian eschon.
"I was established in my kingdom." That is, I was not harmed by the time or by what happened in between. — If one must tell the truth, he says, I had greater authority.
Chapter 5
5.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Βαλτάσαρ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐποίησε δεῖπνον. Οὐχ εἰρηκὼς τελευτὴν τοῦ Ναβουχοδονόσορ, ἐπὶ τὸν Βαλτάσαρ μετέρχεται· ἐπεὶ μηδὲ κατὰ τάξιν τῶν βασιλευόντων λέγειν αὐτῷ τὴν διαδοχὴν πρόκειται· τοῦτο γάρ, ὡς προλαβὼν ἔφην, ἱστοριογράφου ἴδιον· ἀλλὰ τὰ θαύματα διδάσκειν καὶ τὴν καθόλου πρόνοιαν δεικνύναι τοῦ θεοῦ· ὅσα τοίνυν εἰς τὸ προκείμενον αὐτῷ συμβάλλεται, ταῦτα καὶ διηγεῖται· φαίνεται γὰρ μετὰ τὸν Ναβουχοδονόσορ, ὁ Εὐιλὰδ Μαρωδὰχ βασιλεύσας κατὰ τὴν Ἱερεμίου φωνήν, ὃς καὶ τὸν Ἰεχονίαν τῶν δεσμῶν ἀφῆκεν, ἐν τοιούτῳ σχήματι καταλειφθέντα ὑπὸ τοῦ Ναβουχοδονόσορ· λέγει γὰρ οὕτως ὁ προφήτης· ἐν τῷ ἔτει τῷ κγ' τοῦ Ναβουχοδονόσορ ἀπῴκισε Ναβουζαρδὰν ὁ ἀρχιμάγειρος τῶν ἰουδαίων ψυχὰς ψμε'· καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ τριακοστῷ καὶ ἑβδόμῳ ἔτει, καὶ ἀποικισθέντος Ἰωακεὶμ βασιλέως Ἰούδα, ἔλαβεν ἐκεῖνον Εὐιλὰδ Μαρωδὰχ βασιλεὺς βαβυλῶνος ἐν τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ ᾧ ἐβασίλευσε τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωακεὶμ βασιλέως Ἰούδα· εἰ μὲν οὖν ἱστορίαν προέκειτο γράψαι τῷ προφήτῃ, ἀναγκαίως αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ γραφῇ ἐτίθει μετὰ τὸν Ναβουχοδονόσορ· ἑτέρας δὲ οὔσης τῆς προθέσεως παρελθεῖν ἐνόμισε καὶ ταῦτα, οὐδενὸς ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῦ θαυματουργηθέντος· διὰ τοῦτο οὐδὲ αὐτοῦ τοῦ Βαλτάσαρ ἀρχὴν τῆς βασιλείας εἰρηκώς, ἐπὶ τὰ πράγματα μετῆλθεν εὐθύς.
Baltasar ho basileus epoiēse deipnon. Ouch eirēkōs teleutēn tou Nabouchodonosor, epi ton Baltasar meterchetai; epei mēde kata taxin tōn basileuontōn legein autǭ tēn diadochēn prokeitai; touto gar, hōs prolabōn ephēn, historiographou idion; alla ta thaumata didaskein kai tēn katholou pronoian deiknynai tou theou; hosa toinyn eis to prokeimenon autǭ symballetai, tauta kai diēgeitai; phainetai gar meta ton Nabouchodonosor, ho Euilad Marōdach basileusas kata tēn Hieremiou phōnēn, hos kai ton Iechonian tōn desmōn aphēken, en toioutǭ schēmati kataleiphthenta hypo tou Nabouchodonosor; legei gar houtōs ho prophētēs; en tǭ etei tǭ kg' tou Nabouchodonosor apǭkise Nabouzardan ho archimageiros tōn ioudaiōn psychas psme'; kai egeneto en tǭ triakostǭ kai hebdomǭ etei, kai apoikisthentos Iōakeim basileōs Iouda, elaben ekeinon Euilad Marōdach basileus babylōnos en tǭ eniautǭ hǭ ebasileuse tēn kephalēn Iōakeim basileōs Iouda; ei men oun historian proekeito grapsai tǭ prophētę̄, anankaiōs auton en tę̄ graphę̄ etithei meta ton Nabouchodonosor; heteras de ousēs tēs protheseōs parelthein enomise kai tauta, oudenos ep᾽ autou thaumatourgēthentos; dia touto oude autou tou Baltasar archēn tēs basileias eirēkōs, epi ta pragmata metēlthen euthys.
"Belshazzar the king made a feast." Without mentioning the death of Nebuchadnezzar, he passes to Belshazzar, since it is not his purpose to tell the succession of the kings in order; for that, as I said before, is the task of a historian; but to teach the wonders and show God's universal providence. So whatever contributes to his purpose, that he narrates. For after Nebuchadnezzar, Evil-merodach appears to have reigned, according to the words of Jeremiah, who also freed Jechoniah from his bonds, left in that condition by Nebuchadnezzar. For the prophet says thus: "In the twenty-third year of Nebuchadnezzar, Nebuzaradan the chief cook deported seven hundred and forty-five souls of the Jews; and it came to pass in the thirty-seventh year after Jehoiakim king of Judah was deported, Evil-merodach king of Babylon, in the year he became king, lifted up the head of Jehoiakim king of Judah." If, then, the prophet had intended to write history, he would necessarily have put him in the writing after Nebuchadnezzar; but since his purpose was different, he thought fit to pass over these things too, since no wonder was worked in his time. For this reason he did not even mention the beginning of Belshazzar's reign, but passed at once to the events.
5.3Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Κατέναντι τῶν χιλίων ὁ οἶνος. Τουτέστι πολλὴ τῶν ἁπάντων ἡ ἀφθονία, μάλιστα δὲ οἴνου· ὥστε τῇ περὶ τὸ πίνειν φιλοτιμίᾳ, ἄχρις ἑσπέρας βαθείας παραταθῆναι τὸ συμπόσιον.
Katenanti tōn chiliōn ho oinos. Toutesti pollē tōn hapantōn hē aphthonia, malista de oinou; hōste tę̄ peri to pinein philotimią, achris hesperas batheias paratathēnai to symposion.
"Before the thousand, the wine." That is, there was great abundance of everything, and above all of wine, so that by their emulation in drinking the banquet was prolonged until late evening.
5.5Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Καὶ ἠνέχθησαν τὰ σκεύη. Τουτέστιν οὐ μέχρι προστάγματος ἔστησε τὴν τόλμαν, ἀλλὰ καὶ εἰς ἔργον ἐξήνεγκε τὸ βούλευμα.
Kai ēnechthēsan ta skeuē. Toutestin ou mechri prostagmatos estēse tēn tolman, alla kai eis ergon exēnenke to bouleuma.
"And the vessels were brought." That is, he did not stop his daring at the command, but carried out his plan in deed.
5.6Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Καὶ ἔπινον ἐν αὐτοῖς. Ἵνα εἴπῃ οὐ πρὸς ἐπίδειξιν μόνον ἐκόμισε τὰ σκεύη, ἀλλὰ καὶ πρὸς ὕβριν.
Kai epinon en autois. Hina eipę̄ ou pros epideixin monon ekomise ta skeuē, alla kai pros hybrin.
"And they drank from them." To say that he brought the vessels not only for display but also for insult.
5.7Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Καὶ ᾔνεσαν τοὺς θεούς. Ἔδειξε τῆς τόλμης τὴν αἰτίαν· ὡς γὰρ τὴν τῶν ξοάνων πάντων βοήθειαν περιγενομένων καὶ αὐτοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ, ἐκείνοις μὲν ἔγνωκε τὴν χάριν, εἰς δὲ τὸν τῶν ὅλων ἐξύβρισε δεσπότην.
Kai ę̄nesan tous theous. Edeixe tēs tolmēs tēn aitian; hōs gar tēn tōn xoanōn pantōn boētheian perigenomenōn kai autou tou theou, ekeinois men egnōke tēn charin, eis de ton tōn holōn exybrise despotēn.
"And they praised the gods." He showed the cause of the daring: as if by the help of all the idols they had overcome God himself, he acknowledged his gratitude to them, but insulted the Master of all.
5.8Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ. Ἀντὶ τοῦ ἔτι διαλεγομένων ἐκείνων καὶ θαυμαζόντων τῶν δαιμόνων τὴν δύναμιν, παρὰ πόδας ὁ ἔλεγχος γινόμενος, μείζονα τῆς παρανομίας παρέχει τὴν αἴσθησιν.
En autę̄ tę̄ hōrą. Anti tou eti dialegomenōn ekeinōn kai thaumazontōn tōn daimonōn tēn dynamin, para podas ho elenchos ginomenos, meizona tēs paranomias parechei tēn aisthēsin.
"In that very hour." That is, while they were still talking and admiring the power of the demons, the rebuke came at their feet and gave a greater sense of the lawlessness.
5.9Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Ἐξῆλθον δάκτυλοι. Ὥσπερ βασιλέως τόμῳ τὴν κατὰ τοῦ τυράννου ἐκφέροντες ψῆφον.
Exēlthon daktyloi. Hōsper basileōs tomǭ tēn kata tou tyrannou ekpherontes psēphon.
"Fingers came out." As if bringing the sentence against the tyrant by a king's decree.
5.10Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐθεώρει. Ἔοικε γὰρ μόνος ὁρᾶν τὸ παράδοξον· ὡς ἡ ὄνος ἡ ἐπὶ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τὸν ἄγγελον· ἡ μὲν γὰρ κοινὴ ὄψις εὐπαραμύθητον ἐποίει τὸν φόβον, ἄλλου ἄλλως ἐξηγουμένου τὸ ξένον τῆς ὄψεως· τὸ δὲ αὐτὸν μόνον ὁρᾶν, μάρτυρά τε εὐθὺς τῶν λόγων ἔχειν μηδένα, μεῖζόν τι τὸ δέος εἰργάζετο, καὶ τοῖς λοιποῖς μαινομένου δόξαν παρεῖχεν· ὕστερον δὲ καὶ πάντες ἔγνωσαν, εἰς ἀπορίαν τὸ κοινὸν καὶ παιδαγωγίαν Βαβυλωνίων· τοῦτο γὰρ οἶμαι καὶ σημᾶναι βουλόμενος ὁ συγγραφεύς, οὐκ εἶπεν ὅτι βασιλεὺς εἶδεν, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι ἑώρα, τὸ παρατεταμένον σημαίνων τοῦ χρόνου· καὶ ὡς τὴν μὲν πρώτην ἐξεπλάγη ὁ βασιλεύς· τὸ αὐτὸ δὲ πάντες ὕστερον πεπόνθασιν· ὥστε μὴ φαντασίαν τινὰ νομισθῆναι, καὶ ἀπάτην παρά τινος τελουμένην. — Ἡ γὰρ ἐπίτασις τοῦ δέους ἠλλοίωσε τὴν χροιάν. — Τουτέστιν οὐκ εἶχε τί βουλεύσεται περὶ τῶν φαινομένων.
Kai ho basileus etheōrei. Eoike gar monos horan to paradoxon; hōs hē onos hē epi tou Balaam ton angelon; hē men gar koinē opsis euparamythēton epoiei ton phobon, allou allōs exēgoumenou to xenon tēs opseōs; to de auton monon horan, martyra te euthys tōn logōn echein mēdena, meizon ti to deos eirgazeto, kai tois loipois mainomenou doxan pareichen; hysteron de kai pantes egnōsan, eis aporian to koinon kai paidagōgian Babylōniōn; touto gar oimai kai sēmanai boulomenos ho syngrapheus, ouk eipen hoti basileus eiden, all᾽ hoti heōra, to paratetamenon sēmainōn tou chronou; kai hōs tēn men prōtēn exeplagē ho basileus; to auto de pantes hysteron peponthasin; hōste mē phantasian tina nomisthēnai, kai apatēn para tinos teloumenēn. — Hē gar epitasis tou deous ēlloiōse tēn chroian. — Toutestin ouk eiche ti bouleusetai peri tōn phainomenōn.
"And the king was watching." For he seems to have been the only one to see the wonder, as Balaam's donkey saw the angel. A shared sight would have made the fear easy to console, as one explained the strangeness of the vision one way and another another; but that he alone saw it and had no one at once as witness of his words made his dread greater and gave the others the impression that he was mad. Afterwards all knew it, to the perplexity of the whole company and the instruction of the Babylonians. For I think the writer, wishing to indicate this, did not say that the king "saw" but that he "was watching," signifying the extension of the time; and that at first the king was astonished, but afterwards all experienced the same, so that it should not be thought some illusion or deceit worked by someone. — For the intensity of fear changed his color. — That is, he did not know what to decide about what appeared.
5.11Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Καὶ γόνατα αὐτοῦ συνεκροτοῦντο. Δείκνυσιν ὡς οὐ καθήμενος ἢ κατακεκλιμένος ἄνετος διῆγεν, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ τοῦ δέους καθάπερ ὑπὸ φρίκης τινὸς συνεχόμενος ὅλος ἐσείετο.
Kai gonata autou synekrotounto. Deiknysin hōs ou kathēmenos ē katakeklimenos anetos diēgen, all᾽ hypo tou deous kathaper hypo phrikēs tinos synechomenos holos eseieto.
"And his knees knocked together." He shows that, though seated or reclining, he did not remain at ease, but, gripped by fear as by a shivering fit, shook all over.
5.12Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Καὶ ἐβόησεν ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐν ἰσχύϊ. Καλῶς τὸ ἐν ἰσχύϊ· ἔδειξε γὰρ τῆς ψυχῆς τὸν θόρυβον.
Kai eboēsen ho basileus en ischyï. Kalōs to en ischyï; edeixe gar tēs psychēs ton thorybon.
"And the king cried out with strength." "With strength" is well said; for it showed the turmoil of his soul.
5.13Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Καὶ ἡ βασίλισσα. Παρὰ πᾶσαν συνήθειαν φαίνεται ἡ βασίλισσα εἰσπηδήσασα κατὰ μέσον τοῦ συμποσίου· ὡς γὰρ κοινωνοῦσα τῆς συμφορᾶς, τῆς συνήθους εὐκοσμίας ἀμελήσασα, ὑπ᾽ ὄψιν τῶν πάντων εἰσῄει, κατὰ νοῦν λαβομένη τὰ κατὰ τὸν προφήτην.
Kai hē basilissa. Para pasan synētheian phainetai hē basilissa eispēdēsasa kata meson tou symposiou; hōs gar koinōnousa tēs symphoras, tēs synēthous eukosmias amelēsasa, hyp᾽ opsin tōn pantōn eisę̄ei, kata noun labomenē ta kata ton prophētēn.
"And the queen." Contrary to all custom the queen appears to have rushed into the middle of the banquet; for, sharing in the misfortune, she neglected her usual decorum and came in before the eyes of all, having in mind what concerned the prophet.
5.14Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Μὴ ταρασσέτωσάν σε οἱ διαλογισμοί σου. Μὴ καταπέσῃς φησὶν ὑπὸ τοῦ δέους, μηδὲ εἰς ἀπορίαν καθίστασο, εἰ τούτους ἀγνοοῦντας εὕρῃς τὴν γραφήν.
Mē tarassetōsan se hoi dialogismoi sou. Mē katapesę̄s phēsin hypo tou deous, mēde eis aporian kathistaso, ei toutous agnoountas heurę̄s tēn graphēn.
"Let not your thoughts trouble you." Do not collapse from fear, she says, nor fall into perplexity if you find these men ignorant of the writing.
5.15Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):7
Ἔστιν ἀνήρ. Οὐκ οὖν ἀνέλπιστός φησιν ἡ τῶν ἀπορουμένων λύσις· ἕτερος γὰρ ἤδη πέφηνεν ἀμείνων τούτων, ὃς οὐ κατὰ συνήθειαν εἴωθε λέγειν τὰ τοιαῦτα, ἀλλὰ κατὰ χάριν.
Estin anēr. Ouk oun anelpistos phēsin hē tōn aporoumenōn lysis; heteros gar ēdē pephēnen ameinōn toutōn, hos ou kata synētheian eiōthe legein ta toiauta, alla kata charin.
"There is a man." So the solution of the perplexity, she says, is not hopeless; for another, better than these, has already appeared, who is not wont to say such things by custom but by grace.
5.16Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Πορφύραν ἐνδύσῃ. Πορφύραν ἐνδύειν ἐπαγγέλλεται, τουτέστι κοινωνεῖν τῆς βασιλείας· περιαυχένιον δὲ περιτίθεται χρυσοῦν σύμβολον τῆς ἀρχῆς· τρίτον δὲ ἔσεσθαι τῆς βασιλείας ὑπισχνεῖται, τουτέστι μετ᾽ αὐτὸν καὶ τὴν βασιλίδα.
Porphyran endysę̄. Porphyran endyein epangelletai, toutesti koinōnein tēs basileias; periauchenion de peritithetai chrysoun symbolon tēs archēs; triton de esesthai tēs basileias hypischneitai, toutesti met᾽ auton kai tēn basilida.
"You will be clothed in purple." He promises to clothe him in purple, that is, to share the kingdom; he puts on him a gold necklace as a symbol of rule; and he promises that he will be third in the kingdom, that is, after himself and the queen.
5.17Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Τὰ δόματά σου σοὶ ἔστω. Ἄμισθον ποιήσομαι τῶν ζητουμένων τὴν λύσιν, ἅπαντα μετ᾽ ἀκριβείας λέγων.
Ta domata sou soi estō. Amisthon poiēsomai tōn zētoumenōn tēn lysin, hapanta met᾽ akribeias legōn.
"Let your gifts be yours." I will give the solution of what is sought without payment, telling everything exactly.
5.18Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Ὁ θεὸς ὕψιστος τὴν βασιλείαν ἔδωκε Ναβουχοδονόσορ. Βασιλείαν μὲν καλέσας, αὐτὴν τὴν ἀρχήν, μεγαλοσύνην δὲ τὸ περίβλεπτον τῆς ἐξουσίας, τιμὴν δὲ τὴν παρὰ πάντων προσκύνησιν, δόξαν δὲ τοῦ πλούτου τὴν περιουσίαν, καὶ τὴν παρὰ πάντων εὐφημίαν· τῷ θεῷ δὲ ταύτην ἀνέθηκεν, δεικνὺς ὡς οὐδὲ προγονικοῖς, ἀλλ᾽ οἰκείοις καὶ τοῖς παρὰ θεοῦ δοθεῖσι κατορθώμασιν ἐκεῖνος ἐσεμνύνετο.
Ho theos hypsistos tēn basileian edōke Nabouchodonosor. Basileian men kalesas, autēn tēn archēn, megalosynēn de to periblepton tēs exousias, timēn de tēn para pantōn proskynēsin, doxan de tou ploutou tēn periousian, kai tēn para pantōn euphēmian; tǭ theǭ de tautēn anethēken, deiknys hōs oude progonikois, all᾽ oikeiois kai tois para theou dotheisi katorthōmasin ekeinos esemnyneto.
"God Most High gave the kingdom to Nebuchadnezzar." Calling the rule itself "kingdom," the conspicuousness of authority "greatness," the worship from all "honor," and the abundance of wealth and the acclaim of all "glory," he ascribed this to God, showing that Nebuchadnezzar took pride not in ancestral achievements but in his own, which were given by God.
5.19Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Πάντες οἱ λαοί, φυλαί. Οὐ τῆς οἰκείας πατρίδος φησὶ μόνον κατεῖχεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ κατὰ τῶν ἄλλων ἐθνῶν ἐξέτεινε τὴν ἀρχήν· καὶ εἶκον ἅπαντες τοῖς αὐτοῦ μετὰ δέους προστάγμασιν, οὐδὲ τυραννικὸν οὐδενὸς βουλευσαμένου πώποτε. — Πάντα φησὶ μετὰ ἐξουσίας ἔπραττεν.
Pantes hoi laoi, phylai. Ou tēs oikeias patridos phēsi monon kateichen, alla kai kata tōn allōn ethnōn exeteine tēn archēn; kai eikon hapantes tois autou meta deous prostagmasin, oude tyrannikon oudenos bouleusamenou pōpote. — Panta phēsi meta exousias epratten.
"All the peoples, tribes." He held not only his own homeland, he says, but extended his rule over the other nations too; and all yielded to his commands with fear, no one ever plotting rebellion. — He did everything, he says, with authority.
5.20Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Καὶ ὅτε ὑψώθη ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ. Ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως φησὶν ὁ εἰς ἀκρότατον τῆς δυναστείας ἐλθών, ἐπειδὴ κατὰ τοῦ θεοῦ τῶν ὅλων ἠλαζονεύσατο, ἀποφάσει θείᾳ μετεσκευάσθη τῆς βασιλείας.
Kai hote hypsōthē hē kardia autou. All᾽ homōs phēsin ho eis akrotaton tēs dynasteias elthōn, epeidē kata tou theou tōn holōn ēlazoneusato, apophasei theią meteskeuasthē tēs basileias.
"And when his heart was lifted up." Yet, he says, the one who reached the summit of power, since he boasted against the God of all, was removed from the kingdom by divine sentence.
5.21Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Σὺ ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ Βαλτάσαρ. Ὁ μὲν γὰρ εἰ καὶ τοῖς λοιποῖς μεγαλοφρονῶν ὤφθη, τὴν γοῦν περὶ τὰ σκεύη εὐλάβειαν ἀπεδείξατο· σὺ δὲ τῆς ἀλαζονείας οὐ κατέλιπες ἐκείνῳ ὑπερβολήν· καὶ κατὰ τούτων ἐκ τῆς εἰς θεὸν παροινίας τολμηρῶς ἐξέτεινας τὰς χεῖρας, καὶ τῆς ψυχῆς ἐλέγξας τὸ φύσημα ἐπὶ τὰ γεγονότα χωρεῖ.
Sy ho huios autou Baltasar. Ho men gar ei kai tois loipois megalophronōn ōphthē, tēn goun peri ta skeuē eulabeian apedeixato; sy de tēs alazoneias ou katelipes ekeinǭ hyperbolēn; kai kata toutōn ek tēs eis theon paroinias tolmērōs exeteinas tas cheiras, kai tēs psychēs elenxas to physēma epi ta gegonota chōrei.
"You, his son Belshazzar." For he, even if he appeared arrogant in other things, at least showed reverence toward the vessels; but you have left him no excess of boastfulness, and in your drunken insolence toward God you boldly stretched out your hands against them. And having exposed the swelling of his soul, he goes on to what happened.
5.22Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Μανή, ἐμέτρησεν. Τουτέστιν ὥσπερ μέτρῳ τινί, ἄχρι τοῦ παρόντος χρόνου, τὴν σὴν ζωὴν περιώρισεν· ὥσπερ γὰρ παρὰ τῷ Ζαχαρίᾳ μέτρον ἐθεάσατο μολύβδου, ἵνα μάθῃ τὸ τέλος τῆς περὶ τοὺς ἁμαρτάνοντας μακροθυμίας, οὕτω καὶ νῦν ὥσπερ μέτρῳ τινὶ περιωρίσθαι λέγει τῶν κρατούντων τὴν δυναστείαν· τὸ γὰρ μανὴ μέτρον σημαίνει.
Manē, emetrēsen. Toutestin hōsper metrǭ tini, achri tou parontos chronou, tēn sēn zōēn periōrisen; hōsper gar para tǭ Zacharią metron etheasato molybdou, hina mathę̄ to telos tēs peri tous hamartanontas makrothymias, houtō kai nyn hōsper metrǭ tini periōristhai legei tōn kratountōn tēn dynasteian; to gar manē metron sēmainei.
"Mane: he has measured." That is, he has limited your life as by a measure until the present time; for just as in Zechariah he saw a measure of lead, so that he might learn the end of God's patience toward sinners, so now too he says that the power of the rulers has been limited as by a measure; for mane means "measure."
5.23Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Θεκέλ, ἐστάθη ἐν ζυγῷ. Ἔστι μὲν οὖν τὸ θεκὲλ σταθμός· βούλεται δὲ δεῖξαι ὡς οὐκ ἄκριτον τὴν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ψῆφον ἐξήνεγκεν ὁ θεός, τρόπον δέ τινα ἀντιταλαντευθεὶς ὁ χρόνος τῆς σῆς ἀρχῆς ταῖς πράξεσιν, ᾤχετο καθελκυσθεὶς τῷ βάρει τῶν ἁμαρτημάτων· ἵνα εἴπῃ ὡς διὰ τὰς παρανομίας οὐκ ἄξιος ὤφθης τὴν σαυτοῦ παρατεῖναι βασιλείαν.
Thekel, estathē en zygǭ. Esti men oun to thekel stathmos; bouletai de deixai hōs ouk akriton tēn kat᾽ autou psēphon exēnenken ho theos, tropon de tina antitalanteutheis ho chronos tēs sēs archēs tais praxesin, ǭcheto kathelkystheis tǭ barei tōn hamartēmatōn; hina eipę̄ hōs dia tas paranomias ouk axios ōphthēs tēn sautou parateinai basileian.
"Thekel: it was weighed in the balance." Thekel means "weight"; he wants to show that God did not bring his sentence against him without judgment, but that the time of your rule, weighed in some way against your deeds, went down, dragged by the weight of your sins: to say that because of your lawlessness you were found unworthy to prolong your kingdom.
5.24Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Φαρές, διῄρηται. Σημαίνει μὲν οὖν τὸ Φαρὲς διαίρεσιν· λέγει δὲ ὡς οὐ νῦν δίκην τῆς κατὰ τοῦ θεοῦ τόλμης δώσεις, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ παραπέμψεις εἰς ἐκγόνους τὴν ἀρχήν, τῇ τῶν παίδων εὐδοξίᾳ τιμώμενος. Ἄχρι τούτου ἔστη ὁ προφήτης, οὐκέτι δὲ καὶ συμβουλὴν εἰσηγήσατο ὡς ἐπὶ τοῦ Ναβουχοδονόσορ, ἀκολουθῶν καθόλου τῇ θείᾳ γνώμῃ· ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνου μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐνυπνίου ἑώρα ἐλπίδα τινὰ προσοῦσαν τῷ βασιλεῖ· καὶ ἄλλως δὲ αὐτὸν εὐλαβῶς ᾔδει περὶ τοὺς θείους διακείμενον χρησμούς· ἐπί τε γὰρ τῆς τοῦ ἀνδριάντος ἑρμηνείας, οὐ μόνον τοῖς λοιποῖς ἐτίμησεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ προσκυνήσεως ἄξιον ἡγήσατο· καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ δένδρου· πρὸς δὲ τοῖς ῥηθεῖσι, καὶ τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς βασιλείας ἡγεμόνας ἀνέδειξε τοὺς δικαίους· διόπερ ἀγαπῶν τὸν ἄνδρα, καὶ χρηστὰς αὐτῷ τὰς ἐλπίδας ὑποτείνων, πρὸς τὴν τῶν ἀγαθῶν προέτρεπε πρᾶξιν· ἐπὶ δὲ τούτου, οὐ μόνον ἀγνώμονα περὶ τὰς θείας ᾔδει δωρεάς, ἀλλὰ καὶ παντελῶς τῆς χείρονος γέγονε μοίρας· πρὸς τοίνυν ἄνδρα οὔτε τι χρηστὸν κεκτημένον, οὔτε τὴν ἐκ τῶν πραγμάτων δεχόμενον διδασκαλίαν, καὶ διὰ ταῦτα εἰς ὁμολογουμένην ἀπόφασιν πεπτωκότα, περιττὸν ἔκρινε περὶ τῶν προσηκόντων διαλέγεσθαι.
Phares, dię̄rētai. Sēmainei men oun to Phares diairesin; legei de hōs ou nyn dikēn tēs kata tou theou tolmēs dōseis, all᾽ oude parapempseis eis ekgonous tēn archēn, tę̄ tōn paidōn eudoxią timōmenos. Achri toutou estē ho prophētēs, ouketi de kai symboulēn eisēgēsato hōs epi tou Nabouchodonosor, akolouthōn katholou tę̄ theią gnōmę̄; ep᾽ ekeinou men apo tou enypniou heōra elpida tina prosousan tǭ basilei; kai allōs de auton eulabōs ę̄dei peri tous theious diakeimenon chrēsmous; epi te gar tēs tou andriantos hermēneias, ou monon tois loipois etimēsen, alla kai proskynēseōs axion hēgēsato; kai epi tou dendrou; pros de tois rhētheisi, kai tōn epi tēs basileias hēgemonas anedeixe tous dikaious; dioper agapōn ton andra, kai chrēstas autǭ tas elpidas hypoteinōn, pros tēn tōn agathōn proetrepe praxin; epi de toutou, ou monon agnōmona peri tas theias ę̄dei dōreas, alla kai pantelōs tēs cheironos gegone moiras; pros toinyn andra oute ti chrēston kektēmenon, oute tēn ek tōn pragmatōn dechomenon didaskalian, kai dia tauta eis homologoumenēn apophasin peptōkota, peritton ekrine peri tōn prosēkontōn dialegesthai.
"Phares: it has been divided." Phares means "division"; he says that you will not only now pay the penalty for your daring against God, but will not even pass the rule on to descendants, honored by the good repute of your sons. The prophet stopped here, and no longer offered counsel as in the case of Nebuchadnezzar, following throughout the divine purpose. In that case he saw from the dream that there was some hope for the king; and besides he knew him to be reverently disposed toward the divine oracles; for at the interpretation of the statue he not only honored him with the rest but thought him worthy of worship, and again at the tree; and besides what was said, he appointed the righteous men governors in the kingdom. Therefore, loving the man and holding out good hopes to him, he urged him to the doing of good. But in this case he knew him not only to be ungrateful for the divine gifts, but to have become wholly of the worse lot. To a man, then, who had nothing good and did not accept the teaching of events, and so had fallen under an acknowledged sentence, he judged it superfluous to speak of what was fitting.
5.26Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Ἐνέδυσαν τὸν Δανιὴλ πορφύραν. Ἀπορήσειε δ᾽ ἄν τις ὅπως ἢ πότε ταῦτα ἐπράχθησαν· οἶμαι τοίνυν τὴν μὲν ἑρμηνείαν τοῦ γράμματος ἔτι τῆς νυκτὸς οὔσης εἰρῆσθαι παρὰ τοῦ Δανιήλ· καὶ τῇ πορφύρᾳ καὶ τῷ περιαυχενίῳ παραυτίκα τετιμῆσθαι, παρεστώσης τῆς στρατείας καὶ τῶν ἐν τέλει πάντων· τὸ δὲ κήρυγμα οὐ γεγενῆσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν γράμμασι διατετυπῶσθαι μόνον· τὸ δ᾽ ὅσον οὐδέπω ἐσόμενον, μᾶλλον δὲ καὶ πεπληρωμένον τῇ κρίσει ὡς γεγονὸς ὁ ἱστοριογράφος τέθεικεν.
Enedysan ton Daniēl porphyran. Aporēseie d᾽ an tis hopōs ē pote tauta eprachthēsan; oimai toinyn tēn men hermēneian tou grammatos eti tēs nyktos ousēs eirēsthai para tou Daniēl; kai tę̄ porphyrą kai tǭ periaucheniǭ parautika tetimēsthai, parestōsēs tēs strateias kai tōn en telei pantōn; to de kērygma ou gegenēsthai, all᾽ en grammasi diatetypōsthai monon; to d᾽ hoson oudepō esomenon, mallon de kai peplērōmenon tę̄ krisei hōs gegonos ho historiographos tetheiken.
"They clothed Daniel in purple." One might ask how or when these things were done. I think, then, that Daniel gave the interpretation of the writing while it was still night, and was honored at once with the purple and the necklace, with the army and all the officials present; but that the proclamation did not take place, but was only drawn up in writing; and what was not yet to be, or rather what was fulfilled by the judgment, the historian set down as having happened.
5.27Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ νυκτὶ ἀνῃρέθη. Ἐλεγχθείσης γὰρ τῆς μαγγανείας τῶν ἐν Βαβυλῶνι σοφῶν, καὶ τοῦ δεσπότου κηρυχθέντος, κατελάμβανε τὸν παράνομον ἡ δίκη.
En autę̄ tę̄ nykti anę̄rethē. Elenchtheisēs gar tēs manganeias tōn en Babylōni sophōn, kai tou despotou kērychthentos, katelambane ton paranomon hē dikē.
"That very night he was killed." For once the trickery of the wise men in Babylon had been exposed and the Master proclaimed, justice overtook the lawless man.
5.28Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Καὶ Δαρεῖος ὁ μῆδος παρέλαβε τὴν βασιλείαν. Ζητεῖται πῶς ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ, καὶ τῆς γραφῆς τὴν ἑρμηνείαν εἶπεν ὁ Δανιήλ, καὶ Βαβυλωνίων ἀφῃρέθη ἡ βασιλεία, καὶ μῆδοι κατέσχον τὴν ἐκείνων ἀρχήν· καὶ πρὸς τούτῳ πῶς εἰς μήδους φησὶ καὶ πέρσας ὁμοῦ τὴν ἀρχὴν μετατεθήσεσθαι, φήσας ἐν τῇ τῆς γραφῆς ἑρμηνείᾳ, Δαρεῖον τὸν μῆδον μόνον παρειληφέναι τὴν ἀρχὴν ἐπήγαγε· τινὲς μὲν οὖν ἔφασαν ὡς Δαρεῖος ὕπαρχος ἦν τοῦ Βαλτάσαρ, εὐσεβὴς δὲ ὢν παρὰ πάντας τοὺς λοιπούς, καὶ σφόδρα γνησίως πρὸς τοὺς εὐσεβεῖς τῶν ἰουδαίων διακείμενος, ἐπείθετο ἀληθῆ εἶναι τὰ παρὰ τῷ Δανιὴλ εἰρημένα· ὡς οὖν ταῦτα ὁ προφήτης ἀπεφήνατο, οὐκ ἐνδοιάσας περὶ τῶν εἰρημένων, ἅπαντας ἀθρόως ἐκίνησε κατὰ τοῦ βασιλέως· καὶ τὸν μὲν τῆς ἀρχῆς ἐξήλασεν· αὐτὸς δὲ τὴν βασιλείαν κατέσχεν, εἰς μήδους τὴν ἀρχὴν μεταστήσας.
Kai Dareios ho mēdos parelabe tēn basileian. Zēteitai pōs en autǭ tǭ kairǭ, kai tēs graphēs tēn hermēneian eipen ho Daniēl, kai Babylōniōn aphę̄rethē hē basileia, kai mēdoi kateschon tēn ekeinōn archēn; kai pros toutǭ pōs eis mēdous phēsi kai persas homou tēn archēn metatethēsesthai, phēsas en tę̄ tēs graphēs hermēneią, Dareion ton mēdon monon pareilēphenai tēn archēn epēgage; tines men oun ephasan hōs Dareios hyparchos ēn tou Baltasar, eusebēs de ōn para pantas tous loipous, kai sphodra gnēsiōs pros tous eusebeis tōn ioudaiōn diakeimenos, epeitheto alēthē einai ta para tǭ Daniēl eirēmena; hōs oun tauta ho prophētēs apephēnato, ouk endoiasas peri tōn eirēmenōn, hapantas athroōs ekinēse kata tou basileōs; kai ton men tēs archēs exēlasen; autos de tēn basileian kateschen, eis mēdous tēn archēn metastēsas.
"And Darius the Mede received the kingdom." It is asked how, at the same time, Daniel told the interpretation of the writing, the kingdom was taken from the Babylonians, and the Medes held their rule; and besides, how, having said in the interpretation of the writing that the rule would pass to the Medes and Persians together, he added that Darius the Mede alone received the rule. Some, then, have said that Darius was Belshazzar's governor, and, being godly beyond all the rest and very sincerely disposed toward the godly among the Jews, he was persuaded that what Daniel had said was true. So when the prophet declared these things, he did not hesitate about what had been said, but stirred everyone at once against the king; and he drove him from rule and himself held the kingdom, transferring the rule to the Medes.
Chapter 6
6.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Σατράπας ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι. Τουτέστι πολλῆς οὔσης τῆς ἐξουσίας, ἐδοκίμασε πολλοὺς εἶναι τοὺς καθ᾽ ἑκάστην πατρίδα ἄρχοντας.
Satrapas hekaton eikosi. Toutesti pollēs ousēs tēs exousias, edokimase pollous einai tous kath᾽ hekastēn patrida archontas.
"A hundred and twenty satraps." That is, since the dominion was great, he decided that the rulers in each homeland should be many.
6.2Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Τακτικοὺς τρεῖς. Τουτέστιν ἐφεστάναι τοῖς τάγμασιν ἐκέλευσε· τακτικοὺς γὰρ ἐκάλεσε τοὺς τῶν ταγμάτων ἡγεμόνας· καὶ ἦν Δανιὴλ εἷς ἐξ αὐτῶν.
Taktikous treis. Toutestin ephestanai tois tagmasin ekeleuse; taktikous gar ekalese tous tōn tagmatōn hēgemonas; kai ēn Daniēl heis ex autōn.
"Three officers." That is, he ordered them to be set over the regiments; for he called the commanders of the regiments "officers" (taktikoi); and Daniel was one of them.
6.3Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):8
Ὅπως ὁ βασιλεὺς μὴ ἐνοχλῆται. Τουτέστιν ὥστε τὰ ἀναγκαιότατα μόνα ἐπὶ τὸν βασιλέα ἔρχεσθαι· τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ διοικεῖσθαι παρὰ τούτων· τοῦτο δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ Μωσέως γεγένηται.
Hopōs ho basileus mē enochlētai. Toutestin hōste ta anankaiotata mona epi ton basilea erchesthai; ta de loipa dioikeisthai para toutōn; touto de kai epi Mōseōs gegenētai.
"So that the king might not be troubled." That is, so that only the most necessary matters should come to the king, and the rest be administered by these; this happened also in the time of Moses.
6.5Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Ὅτι πνεῦμα περισσότερον. Τουτέστι σοφώτερος ἐδείκνυτο, καὶ κατὰ τὴν διοίκησιν ἐπιτηδειότερος, οὐ μόνον τῶν τριῶν ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῦ πλήθους· ὥστε δειχθῆναι πάντων τῶν ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ ὑπερφερῆ τὸν δίκαιον. — Πνεῦμα μὲν οὖν ἐνταῦθα λέγει τὴν σύνεσιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῶν λογισμῶν τῆς ψυχῆς τὸ κίνημα, καὶ τὴν περὶ τὰ πράγματα ἐντρέχειαν· οὐ γὰρ περὶ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου ἔφη, ὅτι περισσὸν ἦν ἐν αὐτῷ· οὐ γὰρ οἱ λοιποὶ μετεῖχον πνεύματος, ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀσεβείας ἦσαν μέτοχοι· οἶμαι καὶ τὸν προφήτην ἐνταῦθα αἰνίττεσθαι τὴν θείαν χάριν, ἀφ᾽ ἧς καὶ τὴν κατὰ πάντων ὑπεροχὴν ἀσύγκριτον εἶχεν.
Hoti pneuma perissoteron. Toutesti sophōteros edeiknyto, kai kata tēn dioikēsin epitēdeioteros, ou monon tōn triōn alla kai tou plēthous; hōste deichthēnai pantōn tōn en tę̄ basileią hyperpherē ton dikaion. — Pneuma men oun entautha legei tēn synesin autou, kai tōn logismōn tēs psychēs to kinēma, kai tēn peri ta pragmata entrecheian; ou gar peri tou pneumatos tou hagiou ephē, hoti perisson ēn en autǭ; ou gar hoi loipoi meteichon pneumatos, epeidē de asebeias ēsan metochoi; oimai kai ton prophētēn entautha ainittesthai tēn theian charin, aph᾽ hēs kai tēn kata pantōn hyperochēn asynkriton eichen.
"Because an excellent spirit." That is, he showed himself wiser and more capable in administration, not only than the three but than the whole multitude, so that the righteous man was shown superior to all in the kingdom. — By "spirit" he means here his understanding, the movement of the thoughts of his soul, and his skill in affairs; for he did not say of the Holy Spirit that it was "excellent" in him; for the others did not share in the Spirit, since they shared in impiety. Yet I think the prophet hints here at the divine grace, from which he had his incomparable superiority over all.
6.6Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Ὁ βασιλεὺς κατέστησεν αὐτόν. Ὡς εἶναι φησὶ δῆλον, ὡς πειθόμενος τοῖς παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦ Δανιὴλ εἰρημένοις, καὶ ἐπεχώρησε τῷ ἔργῳ, καὶ τετίμηκε τὸν Δανιὴλ ὡς εὐσεβῆ· οἷον δὴ καὶ κατὰ τὸν Ἰὼβ σκοπήσας τις εὕροι γεγονός. — Τουτέστιν ἐκ τῶν πραγμάτων κρείττων τῶν λοιπῶν ὀφθείς, τῶν ὅλων τὴν ἐξουσίαν ἔλαβε παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως. Πρόφασιν καὶ παράπτωμα. Πρόφασιν μὲν λέγων τὴν μεγίστην τοῦ θανάτου ἀφορμήν· παράπτωμα δὲ οὐ καίριον μέν, ὅμως δὲ ἔχον ἀφορμήν τινα ὅπερ κατηγορίας ἐν τῇ διοικήσει τῶν ὑπηκόων ηὑρίσκετο.
Ho basileus katestēsen auton. Hōs einai phēsi dēlon, hōs peithomenos tois par᾽ autou tou Daniēl eirēmenois, kai epechōrēse tǭ ergǭ, kai tetimēke ton Daniēl hōs eusebē; hoion dē kai kata ton Iōb skopēsas tis heuroi gegonos. — Toutestin ek tōn pragmatōn kreittōn tōn loipōn ophtheis, tōn holōn tēn exousian elabe para tou basileōs. Prophasin kai paraptōma. Prophasin men legōn tēn megistēn tou thanatou aphormēn; paraptōma de ou kairion men, homōs de echon aphormēn tina hoper katēgorias en tę̄ dioikēsei tōn hypēkoōn hēurisketo.
"The king set him over them." So that it is clear, he says, that, persuaded by what Daniel himself had said, he both carried it into action and honored Daniel as godly; as one might find, on looking, happened also in the case of Job. — That is, having been seen from his deeds to be better than the rest, he received authority over all from the king. "A pretext and a fault." By "pretext" he means the greatest occasion for death; by "fault" something not fatal, yet having some occasion for an accusation, which might be found in his administration of the subjects.
6.7Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Ὅτι πιστὸς ἦν. Οἱονεὶ τὸ τυχὸν ὅπερ ἐκ τῆς περὶ τοὺς πένητας ἐδείκνυτο γνώμης· μήτε δωροδοκίᾳ τινὶ τὸ δίκαιον ἀπεμπολῶν, μηδὲ ἀφαιρούμενος τοὺς δεσμοὺς τοῦ δικαίου, αἰσχροῦ κέρδους χάριν· τουτέστι τοῦ δικαίου καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας οὐδαμῶς ἐξιστάμενος. — Πλάττεσθαί φασιν οὐ δίκαιον· εὐφώρατοι γὰρ ἐσόμεθα, τῆς ἐξετάσεως τὴν κατασκευὴν γνωριζούσης· τὸ δὲ ὁμολογούμενον εἰς κατηγορίαν τρέπειν προσήκει.
Hoti pistos ēn. Hoionei to tychon hoper ek tēs peri tous penētas edeiknyto gnōmēs; mēte dōrodokią tini to dikaion apempolōn, mēde aphairoumenos tous desmous tou dikaiou, aischrou kerdous charin; toutesti tou dikaiou kai tēs alētheias oudamōs existamenos. — Plattesthai phasin ou dikaion; euphōratoi gar esometha, tēs exetaseōs tēn kataskeuēn gnōrizousēs; to de homologoumenon eis katēgorian trepein prosēkei.
"Because he was faithful." As was shown, for instance, from his disposition toward the poor: neither selling justice for a bribe, nor removing the bonds of justice for shameful gain; that is, never departing from justice and truth. — To invent charges, they say, is not right; for we shall be easily caught, since an inquiry will reveal the fabrication; but it is fitting to turn what is admitted into an accusation.
6.8Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Στῆσον ὁρισμόν. Σχηματίζονται τὴν περὶ αὐτὸν εὔνοιαν, ὡς ἂν αὐτοῖς ἔχῃ τὸ σκαιώρημα· ἀπὸ τῆς περὶ σέ φασι διαθέσεως καὶ τῆς περὶ τὴν βασιλείαν εὐνοίας, ἥκομεν ἐπὶ τήνδε τὴν βουλήν· πλείστῃ δὲ τῇ θωπείᾳ κέχρηνται, δεινὸν εἰδότες τὴν κολακείαν καὶ τὸν ἔμφρονα κλέψαι τὸν νοῦν. — Οὐδένα χρόνον εἰς βουλὴν τῷ βασιλεῖ κατέλιπον· ἔδεισαν γὰρ μὴ σκέψεως καιρὸν δεδωκότες, διαμάρτωσι τοῦ σκοποῦ, τῆς ἀτοπίας τοῦ προταθέντος αὐτόθεν δεικνυμένης.
Stēson horismon. Schēmatizontai tēn peri auton eunoian, hōs an autois echę̄ to skaiōrēma; apo tēs peri se phasi diatheseōs kai tēs peri tēn basileian eunoias, hēkomen epi tēnde tēn boulēn; pleistę̄ de tę̄ thōpeią kechrēntai, deinon eidotes tēn kolakeian kai ton emphrona klepsai ton noun. — Oudena chronon eis boulēn tǭ basilei katelipon; edeisan gar mē skepseōs kairon dedōkotes, diamartōsi tou skopou, tēs atopias tou protathentos autothen deiknymenēs.
"Establish a decree." They pretend goodwill toward him, so that the trick may succeed for them: "From our disposition toward you," they say, "and our goodwill toward the kingdom, we have come to this counsel"; and they use the greatest flattery, knowing that flattery is able to steal even the mind of a sensible man. — They left the king no time for deliberation; for they feared that if they gave time for reflection, they would miss their aim, since the absurdity of the proposal would at once be shown.
6.9Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Ὅπως μὴ ἀλλοιωθῇ τὸ δόγμα. Τουτέστι νόμῳ βασιλέως ὁρισθῆναι τοῦτο, ὥστε ἀπαράβατον εἶναι τὸ πρᾶγμα τῇ ἀξιοπιστίᾳ τοῦ νομοθετοῦντος.
Hopōs mē alloiōthę̄ to dogma. Toutesti nomǭ basileōs horisthēnai touto, hōste aparabaton einai to pragma tę̄ axiopistią tou nomothetountos.
"So that the decree may not be changed." That is, that this be fixed by the king's law, so that the matter be inviolable by the credibility of the lawgiver.
6.10Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Τότε ὁ βασιλεύς. Οὐ γὰρ ᾔδει τὸ σκαιώρημα, καὶ τὴν θωπείαν ἐδέξατο.
Tote ho basileus. Ou gar ę̄dei to skaiōrēma, kai tēn thōpeian edexato.
"Then the king." For he did not know the trick, and accepted the flattery.
6.11Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Καὶ Δανιὴλ ἡνίκα ἔγνω. Κάλλιστα ἔφη τὸ ἡνίκα ἔγνω· ἐνεδείξατο γὰρ ὡς πλείονι τῇ περὶ τὴν προσευχὴν προσοχῇ τοῦ νόμου τεθέντος ἐχρήσατο· ὡς γὰρ ἀγῶνος κειμένου, ἢ τῆς εἰς θεὸν ἔχεσθαι εὐσεβείας, ἢ τὸν ἀνθρώπινον φόβον ἔμπροσθεν θεῖναι τῆς περὶ τὸ καλὸν ἐμμελείας, ἐπέτεινε τὴν σπουδήν· ἄμεινον εἶναι κρίνων τὸ μετ᾽ εὐσεβείας ἀποθανεῖν, ἢ παρανόμως ζῆν· οὐχ ἁπλῶς δὲ τὴν προσευχὴν ποιεῖται, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ τὴν Ἱερουσαλὴμ βλέπων, ὅπερ μείζονα τῆς περὶ θεὸν φιλίας τὸ τεκμήριον παρείχετο· οὔτε γὰρ ἀγνοῶν τὸν κωλυτικὸν ὅρον, ἀδεῶς προσεύχεται παρὰ τὰ ὡρισμένα, οὔτε γινώσκων ἐπίτηδες ἐναντιοῦται τῷ προστάγματι· τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἦν οὐ φιλόθεον· τὸ δὲ φιλοκίνδυνον. Καὶ μετ᾽ ὀλίγα. Οὐ παραχωρητέον οὖν ἀνθρώποις τοῦ θείου νόμου διὰ τὸν φόβον, ἀλλὰ θεῷ καὶ μετὰ κινδύνων ἀκολουθητέον.
Kai Daniēl hēnika egnō. Kallista ephē to hēnika egnō; enedeixato gar hōs pleioni tę̄ peri tēn proseuchēn prosochę̄ tou nomou tethentos echrēsato; hōs gar agōnos keimenou, ē tēs eis theon echesthai eusebeias, ē ton anthrōpinon phobon emprosthen theinai tēs peri to kalon emmeleias, epeteine tēn spoudēn; ameinon einai krinōn to met᾽ eusebeias apothanein, ē paranomōs zēn; ouch haplōs de tēn proseuchēn poieitai, all᾽ epi tēn Hierousalēm blepōn, hoper meizona tēs peri theon philias to tekmērion pareicheto; oute gar agnoōn ton kōlytikon horon, adeōs proseuchetai para ta hōrismena, oute ginōskōn epitēdes enantioutai tǭ prostagmati; to men gar ēn ou philotheon; to de philokindynon. Kai met᾽ oliga. Ou parachōrēteon oun anthrōpois tou theiou nomou dia ton phobon, alla theǭ kai meta kindynōn akolouthēteon.
"And Daniel, when he knew." "When he knew" is excellently said; for it showed that, once the law had been made, he applied himself to prayer with greater attention. For since a contest lay before him, either to hold to godliness toward God or to put human fear before diligence in what is good, he intensified his zeal, judging it better to die with godliness than to live unlawfully. And he did not pray simply, but looking toward Jerusalem, which gave greater proof of his love for God. For he neither prays freely against what was decreed as though ignorant of the prohibition, nor, knowing it, deliberately sets himself against the command: the one would not have been God-loving, the other would have been courting danger. And a little after: One must not, then, give way to men against the divine law out of fear, but follow God even with dangers.
6.13Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Οὐχὶ ὁρισμὸν ἔταξας. Τῇ ἴσῃ καὶ νῦν κέχρηνται κακουργίᾳ· πρὸ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ δόγματος οὗτοι ἤρξαντο τοῦ γεγενημένου· ἐνταῦθα δὲ κρύψαντες τῶν γραμμάτων τὴν αἰτίαν, αὐτῷ τῷ βασιλεῖ καθαρὰν περιάπτουσι τοῦ νόμου τὴν διαγόρευσιν.
Ouchi horismon etaxas. Tę̄ isę̄ kai nyn kechrēntai kakourgią; pro men gar tou dogmatos houtoi ērxanto tou gegenēmenou; entautha de krypsantes tōn grammatōn tēn aitian, autǭ tǭ basilei katharan periaptousi tou nomou tēn diagoreusin.
"Did you not issue a decree?" They use the same villainy now too: before the decree they began from what had happened; but here, hiding the reason for the document, they fasten on the king himself the plain declaration of the law.
6.14Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Ὁ βασιλεὺς πολὺ ἐλυπήθη. Τουτέστιν ἐν ἀπορίᾳ κατέστη, συνιδὼν μὲν τὸν δόλον, οὐκ εἰδὼς δὲ ὅ τι πράξει· οὔτε γὰρ ἀρνεῖσθαι τὰ ἄρτι ὁμολογηθέντα εἶχεν, οὔτ᾽ ἄντικρυς ᾤετο δεῖν τὸν νόμον λύειν.
Ho basileus poly elypēthē. Toutestin en aporią katestē, synidōn men ton dolon, ouk eidōs de ho ti praxei; oute gar arneisthai ta arti homologēthenta eichen, out᾽ antikrys ǭeto dein ton nomon lyein.
"The king was much grieved." That is, he was at a loss, seeing the deceit but not knowing what to do; for he could neither deny what he had just agreed to, nor did he think he ought openly to break the law.
6.15Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Ἠγωνίσατο τοῦ ἐξελέσθαι αὐτόν. Ἐπειρᾶτο φησὶν ἑτέροις τισὶ λόγοις ἀποκρούσασθαι τὴν κατὰ τοῦ δικαίου ψῆφον· καὶ ἕως πρὸς δυσμαῖς ἡλίου ἠγωνίζετο τοῦ ἐξελέσθαι αὐτόν· οὐ τὸ πρᾶγμα μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ ὁ χρόνος ἔδειξε τὴν περὶ τὸν δίκαιον εὔνοιαν τοῦ βασιλέως.
Ēgōnisato tou exelesthai auton. Epeirato phēsin heterois tisi logois apokrousasthai tēn kata tou dikaiou psēphon; kai heōs pros dysmais hēliou ēgōnizeto tou exelesthai auton; ou to pragma monon alla kai ho chronos edeixe tēn peri ton dikaion eunoian tou basileōs.
"He struggled to deliver him." He tried, he says, by other arguments to ward off the sentence against the righteous man; and until sunset he strove to deliver him: not only the deed but also the time showed the king's goodwill toward the righteous man.
6.16Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπε. Ἔθος φησὶν ἀρχαῖον παρηκολούθησε κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον τοὺς βασιλικοὺς παραβαίνεσθαι νόμους· ἄρα δὲ δυοῖν ἑλέσθαι ἕτερον, ἢ τὸν Δανιὴλ σώσαντα ἄδειαν τοῖς λοιποῖς παραβάσεως δοῦναι, ἢ τὴν τῶν νόμων ἰσχύν, ἐκ τοῦ νόμου ψῆφον ὁρίσαι κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ.
Tote ho basileus eipe. Ethos phēsin archaion parēkolouthēse kata mēdena tropon tous basilikous parabainesthai nomous; ara de dyoin helesthai heteron, ē ton Daniēl sōsanta adeian tois loipois parabaseōs dounai, ē tēn tōn nomōn ischyn, ek tou nomou psēphon horisai kat᾽ autou.
"Then the king said." An ancient custom, he says, was followed, that the royal laws were in no way to be transgressed; so he had to choose one of two things: either, by saving Daniel, give the rest licence to transgress, or, keeping the force of the laws, pass sentence against him by the law.
6.17Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Καὶ εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεὺς τῷ Δανιήλ. Ἀπὸ τῶν προτέρων οἶμαι πεπαιδευμένος ὁ βασιλεύς, ἐλπίδας χρηστὰς περὶ τοῦ δικαίου ἔλαβε, καὶ ὡς οὐκ ἔνεστιν αὐτὸν παροφθῆναι· ἐλογίζετο γὰρ ὅτι καὶ τοὺς περὶ Ἀνανίαν τοῦ πυρὸς ἐξαρπάσας, οἷός τέ ἐστι καὶ τῆς τῶν θηρίων ὠμότητος ἐξελκύσαι τὸν δίκαιον. Καὶ ἐσφραγίσατο ὁ βασιλεύς. Ἐλπίσας σώζεσθαι τὸν δίκαιον, προνοήσει ὅπως μή τινα ἑτέραν ἐπιβουλὴν ὑπομείνῃ· καὶ ἀσφαλισάμενος τὸν λάκκον, σήμαντρα ἐπέθηκεν οὐχ ἑαυτοῦ μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ἐν τέλει, ὡς ἂν μὴ αὐτὸς ὑποπτευθῇ βοηθεῖν τῷ δικαίῳ· καὶ τοῦτο κατὰ θείαν ἐγένετο προμήθειαν, ἵνα μὴ ἀνθρωπίνῃ συμμαχίᾳ φήσωσιν ἀβλαβῆ διαμεῖναι τὸν δίκαιον· οὕτω γὰρ καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ κυρίου ἐγένετο· ᾠκονομήθη φύλακας δοθῆναι τῷ μνήματι, ἵνα μήτε κλοπὴν τοῦ νεκροῦ κατηγορήσωσι καὶ οἱ ἐχθροί, μάρτυρες τῆς ἀληθείας γίνωνται.
Kai eipen ho basileus tǭ Daniēl. Apo tōn proterōn oimai pepaideumenos ho basileus, elpidas chrēstas peri tou dikaiou elabe, kai hōs ouk enestin auton parophthēnai; elogizeto gar hoti kai tous peri Ananian tou pyros exarpasas, hoios te esti kai tēs tōn thēriōn ōmotētos exelkysai ton dikaion. Kai esphragisato ho basileus. Elpisas sōzesthai ton dikaion, pronoēsei hopōs mē tina heteran epiboulēn hypomeinę̄; kai asphalisamenos ton lakkon, sēmantra epethēken ouch heautou monon alla kai tōn en telei, hōs an mē autos hypopteuthę̄ boēthein tǭ dikaiǭ; kai touto kata theian egeneto promētheian, hina mē anthrōpinę̄ symmachią phēsōsin ablabē diameinai ton dikaion; houtō gar kai epi tou kyriou egeneto; ǭkonomēthē phylakas dothēnai tǭ mnēmati, hina mēte klopēn tou nekrou katēgorēsōsi kai hoi echthroi, martyres tēs alētheias ginōntai.
"And the king said to Daniel." The king, taught, I think, by earlier events, had good hopes for the righteous man, that he could not be overlooked; for he reasoned that he who snatched Hananiah and his companions from the fire was able also to draw the righteous man out of the savagery of the beasts. "And the king sealed it." Hoping that the righteous man would be saved, he took care that he should not suffer any other plot; and, securing the den, he put on it the seals not only of himself but also of the officials, so that he himself might not be suspected of helping the righteous man. And this happened by divine providence, so that they might not say that the righteous man remained unharmed by human aid. So it happened also in the case of the Lord: it was arranged that guards be given to the tomb, so that the enemies might not allege a theft of the body, and might become witnesses of the truth.
6.18Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):9
Ἐκοιμήθη ἄδειπνος. Πολλὴν τὴν περὶ τὸν δίκαιον φροντίδα δεικνὺς τοῦ βασιλέως, ὅπου γε οὐ τῆς συνήθους μόνον ἀπέσχετο τροφῆς, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὕπνου κρείττων ἐγένετο, ὑπὸ τοῦ παραλόγου τῶν σκαιωρηθέντων εἰς ἀμηχανίαν καταστάς.
Ekoimēthē adeipnos. Pollēn tēn peri ton dikaion phrontida deiknys tou basileōs, hopou ge ou tēs synēthous monon apescheto trophēs, alla kai hypnou kreittōn egeneto, hypo tou paralogou tōn skaiōrēthentōn eis amēchanian katastas.
"He went to bed without supper." Showing the king's great concern for the righteous man, since he not only abstained from his usual food but even rose above sleep, reduced to helplessness by the unreasonableness of what had been plotted.
6.21Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Ἐβόησε φωνῇ ἰσχυρᾷ. Τὴν περὶ τὸ πρᾶγμα ἐπιθυμίαν ἔδειξε τῆς φωνῆς ὁ τόνος· καὶ οὐχ ἁπλῶς εἶπεν, εἰ ἐσώθη· οὐ γὰρ εἶχε φύσιν τὸ πρᾶγμα· ἀλλ᾽ εἰ ὁ θεός σε ἐδυνήθη ἐξαρπάσαι, ὁ τῆς παρὰ σοῦ θεραπείας ἀξιούμενος ἀεί· τὸ δέ, εἰ ἐδυνήθη ἐξελέσθαι σε ἀπὸ στόματος τῶν λεόντων, ἐμφαίνει ὡς ἤλπιζε μέν τι παράδοξον ἔσεσθαι περὶ αὐτόν, ὑπώπτευε δὲ καὶ μὴ ἔσεσθαι, τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης φύσεως οὐ συγχωρούσης τὸ πρᾶγμα.
Eboēse phōnę̄ ischyrą. Tēn peri to pragma epithymian edeixe tēs phōnēs ho tonos; kai ouch haplōs eipen, ei esōthē; ou gar eiche physin to pragma; all᾽ ei ho theos se edynēthē exarpasai, ho tēs para sou therapeias axioumenos aei; to de, ei edynēthē exelesthai se apo stomatos tōn leontōn, emphainei hōs ēlpize men ti paradoxon esesthai peri auton, hypōpteue de kai mē esesthai, tēs anthrōpinēs physeōs ou synchōrousēs to pragma.
"He cried with a loud voice." The pitch of his voice showed his longing about the matter. And he did not simply say "if he was saved," for the thing was not in nature; but "if God was able to snatch you away, he who is always counted worthy of your service." And "if he was able to deliver you from the mouth of the lions" shows that he hoped something wonderful would happen to him, but also suspected that it would not, since human nature does not allow such a thing.
6.22Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Ὁ θεός μου ἀπέστειλε τὸν ἄγγελον. Οὐκ εἶπεν ὅτι ζῶ, οὐδ᾽ ὅτι ἀπέθανον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ τὸν θεὸν ἀνήνεγκε τὸ παράδοξον· καὶ οὐχ ἁπλῶς εἶπεν ὁ θεὸς ἐνέφραξε τῶν λεόντων τὰ στόματα, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι ἀπέστειλε τὸν ἄγγελον αὐτοῦ· πολλὴν αὐτοῦ τὴν ἐξουσίαν σημαίνων, καὶ τῶν διακόνων τὸ ἀξιόπιστον.
Ho theos mou apesteile ton angelon. Ouk eipen hoti zō, oud᾽ hoti apethanon, all᾽ epi ton theon anēnenke to paradoxon; kai ouch haplōs eipen ho theos enephraxe tōn leontōn ta stomata, all᾽ hoti apesteile ton angelon autou; pollēn autou tēn exousian sēmainōn, kai tōn diakonōn to axiopiston.
"My God sent his angel." He did not say "I am alive," nor "I did not die," but referred the wonder to God; and he did not simply say "God shut the lions' mouths," but that he "sent his angel," signifying his great authority and the trustworthiness of his ministers.
6.23Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Ὅτι κατέναντι αὐτοῦ κ. τ. λ. Τουτέστιν ἔγνω τῆς γνώμης τὸ ὀρθόν· καὶ δίκαιος ὤν, οὐ συνεχώρησε παθεῖν τὸν οὐδὲν ἠδικηκότα.
Hoti katenanti autou k. t. l. Toutestin egnō tēs gnōmēs to orthon; kai dikaios ōn, ou synechōrēse pathein ton ouden ēdikēkota.
"Because before him," and so on. That is, he knew the uprightness of his purpose, and, being just, did not allow one who had done no wrong to suffer.
6.24Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Καὶ ἐνώπιον δέ σου. Ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐν τοῖς θείοις φησὶ μόνον ἄμεμπτος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν τῇ περὶ τὰ πιστευθέντα διακονίᾳ καθαρὸς ἐγκλημάτων πεφώραμαι· ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ἐκεῖνοι διαβάλλοντες ἔλεγον, οὐχ ὑπετάγη τῷ δόγματί σου, βουλόμενος δεῖξαι ὡς οὐ δικαίαν πεποίηνται τὴν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ κατηγορίαν, καὶ τῆς περὶ τὸν βασιλέα εὐνοίας ἐμνήσθη· ἄντικρυς τοῖς παρ᾽ ἐκείνων λεχθεῖσι δεικνὺς ἀντὶ μαρτύρων τὰ πράγματα.
Kai enōpion de sou. All᾽ ouk en tois theiois phēsi monon amemptos, alla kai en tę̄ peri ta pisteuthenta diakonią katharos enklēmatōn pephōramai; epeidē gar ekeinoi diaballontes elegon, ouch hypetagē tǭ dogmati sou, boulomenos deixai hōs ou dikaian pepoiēntai tēn kat᾽ autou katēgorian, kai tēs peri ton basilea eunoias emnēsthē; antikrys tois par᾽ ekeinōn lechtheisi deiknys anti martyrōn ta pragmata.
"And before you too." Not only in divine things, he says, am I blameless, but in the service entrusted to me too I have been found clean of charges. For since they slanderously said, "He did not submit to your decree," wishing to show that they had made an unjust accusation against him, he also mentioned his goodwill toward the king, setting the facts directly against what they had said, in place of witnesses.
6.25Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Πολὺ ἠγαθύνθη ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ. Τουτέστι μείζονα τὴν περὶ αὐτὸν ἔσχε διάθεσιν.
Poly ēgathynthē ep᾽ autǭ. Toutesti meizona tēn peri auton esche diathesin.
"He was very glad about him." That is, he had a greater affection for him.
6.26Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Καὶ πᾶσα διαφθορὰ οὐχ εὑρέθη. Ἵνα γὰρ μή τις νομίσῃ κατά τινα τέχνην ἢ ῥώμην σώματος περιγεγενῆσθαι τῶν θηρίων τὸν προφήτην, καθαρὸν τραυμάτων καὶ λοιπῆς διαφθορᾶς εὑρῆσθαι αὐτὸν ἔφη, ὡς ἀναντίρρητος ἡ παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ βοήθεια ὀφθείη.
Kai pasa diaphthora ouch heurethē. Hina gar mē tis nomisę̄ kata tina technēn ē rhōmēn sōmatos perigegenēsthai tōn thēriōn ton prophētēn, katharon traumatōn kai loipēs diaphthoras heurēsthai auton ephē, hōs anantirrētos hē para tou theou boētheia ophtheiē.
"And no harm was found." Lest anyone think the prophet overcame the beasts by some skill or bodily strength, he said that he was found clean of wounds and of any other harm, so that the help from God might be seen to be undeniable.
6.27Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Καὶ οὐκ ἔφθασαν εἰς τὸ ἔδαφος. Μάλιστα ἡ περὶ τούτους ὁρμὴ τῶν θηρίων ἔδειξε τὸ θαῦμα λαμπρότερον· εἰ μὲν γὰρ κεκορεσμένα τὰ θηρία οὐ προσέβαλε τῷ προφήτῃ, δῆλον ὅτι οὐδ᾽ ἂν τούτων ἥψατο· ἐπειδὴ δὲ τοσαύτῃ τῇ κατὰ τούτων ἐχρήσαντο ὁρμῇ, καὶ ταῦτα οὐχ ἑνὸς οὐδὲ δευτέρου τοῦ ἐμβληθέντος, ἀλλὰ πλήθους πολλοῦ, μετὰ γὰρ γυναικῶν καὶ παιδίων, δῆλον ὡς ἀκατηγόρητον τὸ θαῦμα γεγένηται.
Kai ouk ephthasan eis to edaphos. Malista hē peri toutous hormē tōn thēriōn edeixe to thauma lamproteron; ei men gar kekoresmena ta thēria ou prosebale tǭ prophētę̄, dēlon hoti oud᾽ an toutōn hēpsato; epeidē de tosautę̄ tę̄ kata toutōn echrēsanto hormę̄, kai tauta ouch henos oude deuterou tou emblēthentos, alla plēthous pollou, meta gar gynaikōn kai paidiōn, dēlon hōs akatēgorēton to thauma gegenētai.
"And they had not reached the floor." Above all, the beasts' attack on these men showed the wonder more brightly. For if the beasts did not attack the prophet because they were sated, clearly they would not have touched these either; but since they attacked them with such violence, and that not one or two who were thrown in but a great multitude, with women and children, it is clear that the wonder was beyond reproach.
6.28Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Τότε Δαρεῖος ὁ βασιλεὺς ἔγραψε πᾶσι τοῖς λαοῖς. Ὥσπερ ὁ Ναβουχοδονόσορ μετὰ τὰ θαύματα πᾶσι διήγγελλε τοῦ θεοῦ τὴν δύναμιν, οὕτω καὶ ὁ Δαρεῖος.
Tote Dareios ho basileus egrapse pasi tois laois. Hōsper ho Nabouchodonosor meta ta thaumata pasi diēngelle tou theou tēn dynamin, houtō kai ho Dareios.
"Then King Darius wrote to all the peoples." As Nebuchadnezzar after the wonders proclaimed God's power to all, so did Darius.
6.29Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Εἰρήνη ὑμῖν πληθυνθείη. Τουτέστιν ἐν εὐσταθούσῃ τῇ βασιλείᾳ διάγοιτε· διαμενεῖτέ φησι πάσης ἄτης ἐκτός, εἰ τὸν ὑπὸ τοῦ Δανιὴλ σεβόμενον θεὸν τιμᾶτε.
Eirēnē hymin plēthyntheiē. Toutestin en eustathousę̄ tę̄ basileią diagoite; diameneite phēsi pasēs atēs ektos, ei ton hypo tou Daniēl sebomenon theon timate.
"May your peace be multiplied." That is, may you live in a stable kingdom; you will remain, he says, free of all harm, if you honor the God worshipped by Daniel.
6.30Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Ὅτι αὐτὸς θεὸς ζῶν. Ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀτελεύτητον ἔχει τὴν φύσιν, οὔτε χρόνῳ τὸ εἶναι λαβὼν οὔτε πρὸς σύστασιν ἑτέρου δεόμενος. — Οὐκ ἔχει διαδοχὴν ὡς ἡ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἀρχή. — Οὗτός φησι δυνατός ἐστι παρ᾽ ἐλπίδας τε τῶν κινδύνων ἐξαρπάζειν τοὺς ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ πεποιθότας, καὶ παράδοξα ποιεῖν ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐν τῇ γῇ.
Hoti autos theos zōn. Anti tou ateleutēton echei tēn physin, oute chronǭ to einai labōn oute pros systasin heterou deomenos. — Ouk echei diadochēn hōs hē tōn anthrōpōn archē. — Houtos phēsi dynatos esti par᾽ elpidas te tōn kindynōn exarpazein tous ep᾽ autǭ pepoithotas, kai paradoxa poiein en tǭ ouranǭ kai en tę̄ gę̄.
"For he is the living God." That is, he has a nature without end, neither receiving his being in time nor needing another for his subsistence. — He has no succession, as human rule does. — He, he says, is able to snatch those who trust in him out of dangers beyond hope, and to do wonders in heaven and on earth.
6.32Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Καὶ Δανιὴλ κατηύθυνεν. Τουτέστιν οὐκ ἐπὶ τούτου μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐπὶ Κύρου λαμπρὸς καὶ περίδοξος ἀνὴρ γεγένηται.
Kai Daniēl katēuthynen. Toutestin ouk epi toutou monon, alla kai epi Kyrou lampros kai peridoxos anēr gegenētai.
"And Daniel prospered." That is, not only under this king, but under Cyrus too he was an illustrious and renowned man.
Chapter 7
7.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ ἔτει Βαλτάσαρ. Ὅτι δὲ αἱ βασιλεῖαι αὗται γνωρίζονται διά τε ἐκείνης καὶ ταύτης τῆς ὀπτασίας, δῆλον· οὐ μέντοι καθόλου τὴν ὁμοιότητα ἔχουσιν.
En tǭ prōtǭ etei Baltasar. Hoti de hai basileiai hautai gnōrizontai dia te ekeinēs kai tautēs tēs optasias, dēlon; ou mentoi katholou tēn homoiotēta echousin.
"In the first year of Belshazzar." That these kingdoms are made known through both that vision and this one is clear; yet they do not correspond in every respect.
7.2Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Καὶ τὸ ἐνύπνιον ἔγραψεν ἀρχὴν λόγων αὐτοῦ. Τουτέστι τῶν καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ἀρχὴν ἐποιήσατο, ὧν εἶδεν ἐπὶ τοῦ Βαλτάσαρ· ὡς τῶν ἤδη πρότερον λελεγμένων, μὴ ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν ἀναφερομένων, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ τοὺς Βαβυλωνίων βασιλεῖς.
Kai to enypnion egrapsen archēn logōn autou. Toutesti tōn kath᾽ heauton archēn epoiēsato, hōn eiden epi tou Baltasar; hōs tōn ēdē proteron lelegmenōn, mē ep᾽ auton anapheromenōn, all᾽ epi tous Babylōniōn basileis.
"And he wrote the dream, the beginning of his words." That is, he began the things concerning himself, which he saw under Belshazzar, since what had been said before did not concern him but the kings of Babylon.
7.3Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν τὴν μεγάλην. Θάλασσαν μὲν καλεῖ τὸν βίον, ὡς θορύβου μεστὸν καὶ ταραχῆς· ἀνέμους δὲ τέσσαρας ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ὁρᾷ φερομένους, τὰς ἀγγελικὰς μὲν δυνάμεις τὰς ἐφεστηκυίας τοῖς τέσσαρσιν ἔθνεσι, Βαβυλωνίοις, μήδοις, πέρσαις, μακεδόσι· τὸ δ᾽ ἀπ᾽ οὐρανοῦ προσέθηκεν, ἵνα δείξῃ τὴν ἀγγέλων εἰς οὐρανοὺς ἐπιστασίαν κατὰ θεοῦ γνώμην γινομένην· νοήσαιτο δ᾽ ἄν τις τὸ οἱ τέσσαρες ἄνεμοι, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων κλιμάτων· πολλάκις γὰρ ἀνέμους τὰ κλίματα λέγει.
Eis tēn thalassan tēn megalēn. Thalassan men kalei ton bion, hōs thorybou meston kai tarachēs; anemous de tessaras ek tou ouranou horą pheromenous, tas angelikas men dynameis tas ephestēkuias tois tessarsin ethnesi, Babylōniois, mēdois, persais, makedosi; to d᾽ ap᾽ ouranou prosethēken, hina deixę̄ tēn angelōn eis ouranous epistasian kata theou gnōmēn ginomenēn; noēsaito d᾽ an tis to hoi tessares anemoi, anti tou ek tōn tessarōn klimatōn; pollakis gar anemous ta klimata legei.
"Into the great sea." He calls life "sea," as full of tumult and disturbance; the four winds he sees coming from heaven are the angelic powers set over the four nations, Babylonians, Medes, Persians, Macedonians; and he added "from heaven" to show that the angels' charge takes place by the will of God. One might also understand "the four winds" as "from the four regions"; for it often calls the regions "winds."
7.4Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Καὶ τέσσαρα θηρία. Τέσσαρα μὲν θηρία λέγει τὰς εἰρημένας τέσσαρας βασιλείας, αἷς ἐφειστήκεισαν δυνάμεις θεῖαι· τὸ δέ, ἀνέβαινον ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης, ἵνα εἴπῃ ἐν τῷ βίῳ ἐδείκνυντο· μεγάλα δέ, ἵνα δείξῃ ὡς ἑκάστη βασιλεία φοβερά τις ἦν, αὐτὴ καθ᾽ ἑαυτὴν ἐξεταζομένη· ἠλαττοῦτο δὲ ἑκάστη τῆς ἑτέρας κατά τι· τοῦτο γὰρ μηνύει τὸ διαφέροντα ἀλλήλων· ἵνα εἴπῃ, ἑκάστου μὲν θηρίου ὄψις ἦν καταπληκτική, οὐ μὴν ἅπαντα ὅμοιον εἶχε τὸν φόβον.
Kai tessara thēria. Tessara men thēria legei tas eirēmenas tessaras basileias, hais epheistēkeisan dynameis theiai; to de, anebainon ek tēs thalassēs, hina eipę̄ en tǭ biǭ edeiknynto; megala de, hina deixę̄ hōs hekastē basileia phobera tis ēn, autē kath᾽ heautēn exetazomenē; ēlattouto de hekastē tēs heteras kata ti; touto gar mēnyei to diapheronta allēlōn; hina eipę̄, hekastou men thēriou opsis ēn kataplēktikē, ou mēn hapanta homoion eiche ton phobon.
"And four beasts." By four beasts he means the four kingdoms mentioned, over which divine powers were set; "they came up from the sea," to say that they appeared in life; "great," to show that each kingdom was fearsome considered by itself, but each fell short of another in some respect; for this "differing from one another" indicates: to say that the sight of each beast was terrifying, yet not all caused the same fear.
7.5Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Ὡσεὶ λέαινα. Τὸ γὰρ βασιλικώτατον τῶν θηρίων εἶπεν· ὥσπερ ἐπὶ τῆς εἰκόνος τὸν χρυσόν, εἰς τὴν Βαβυλωνίων ἔλαβεν ἀρχήν, ὡς τῶν λοιπῶν ὑλῶν τιμιώτερον, οὕτως καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν θηρίων τὸ ἀρχικώτερον, ἔλαβεν εἰς τὴν τῶν Βαβυλωνίων ἀρχήν.
Hōsei leaina. To gar basilikōtaton tōn thēriōn eipen; hōsper epi tēs eikonos ton chryson, eis tēn Babylōniōn elaben archēn, hōs tōn loipōn hylōn timiōteron, houtōs kai epi tōn thēriōn to archikōteron, elaben eis tēn tōn Babylōniōn archēn.
"Like a lioness." For he named the most royal of the beasts: as in the case of the statue he took gold for the empire of the Babylonians as more precious than the other materials, so among the beasts too he took the most sovereign for the empire of the Babylonians.
7.6Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Ἐθεώρουν. Θαυμάζων φησὶν ἀτενὲς ἑώρων πρὸς τὸ θηρίον, καὶ ἐν τοσούτῳ ἔβλεπον αὐτοῦ τὴν εἰς τὸ ἐναντίον μεταβολήν· τῶν γὰρ πτερῶν ὁ κόσμος ἀφῄρετο· οὐ γὰρ εἶπεν ἐξερρύη, ἀλλ᾽ ἐξετίλη· ἵνα κατὰ θεοῦ ἀπόφασιν τὴν καθαίρεσιν τῆς βαβυλωνικῆς ἀρχῆς σημάνῃ.
Etheōroun. Thaumazōn phēsin atenes heōrōn pros to thērion, kai en tosoutǭ eblepon autou tēn eis to enantion metabolēn; tōn gar pterōn ho kosmos aphę̄reto; ou gar eipen exerryē, all᾽ exetilē; hina kata theou apophasin tēn kathairesin tēs babylōnikēs archēs sēmanę̄.
"I was watching." Wondering, he says, I looked intently at the beast, and meanwhile I saw its change to the opposite; for the adornment of its wings was taken away. For he did not say "fell off" but "was plucked," to signify that the overthrow of the Babylonian empire was by God's sentence.
7.9Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):10
Καὶ ἐξηράνθη. Τουτέστιν ἐταλαιπώρησε μέν, ἦν δὲ ὅμως, καὶ οὐ παντελὴς αὐτὸ ἀπώλεια κατέλαβεν.
Kai exēranthē. Toutestin etalaipōrēse men, ēn de homōs, kai ou pantelēs auto apōleia katelaben.
"And it was dried up." That is, it suffered hardship, but it still existed, and complete destruction did not overtake it.
7.10Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Καρδία ἀνθρώπου ἐδόθη αὐτῇ. Λέοντος μὲν ἴδιον τὸ κράτος, ἀνθρώπου δὲ τὸ μὴ φέρειν ὁρμὴν τοῦ θηρίου· ἡνίκα μὲν οὖν ἐκράτουν Βαβυλώνιοι, ἦσαν τοῖς ὑποτεταγμένοις φοβεροί· δειλοὶ δὲ κατέστησαν, εἰς μήδους τῆς ἀρχῆς μεταστάσης κατὰ θεοῦ πρόνοιαν.
Kardia anthrōpou edothē autę̄. Leontos men idion to kratos, anthrōpou de to mē pherein hormēn tou thēriou; hēnika men oun ekratoun Babylōnioi, ēsan tois hypotetagmenois phoberoi; deiloi de katestēsan, eis mēdous tēs archēs metastasēs kata theou pronoian.
"A human heart was given to it." A lion's mark is strength, but a human being's is not to have the beast's impulse. When the Babylonians ruled, they were fearsome to their subjects; but they were made cowardly when the rule passed to the Medes by God's providence.
7.11Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Τρία πλευρὰ ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτῆς. Ἐπειδὴ στόματι χρησίμους κατέστησε τὴν ἀρχὴν τῶν τριῶν, ἐν τῷ στόματί φησι τὰ γ' πλευρὰ συνεργὰ τῆς ἀσχολουμένης βασιλείας πρὸς σαρκοφαγίαν· διὸ ἐπεβόων αὐτῇ τὸ φονικὸν οἱ ὁρῶντες, ἀνάστα φάγε κρέα.
Tria pleura en tǭ stomati autēs. Epeidē stomati chrēsimous katestēse tēn archēn tōn triōn, en tǭ stomati phēsi ta g' pleura synerga tēs ascholoumenēs basileias pros sarkophagian; dio epeboōn autę̄ to phonikon hoi horōntes, anasta phage krea.
"Three ribs in its mouth." Since he set up the rule of the three as useful to the mouth, he says the three ribs in the mouth are fellow workers of the kingdom that is busied with eating flesh; therefore those who see it shout to it, "Arise, eat flesh."
7.12Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Καὶ αὐτῇ πτερὰ τέσσαρα. Ἐπὶ μὲν τοῦ μήδου τρία πλευρὰ ἔφη, ἐπὶ δὲ τούτου πτερὰ τέσσαρα· ἐπειδὴ μετὰ μήδων καὶ Βαβυλωνίων καὶ αἰγυπτίων, καὶ τὴν περσῶν κατέσχεν· ὁ μὲν γὰρ Δαρεῖος ἔξω τῆς ἑαυτοῦ χειρὸς εἶχε τὴν Περσίδα· ὁ δὲ πρὸς ταύτῃ καὶ τὰς λοιπὰς προσεκτήσατο· καὶ ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνου μὲν μόνον ἐν τῷ στόματί φησιν αἱ πλευραί· ἐνταῦθα δὲ καὶ πετεινοῦ εἶπεν εἶναι· καὶ πετεινοῦ μέν, ἐν πολέμοις νίκην· πτερὰ δέ, διὰ τὸ κεκοσμῆσθαι ἀπὸ τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων· οὐ γὰρ καταστρεψάμενος εἶχεν.
Kai autę̄ ptera tessara. Epi men tou mēdou tria pleura ephē, epi de toutou ptera tessara; epeidē meta mēdōn kai Babylōniōn kai aigyptiōn, kai tēn persōn kateschen; ho men gar Dareios exō tēs heautou cheiros eiche tēn Persida; ho de pros tautę̄ kai tas loipas prosektēsato; kai ep᾽ ekeinou men monon en tǭ stomati phēsin hai pleurai; entautha de kai peteinou eipen einai; kai peteinou men, en polemois nikēn; ptera de, dia to kekosmēsthai apo tōn hypotetagmenōn; ou gar katastrepsamenos eichen.
"And it had four wings." In the case of the Mede he spoke of three ribs, in this case of four wings; since after the Medes, Babylonians, and Egyptians it held the kingdom of the Persians too. For Darius had Persia outside his hand, but this one won over the rest in addition to these. And in that case he speaks of ribs only in the mouth, but here he said there are also wings of a bird: "bird," for victory in wars; "wings," for being adorned by his subjects; for he had not conquered by overthrowing them.
7.13Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Καὶ τέσσαρες κεφαλαί. Ἵνα εἴπῃ ἐν τέσσαρσι ταύτας βασιλείας ἐγνωρίζετο· τοσαύτη γὰρ ἡ ἑκάστου ἔθνους σύστασις, ὥστε ἀρκεῖν πρὸς βασιλείαν· οὕτω δὲ πάντων κατεῖχεν ὡς μηδεμίαν ἐχόντων ἰσχύν· διὰ τοῦτο κεφαλὰς μὲν εἶπεν, ἵνα τὴν ἐν τῇ ἀρχῇ δύναμιν γνωρίσῃ· ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν δὲ ἀνεφέροντο, ἐπειδὴ κατὰ τὴν αὐτοῦ διοίκησιν διῄρηντο.
Kai tessares kephalai. Hina eipę̄ en tessarsi tautas basileias egnōrizeto; tosautē gar hē hekastou ethnous systasis, hōste arkein pros basileian; houtō de pantōn kateichen hōs mēdemian echontōn ischyn; dia touto kephalas men eipen, hina tēn en tę̄ archę̄ dynamin gnōrisę̄; ep᾽ auton de anepheronto, epeidē kata tēn autou dioikēsin dię̄rēnto.
"And four heads." To say that these kingdoms were known in four; for so great was each nation's standing that it sufficed for a kingdom; yet he held all as though they had no strength; therefore he spoke of heads, to make known the power in the rule, but referred them to him, since they were divided under his administration.
7.14Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Ἐξουσία ἐδόθη αὐτῇ. Τουτέστιν αὐτῷ τῷ θηρίῳ, ἵνα εἴπῃ τῷ Κύρῳ· οὐκ εἶπε δὲ ἐξουσίαν ἴσχεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐδόθη, τὴν ἄνωθεν συμμαχίαν γνωρίζων· ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ἤμελλεν ἰουδαίους τε ἀφιέναι εἰς τὴν ἑαυτῶν χώραν, καὶ χαρίζεσθαι τὰ σκεύη τὰ ἱερατικά, τοῦ τε ναοῦ τὴν οἰκοδομὴν κελεύειν γίνεσθαι, ἅπασί τε ἐπιτάττειν τὴν εἰς θεὸν εὐσέβειαν, θεὸς αὐτῷ συμμαχήσας, κρείττονα τῶν ἀντιτεταγμένων εἰργάσατο.
Exousia edothē autę̄. Toutestin autǭ tǭ thēriǭ, hina eipę̄ tǭ Kyrǭ; ouk eipe de exousian ischen, all᾽ edothē, tēn anōthen symmachian gnōrizōn; epeidē gar ēmellen ioudaious te aphienai eis tēn heautōn chōran, kai charizesthai ta skeuē ta hieratika, tou te naou tēn oikodomēn keleuein ginesthai, hapasi te epitattein tēn eis theon eusebeian, theos autǭ symmachēsas, kreittona tōn antitetagmenōn eirgasato.
"Authority was given to it." That is, to the beast itself, to say, to Cyrus; and he did not say that it "had" authority, but that it "was given," making known the help from above. For since he was going to release the Jews to their own land, to grant the sacred vessels, to order the building of the temple, and to enjoin on all godliness toward God, God, fighting on his side, made him stronger than his opponents.
7.15Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Ἰδοὺ θηρίον τέταρτον. Μηνύει τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον· ἐπεὶ καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀνδριάντος, σιδήρῳ αὐτὸν ἀπείκασε· καὶ τὴν αὐτὴν ἑρμηνεύσας ὁ προφήτης, ὥσπερ γέ φησιν ὁ σίδηρος λεπτύνει καὶ δαμάζει πάντα, οὕτω πάντα λεπτυνεῖ καὶ δαμάσει· διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ἐνταῦθα θηρίῳ μὲν παρέβαλεν, ἀκολούθως τοῖς προτέροις, ἵνα τὴν βασιλείαν σημάνῃ· ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς διαφορᾶς τῆς πρὸς τὰ προλαβόντα, ἐξαίρετον μηνύει.
Idou thērion tetarton. Mēnyei ton Alexandron; epei kai epi tou andriantos, sidērǭ auton apeikase; kai tēn autēn hermēneusas ho prophētēs, hōsper ge phēsin ho sidēros leptynei kai damazei panta, houtō panta leptynei kai damasei; dia touto kai entautha thēriǭ men parebalen, akolouthōs tois proterois, hina tēn basileian sēmanę̄; apo de tēs diaphoras tēs pros ta prolabonta, exaireton mēnyei.
"Behold a fourth beast." He indicates Alexander; since in the case of the statue too he likened him to iron, and, interpreting it, the prophet says that as iron crushes and subdues all things, so he will crush all things and subdue them. For this reason here too he compared him to a beast, in keeping with the earlier ones, so as to signify the kingdom; but by its difference from those before he indicates its pre-eminence.
7.16Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Περισσῶς παρὰ πάντα. Ἀντὶ τοῦ μετὰ πλείονος περιουσίας βασιλεύσει, πάσης ἐλπίδος ὀξύτερον τὰ κατὰ πόλεμον ἀνύων.
Perissōs para panta. Anti tou meta pleionos periousias basileusei, pasēs elpidos oxyteron ta kata polemon anyōn.
"Exceedingly, beyond all." Meaning that he reigned with greater abundance, accomplishing his wars more swiftly than all hope.
7.17Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Καὶ αὐτὸ διαφέρον περισσῶς. Οὐδεμία φησὶν ἡ σύγκρισις τοῖς λοιποῖς πρὸς τοῦτο· ἐν δώδεκα γὰρ ἔτεσιν ἀρξάμενος ὁ Ἀλέξανδρος ἀπὸ τῆς Μακεδονίας ἄχρι τῆς Περσίδος καὶ Αἰγύπτου διέδραμεν, οὐδὲν κωλυόμενος ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀνθισταμένων ἰσχύος ἰσχυρῶς· σκοπεῖν δὲ ἔνεστιν, ὅπως ἄχρι τῶν ῥηθέντων ἐθεάσατο μὲν τῶν βασιλέων τὴν διαδοχὴν μετά τινος περιουσίας· τὰ δὲ μετὰ ταῦτα ἅπαντα τὸν λόγον ἔχει συντείνοντα εἰς τὸν λαόν.
Kai auto diapheron perissōs. Oudemia phēsin hē synkrisis tois loipois pros touto; en dōdeka gar etesin arxamenos ho Alexandros apo tēs Makedonias achri tēs Persidos kai Aigyptou diedramen, ouden kōlyomenos hypo tēs tōn anthistamenōn ischyos ischyrōs; skopein de enestin, hopōs achri tōn rhēthentōn etheasato men tōn basileōn tēn diadochēn meta tinos periousias; ta de meta tauta hapanta ton logon echei synteinonta eis ton laon.
"And it was exceedingly different." There is no comparison at all, he says, between the others and this one; for in twelve years Alexander, starting from Macedonia, ran across as far as Persia and Egypt, unhindered by the strength of his opponents. But one must observe how, up to what was said, he saw the succession of the kings with a certain abundance; but all that follows has its account directed to the people.
7.19Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Ἰδοὺ κέρας ἕτερον μικρὸν ἀνέβη ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν. Λέγει μὲν τὸν ἐπιφανῆ Ἀντίοχον· δέκατος γὰρ οὗτος ἀπὸ Ἀλεξάνδρου· βούλεται δὲ εἰπεῖν ὅτι θαυμάζοντί μοι τὰ πρότερα, ἕτερον παραδοξότερον ἐφαίνετο· ἀθρόον γὰρ ἀνέφυ κέρας μικρόν, εἶτα κατὰ μέρος αὐξανόμενον, ἰσοῦτο τοῖς λοιποῖς· τὸ γὰρ ἀνέβαινεν ἵνα δείξῃ τὴν ἐξουσίαν τὴν κατὰ μέρος προσγινομένην· καὶ ὡς τῷ χρόνῳ πρόεισιν εἰς ἔσχατον ἐλάσει κακίας· τὸ δὲ ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν λέγει, οὐχ ἵνα σημάνῃ ὅτι τῶν δέκα βασιλέων κρατούντων βασιλεύσει μέσος, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα δείξῃ ὅτι τῆς βασιλείας συνεστώσης τῆς μακεδονικῆς ὀφθήσεται οὗτος, τοὺς πώποτε κακίᾳ ὑπερβαλόμενος· οὕτω γὰρ καὶ γέγονεν· οὐκ εὐθὺς εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν προσελθὼν διέθηκεν ἰουδαίους τὰ χείριστα, εἰ καὶ πρὸς ἑλληνικὸν τύπον μεταθεῖναι τὰ πράγματα ἐβούλετο· ἀλλὰ τοῦ Μενελάου πρὸς τὸν Ἰάσονα διαγωνισαμένου περὶ τῆς ἱερωσύνης, ταραχῆς τε ἐκ τούτου συμβάσης, δείσας περὶ τῶν ὅλων ὁ Ἀντίοχος, αἰγυπτίους καταστρεφόμενος, οὐ μόνον κακῶς διέθηκε τὴν πόλιν, ἀλλὰ καὶ εἰς ἑλληνικὸν χαρακτῆρα μεταρρυθμίζειν ἰουδαίους ἐπειρᾶτο.
Idou keras heteron mikron anebē en mesǭ autōn. Legei men ton epiphanē Antiochon; dekatos gar houtos apo Alexandrou; bouletai de eipein hoti thaumazonti moi ta protera, heteron paradoxoteron ephaineto; athroon gar anephy keras mikron, eita kata meros auxanomenon, isouto tois loipois; to gar anebainen hina deixę̄ tēn exousian tēn kata meros prosginomenēn; kai hōs tǭ chronǭ proeisin eis eschaton elasei kakias; to de en mesǭ autōn legei, ouch hina sēmanę̄ hoti tōn deka basileōn kratountōn basileusei mesos, all᾽ hina deixę̄ hoti tēs basileias synestōsēs tēs makedonikēs ophthēsetai houtos, tous pōpote kakią hyperbalomenos; houtō gar kai gegonen; ouk euthys eis tēn archēn proselthōn diethēken ioudaious ta cheirista, ei kai pros hellēnikon typon metatheinai ta pragmata ebouleto; alla tou Menelaou pros ton Iasona diagōnisamenou peri tēs hierōsynēs, tarachēs te ek toutou symbasēs, deisas peri tōn holōn ho Antiochos, aigyptious katastrephomenos, ou monon kakōs diethēke tēn polin, alla kai eis hellēnikon charaktēra metarrythmizein ioudaious epeirato.
"Behold another horn, a small one, came up among them." He means Antiochus Epiphanes; for he was the tenth from Alexander. He wants to say that while I was wondering at the earlier things, another, more wonderful, appeared; for suddenly a small horn sprang up, then, growing by degrees, it became equal to the rest. For "it came up" is to show the authority acquired by degrees, and how in time he would advance to the extreme limit of wickedness. And he says "among them" not to signify that he reigned in the middle of the ten kings, but to show that while the Macedonian kingdom still stood, this one would appear, surpassing all who ever lived in wickedness. And so it happened: on first coming to rule he did not at once treat the Jews worst, even though he wanted to change their affairs to a Greek pattern; but when Menelaus contended with Jason for the priesthood, and disturbance arose from this, Antiochus, fearing for the whole, as he was subduing the Egyptians, not only treated the city badly but also tried to remould the Jews to a Greek character.
7.20Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Τρία κέρατα τῶν ἔμπροσθεν αὐτοῦ ἐξερριζώθη. Τουτέστι τριῶν βασιλέων ἀλλαγὴν καθεῖλε· τὰς γὰρ Ἀσίας ἀρχάς, εἷλε πέρσας, αἰγυπτίους, ἰουδαίους· καὶ διεδέξατο μὲν Σέλευκον, κατέσχε δὲ αὐτὸς τῆς Ἀσίας· καὶ μάρτυς ἡ τῶν Μακκαβαίων βίβλος· ὅθεν ἐγώ γε θαυμάζω, ὅπως πρὸς οὕτω σαφῆ ἱστορίαν ἀνθιστάμενος ὁ Ἀπολινάριος, εἰς τὴν τοῦ ἀντιχρίστου παρουσίαν ἕλκειν βιάζεται τὰ ῥήματα. — Ἀλλὰ Εὐδόξιος τὴν ὑπὸ σοῦ ῥηθεῖσαν ἑρμηνείαν, Πολυχρόνιε, Πορφυρίου ἔφησεν εἶναι τοῦ ματαιόφρονος.
Tria kerata tōn emprosthen autou exerrizōthē. Toutesti triōn basileōn allagēn katheile; tas gar Asias archas, heile persas, aigyptious, ioudaious; kai diedexato men Seleukon, katesche de autos tēs Asias; kai martys hē tōn Makkabaiōn biblos; hothen egō ge thaumazō, hopōs pros houtō saphē historian anthistamenos ho Apolinarios, eis tēn tou antichristou parousian helkein biazetai ta rhēmata. — Alla Eudoxios tēn hypo sou rhētheisan hermēneian, Polychronie, Porphyriou ephēsen einai tou mataiophronos.
"Three of the horns before it were plucked up." That is, he overthrew three kings; for he took the Asian rule, and seized the Persians, the Egyptians, and the Jews; and he succeeded Seleucus, and himself held Asia, as the book of the Maccabees bears witness. Hence I am amazed how Apollinarius, setting himself against so clear a history, forces the words to refer to the coming of the Antichrist. — But Eudoxius, O Polychronius, said that the interpretation you have given is that of Porphyry the madman.
7.21Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Ἰδοὺ ὀφθαλμοί. Τὴν μὲν τῶν λοιπῶν ἰσχὺν ἐν κεφαλαίῳ περιέλαβε· τὰ δὲ κατὰ ἰουδαίους, λοιπὸν μετὰ ἀκριβείας ἐξηγεῖται, οὐ τὰς πράξεις μόνον λέγων τοῦ Ἀντιόχου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν γνώμην, ἀφ᾽ ἧς ἐπὶ τὴν παρανομίαν ὤλισθεν· ὀφθαλμοὶ γάρ φησιν, ὡσεὶ ὀφθαλμοὶ ἀνθρώπου· τῆς συνηθείας φησὶν ἐκτὸς τὰ παρὰ τούτου πραττόμενα· ὡς γὰρ οὐ κατὰ φύσιν ἐστὶ κέρας ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχειν ἀνθρώπου, οὕτως οὐδὲ ἀνθρωπίνου λογισμοῦ τοσαύτῃ ὠμότητι κατὰ τοῦ ὁμοφύλου χρήσασθαι.
Idou ophthalmoi. Tēn men tōn loipōn ischyn en kephalaiǭ perielabe; ta de kata ioudaious, loipon meta akribeias exēgeitai, ou tas praxeis monon legōn tou Antiochou, alla kai tēn gnōmēn, aph᾽ hēs epi tēn paranomian ōlisthen; ophthalmoi gar phēsin, hōsei ophthalmoi anthrōpou; tēs synētheias phēsin ektos ta para toutou prattomena; hōs gar ou kata physin esti keras ophthalmous echein anthrōpou, houtōs oude anthrōpinou logismou tosautę̄ ōmotēti kata tou homophylou chrēsasthai.
"Behold eyes." He summed up the strength of the rest in brief; but what concerns the Jews he now explains with exactness, telling not only the deeds of Antiochus but also his purpose, from which he slid into lawlessness. For "eyes," he says, "like the eyes of a man": what he did was beyond custom; for as it is not natural for a horn to have the eyes of a man, so it does not belong to human reason to use such cruelty against one's own kin.
7.24Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Στόμα λαλοῦν μεγάλα. Ἀντὶ τοῦ ὑπερήφανα, καὶ λόγους κατὰ θεοῦ ἀκοντιζομένους· ὅπερ οὐ τοῦ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ φύσιν ἐπιγινώσκοντος ἦν ἴδιον, ἀλλὰ τοῦ θηριώδη καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπινον κεκτημένου λογισμόν.
Stoma laloun megala. Anti tou hyperēphana, kai logous kata theou akontizomenous; hoper ou tou tēn heautou physin epiginōskontos ēn idion, alla tou thēriōdē kai ouk anthrōpinon kektēmenou logismon.
"A mouth speaking great things." That is, arrogant words, hurled against God; which was not the mark of one who recognizes his own nature, but of one possessing a beastlike and not a human reasoning.
7.25Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Καὶ ἐποίει πόλεμον πρὸς ἁγίους. Τουτέστι πρὸς ἰουδαίων τοὺς εὐλαβεστάτους.
Kai epoiei polemon pros hagious. Toutesti pros ioudaiōn tous eulabestatous.
"And it made war against the holy ones." That is, against the most devout of the Jews.
7.26Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Ἐθεώρουν ἕως ὅτου θρόνοι ἐτέθησαν. Οὐ τὰ δεινὰ μόνον βλέπει, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν ἄνωθεν ἐσομένην τῷ λαῷ βοήθειαν.
Etheōroun heōs hotou thronoi etethēsan. Ou ta deina monon blepei, alla kai tēn anōthen esomenēn tǭ laǭ boētheian.
"I watched until thrones were set." He sees not only the terrible things, but also the help from above that would come to the people.
7.28Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):11
Καὶ παλαιὸς ἡμερῶν. Παλαιὸν δὲ ἡμερῶν λέγει τὸν θεόν· τουτέστιν εἶδον τὸν τῶν αἰώνων δεσπότην, τὸν ἀΐδιον ἔχοντα τὴν φύσιν, καὶ ἀνώτερον πάντων τυγχάνοντα.
Kai palaios hēmerōn. Palaion de hēmerōn legei ton theon; toutestin eidon ton tōn aiōnōn despotēn, ton aïdion echonta tēn physin, kai anōteron pantōn tynchanonta.
"And the Ancient of Days." By "Ancient of Days" he means God; that is, he saw the Master of the ages, who has an eternal nature and is above all.
7.30Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Παλαιὸς ἡμερῶν ἐκάθετο. Ἵνα τὸ πρέπον τῇ θείᾳ φύσει φυλάξῃ.
Palaios hēmerōn ekatheto. Hina to prepon tę̄ theią physei phylaxę̄.
"The Ancient of Days sat." So as to keep what befits the divine nature.
7.31Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Τὸ ἔνδυμα αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ χιὼν λευκόν. Ἵνα τῆς φύσεως σημάνῃ τὸ ἀσύγκριτον· πάντα δὲ ὡς ἐπὶ δικαστηρίου σχηματίζει, οὐ τῆς φύσεως μόνον τὸ ἀπρόσιτον διδάσκων, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς κρίσεως τὸ καθαρὸν παριστῶν.
To endyma autou hōsei chiōn leukon. Hina tēs physeōs sēmanę̄ to asynkriton; panta de hōs epi dikastēriou schēmatizei, ou tēs physeōs monon to aprositon didaskōn, alla kai tēs kriseōs to katharon paristōn.
"His garment was white as snow." To signify the incomparable nature; and he shapes everything as in a law court, teaching not only the unapproachableness of the nature but also presenting the purity of the judgment.
7.32Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Οἱ τροχοὶ αὐτοῦ πῦρ φλέγον. Ἐπὶ τιμωρίᾳ γὰρ ἀφίκετο.
Hoi trochoi autou pyr phlegon. Epi timōrią gar aphiketo.
"Its wheels were burning fire." For he had come for punishment.
7.33Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Ποταμὸς πυρὸς εἷλκεν. Οὔ γε πόνου δεῖται πρὸς ἀναίρεσιν τῶν ὑπευθύνων, ἀλλὰ μετ᾽ εὐκολίας ἅπαντα διαπράττεται.
Potamos pyros heilken. Ou ge ponou deitai pros anairesin tōn hypeuthynōn, alla met᾽ eukolias hapanta diaprattetai.
"A river of fire was drawn." He needs no toil to destroy the guilty, but accomplishes everything with ease.
7.34Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Ἐκπορευόμενος ἔμπροσθεν αὐτοῦ. Διὰ μὲν τῶν προτέρων τὸ τῆς φύσεως ἐξαίρετον μηνύει· διὰ δὲ τούτων, τὸν κατὰ πάντων δεσπότην γνωρίζει· τὰς γὰρ ἀγγελικὰς λέγει δυνάμεις.
Ekporeuomenos emprosthen autou. Dia men tōn proterōn to tēs physeōs exaireton mēnyei; dia de toutōn, ton kata pantōn despotēn gnōrizei; tas gar angelikas legei dynameis.
"Going out before him." By the earlier words he indicates the pre-eminence of the nature, by these he makes known the Master of all; for he means the angelic powers.
7.35Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Μυρίαι μυριάδες παρειστήκεισαν. Οὐχ ὡς τινῶν καθεσθέντων· δῆλον γὰρ ὡς θεὸς ὁ κρίνων· ἐνταῦθα κριτήριον λέγει τὴν τοῦ δικαστηρίου κατασκευήν· τὸ δὲ ἐκάθισεν, ἀντὶ τοῦ ηὐτρεπίσθη. Καὶ μετ᾽ ὀλίγα· οἱ δὲ λειτουργοῦντες εἰς τὴν προκειμένην ἠπείγοντο χρείαν· πρός τε εἰσαγωγὴν τῶν δικαζομένων, καὶ κόλασιν τῶν ὑπευθύνων, καὶ γραφὴν τῶν πραττομένων· δι᾽ ὅλου γὰρ ὡς ἐπὶ δικαστηρίου σχηματίζει, τὸν κριτήν, τοὺς παρεστῶτας, τοὺς δημίους, τοὺς ταχυγράφους, τοὺς κρινομένους, ὡς ἂν ἐπὶ τὸ μεγαλοφυέστερον ἐξάρῃ τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων τὸν νοῦν.
Myriai myriades pareistēkeisan. Ouch hōs tinōn kathesthentōn; dēlon gar hōs theos ho krinōn; entautha kritērion legei tēn tou dikastēriou kataskeuēn; to de ekathisen, anti tou ēutrepisthē. Kai met᾽ oliga; hoi de leitourgountes eis tēn prokeimenēn ēpeigonto chreian; pros te eisagōgēn tōn dikazomenōn, kai kolasin tōn hypeuthynōn, kai graphēn tōn prattomenōn; di᾽ holou gar hōs epi dikastēriou schēmatizei, ton kritēn, tous parestōtas, tous dēmious, tous tachygraphous, tous krinomenous, hōs an epi to megalophyesteron exarę̄ tōn entynchanontōn ton noun.
"Ten thousand times ten thousand stood before him." Not as though some sat; for it is clear that God is the one who judges. Here he calls the arrangement of the law court "the judgment"; and "it sat" in the sense of "it was made ready." And a little after: Those who serve were busy with the needs at hand: bringing in those on trial, punishing the guilty, and recording what was done. For throughout he shapes it as in a law court: the judge, the attendants, the executioners, the stenographers, those being judged, so as to lift the mind of the readers to something more magnificent.
7.36Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Βίβλοι ἀνεῴχθησαν. Καθ᾽ ὅλου σώζων τὴν εἰκόνα, ὥσπερ ἀπὸ τῶν βιβλίων λέγει τήν τε παρανομίαν τῶν κακῶν ἐλέγχεσθαι.
Bibloi aneǭchthēsan. Kath᾽ holou sōzōn tēn eikona, hōsper apo tōn bibliōn legei tēn te paranomian tōn kakōn elenchesthai.
"Books were opened." Keeping the image throughout, he says that the lawlessness of evil deeds is exposed as from books.
7.37Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Ἕως ἀνῃρέθη τὸ θηρίον. Ἑώρων ὡς ὁ μὲν ἐλάλει ὑπερηφανίας μεστά· ἐν τοσούτῳ δὲ τότε τὸ κριτήριον συνεκροτήθη, καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἀναγνωσμάτων ἀπόφασις ἐξηνέχθη, οὐ κατὰ τοῦ κέρατος μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ κατὰ παντὸς τοῦ θηρίου· οὐ γὰρ μόνον ὁ Ἀντίοχος ἀπώλετο, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἡ μακεδονικὴ ἀρχὴ πᾶσα κατελύθη.
Heōs anę̄rethē to thērion. Heōrōn hōs ho men elalei hyperēphanias mesta; en tosoutǭ de tote to kritērion synekrotēthē, kai ek tōn anagnōsmatōn apophasis exēnechthē, ou kata tou keratos monon, alla kai kata pantos tou thēriou; ou gar monon ho Antiochos apōleto, alla kai hē makedonikē archē pasa katelythē.
"Until the beast was slain." I saw how, while he was speaking words full of arrogance, at that very moment the judgment was convened, and the sentence was brought out from the reading, not only against the horn but against the whole beast; for not only did Antiochus perish, but the whole Macedonian empire was destroyed.
7.38Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ ἐδόθη εἰς καῦσιν πυρός. Οὐ τὸ εἶδος τῆς τιμωρίας μηνύει, ἀλλὰ τὸ σφοδρὸν τῆς ἀποφάσεως· καὶ γὰρ ἔθος τῇ θείᾳ γραφῇ πῦρ λέγειν τὴν δίκην· ὡς τὸ ἔπεσε πῦρ ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς, καὶ οὐκ εἶδον τὸν ἥλιον.
To sōma autou edothē eis kausin pyros. Ou to eidos tēs timōrias mēnyei, alla to sphodron tēs apophaseōs; kai gar ethos tę̄ theią graphę̄ pyr legein tēn dikēn; hōs to epese pyr ep᾽ autous, kai ouk eidon ton hēlion.
"Its body was given to the burning of fire." He does not indicate the form of the punishment, but the vehemence of the sentence; for divine Scripture customarily calls the penalty "fire": as "Fire fell on them, and they did not see the sun."
7.39Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Τῶν λοιπῶν θηρίων ἡ ἀρχή. Τουτέστι τῆς λεαίνης, τῆς ἄρκτου, τῆς παρδάλεως, μετὰ τοῦ παρηλλαγμένου θηρίου καὶ φοβεροῦ, ἅπερ ἐσήμανε τὰς προειρημένας βασιλείας. Ἐπεὶ μηδέ τι τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων βέβαιον, ἀλλὰ ταχεῖαν τὴν εἰς τοὐναντίον δεχόμενον μεταβολήν.
Tōn loipōn thēriōn hē archē. Toutesti tēs leainēs, tēs arktou, tēs pardaleōs, meta tou parēllagmenou thēriou kai phoberou, haper esēmane tas proeirēmenas basileias. Epei mēde ti tōn anthrōpinōn bebaion, alla tacheian tēn eis tounantion dechomenon metabolēn.
"The dominion of the rest of the beasts." That is, of the lioness, the bear, and the leopard, with the strange and fearsome beast, which signified the kingdoms mentioned before. Since nothing human is secure, but quickly receives the change to the opposite.
7.40Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Καὶ μακρότης ζωῆς ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἕως καιροῦ. Ταῦτα δέ φησιν ἔσται οὐκ ἐπὶ προτέρου ἢ δευτέρου ἢ δεκάτου βασιλέως· ἐπὶ πλεῖστον γὰρ χρόνον διατεθήσεται ἡ μακεδονικὴ ἀρχή· τὸ ἕως καιροῦ προσέθηκεν, ἵνα εἴπῃ οὐκ εἰς τὸν ἅπαντα αἰῶνα διαρκέσει, τιμωρηθήσεται δὲ τὸ τελευταῖον.
Kai makrotēs zōēs edothē autois heōs kairou. Tauta de phēsin estai ouk epi proterou ē deuterou ē dekatou basileōs; epi pleiston gar chronon diatethēsetai hē makedonikē archē; to heōs kairou prosethēken, hina eipę̄ ouk eis ton hapanta aiōna diarkesei, timōrēthēsetai de to teleutaion.
"And a prolonging of life was given them until a time." These things, he says, will happen not under the first or second or tenth king; for the Macedonian empire will last a very long time. He added "until a time" to say that it will not last for all ages, but will be punished at the end.
7.42Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Ἐθεώρουν ἐν ὁράματι. Ἐν ὅσῳ φησὶ τὸ δικαστήριον ἐθεώρουν, καὶ πρὸς τὸ παράδοξον ἐξεπλήττομην τῶν γινομένων, τὴν ψῆφον, τὴν δίκην, τοῦ τυράννου τὴν ἀναίρεσιν, εἶδόν φησιν ἕτερον ἀνθρωπίνῳ σχήματι οὐ βάδην ἰόντα, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν νεφελῶν ὀχούμενον, καὶ οὐ πρὸ τοῦ δικαστηρίου στάντα, ἀκωλύτως δὲ ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν ἥκοντα τὸν κριτήν, ὃ τῆς ἀνωτάτω τιμῆς ἴδιον καθέστηκεν· οὐ ψιλὴν δὲ τὴν παρουσίαν εἶδεν, ἵνα τήν τε ἀξίαν τοῦ ὀφθέντος, καὶ τὴν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἄφιξιν μάθῃ.
Etheōroun en horamati. En hosǭ phēsi to dikastērion etheōroun, kai pros to paradoxon exeplēttomēn tōn ginomenōn, tēn psēphon, tēn dikēn, tou tyrannou tēn anairesin, eidon phēsin heteron anthrōpinǭ schēmati ou badēn ionta, epi de tōn nephelōn ochoumenon, kai ou pro tou dikastēriou stanta, akōlytōs de ep᾽ auton hēkonta ton kritēn, ho tēs anōtatō timēs idion kathestēken; ou psilēn de tēn parousian eiden, hina tēn te axian tou ophthentos, kai tēn ex ouranou aphixin mathę̄.
"I watched in the vision." While I watched the law court, he says, and was astonished at the wonder of what was happening, the sentence, the penalty, the destruction of the tyrant, I saw another in human form, not walking but borne upon the clouds, and not standing before the court, but coming without hindrance to the judge himself, which is the mark of the highest honor. And he did not see a bare presence, so that he might learn both the dignity of the one who appeared and his coming from heaven.
7.45Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Αὐτῷ ἐδόθη ἡ ἀρχή. Τουτέστι πᾶσα ἡ οἰκουμένη· οὐ γὰρ ἐν γωνίᾳ τῆς Παλαιστίνης ὥς φησι Μωϋσῆς κατέσχεν, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ πάντων προσκυνεῖται ἐξουσία αἰώνιος· οὐ τῷ τόπῳ, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῷ χρόνῳ τῆς ἀρχῆς παρίστησι τὸ μέγεθος. — Τὸ ἀτελεύτητον τῆς τιμῆς διδάσκων.
Autǭ edothē hē archē. Toutesti pasa hē oikoumenē; ou gar en gōnią tēs Palaistinēs hōs phēsi Mōÿsēs kateschen, all᾽ hypo pantōn proskyneitai exousia aiōnios; ou tǭ topǭ, alla kai tǭ chronǭ tēs archēs paristēsi to megethos. — To ateleutēton tēs timēs didaskōn.
"To him was given the dominion." That is, the whole world; for he did not hold a corner of Palestine, as Moses did, but is worshipped by all, an eternal authority. He presents the greatness of the rule not by place but also by time. — Teaching the endlessness of his honor.
7.46Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Ἔφριξε τὸ πνεῦμά μου. Τουτέστιν εἰς φόβον κατέστην, καὶ τὴν ψυχὴν ἐναγώνιος γέγονα ὥστε μοι καὶ τὴν μορφὴν ἀλλαγῆναι. — Τουτέστιν ἐν ἀπορίᾳ ἤμην τῶν ὀφθέντων, οὐκ ἔχων τῶν ὁρωμένων τὴν γνῶσιν.
Ephrixe to pneuma mou. Toutestin eis phobon katestēn, kai tēn psychēn enagōnios gegona hōste moi kai tēn morphēn allagēnai. — Toutestin en aporią ēmēn tōn ophthentōn, ouk echōn tōn horōmenōn tēn gnōsin.
"My spirit shuddered." That is, I fell into fear, and was in agony in my soul, so that my form was changed. — That is, I was at a loss about what I had seen, not having knowledge of the things seen.
7.49Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Καὶ προσῆλθον ἑνί. Τουτέστιν ἑνὶ τῶν λειτουργούντων, καὶ τὴν ἀκρίβειαν ἐζήτουν παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ· τῷ μὲν κριτῇ προσιέναι οὐκ ἐτόλμα διὰ τὸ τῆς φύσεως ἐξαίρετον καὶ τῶν ὁρωμένων τὸν φόβον· ἡ δὲ ἐπιθυμία προσιέναι αὐτὸν ἑνὶ τῶν διακονουμένων παρεσκεύαζε· μᾶλλον δὲ ὡς ὀνείροις πρὸς τὸ συμφέρον ἅπαντα ἐδείκνυτο.
Kai prosēlthon heni. Toutestin heni tōn leitourgountōn, kai tēn akribeian ezētoun par᾽ autou; tǭ men kritę̄ prosienai ouk etolma dia to tēs physeōs exaireton kai tōn horōmenōn ton phobon; hē de epithymia prosienai auton heni tōn diakonoumenōn pareskeuaze; mallon de hōs oneirois pros to sympheron hapanta edeiknyto.
"And I went up to one." That is, to one of those who served, and I sought exactness from him; for he did not dare approach the judge because of the pre-eminence of his nature and his fear of what he saw; but desire prepared him to approach one of those who served; or rather, as in dreams, everything was shown toward what was profitable.
7.50Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Καὶ εἶπέ μοι τὴν ἀκρίβειαν. Τουτέστι τὴν περὶ τῶν λόγων παρέσχε μοι σαφήνειαν, οὐδὲν τῶν ἀπορουμένων καταλιπὼν ἀνεξέταστον.
Kai eipe moi tēn akribeian. Toutesti tēn peri tōn logōn paresche moi saphēneian, ouden tōn aporoumenōn katalipōn anexetaston.
"And he told me the exactness." That is, he gave me the clear meaning of the words, leaving none of the difficulties unexamined.
7.51Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Ταῦτα τὰ θηρία τὰ μεγάλα. Ὅρα πῶς καὶ τῶν περὶ τῶν βασιλέων οὐ κατὰ μέρος διηγεῖται· οὐ γὰρ περὶ Βαβυλωνίων καὶ μήδων ἢ περσῶν ἢ μακεδόνων μανθάνειν ἐβούλετο· ἀλλ᾽ ἐπειδὴ οὐχ οἷόν τε αὐτὸν τὰ κατὰ Ἀντίοχον μαθεῖν, μὴ πᾶσαν τὴν ἀκολουθίαν ἐγνωκότα, ἀναγκαίως κἀκείνων τὴν ὄψιν δείκνυσιν.
Tauta ta thēria ta megala. Hora pōs kai tōn peri tōn basileōn ou kata meros diēgeitai; ou gar peri Babylōniōn kai mēdōn ē persōn ē makedonōn manthanein ebouleto; all᾽ epeidē ouch hoion te auton ta kata Antiochon mathein, mē pasan tēn akolouthian egnōkota, anankaiōs kakeinōn tēn opsin deiknysin.
"These great beasts." See how he does not narrate what concerns the kings in detail; for he did not wish to learn about the Babylonians and Medes or Persians or Macedonians; but since it was not possible for him to learn what concerned Antiochus without knowing the whole sequence, he necessarily shows him their vision too.
7.52Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Ἅγιοι ὑψίστου. Τουτέστιν οἱ ἐπὶ τὸν χριστὸν πιστεύοντες· οὗτοι τῶν ἀγαθῶν κοινωνήσουσι τῷ ὀφθέντι· τὸ οὖν παραλήψονται, τουτέστιν ἐν ἀπολαύσει ἔσονται· εἴπερ συμπάσχομεν κατὰ τὸν μακάριον Παῦλον, ἵνα καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν.
Hagioi hypsistou. Toutestin hoi epi ton christon pisteuontes; houtoi tōn agathōn koinōnēsousi tǭ ophthenti; to oun paralēpsontai, toutestin en apolausei esontai; eiper sympaschomen kata ton makarion Paulon, hina kai syndoxasthōmen.
"The holy ones of the Most High." That is, those who believe in Christ: these will share in the good things with the one who appeared. "They will receive," then, that is, "they will be in enjoyment"; "if indeed we suffer with him," according to the blessed Paul, "so that we may also be glorified with him."
7.53Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12
Τὸ θηρίον τὸ τέταρτον βασιλεία τετάρτη ἔσται. Οὐκέτι κοινῶς διαλέγεται περὶ τούτου ὡς καὶ περὶ τῶν λοιπῶν, ἀλλὰ μετὰ ἀκριβείας λέγει· καὶ οὐ περὶ Ἀντιόχου μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ Ἀλεξάνδρου πρότερον, εἴτουν τῆς μακεδονικῆς ἀρχῆς· ἐκείνης γὰρ ἦν καὶ ἡ τοῦ Ἀντιόχου ἀρχή· διὸ οὐδὲ περὶ τούτου μόνου διαλέγεται, ἀλλὰ περὶ πάσης τῆς βασιλείας.
To thērion to tetarton basileia tetartē estai. Ouketi koinōs dialegetai peri toutou hōs kai peri tōn loipōn, alla meta akribeias legei; kai ou peri Antiochou monon, alla kai peri Alexandrou proteron, eitoun tēs makedonikēs archēs; ekeinēs gar ēn kai hē tou Antiochou archē; dio oude peri toutou monou dialegetai, alla peri pasēs tēs basileias.
"The fourth beast will be a fourth kingdom." He no longer speaks in general about this as about the rest, but speaks with exactness; and not about Antiochus only, but about Alexander first, that is, the Macedonian empire; for the rule of Antiochus belonged to it too; therefore he speaks not only about him but about the whole kingdom.
7.54Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):12-13
Ἥτις ὑπερέξει. Τουτέστι κατὰ πολλὴν τὴν περιουσίαν περιέσται· ἐναργέστατα δὲ καταφάγεται· μονονουχὶ γὰρ ἔδειξεν αὐτόν, ὡς ἐφ᾽ ἑτοίμην ὁρμῶντα τροφήν, οὐδενὸς ἀντιστῆναι τολμῶντος. — Τῆς ἐξουσίας δείκνυσι τὴν περιουσίαν.
Hētis hyperexei. Toutesti kata pollēn tēn periousian periestai; enargestata de kataphagetai; mononouchi gar edeixen auton, hōs eph᾽ hetoimēn hormōnta trophēn, oudenos antistēnai tolmōntos. — Tēs exousias deiknysi tēn periousian.
"Which will surpass." That is, it will prevail with great abundance; and "it will devour" most vividly; for it all but showed it rushing on ready food, with no one daring to resist. — It shows the abundance of its authority.
7.55Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Τὰ δέκα κέρατα αὐτοῦ. Ἐγνώρισέ μοι φησίν, ὡς κατὰ διαδοχὴν ἔσονται δέκα τὸν ἀριθμὸν οἱ κρατοῦντες.
Ta deka kerata autou. Egnōrise moi phēsin, hōs kata diadochēn esontai deka ton arithmon hoi kratountes.
"Its ten horns." He made known to me, he says, that those who rule in succession will be ten in number.
7.56Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Ὃς ὑπεροίσει κακοὺς πάντας. Τουτέστιν ἅπασι τοῖς λοιποῖς εἰς κακίαν συγκρινόμενος, μείζων ὀφθήσεται.
Hos hyperoisei kakous pantas. Toutestin hapasi tois loipois eis kakian synkrinomenos, meizōn ophthēsetai.
"Who will surpass all in evils." That is, compared with all the rest in wickedness, he will appear greater.
7.57Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Καὶ τρεῖς βασιλεῖς ταπεινώσει. Τουτέστι περιέσται τριῶν, ὡς ἔμπροσθεν εἴρηται.
Kai treis basileis tapeinōsei. Toutesti periestai triōn, hōs emprosthen eirētai.
"And he will humble three kings." That is, he will prevail over three, as was said before.
7.58Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Λόγους πρὸς τὸν ὕψιστον λαλήσει. Ἵνα εἴπῃ ἀλαζονεύσεται κατὰ τοῦ θεοῦ.
Logous pros ton hypsiston lalēsei. Hina eipę̄ alazoneusetai kata tou theou.
"He will speak words against the Most High." To say that he will boast against God.
7.59Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Τοὺς ἁγίους ὑψίστου πλανήσει. Ἀντὶ τοῦ εἰς ταλαιπωρίαν καταστήσει ἰουδαίους· τοὺς γὰρ ἐπὶ θεὸν ἐλπίζοντας καὶ τοῦ νόμου φύλακας φαίνεσθαι βουλομένους, τούτους διέθηκε τὰ χείριστα.
Tous hagious hypsistou planēsei. Anti tou eis talaipōrian katastēsei ioudaious; tous gar epi theon elpizontas kai tou nomou phylakas phainesthai boulomenous, toutous diethēke ta cheirista.
"He will wear out the holy ones of the Most High." Meaning he will bring the Jews to misery; for those who hoped in God and wished to appear guardians of the law, these he treated worst.
7.61Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Ὑπονοήσει τοῦ ἀλλοιῶσαι καιρούς. Θήσεταί φησι σπουδὴν ὡς μεταβαλεῖν τὴν ἰουδαϊκὴν εὐταξίαν· καιρὸν δὲ λέγει τὸν ἰουδαϊκὸν ἐν ᾧ περιεῖχον τὸν ναὸν καὶ θυσίας ἐτέλουν.
Hyponoēsei tou alloiōsai kairous. Thēsetai phēsi spoudēn hōs metabalein tēn ioudaïkēn eutaxian; kairon de legei ton ioudaïkon en hǭ perieichon ton naon kai thysias eteloun.
"He will think to change the times." He will make it his effort, he says, to change the Jewish order; by "time" he means the Jewish time in which they held the temple and performed sacrifices.
7.62Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Καὶ νόμον. Τῆς πολιτείας τὴν κατάστασιν, ἐν ᾗ καὶ τῆς ἱερατείας ἡ τάξις ἐκρίνετο.
Kai nomon. Tēs politeias tēn katastasin, en hę̄ kai tēs hierateias hē taxis ekrineto.
"And law." The constitution of the commonwealth, in which the order of the priesthood too was determined.
7.63Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Δοθήσεται ἐν χειρὶ αὐτοῦ. Οὐκ ἄνωθέν φησι κωλύσει αὐτὸν θεὸς εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν παρελθεῖν, ἢ παρελθόντα μὴ πρᾶξαι κατὰ πρόθεσιν· ἀλλὰ συγχωρήσει μὲν αὐτὸν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἐνδείξασθαι γνώμην· οὐ μὴν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ παντελὲς ἐμπαροινεῖν τοῖς ἁγίοις ἐάσει· τὸ δὲ δοθήσεται, τήν τε παρὰ θεοῦ συγχώρησιν διδάσκει, καὶ τὴν ἄνωθεν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐνεχθησομένην τιμωρίαν· καιρὸν δὲ λέγει τὸ ἑξάμηνον.
Dothēsetai en cheiri autou. Ouk anōthen phēsi kōlysei auton theos eis tēn archēn parelthein, ē parelthonta mē praxai kata prothesin; alla synchōrēsei men auton tēn heautou endeixasthai gnōmēn; ou mēn auton eis to panteles emparoinein tois hagiois easei; to de dothēsetai, tēn te para theou synchōrēsin didaskei, kai tēn anōthen kat᾽ autou enechthēsomenēn timōrian; kairon de legei to hexamēnon.
"It will be given into his hand." God will not prevent him from above, he says, from coming to rule, or, once come, from failing to act according to his purpose; but he will allow him to show his own intention, yet will not let him ruin the holy ones completely. And "it will be given" teaches both the permission from God and the punishment that will be brought on him from above; by "time" he means the six months.
7.64Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Ἡ βασιλεία κ. τ. λ. Οὐκέτι μερικὴ βασιλεία, ἀλλ᾽ ὑποκάτω παντὸς τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ἵνα ἡ πᾶσα κτίσις νοηθῇ. — Ὁ δὲ θεός φησι ταῦτα ποιῶν, πάντων δεσπόζει, οὔτε ἀπὸ διαδοχῆς ἔχων τὴν ἐξουσίαν· πάντων γὰρ τυγχάνει δημιουργός· οὔτε ἑτέροις ταύτης παραχωρῶν· ἀΐδιος γάρ ἐστι τὴν φύσιν. — Γνωρίζει δέ φησι τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτὰ τὰ πράγματα.
Hē basileia k. t. l. Ouketi merikē basileia, all᾽ hypokatō pantos tou ouranou, hina hē pasa ktisis noēthę̄. — Ho de theos phēsi tauta poiōn, pantōn despozei, oute apo diadochēs echōn tēn exousian; pantōn gar tynchanei dēmiourgos; oute heterois tautēs parachōrōn; aïdios gar esti tēn physin. — Gnōrizei de phēsi tēn basileian auta ta pragmata.
"And the kingdom," and so on. No longer a partial kingdom, but one under the whole heaven, so that the whole creation may understand. — God, he says, who makes these things, is master of all, neither having his authority by succession, for he is the creator of all, nor yielding it to others, for he is eternal in nature. — And the events themselves make known the kingdom.
7.65Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Ἕως ὧδε τὸ πέρας τοῦ λόγου. Ἄχρι τούτων μοί φησιν ἡρμήνευσεν ὁ ἄγγελος· τὰ δὲ κατὰ τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, ὃς ἐπὶ τῶν νεφελῶν ἐρχόμενος ὤφθη, εἰπεῖν οὐκ ἠβουλήθη.
Heōs hōde to peras tou logou. Achri toutōn moi phēsin hērmēneusen ho angelos; ta de kata ton huion tou anthrōpou, hos epi tōn nephelōn erchomenos ōphthē, eipein ouk ēboulēthē.
"Here is the end of the word." Up to this point, he says, the angel interpreted for me; but what concerned the son of man, who appeared coming on the clouds, he did not wish to tell.
7.66Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Οἱ διαλογισμοί μου συνετάρασσόν με. Διεγερθείς φησι καὶ διαλογιζόμενος τῶν ὀφθέντων τὸ παράδοξον, καὶ ἅπερ πείσονται οἱ ἰουδαῖοι, ἐν ἀθυμίᾳ καθέστην.
Hoi dialogismoi mou synetarasson me. Diegertheis phēsi kai dialogizomenos tōn ophthentōn to paradoxon, kai haper peisontai hoi ioudaioi, en athymią kathestēn.
"My thoughts troubled me." Roused, he says, and reflecting on the strangeness of what was seen and what the Jews would suffer, I fell into despondency.
7.67Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Ἡ μορφή μου ἠλλοιώθη. Τοσαύτῃ δέ φησι τῇ ἀθυμίᾳ κατεσχέθην, ὥστε μοι καὶ τὴν ὄψιν τοῦ σώματος ἀλλοιωθῆναι· ἔθος γὰρ τοῖς δικαίοις οἰκειοῦσθαι τοῦ πλήθους τὰς συμφοράς.
Hē morphē mou ēlloiōthē. Tosautę̄ de phēsi tę̄ athymią kateschethēn, hōste moi kai tēn opsin tou sōmatos alloiōthēnai; ethos gar tois dikaiois oikeiousthai tou plēthous tas symphoras.
"My appearance was changed." I was held by such despondency, he says, that even the look of my body was changed; for the righteous are accustomed to make the misfortunes of the multitude their own.
7.68Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Τὸ ῥῆμα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ μου συνετήρησα. Οὐκ ἐξήγγειλά φησι ταῦτα τῷ λαῷ, ὡς ἂν μὴ καταπλαγέντες τὰ ἐσόμενα ἀποτραπῶσι πρὸς τὴν ἄνοδον· καὶ τῆς ἀδείας αὐτοῖς δοθείσης, ἐθελοκακήσαντες μείνωσιν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀλλοτρίας.
To rhēma en tę̄ kardią mou synetērēsa. Ouk exēngeila phēsi tauta tǭ laǭ, hōs an mē kataplagentes ta esomena apotrapōsi pros tēn anodon; kai tēs adeias autois dotheisēs, ethelokakēsantes meinōsin epi tēs allotrias.
"I kept the word in my heart." I did not announce these things to the people, he says, lest, terrified at what was to come, they turn back from the return, and, the freedom being given them, they willingly remain in the foreign land.
Chapter 8
8.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Μετὰ τὴν ὀφθεῖσάν μοι τὴν ἀρχήν. Τουτέστι μεθ᾽ ἣν εἶδον ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ ἔτει τοῦ Βαλτάσαρ.
Meta tēn ophtheisan moi tēn archēn. Toutesti meth᾽ hēn eidon en tǭ prōtǭ etei tou Baltasar.
"After the one that appeared to me at the beginning." That is, after the one I saw in the first year of Belshazzar.
8.2Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Εἶδον ἐν ὁράματι. Εἶδον δέ φησιν ἐν τῷ ἐμαυτοῦ τυγχάνων οἴκῳ, ἐν δεδομημένῳ ἐν τῇ περσικῇ χώρᾳ. Αἰλαμ πρόγονοι περσῶν· Ἐλυμαῖοι γὰρ οἱ πέρσαι καλοῦνται· ἔοικε δὲ οὐχ ἁπλῶς οὔτε τόπου οὔτε τῆς χώρας οὔτε τοῦ οἴκου μνημονεύσαι. Καὶ μετ᾽ ὀλίγα. Καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν οὖν ὁ προφήτης διάγων, καὶ φιλόθεος ὤν, καὶ ἀνιώμενος ἐπὶ ταῖς κατεχούσαις αὐτοὺς συμφοραῖς, εἶδε τὴν προτέραν ὀπτασίαν, ἐν ᾗ ἔμαθεν ὡς χείριστα πείσονται οἱ ὁμόφυλοι· ἐν δὲ τούτοις τυγχάνων ἐδεῖτο αὖθις ἀκριβῶς μαθεῖν τὰ μετὰ ταῦτα, καὶ τίς ἐστι τῶν πραγμάτων ἡ κατάστασις, ἐν ᾗπερ ταῦτα πείσονται. — Τουτέστι τὴν ἀκριβῆ τῶν πραγμάτων κατάστασιν ἔμαθον· τὸ γὰρ εἶδον ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀκριβῶς ἔμαθον ἔφη· οὐ κατὰ φαντασίαν εἶδον τὰ ἐσόμενα, ἀλλὰ τοῦ θεοῦ ἀποκαλύψαντος.
Eidon en horamati. Eidon de phēsin en tǭ emautou tynchanōn oikǭ, en dedomēmenǭ en tę̄ persikę̄ chōrą. Ailam progonoi persōn; Elymaioi gar hoi persai kalountai; eoike de ouch haplōs oute topou oute tēs chōras oute tou oikou mnēmoneusai. Kai met᾽ oliga. Kath᾽ heauton oun ho prophētēs diagōn, kai philotheos ōn, kai aniōmenos epi tais katechousais autous symphorais, eide tēn proteran optasian, en hę̄ emathen hōs cheirista peisontai hoi homophyloi; en de toutois tynchanōn edeito authis akribōs mathein ta meta tauta, kai tis esti tōn pragmatōn hē katastasis, en hę̄per tauta peisontai. — Toutesti tēn akribē tōn pragmatōn katastasin emathon; to gar eidon anti tou akribōs emathon ephē; ou kata phantasian eidon ta esomena, alla tou theou apokalypsantos.
"I saw in a vision." I saw, he says, while I was in my own house, built in the Persian country. Elymaeans are the ancestors of the Persians; for the Persians are called Elymaeans; and it seems he mentions neither the place nor the country nor the house without reason. And a little after: The prophet, then, living by himself, being God-loving and grieved at the misfortunes that held them, saw the earlier vision, in which he learned that his kinsmen would suffer the worst; and in these circumstances he asked again to learn exactly what would follow, and what the condition of affairs would be in which they would suffer these things. — That is, he learned the exact condition of affairs; for "I saw" stands for "I learned exactly"; he did not see what was to come by fantasy, but by God's revelation.
8.3Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Καὶ ἤμην ἐπὶ τοῦ Οὐβάλ. Ἐδόκουν φησὶ πρὸς παραρρέοντι ὕδατι ἑστάναι· εἶτ᾽ ἀθρόως ἀπιδὼν πόρρωθεν ἑώρων πρὸς τοῦ ποταμοῦ κριὸν οὐ κατὰ τὴν τῶν λοιπῶν συνήθειαν, κέρατα δὲ ἔχοντα δύο μείζονα ἢ κατὰ κριοῦ φύσιν· μηνύει δὲ τὴν μήδων καὶ περσῶν ἀρχήν.
Kai ēmēn epi tou Oubal. Edokoun phēsi pros pararreonti hydati hestanai; eit᾽ athroōs apidōn porrōthen heōrōn pros tou potamou krion ou kata tēn tōn loipōn synētheian, kerata de echonta dyo meizona ē kata kriou physin; mēnyei de tēn mēdōn kai persōn archēn.
"And I was by the Ubal." I seemed, he says, to stand by flowing water; then suddenly, looking up, I saw from afar, by the river, a ram, not according to the usual appearance of the others, but having two horns greater than accords with a ram's nature: it indicates the rule of the Medes and Persians.
8.4Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Τὸ ἓν ὑψηλότερον τοῦ ἑτέρου. Οὐκ ἴσα μεγέθει φησὶν ὄντα πρότερον ἔσχε τὴν πρὸς ἑαυτὰ διαφοράν· ἀλλὰ τὸ μὲν ὂν τέλειον, τὸ δὲ ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἀρξάμενον ἐγένετο μεῖζον· μῆδοι μὲν γὰρ καὶ πέρσαι ἐδόκουν κατὰ ταυτὸν ἄρχειν, Δαρείου καὶ Κύρου συγγενῶν ὄντων, καὶ οὐδεμίαν πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἐσχηκότων μάχην· ὁ δὲ Κῦρος καὶ μετὰ Δαρείου τελευτὴν βασιλείαν, μείζονα τὴν ἀρχὴν κατεκτήσατο, πρὸς τῇ περσῶν, καὶ τὴν μήδων λαβών.
To hen hypsēloteron tou heterou. Ouk isa megethei phēsin onta proteron esche tēn pros heauta diaphoran; alla to men on teleion, to de apo mikrou arxamenon egeneto meizon; mēdoi men gar kai persai edokoun kata tauton archein, Dareiou kai Kyrou syngenōn ontōn, kai oudemian pros allēlous eschēkotōn machēn; ho de Kyros kai meta Dareiou teleutēn basileian, meizona tēn archēn katektēsato, pros tę̄ persōn, kai tēn mēdōn labōn.
"The one higher than the other." Being not equal in size, he says, they formerly had a difference from each other; but the one was full-grown, while the other, beginning small, became greater. For the Medes and Persians seemed to rule together, since Darius and Cyrus were kinsmen and had no battle with one another; but Cyrus, even after the end of Darius's reign, acquired a greater rule, taking that of the Medes in addition to that of the Persians.
8.5Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Κριὸν κερατίζοντα. Οὐδὲ ἐνταῦθα διῃρημένως περὶ τῶν κεράτων διαλέγεται, ἀλλὰ κοινῶς περὶ τοῦ κριοῦ· ἐπειδὴ γὰρ κατὰ τιμὴν ἦσαν διῃρημένοι, κατά τι δὲ συνημμένοι ὡς εἴρηται· μηνύει δὲ νῦν τὴν περσικὴν ἀρχήν· φαίνεται γὰρ ὅ τε Κῦρος ἁπάντων κατεσχηκώς, καὶ τοῖς μετ᾽ αὐτὸν ἄμαχον τὴν βασιλείαν παραδούς.
Krion keratizonta. Oude entautha dię̄rēmenōs peri tōn keratōn dialegetai, alla koinōs peri tou kriou; epeidē gar kata timēn ēsan dię̄rēmenoi, kata ti de synēmmenoi hōs eirētai; mēnyei de nyn tēn persikēn archēn; phainetai gar ho te Kyros hapantōn kateschēkōs, kai tois met᾽ auton amachon tēn basileian paradous.
"A ram butting." Here too he does not speak of the horns separately, but of the ram in common; for since they were divided in honor, but in some way joined, as has been said, he indicates the Persian empire; for Cyrus appears to have conquered all and handed on the kingdom unassailable to those after him.
8.6Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Πάντα τὰ θηρία οὐ στήσεται. Ἀντὶ τοῦ οὐδὲν τῶν ἐθνῶν ἰσόρροπον αὐτοῦ ἕξει τὴν δύναμιν. — Τουτέστι κρατήσει βεβαίως, οὔτε κατὰ πρώτην προσβολὴν ἀντιστῆναί τινος ἰσχύοντος.
Panta ta thēria ou stēsetai. Anti tou ouden tōn ethnōn isorropon autou hexei tēn dynamin. — Toutesti kratēsei bebaiōs, oute kata prōtēn prosbolēn antistēnai tinos ischyontos.
"All the beasts will not stand." Meaning that none of the nations will have power equal to his. — That is, he will prevail firmly, no one being able to resist at the first onset.
8.7Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):13
Ἐποίησε κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ. Τουτέστιν ἐν οὐδενὶ ἥμαρτεν, ἀλλ᾽ εἰς πλεῖστον ἦλθε δόξης τοσοῦτον ἐλθεῖν ὅσον αὐτῷ ἐπελθεῖν συνέβη· τῆς γὰρ παρὰ θεοῦ συμμαχίας ἀξιωθείς, ἀπονητὶ τὰς νίκας ἤρατο, καὶ ὑπὸ μίαν βασιλείαν τίθησι τὸν μῆδον καὶ τὸν πέρσην· ἣν καὶ πρότερον ἦν ὑπὸ τῷ μήδῳ· οὗτος δὲ ἦν Κῦρος μετὰ Ἀστυάγην τὸν πάππον ἀναστὰς καὶ ὑπεραυξηθείς. Δαρεῖον δὲ τὸν σὺν αὐτῷ κρατήσαντα τῶν Βαβυλωνίων, ἕλληνες καλοῦσι Κυαξάρην θεῖον αὐτοῦ.
Epoiēse kata to thelēma autou. Toutestin en oudeni hēmarten, all᾽ eis pleiston ēlthe doxēs tosouton elthein hoson autǭ epelthein synebē; tēs gar para theou symmachias axiōtheis, aponēti tas nikas ērato, kai hypo mian basileian tithēsi ton mēdon kai ton persēn; hēn kai proteron ēn hypo tǭ mēdǭ; houtos de ēn Kyros meta Astyagēn ton pappon anastas kai hyperauxētheis. Dareion de ton syn autǭ kratēsanta tōn Babylōniōn, hellēnes kalousi Kyaxarēn theion autou.
"It did according to its will." That is, it failed in nothing, but came to so great a height of glory as it happened to reach; for, counted worthy of help from God, it won its victories without toil, and placed the Medes and Persians under one kingdom, which had formerly been under the Medes; for this Cyrus, after Astyages his grandfather, rose up and grew strong. And Darius, who conquered the Babylonians with him, the Greeks call Cyaxares, his uncle.
8.8Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Καὶ ἐγὼ ἤμην συνιών. Τουτέστι ταῦτά φησιν ὁρῶν ἀπεσκόπουν τί ποτε ἄρα βούλεται πάλιν ἡ ὄψις ἀπὸ τῶν προτέρων καὶ περὶ τῶν παρόντων μειζόνων ἀπορῶν.
Kai egō ēmēn syniōn. Toutesti tauta phēsin horōn apeskopoun ti pote ara bouletai palin hē opsis apo tōn proterōn kai peri tōn parontōn meizonōn aporōn.
"And I was understanding." That is, seeing these things, he says, I wondered what the vision might mean again, being at a greater loss about the present things than about the earlier ones.
8.9Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Ἰδοὺ τράγος αἰγῶν. Μηνύει μὲν ἐνταῦθα τὴν μακεδονικὴν ἀρχήν· ἀπὸ λιβὸς δέ, ἵνα εἴπῃ ἀπὸ τοῦ νότου· νοτιωτέρα γὰρ ἡ Μακεδονία.
Idou tragos aigōn. Mēnyei men entautha tēn makedonikēn archēn; apo libos de, hina eipę̄ apo tou notou; notiōtera gar hē Makedonia.
"Behold, a he-goat." He indicates here the Macedonian empire; and "from the southwest," to say "from the south"; for Macedonia lies to the south.
8.10Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Τῷ τράγῳ κέρας θεωρητόν. Τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον μηνύει· τὸ δὲ θεωρητόν, ἀντὶ τοῦ ὑψηλὸν καὶ περιφανές· τράγος ὅτι νέος ὁ μακεδὼν Ἀλέξανδρος, ἀφ᾽ οὗ καὶ ἦλθεν εἰς τὸ καθολικὸν ἡ βασιλεία ἡ μακεδονική· ὃ καὶ δηλοῖ κέρας λέγων θεωρητὸν μεταξὺ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ, ἐπικρατῆ βασιλείᾳ, ὡς ἓν μόνον τὸ κέρας.
Tǭ tragǭ keras theōrēton. Ton Alexandron mēnyei; to de theōrēton, anti tou hypsēlon kai periphanes; tragos hoti neos ho makedōn Alexandros, aph᾽ hou kai ēlthen eis to katholikon hē basileia hē makedonikē; ho kai dēloi keras legōn theōrēton metaxy tōn ophthalmōn autou, epikratē basileią, hōs hen monon to keras.
"The goat had a conspicuous horn." He indicates Alexander; "conspicuous" stands for "lofty and renowned"; a he-goat, because the Macedonian Alexander was young, from whom the Macedonian kingdom came to universal rule; which he also shows by speaking of a conspicuous horn between his eyes: a kingdom set over the nation, as one horn alone.
8.11Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Ἔδραμε πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐν ὁρμῇ. Οὐ γὰρ τοῦ πέρσου εἰς τὴν Μακεδονίαν γινομένου τὴν νίκην ἤρατο, ἀλλ᾽ αὐτὸς τοῖς τοῦ πέρσου ἐπιβὰς τόποις καθεῖλε τὸν Δαρεῖον πολεμοῦντα.
Edrame pros auton en hormę̄. Ou gar tou persou eis tēn Makedonian ginomenou tēn nikēn ērato, all᾽ autos tois tou persou epibas topois katheile ton Dareion polemounta.
"It ran at him in fury." For he did not win the victory when the Persian came into Macedonia, but he himself, setting foot on the Persian's territory, brought down Darius as he fought.
8.12Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Εἶδον αὐτὸν φθάνοντα ἕως τοῦ κριοῦ. Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ὡς ἀμυνόμενος αὐτόν, στρατείαν συναγαγών, ὑπήντησε κατὰ Κιλικίαν, πλείονι τῇ ὁρμῇ χρησάμενος καὶ σφοδρῷ τῷ θυμῷ πολλοὺς μὲν τῆς οἰκείας στρατείας κατέσφαξε, τοὺς δὲ οἰκειοτάτους ἑλών, εἰς φυγὴν ἔτρεψε τὸν Δαρεῖον.
Eidon auton phthanonta heōs tou kriou. Epeidē gar hōs amynomenos auton, strateian synagagōn, hypēntēse kata Kilikian, pleioni tę̄ hormę̄ chrēsamenos kai sphodrǭ tǭ thymǭ pollous men tēs oikeias strateias katesphaxe, tous de oikeiotatous helōn, eis phygēn etrepse ton Dareion.
"I saw it reaching the ram." Since, to ward him off, Darius gathered an army and met him in Cilicia; using greater fury and vehement anger, Alexander slaughtered many of his army, and, capturing his closest kin, put Darius to flight.
8.13Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Συνέτριψεν ἀμφότερα τὰ κέρατα αὐτοῦ. Τούς τε γὰρ στρατηγοὺς αὐτοῦ ἤδη πρότερον ἐπὶ τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον ἀπέβαλεν ἐν τῇ πρὸς Ἀλέξανδρον μάχῃ, καὶ νῦν τὴν στρατείαν ἀπολέσας, τῆς βασιλείας ἐξέπεσε· τὸ οὐκ ἦν ἰσχύς, τουτέστιν οὐδὲ ἀναμαχέσασθαι τὴν ἧτταν ἠδυνήθη. — Ἵνα εἴπῃ τέλειον ἐτρέψατο· τουτέστιν κατὰ πολλὴν αὐτὸν ἐξουσίαν κατέσχεν. — Τουτέστιν οὐδεμία συμμαχία ἤρκεσε πρὸς ἀντίστασιν τοῦ μακεδόνος· διδάσκει δὲ ταῦτα Ἰώσηπος κατὰ τὴν δεκάτην βίβλον τῆς ἀρχαιολογίας.
Synetripsen amphotera ta kerata autou. Tous te gar stratēgous autou ēdē proteron epi ton Hellēsponton apebalen en tę̄ pros Alexandron machę̄, kai nyn tēn strateian apolesas, tēs basileias exepese; to ouk ēn ischys, toutestin oude anamachesasthai tēn hēttan ēdynēthē. — Hina eipę̄ teleion etrepsato; toutestin kata pollēn auton exousian kateschen. — Toutestin oudemia symmachia ērkese pros antistasin tou makedonos; didaskei de tauta Iōsēpos kata tēn dekatēn biblon tēs archaiologias.
"It shattered both his horns." For he had already lost his generals earlier at the Hellespont in the battle against Alexander, and now, having destroyed his army, he fell from the kingdom; "there was no strength in him," that is, he could not even renew the fight after his defeat. — To say, "he turned him completely"; that is, he held authority over him with great power. — That is, no alliance sufficed to resist the Macedonian; Josephus teaches this in the tenth book of the Antiquities.
8.14Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Συνετρίβη τὸ κέρας αὐτοῦ. Ἵνα εἴπῃ ἁπάντων κατεσχηκὼς ὁ Ἀλέξανδρος κατέστρεψε τὸν βίον.
Synetribē to keras autou. Hina eipę̄ hapantōn kateschēkōs ho Alexandros katestrepse ton bion.
"Its horn was broken." To say that Alexander, having conquered all, ended his life.
8.15Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Ἀνέβη ἕτερα κέρατα τέσσαρα. Τοὺς μετ᾽ αὐτὸν βασιλεύσαντας λέγει· μετὰ γὰρ τὸν τούτου θάνατον Πτολεμαῖος μὲν κατέσχεν Αἰγύπτου, Συρίας δὲ καὶ Βαβυλῶνος Σέλευκος, τῆς δὲ Ἀσίας καὶ Ἑλλησπόντου Ἀντίγονος, Κάσανδρος δὲ Μακεδονίας.
Anebē hetera kerata tessara. Tous met᾽ auton basileusantas legei; meta gar ton toutou thanaton Ptolemaios men kateschen Aigyptou, Syrias de kai Babylōnos Seleukos, tēs de Asias kai Hellēspontou Antigonos, Kasandros de Makedonias.
"Four other horns came up." He means those who reigned after him; for after his death Ptolemy held Egypt, Seleucus Syria and Babylon, Antigonus Asia and the Hellespont, and Cassander Macedonia.
8.16Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς αὐτῶν. Τὸν Ἀντίοχον σημαίνει.
Ek tou henos autōn. Ton Antiochon sēmainei.
"From one of them." He indicates Antiochus.
8.17Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Πρὸς τὸν νότον κ. τ. λ. Νότον τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐκάλεσεν, ἀνατολὴν δὲ ἰουδαίους, ὡς ἰσχύσαντας πολλάκις τῇ τοῦ θεοῦ συμμαχίᾳ.
Pros ton noton k. t. l. Noton tēn Aigypton ekalesen, anatolēn de ioudaious, hōs ischysantas pollakis tę̄ tou theou symmachią.
"Toward the south," and so on. He called Egypt "south," and the Jews "east," as having often grown strong by God's help.
8.18Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Ἐμεγαλύνθη ἕως τῆς δυνάμεως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. Τουτέστι κατὰ θεοῦ ἠλαζονεύσατο· προσέθηκε γὰρ τὸ ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ἵνα σημάνῃ ὑπεροψίας τὸν ὄγκον.
Emegalynthē heōs tēs dynameōs tou ouranou. Toutesti kata theou ēlazoneusato; prosethēke gar to heōs tou ouranou, hina sēmanę̄ hyperopsias ton onkon.
"It grew great, up to the host of heaven." That is, he boasted against God; for he added "up to heaven" to signify the swelling of his pride.
8.19Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ἀπὸ τῆς δυνάμεως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. Τὸ σαφὲς τὸ ἀπὸ τῆς δυνάμεως οὐκ ἔχει· ὃ δὲ βούλεται εἰπεῖν ταῦτά ἐστι· μετὰ τὸ κρατῆσαι αὐτὸν πολλῶν, βλάσφημά τε ῥήματα κατὰ τοῦ θεοῦ φθέγξασθαι, πατεῖται ὑπὸ τῶν Μακκαβαίων· τούτους γὰρ ἀστέρας ἐκάλεσε διὰ τὴν ἀρετήν· τὸ δὲ συνεπάτησαν αὐτόν, διδάσκει τὴν κατὰ κράτος νίκην.
Epesen epi tēn gēn apo tēs dynameōs tou ouranou. To saphes to apo tēs dynameōs ouk echei; ho de bouletai eipein tauta esti; meta to kratēsai auton pollōn, blasphēma te rhēmata kata tou theou phthenxasthai, pateitai hypo tōn Makkabaiōn; toutous gar asteras ekalese dia tēn aretēn; to de synepatēsan auton, didaskei tēn kata kratos nikēn.
"It cast down to the earth some of the host of heaven." The "from the host" has a certain obscurity; but what he wants to say is this: after he had prevailed over many and uttered blasphemous words against God, he is trampled by the Maccabees; for he called them "stars" because of their virtue; and "they trampled him" teaches the victory by force.
8.21Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Ἕως οὗ ἀρχιστράτηγος. Ἀρχιστράτηγον καλεῖ τὸν ἐφεστῶτα τῷ ἔθνει ἄγγελον.
Heōs hou archistratēgos. Archistratēgon kalei ton ephestōta tǭ ethnei angelon.
"Until the commander-in-chief." He calls "commander-in-chief" the angel set over the nation.
8.22Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Θυσία ἐταράχθη. Τουτέστιν ἐκ τῆς τούτου αἰτίας, ἡ περὶ τὴν ἱερωσύνην εὐταξία ἀφανισθήσεται, πλείστων εἰς παρανομίαν ἐκκλινάντων. Κατευωδώθη. Διαπράξεται δὲ ταῦτα ἐπὶ πλεῖστον, τοῦ θεοῦ συγχωροῦντος.
Thysia etarachthē. Toutestin ek tēs toutou aitias, hē peri tēn hierōsynēn eutaxia aphanisthēsetai, pleistōn eis paranomian ekklinantōn. Kateuōdōthē. Diapraxetai de tauta epi pleiston, tou theou synchōrountos.
"The sacrifice was disturbed." That is, because of him the good order of the priesthood will be done away with, most having turned aside to lawlessness. "It prospered." He accomplishes these things for a very long time, God permitting.
8.23Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Τὸ ἅγιον ἐρημωθήσεται. Εἰς τοσαύτην δὲ παρανομίαν ἥξει, ὥστε καὶ τοῦ θεοῦ τὸν ναὸν μολύνειν ταῖς εἰδωλικαῖς θυσίαις· Διὸς γὰρ ὀλυμπίου ἠπείλησεν ἱερὸν ποιήσειν τὸν τοῦ θεοῦ ναόν.
To hagion erēmōthēsetai. Eis tosautēn de paranomian hēxei, hōste kai tou theou ton naon molynein tais eidōlikais thysiais; Dios gar olympiou ēpeilēsen hieron poiēsein ton tou theou naon.
"The sanctuary will be made desolate." He will come to such lawlessness as even to defile the temple of God with idolatrous sacrifices; for he threatened to make the temple of God a shrine of Olympian Zeus.
8.24Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Ἐδόθη ἐπὶ τὴν θυσίαν ἁμαρτία. Τουτέστιν ἔνθα ἔδει τὸ θεῖον θεραπεύεσθαι, ἐκεῖ τοῖς εἰδώλοις τὰς τιμὰς προσέφερον. — Συνελὼν δέ φησιν ἄν εἴποι τις, ὡς ἅπασα ἡ τῶν νομίμων διάταξις διαλέλυτο· εὔδηλον γὰρ ὡς τοῦ ναοῦ βατοῦ τοῖς ἐχθροῖς γενομένου, οὐ σαββάτου ἦν φυλακή, οὐχ ἱερουργίας τάξις, οὐ τῶν ἱερέων ἀξία, οὐ τῶν ἐδεσμάτων αἱ παρατηρήσεις, οὐδ᾽ ἕτερον οὐδέν, ὧν ὁ νόμος μετὰ ἀκριβείας διετάξατο.
Edothē epi tēn thysian hamartia. Toutestin entha edei to theion therapeuesthai, ekei tois eidōlois tas timas prosepheron. — Synelōn de phēsin an eipoi tis, hōs hapasa hē tōn nomimōn diataxis dialelyto; eudēlon gar hōs tou naou batou tois echthrois genomenou, ou sabbatou ēn phylakē, ouch hierourgias taxis, ou tōn hiereōn axia, ou tōn edesmatōn hai paratērēseis, oud᾽ heteron ouden, hōn ho nomos meta akribeias dietaxato.
"Sin was given upon the sacrifice." That is, where the divine ought to be served, there they offered honors to idols. — In short, one might say, all the ordering of the law was dissolved; for it is clear that when the temple became accessible to the enemies, there was no keeping of the Sabbath, no order of the liturgy, no dignity of priests, no observances of foods, nor anything else that the law had ordered with exactness.
8.27Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Ἐποίησε καὶ κατευωδώθη. Τουτέστιν ἐγχειρήσας ταῦτα διεπράξατο, οὐδεμίαν τὴν ἀρχὴν δεδωκὼς δίκην.
Epoiēse kai kateuōdōthē. Toutestin encheirēsas tauta diepraxato, oudemian tēn archēn dedōkōs dikēn.
"It acted and prospered." That is, he carried out what he attempted, paying no penalty at the beginning.
8.28Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Ἤκουσα ἑνὸς ἁγίου λαλοῦντος. Ταῦτα μὲν ἑώρων· οὐκ ἔστη δὲ μέχρι τούτου τὰ τῆς θέας, ἀλλ᾽ ἐδόκουν τινὰ ὁρᾶν ἄγγελον· τοῦτον γὰρ ἅγιον καλεῖ, ὡς πάσης τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης δυσχερείας ἀπηλλαγμένον. — Φελμουνὶ ὄνομά ἐστιν ἀγγέλῳ ὅτῳ δέ τινι.
Ēkousa henos hagiou lalountos. Tauta men heōrōn; ouk estē de mechri toutou ta tēs theas, all᾽ edokoun tina horan angelon; touton gar hagion kalei, hōs pasēs tēs anthrōpinēs dyschereias apēllagmenon. — Phelmouni onoma estin angelǭ hotǭ de tini.
"I heard one holy one speaking." These things I saw, he says; but the vision did not stop there; I seemed to see an angel; for he calls him "holy," as free from all human difficulty. — Phelmoni is a name of an angel, or of someone.
8.29Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Ἕως ἑσπέρας καὶ πρωΐ. Λέγει μὲν οὖν τὸν χρόνον καθ᾽ ὃν συμβήσεται τὰ εἰρημένα. Καὶ μεθ᾽ ἕτερα. Λέγει μὲν ἔτη τρία καὶ μῆνας ἓξ καθέξειν τὸν Ἀντίοχον· ἀριθμεῖται δὲ ὁ χρόνος κατὰ τὸν σεληνιακὸν κύκλον· οὕτω γὰρ φίλον ἑβραίοις τοὺς χρόνους ἀριθμεῖν· ὁ γὰρ μὴν ἔχει ἡμέρας κθ' ὡς γίνεσθαι πάσας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ τὰς ἡμέρας τνδ'· τριπλασιαζόμεναι δὲ ποιοῦσιν ἡμερῶν ἀριθμὸν αξβ'· αἷς προσθετέον καὶ τὸ τέταρτον τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ὑπὲρ τῶν τριῶν μηνῶν, ὀγδοήκοντα καὶ ὀκτὼ ἡμέρας· γίνονται αἱ πᾶσαι ἡμέραι ,ασν'· αὗται πάλιν διπλασιαζόμεναι ποιοῦσι τὰς ,βτ' ἡμέρας· φησὶ γὰρ ἑσπέρας καὶ πρωΐ, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἡμερονύχθιον· ὡς οὕτως ὀφειλόντων ἡμῶν ἀριθμεῖν τὰς ,βτ' ἡμέρας· συντέμνεται γὰρ τῆς ἀποφάσεως ὁ χρόνος, νυκτὸς εἰς ἡμέρας λογιζομένης· ᾧ δὴ καὶ νῦν οἱ τὰς ἐξορίας ὁρίζοντες ἄρχοντες τοῖς νόμοις ἑπόμενοι, τὴν νύκτα εἰς ἡμέραν λογιζόμενοι, τὸν χρόνον ἀριθμοῦσιν.
Heōs hesperas kai prōï. Legei men oun ton chronon kath᾽ hon symbēsetai ta eirēmena. Kai meth᾽ hetera. Legei men etē tria kai mēnas hex kathexein ton Antiochon; arithmeitai de ho chronos kata ton selēniakon kyklon; houtō gar philon hebraiois tous chronous arithmein; ho gar mēn echei hēmeras kth' hōs ginesthai pasas tou eniautou tas hēmeras tnd'; triplasiazomenai de poiousin hēmerōn arithmon axb'; hais prostheteon kai to tetarton tou eniautou hyper tōn triōn mēnōn, ogdoēkonta kai oktō hēmeras; ginontai hai pasai hēmerai ,asn'; hautai palin diplasiazomenai poiousi tas ,bt' hēmeras; phēsi gar hesperas kai prōï, anti tou hēmeronychthion; hōs houtōs opheilontōn hēmōn arithmein tas ,bt' hēmeras; syntemnetai gar tēs apophaseōs ho chronos, nyktos eis hēmeras logizomenēs; hǭ dē kai nyn hoi tas exorias horizontes archontes tois nomois hepomenoi, tēn nykta eis hēmeran logizomenoi, ton chronon arithmousin.
"Until evening and morning." He means the time in which what was said will happen. And after other things: He means three years and six months during which Antiochus will rule; the time is reckoned by the lunar cycle, for so the Hebrews are accustomed to count the times; for the month has twenty-nine days, so that all the days of the year come to 354; tripled, they make a number of 1062 days; to which one must add also the quarter of the year beyond the three months, eighty-eight days; all the days come to 1150; and these, doubled again, make the 2300 days. For he says "evening and morning" instead of "a day and a night," as we ought to count the 2300 days so; for the time of the sentence is cut short, the nights being reckoned as days; which even now those rulers who fix the terms of exile, following the laws, count, reckoning the night as a day.
8.30Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14
Καθαρισθήσεται τὸ ἅγιον. Ἐπὶ τοσοῦτον χρόνον φησὶ τοῦ Ἀντιόχου τὰ προειρημένα διαθέντος τοὺς ἰουδαίους, αὖθις τὸ οἰκεῖον σχῆμα ὁ ναὸς ἀπολήψεται.
Katharisthēsetai to hagion. Epi tosouton chronon phēsi tou Antiochou ta proeirēmena diathentos tous ioudaious, authis to oikeion schēma ho naos apolēpsetai.
"The sanctuary will be cleansed." For so long a time, he says, after Antiochus has treated the Jews as foretold, the temple will receive its proper form again.
8.31Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):14-15
Ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ἰδεῖν με. Τὰ μὲν οὖν φησὶ εἰρημένα εἶδον· οὐ μὴν συνιὼν τῶν λεγομένων τὴν δύναμιν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ κατέστην τῆς ἑρμηνείας τῶν δειχθέντων.
Egeneto en tǭ idein me. Ta men oun phēsi eirēmena eidon; ou mēn syniōn tōn legomenōn tēn dynamin, all᾽ en epithymią katestēn tēs hermēneias tōn deichthentōn.
"It happened when I saw." I saw what was said, he says, but not understanding the force of the words, I came to desire the interpretation of what was shown.
8.32Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Ἐζήτουν σύνεσιν. Περισκοπουμένῳ δέ μοι φησὶ τίς ἂν εὑρεθείη τῶν ἀπορουμένων παρέχων τὴν λύσιν, εἶδον ἀθρόον ἐν ἀνδρὸς σχήματι παρεστῶτα. — Ὁρᾷς ἐπιτάγματα ἀγγέλων καὶ ἀρχαγγέλων μεῖζον ἴσως δύναμις ἑτέρα. — Ἀλλ᾽ ὁ μέν φησιν εἱστήκει· ἕτερος δέ τις παρὰ τὸ ὕδωρ ἑστὼς ἐκάλει τὸν παρεστῶτα, ὀνόματι Γαβριὴλ προσαγορεύων· καὶ παρεκελεύετο τῶν ζητουμένων παρέχειν τὴν ἑρμηνείαν. — Ὁ δὲ αὐτίκα φησὶν ὑπήκουσε, καὶ ἦλθεν ἄχρις ἐμοῦ, ἐκτελέσων τὸ προσταχθέν.
Ezētoun synesin. Periskopoumenǭ de moi phēsi tis an heuretheiē tōn aporoumenōn parechōn tēn lysin, eidon athroon en andros schēmati parestōta. — Horąs epitagmata angelōn kai archangelōn meizon isōs dynamis hetera. — All᾽ ho men phēsin heistēkei; heteros de tis para to hydōr hestōs ekalei ton parestōta, onomati Gabriēl prosagoreuōn; kai parekeleueto tōn zētoumenōn parechein tēn hermēneian. — Ho de autika phēsin hypēkouse, kai ēlthen achris emou, ektelesōn to prostachthen.
"I sought understanding." As I was considering, he says, who might be found to give the solution of what was in doubt, I suddenly saw one in the form of a man standing by. — You see orders given to angels and archangels; perhaps another, greater power. — But this one, he says, stood there, while another, standing by the water, called to the one standing by, addressing him by the name Gabriel, and urged him to give the interpretation of what was sought. — And he at once, he says, obeyed, and came up to me, to carry out what was commanded.
8.33Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Ἐν τῷ ἐλθεῖν αὐτὸν ἐθαμβήθην. Τουτέστιν ἠγάσθην τὸ κάλλος τοῦ ὀφθέντος, καὶ πρηνὴς ἔπεσον, ἐκπλαγεὶς πρὸς τὸ παράδοξον τῆς θέας.
En tǭ elthein auton ethambēthēn. Toutestin ēgasthēn to kallos tou ophthentos, kai prēnēs epeson, ekplageis pros to paradoxon tēs theas.
"When he came I was amazed." That is, I was astonished at the beauty of the one who appeared, and I fell on my face, struck by the wonder of the sight.
8.34Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Σύνες υἱὲ ἀνθρώπου. Ἀντὶ τοῦ δέξαι τῶν λεγομένων τὴν σύνεσιν.
Synes huie anthrōpou. Anti tou dexai tōn legomenōn tēn synesin.
"Understand, son of man." Meaning, receive the understanding of what is said.
8.35Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Ἔτι γὰρ εἰς καιροῦ πέρας ἡ ὅρασις. Ἔσται δέ φησι τὰ ῥηθέντα χρόνοις ὕστερον, ἡνίκα ἂν ὁ καιρὸς ὁ προειρημένος περαιωθῇ· καιρὸν δὲ λέγει τὸν τῆς βασιλείας μήδων περσῶν, καὶ μακεδόνων, καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν βασιλέων τὴν διαδοχήν.
Eti gar eis kairou peras hē horasis. Estai de phēsi ta rhēthenta chronois hysteron, hēnika an ho kairos ho proeirēmenos peraiōthę̄; kairon de legei ton tēs basileias mēdōn persōn, kai makedonōn, kai tōn loipōn basileōn tēn diadochēn.
"For the vision is still for the end of a time." What was said, he says, will happen in later times, when the time mentioned before is completed; by "time" he means that of the kingdom of the Medes, Persians, and Macedonians, and the succession of the other kings.
8.36Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Ἐν τῷ λαλεῖν αὐτόν. Τοῦτο ἐπανάληψίς τίς ἐστι τοῦ προρρηθέντος· βούλεται γὰρ εἰπεῖν ὡς οὐχ ἅμα πρὸς αὐτὸν ἀφίκετο κατέπεσεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τῷ ἄρξασθαι αὐτὸν λέγειν.
En tǭ lalein auton. Touto epanalēpsis tis esti tou prorrēthentos; bouletai gar eipein hōs ouch hama pros auton aphiketo katepesen, all᾽ en tǭ arxasthai auton legein.
"While he was speaking." This is a repetition of what was said before; for he wants to say that he did not fall down as soon as he came to him, but when he began to speak.
8.37Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Ἔστησέ με ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας. Ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως φησὶ παρεθάρσυνεν ἐγείρας κείμενον.
Estēse me epi tous podas. All᾽ homōs phēsi paretharsynen egeiras keimenon.
"He set me on my feet." Yet, he says, he encouraged me, raising me as I lay.
8.38Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Ἐγὼ γνωρίζω σοι. Ἥκω φησὶ δηλῶσαί σοι ἃ συμβήσεται τῷ λαῷ διὰ τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ ὀργήν· ἵνα γνῷς ὡς οὔτε ὑπὸ ἀσθενείας ἡττηθήσονται, οὔτ᾽ Ἀντίοχος περιουσίᾳ δυνάμεως περιέσται· ἀλλὰ τοῦ θεοῦ δίκας αὐτοὺς εἰσπραξαμένου τῆς παρανομίας.
Egō gnōrizō soi. Hēkō phēsi dēlōsai soi ha symbēsetai tǭ laǭ dia tēn tou theou orgēn; hina gnǭs hōs oute hypo astheneias hēttēthēsontai, out᾽ Antiochos periousią dynameōs periestai; alla tou theou dikas autous eispraxamenou tēs paranomias.
"I am making known to you." I have come, he says, to show you what will happen to the people because of God's anger; so that you may know that they will be defeated neither from weakness, nor will Antiochus prevail by abundance of power, but because God exacts from them the penalty of their lawlessness.
8.39Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Ὁ κριὸς ὃν εἶδες. Κριὸν μὲν λέγει τὴν βασιλείαν· τὰ δὲ κέρατα, ἀμφοτέρους, Κῦρον τὸν πέρσην καὶ Δαρεῖον τὸν μῆδον· οὔτε γὰρ καθ᾽ ὅλου διῄρηντο, οὔτε συνήπτοντο πάλιν δι᾽ ὅλου· ἀλλὰ τὴν μὲν Βαβυλωνίων βασιλείαν διεδέξατο ὁ μῆδος· ἐκράτει δὲ τῆς περσίδος ὁ Κῦρος· τούτου δὲ τελευτήσαντος, μετέστη εἰς πέρσας ἡ ἀρχή.
Ho krios hon eides. Krion men legei tēn basileian; ta de kerata, amphoterous, Kyron ton persēn kai Dareion ton mēdon; oute gar kath᾽ holou dię̄rēnto, oute synēptonto palin di᾽ holou; alla tēn men Babylōniōn basileian diedexato ho mēdos; ekratei de tēs persidos ho Kyros; toutou de teleutēsantos, metestē eis persas hē archē.
"The ram that you saw." By the ram he means the kingdom; by the horns, both: Cyrus the Persian and Darius the Mede; for they were neither divided altogether nor again joined altogether; but the Mede succeeded to the Babylonian kingdom, while Cyrus ruled Persia; and when he died, the rule passed to the Persians.
8.40Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Ὁ τράγος τῶν αἰγῶν. Αὐτός ἐστι βασιλεὺς ὁ πρῶτος· μηνύει δὲ τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον· τῆς μὲν γὰρ μακεδονικῆς ἀρχῆς πλείους τὸν ἀριθμὸν οἱ βασιλεύσαντες· τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν πρῶτος ἦν ὁ Ἀλέξανδρος.
Ho tragos tōn aigōn. Autos esti basileus ho prōtos; mēnyei de ton Alexandron; tēs men gar makedonikēs archēs pleious ton arithmon hoi basileusantes; tōn de loipōn prōtos ēn ho Alexandros.
"The he-goat." He is the first king; he indicates Alexander; for those who reigned over the Macedonian empire were more in number, but of the rest Alexander was the first.
8.41Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Τέσσαρες βασιλεῖς ἐκ τοῦ ἔθνους αὐτοῦ ἀναστήσονται. Οὐκ εἶπεν ἐξ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἔθνους, ἵνα εἴπῃ τῆς μακεδονικῆς ἀρχῆς.
Tessares basileis ek tou ethnous autou anastēsontai. Ouk eipen ex autou, all᾽ apo tou ethnous, hina eipę̄ tēs makedonikēs archēs.
"Four kings will arise from his nation." He did not say "from him," but "from the nation," to say, of the Macedonian empire.
8.42Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Ἐκοιμήθην καὶ ἐμαλακίσθην. Τοσοῦτό με φησὶ φόβος κατέσχεν ἀπὸ τῶν δειχθέντων, ὥστε μηδὲ ἄμεινον διατεθῆναι τῶν ὑπὸ μακρᾶς ἀσθενείας κατεσκληκότων.
Ekoimēthēn kai emalakisthēn. Tosouto me phēsi phobos kateschen apo tōn deichthentōn, hōste mēde ameinon diatethēnai tōn hypo makras astheneias katesklēkotōn.
"I fell asleep and was sick." Such fear held me, he says, from what was shown, that I was in no better state than those withered by a long illness.
8.43Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Ἀνέστην καὶ ἐποίουν τὰ ἔργα τοῦ βασιλέως. Τουτέστι τὰ ἐγκεχειρισμένα τὸν ὅμοιον τρόπον ἐτέλουν, ἀνιώμενος μὲν ἐπὶ τοῖς δειχθεῖσιν, οὐκ ἐκφέρων δὲ εἰς ἑτέρους· εἰ γὰρ καὶ μὴ ἐν αὐτοῖς τοῖς βασιλείοις ἐτύγχανεν ὤν, ὡς ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν δέδεικται, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν ἴσως ἀπὸ τῆς προτέρας εὐημερίας, ἣν ἀπὸ τοῦ Ναβουχοδονόσορ ἐκέκτητο, μοῖράν τινα διοικήσεως ἐγκεχείριστο· φυλάττειν τι καὶ τῶν τοῦ πατρὸς ἐσπουδακότες τοῦ Βαλτάσαρ, καὶ μάλιστα καὶ ἐπειδὴ ἐν τοῖς προγονικοῖς κατορθώμασιν ἐφρόνει μεγάλα· διὰ τοῦτο οὔτε πάνυ γνώριμος ἐτύγχανεν αὐτῶν ὁ ἀνήρ, ἅτε οὐδὲ ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ προχειρισθεὶς εἰς ἀρχήν, μείνας δὲ ἐπί τινος δυναστείας ἀπὸ τῆς προτέρας συνθήκης.
Anestēn kai epoioun ta erga tou basileōs. Toutesti ta enkecheirismena ton homoion tropon eteloun, aniōmenos men epi tois deichtheisin, ouk ekpherōn de eis heterous; ei gar kai mē en autois tois basileiois etynchanen ōn, hōs en tois emprosthen dedeiktai, all᾽ oun isōs apo tēs proteras euēmerias, hēn apo tou Nabouchodonosor ekektēto, moiran tina dioikēseōs enkecheiristo; phylattein ti kai tōn tou patros espoudakotes tou Baltasar, kai malista kai epeidē en tois progonikois katorthōmasin ephronei megala; dia touto oute pany gnōrimos etynchanen autōn ho anēr, hate oude hyp᾽ autou procheiristheis eis archēn, meinas de epi tinos dynasteias apo tēs proteras synthēkēs.
"I rose and did the king's business." That is, I carried out what was entrusted to me in the same way, grieved at what was shown, but not divulging it to others. For even if he was not at the palace itself, as was shown in what came before, yet perhaps, from his earlier prosperity, which he had acquired from Nebuchadnezzar, some share of administration had been entrusted to him; and those of Belshazzar's father's people who had been diligent kept something; and especially since he prided himself on his ancestors' achievements; therefore the man was not very well known to them, as he was not even appointed to office by him, but remained in some position of authority from the earlier arrangement.
Chapter 9
9.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Συνῆκα ἐν ταῖς βίβλοις τὸν ἀριθμὸν τῶν ἐτῶν. Ἐπεὶ τοίνυν ὁ λαὸς πρὸς τὴν αἴτησιν τῆς ἐπανόδου μὴ ἐγρηγόρει, αὐτὸς τὰ τοῦ λαοῦ οἰκειωσάμενος, προσπίπτει θεῷ, λαμβάνων ἀφορμὴν τῆς αἰτήσεως τὸν ἀριθμὸν τῶν ἐτῶν.
Synēka en tais biblois ton arithmon tōn etōn. Epei toinyn ho laos pros tēn aitēsin tēs epanodou mē egrēgorei, autos ta tou laou oikeiōsamenos, prospiptei theǭ, lambanōn aphormēn tēs aitēseōs ton arithmon tōn etōn.
"I understood in the books the number of the years." Since the people were not alert to ask for the return, he himself, making the people's cause his own, falls down before God, taking the number of years as the occasion for his request.
9.2Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐρημώσεως. Οὐ γὰρ εἶπεν ὅτι ἐπληρώθη, ἀλλ᾽ εἰς συμπλήρωσιν, ὅπερ ἐγγίζειν ἢ συμπεπληρῶσθαι σημαίνει. — Σφόδρα περὶ τὸν λαὸν διακείμενος φαίνεται ὁ προφήτης, οὐκ ἐκ τῶν προρρηθέντων μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐκ τῶν παρόντων· ὡς γὰρ ἑώρα λοιπὸν συμπληρούμενον τὸν ὁρισθέντα τῆς αἰχμαλωσίας χρόνον, ἰουδαίους δὲ οὐδεμίαν ἔχοντας σπουδὴν πρὸς τὴν ἄνοδον οὐδὲ ἐκτενεύοντας τὸν θεόν, σκοπήσας ὡς τῆς προθεσμίας παρελθούσης, καὶ τῶν περὶ τῆς ἐπανόδου ἐπαγγελιῶν μὴ πληρωθεισῶν, αὖθις ἑτέραν ἀφορμὴν οἱ παράνομοι λήψονται τῆς κατὰ θεὸν βλασφημίας, ὡς ψευσαμένου καὶ μὴ ἀναγαγόντος τὸν λαόν, αὐτὸς εἰς ἱκεσίαν ἐτράπη καινήν, ὑπὲρ ἁπάντων ποιούμενος τὴν προσευχήν.
Eis symplērōsin erēmōseōs. Ou gar eipen hoti eplērōthē, all᾽ eis symplērōsin, hoper engizein ē sympeplērōsthai sēmainei. — Sphodra peri ton laon diakeimenos phainetai ho prophētēs, ouk ek tōn prorrēthentōn monon, alla kai ek tōn parontōn; hōs gar heōra loipon symplēroumenon ton horisthenta tēs aichmalōsias chronon, ioudaious de oudemian echontas spoudēn pros tēn anodon oude ekteneuontas ton theon, skopēsas hōs tēs prothesmias parelthousēs, kai tōn peri tēs epanodou epangeliōn mē plērōtheisōn, authis heteran aphormēn hoi paranomoi lēpsontai tēs kata theon blasphēmias, hōs pseusamenou kai mē anagagontos ton laon, autos eis hikesian etrapē kainēn, hyper hapantōn poioumenos tēn proseuchēn.
"For the fulfilment of the desolation." For he did not say "it has been fulfilled," but "for the fulfilment," which signifies "it is near to being fulfilled." — The prophet appears to be very concerned for the people, not only from what had been foretold but also from the present circumstances; for since he saw the appointed time of the captivity being completed, and the Jews having no zeal for the return nor entreating God, he considered that, if the opportunity passed and the promises about the return were not fulfilled, the lawless would again take another occasion for blasphemy against God, as having lied and not brought back the people; so he himself turned to supplication, making the prayer on behalf of all.
9.3Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Ἡμάρτομεν, ἠδικήσαμεν, ἠσεβήσαμεν, καὶ ἀπέστημεν, καὶ ἐξεκλίναμεν. Ἁμαρτίαν μὲν γὰρ λέγει τοῦ βίου τὸ διάφορον· ἀδικίαν δὲ τὴν κατὰ τοῦ πλησίον πλεονεξίαν· ἀσέβειαν δὲ τὴν εἰς θεὸν ὕβριν, ἥτις ἐκρίνετο ἐν τῇ τῶν εἰδώλων θρησκείᾳ· τὸ δὲ ἐξεκλίναμεν, ἐμφαντικώτερον εἴρηται, ὡς τοῦ θεοῦ προσκαλουμένου, ἐκείνων δὲ φευγόντων· ἐντολὰς δὲ καὶ κρίματα λέγει τὰ νόμιμα· ἐντολὰς μὲν ὡς προστάγματα, κρίματα δὲ ὡς δικαίως κείμενα.
Hēmartomen, ēdikēsamen, ēsebēsamen, kai apestēmen, kai exeklinamen. Hamartian men gar legei tou biou to diaphoron; adikian de tēn kata tou plēsion pleonexian; asebeian de tēn eis theon hybrin, hētis ekrineto en tę̄ tōn eidōlōn thrēskeią; to de exeklinamen, emphantikōteron eirētai, hōs tou theou proskaloumenou, ekeinōn de pheugontōn; entolas de kai krimata legei ta nomima; entolas men hōs prostagmata, krimata de hōs dikaiōs keimena.
"We have sinned, we have done wrong, we have been ungodly, and have rebelled, and turned aside." By "sins" he means the corruption of life; by "wrong" greed against one's neighbor; by "ungodliness" insult toward God, which was judged in the worship of idols; and "we turned aside" is said more vividly, as though God were calling and they fleeing. By "commandments" and "judgments" he means the ordinances: commandments as orders, judgments as justly laid down.
9.4Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Οὐκ εἰσηκούσαμεν. Οὐ γὰρ μόνον ἠρκέσθης φησὶ δοὺς τὸν νόμον διὰ Μωϋσέως, καὶ ποιήσας τὰ θαύματα· οὐδὲ ἔστης μέχρι τοῦ δοῦναι ἡμῖν τὴν γῆν· ἀλλ᾽ ἐπειδὴ εἶδες ἡμᾶς παραφθείραντας τῶν νομίμων τὴν διάταξιν, τούς τε προφήτας ἀπέστειλας ἄγειν ἐπὶ τὸ δέον ἡμᾶς βουλόμενος· ἀλλ᾽ οὐ γεγόναμεν εὐγνώμονες πρὸς τὰ λεγόμενα, ἀλλ᾽ ἀσυμφώνῳ τῇ γνώμῃ τῆς χείρονος γεγόναμεν γνώμης.
Ouk eisēkousamen. Ou gar monon ērkesthēs phēsi dous ton nomon dia Mōÿseōs, kai poiēsas ta thaumata; oude estēs mechri tou dounai hēmin tēn gēn; all᾽ epeidē eides hēmas paraphtheirantas tōn nomimōn tēn diataxin, tous te prophētas apesteilas agein epi to deon hēmas boulomenos; all᾽ ou gegonamen eugnōmones pros ta legomena, all᾽ asymphōnǭ tę̄ gnōmę̄ tēs cheironos gegonamen gnōmēs.
"We did not listen." For you were not content, he says, with giving the law through Moses and doing the wonders; nor did you stop at giving us the land; but when you saw that we had corrupted the order of the ordinances, you sent the prophets, wishing to lead us to what was right; but we did not become well disposed toward what was said, but, in discord with your purpose, we became of the worse mind.
9.5Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Διέσπειρας αὐτούς. Ἐπταικότας ἡμᾶς φησὶ, εἰς διαφόρους ἀποικίας ἔπεμψας· καὶ εἰ βούλει πρὸς ἡμᾶς κριθῆναι, ὀφθείης μὲν αὐτὸς δίκαιος, ἡμεῖς αἰσχύνην ὀφλήσομεν, ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων πάσης παρρησίας ἀφῃρημένοι.
Diespeiras autous. Eptaikotas hēmas phēsi, eis diaphorous apoikias epempsas; kai ei boulei pros hēmas krithēnai, ophtheiēs men autos dikaios, hēmeis aischynēn ophlēsomen, ex autōn tōn ergōn pasēs parrēsias aphę̄rēmenoi.
"You scattered them." When we had stumbled, he says, you sent us into various exiles; and if you wish to be judged with us, you will appear righteous, and we shall incur shame, deprived of all confidence by our very deeds.
9.6Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):15
Τῷ κυρίῳ θεῷ ἡμῶν οἱ οἰκτιρμοί. Ἀλλὰ τούτων φησὶν οὕτως ἐχόντων, ἐπὶ τὴν σὴν καταφεύγομεν φιλανθρωπίαν, ὁμολογοῦντες τὰ οἰκεῖα πταίσματα, καὶ οὔτε τῶν νομίμων ἐφυλάξαμεν, οὔτε παραινοῦσι τοῖς προφήταις ἐπειθαρχήσαμεν· οὐδεμίαν τοίνυν ὁρῶντες ὑποῦσαν δικαιολογίαν, τοὺς σοὺς ἀναμένομεν οἰκτιρμούς.
Tǭ kyriǭ theǭ hēmōn hoi oiktirmoi. Alla toutōn phēsin houtōs echontōn, epi tēn sēn katapheugomen philanthrōpian, homologountes ta oikeia ptaismata, kai oute tōn nomimōn ephylaxamen, oute parainousi tois prophētais epeitharchēsamen; oudemian toinyn horōntes hypousan dikaiologian, tous sous anamenomen oiktirmous.
"To the Lord our God belong compassions." But since this is so, he says, we take refuge in your love for humankind, confessing our own offenses: that we neither kept the ordinances nor obeyed the prophets who exhorted us; seeing, then, that we have no plea of justification left, we wait for your compassions.
9.8Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Ἐπῆλθεν ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς ἡ κατάρα. Ποία κατάρα αὕτη; βούλεσθε ἀναγνῶμεν αὐτήν; ἐὰν μὴ λατρεύσητε κυρίῳ τῷ θεῷ ὑμῶν φησι, ἐπάξει ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἔθνος ἀναιδές, οὐκ ἀκοῦσαν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ· καὶ ἔσεσθε ἐν ἀριθμῷ βραχεῖς· τοῦτο γοῦν αὐτὸ δηλοῦντες οἱ τρεῖς παῖδες, καὶ δείκνυνται ὡς διὰ τῶν ἔργων αὐτῶν ἐξέβη τὸ τῆς κολάσεως εἶδος· καὶ αὐτοὶ πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ἐξομολογούμενοι περὶ τῶν κοινῶν ἁμαρτημάτων ἔλεγον, παρέδωκας ἡμᾶς εἰς χεῖρας ἐχθρῶν ἀνόμων, ἐχθίστων, ἀποστατῶν, καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς.
Epēlthen eph᾽ hēmas hē katara. Poia katara hautē? boulesthe anagnōmen autēn? ean mē latreusēte kyriǭ tǭ theǭ hymōn phēsi, epaxei eph᾽ hymas ethnos anaides, ouk akousan tēs phōnēs autou; kai esesthe en arithmǭ bracheis; touto goun auto dēlountes hoi treis paides, kai deiknyntai hōs dia tōn ergōn autōn exebē to tēs kolaseōs eidos; kai autoi pros ton theon exomologoumenoi peri tōn koinōn hamartēmatōn elegon, paredōkas hēmas eis cheiras echthrōn anomōn, echthistōn, apostatōn, kai ta hexēs.
"The curse came upon us." What curse is this? Do you want us to read it? "If you do not serve the Lord your God," he says, "he will bring on you a shameless nation, which does not hear his voice, and you will be few in number." The three youths too showed this very thing, and it is shown that from their deeds the form of the punishment came about; and they themselves, confessing to God about the common sins, said: "You handed us over into the hands of lawless enemies, most hateful apostates," and what follows.
9.9Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Κακὰ μεγάλα. Ποῖα δὲ ταῦτα; μητέρες παίδων ἐγεύσαντο· καὶ τοῦτο αὐτὸ προλέγει μὲν Μωϋσῆς· δείκνυσι δὲ ἐκβεβηκὸς Ἱερεμίας· ὁ μὲν γάρ φησιν ὅτι ἡ ἁπαλὴ καὶ ἡ τρυφερά, ἧς οὐκ ἔλαβε πεῖραν ὁ ποὺς αὐτῆς ἐπιβῆναι ἐπὶ τὸ ἔδαφος διὰ τὴν ἁπαλότητα καὶ τὴν τρυφερότητα, ἅψεται παρανόμου τραπέζης, καὶ τῶν ἐκγόνων ἀπογεύσεται τῶν ἑαυτῆς· ὁ δὲ Ἱερεμίας αὐτὸ τοῦτο δηλῶν, ὅτι ἐξέβη, ἔλεγε· χεῖρες γυναικῶν οἰκτιρμόνων ἧψαν τὰ τέκνα αὐτῶν.
Kaka megala. Poia de tauta? mēteres paidōn egeusanto; kai touto auto prolegei men Mōÿsēs; deiknysi de ekbebēkos Hieremias; ho men gar phēsin hoti hē hapalē kai hē tryphera, hēs ouk elabe peiran ho pous autēs epibēnai epi to edaphos dia tēn hapalotēta kai tēn trypherotēta, hapsetai paranomou trapezēs, kai tōn ekgonōn apogeusetai tōn heautēs; ho de Hieremias auto touto dēlōn, hoti exebē, elege; cheires gynaikōn oiktirmonōn hēpsan ta tekna autōn.
"Great evils." What were these? Mothers tasted their children; and this very thing Moses foretells, and Jeremiah shows to have come about. For the one says that the tender and delicate woman, whose foot had not tried to step on the ground because of her tenderness and delicacy, will touch a lawless table and taste her own offspring; and Jeremiah, showing this very thing, that it came to pass, said: "The hands of compassionate women boiled their children."
9.10Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Οὐκ ἐδεήθημεν τοῦ προσώπου κυρίου. Ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως φησὶ καὶ τούτων γεγενημένων, οὐδὲν ἀμείνους διετέθημεν τῶν ἡμετέρων ἁμαρτημάτων.
Ouk edeēthēmen tou prosōpou kyriou. All᾽ homōs phēsi kai toutōn gegenēmenōn, ouden ameinous dietethēmen tōn hēmeterōn hamartēmatōn.
"We did not entreat the face of the Lord." Yet even when these things had happened, he says, we were in no better state regarding our sins.
9.11Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Καὶ ἐγρηγόρησεν ὁ κύριος. Οὐδέν φησι τῶν κακῶν τερπόμενος ὁ θεός, ἀλλ᾽ ἅγιός τε ὢν καὶ καθαρὸς τὸν τρόπον, προσιέναι αὐτῶν βουλόμενος, ἀπώσατο ἡμᾶς ἁμαρτάνοντας.
Kai egrēgorēsen ho kyrios. Ouden phēsi tōn kakōn terpomenos ho theos, all᾽ hagios te ōn kai katharos ton tropon, prosienai autōn boulomenos, apōsato hēmas hamartanontas.
"And the Lord watched." God, he says, taking no delight in evils, but being holy and pure in character, wishing to draw near to them, rejected us as we sinned.
9.12Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Ὃς ἐξήγαγες τὸν λαόν σου. Ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως φησὶ τούτων οὕτως ἐχόντων δέσποτα, ἐπειδήπερ καὶ πάλαι οἰκείᾳ ἀγαθότητι ἀπήλλαξας τῆς Αἰγύπτου δουλείας, οὐχ ἡμῶν ἀξίων ὄντων· ἡμάρτομεν γὰρ καὶ τότε, ἀλλ᾽ ἀγαθότητι οἰκείᾳ, μνήμῃ τε τῆς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ἐπαγγελίας· τὸν ὅμοιον τρόπον καὶ νῦν τῇ συνήθει φιλανθρωπίᾳ κεχρημένος σύγγνωθι ἡμαρτηκόσι, καὶ μάλιστα ἐπειδήπερ εἰσεπράχθημεν δίκας.
Hos exēgages ton laon sou. All᾽ homōs phēsi toutōn houtōs echontōn despota, epeidēper kai palai oikeią agathotēti apēllaxas tēs Aigyptou douleias, ouch hēmōn axiōn ontōn; hēmartomen gar kai tote, all᾽ agathotēti oikeią, mnēmę̄ te tēs pros tous pateras epangelias; ton homoion tropon kai nyn tę̄ synēthei philanthrōpią kechrēmenos syngnōthi hēmartēkosi, kai malista epeidēper eiseprachthēmen dikas.
"You who brought your people out." Yet, he says, since this is so, Master, since long ago too in your own goodness you freed us from slavery in Egypt, though we were not worthy (for we sinned then too), but by your own goodness and in memory of your promise to the fathers, in the same way now too, using your usual love for humankind, forgive those who have sinned, especially since we have paid the penalty.
9.13Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεώς σου Ἱερουσαλήμ. Ἐπειδὴ τοὺς ἀνθρώπους περιελθών, οὐδένα ἑώρα δυνάμενον ἵλεω ποιῆσαι τὸν θεόν, πρὸς τὰ οἰκοδομήματα καταφεύγει, καὶ τὴν πόλιν αὐτὴν προβάλλεται, καὶ τὴν ἐρημίαν αὐτῆς προτείνεται, καὶ ἐν τούτοις καταλύσας τὸν λόγον, ἵλεω τὸν θεὸν ἐποίησεν.
Apo tēs poleōs sou Hierousalēm. Epeidē tous anthrōpous perielthōn, oudena heōra dynamenon hileō poiēsai ton theon, pros ta oikodomēmata katapheugei, kai tēn polin autēn proballetai, kai tēn erēmian autēs proteinetai, kai en toutois katalysas ton logon, hileō ton theon epoiēsen.
"From your city Jerusalem." Since, going round the people, he finds none able to make God merciful, he takes refuge in the buildings, and puts forward the city itself, and holds out its desolation; and ending his words with these, he made God merciful.
9.14Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Νῦν εἰσάκουσον. Τουτέστι δέξαι τῆς δεήσεώς μου τὰ ῥήματα.
Nyn eisakouson. Toutesti dexai tēs deēseōs mou ta rhēmata.
"Now hear." That is, receive the words of my prayer.
9.15Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Ἄνοιξον τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς. Καὶ θεασάμενός φησι τήν τε ἡμετέραν ταλαιπωρίαν, καὶ τῆς πόλεως τὴν ἐρήμωσιν, ἐν ᾗπερ πρότερόν σοι τοὺς ὕμνους ἀνεπέμπομεν, ἐπινεύσειας δέσποτα εἰς πέρας ἀγαγεῖν τῆς ἱκεσίας.
Anoixon tous ophthalmous. Kai theasamenos phēsi tēn te hēmeteran talaipōrian, kai tēs poleōs tēn erēmōsin, en hę̄per proteron soi tous hymnous anepempomen, epineuseias despota eis peras agagein tēs hikesias.
"Open your eyes." And seeing, he says, both our misery and the desolation of the city, in which formerly we sent up hymns to you, deign, Master, to bring our supplication to its fulfilment.
9.16Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Οὐκ ἐπὶ ταῖς δικαιοσύναις. Οὐκ ἀφ᾽ ὧν πράττομεν, ἵλεώ σε γενέσθαι βουλόμεθα, ἀλλ᾽ οἶκτον ἐπὶ ταῖς συμφοραῖς λαβεῖν ἐθέλομεν. — Τουτέστι μὴ ἀπώσῃ ἱκετεύοντας. — Ἀντὶ τοῦ συγχώρησον τὰ πταίσματα. — Τουτέστι θέασαι ἐν οἷς ἐξεταζόμεθα κακοῖς. — Τὸ δὲ τάχος φησὶ διὰ τὴν σὴν ἀγαθότητα παράσχου. — Ὥστε φησὶ τὸ σὸν ὄνομα ὀνομάζεσθαι, καὶ μὴ ἔχειν χώραν τοὺς κατηγορεῖν βουλομένους τῆς σῆς δυνάμεως.
Ouk epi tais dikaiosynais. Ouk aph᾽ hōn prattomen, hileō se genesthai boulometha, all᾽ oikton epi tais symphorais labein ethelomen. — Toutesti mē apōsę̄ hiketeuontas. — Anti tou synchōrēson ta ptaismata. — Toutesti theasai en hois exetazometha kakois. — To de tachos phēsi dia tēn sēn agathotēta paraschou. — Hōste phēsi to son onoma onomazesthai, kai mē echein chōran tous katēgorein boulomenous tēs sēs dynameōs.
"Not on account of our righteousness." Not from what we do do we want you to become merciful, but we wish to receive pity in our misfortunes. — That is, do not reject us as we supplicate. — Meaning, forgive our offenses. — That is, deliver us from the evils by which we are tested. — And do it quickly, he says, through your goodness. — So that, he says, your name may be named, and those who wish to accuse your power may have no room.
9.18Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Ἔτι μου λαλοῦντος. Οὐ διήμαρτόν φησι τοῦ σκοποῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπέτυχον ἱκετεύων τὸν θεόν· διαλεγομένου μου οὖν τὰ προειρημένα, καὶ ὁμολογοῦντος τὰ ἁμαρτήματα ἐμαυτοῦ καὶ τοῦ πλήθους, καὶ τῇ τοῦ θεοῦ φιλανθρωπίᾳ τὴν σωτηρίαν αἰτοῦντος, ἀπεστάλη πρός με ἄγγελος θεοῦ· ἐδόκει δὲ πετομένῳ· οὐ γὰρ εἶδε σχῆμα· τοῦτο λέγει, οὐχ ἵνα διδάξῃ πτερὰ ἔχειν τὸν ἄγγελον, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα ἡμᾶς διδάξῃ, ὡς ταχεῖαί εἰσιν αἱ ἄνω δυνάμεις πρὸς τὴν διακονίαν τῶν ὑπὸ θεοῦ προστασσομένων.
Eti mou lalountos. Ou diēmarton phēsi tou skopou, oude apetychon hiketeuōn ton theon; dialegomenou mou oun ta proeirēmena, kai homologountos ta hamartēmata emautou kai tou plēthous, kai tę̄ tou theou philanthrōpią tēn sōtērian aitountos, apestalē pros me angelos theou; edokei de petomenǭ; ou gar eide schēma; touto legei, ouch hina didaxę̄ ptera echein ton angelon, all᾽ hina hēmas didaxę̄, hōs tacheiai eisin hai anō dynameis pros tēn diakonian tōn hypo theou prostassomenōn.
"While I was still speaking." I did not miss my aim, he says, nor fail in supplicating God; while I was saying what was mentioned, confessing my own sins and those of the multitude, and asking salvation by God's love for humankind, an angel of God was sent to me, seeming to be flying; for he says this not because he saw a shape, not to teach that the angel has wings, but to teach us how swift the powers above are in serving what is commanded by God.
9.20Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Ἰδοὺ ἀνὴρ Γαβριήλ. Ἵνα εἴπῃ ὃς ὤφθη μοι ἐν τῇ τοῦ κριοῦ καὶ τοῦ τράγου ὁράσει· ὃς καὶ ἡρμήνευσεν ἐν τοῖς τότε ἀποδειχθεῖσι τὰ ἀπορούμενα.
Idou anēr Gabriēl. Hina eipę̄ hos ōphthē moi en tę̄ tou kriou kai tou tragou horasei; hos kai hērmēneusen en tois tote apodeichtheisi ta aporoumena.
"Behold, the man Gabriel." To say: the one who appeared to me in the vision of the ram and the he-goat, who also interpreted then what was in doubt in what was shown.
9.21Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Ὡσεὶ ὥραν θυσίας. Τουτέστιν ἢ κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν καθ᾽ ὃν εἴρηται, ἢ καθ᾽ ὃν εἰώθεισαν τὰς θυσίας κατὰ τὴν ἑσπέραν ἐκπληροῦν τῷ θεῷ, ἡνίκα τὰ ἰουδαίων συνειστήκει.
Hōsei hōran thysias. Toutestin ē kata ton kairon kath᾽ hon eirētai, ē kath᾽ hon eiōtheisan tas thysias kata tēn hesperan ekplēroun tǭ theǭ, hēnika ta ioudaiōn syneistēkei.
"About the hour of sacrifice." That is, at the time when it is said, or at which they used to offer the sacrifices to God in the evening, when the affairs of the Jews were established.
9.22Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Σύνες ἐν τῇ ὀπτασίᾳ. Τουτέστι πρόσεχε τοῖς λεγομένοις τὰ νῦν. — Τουτέστι λόγισαι οἵων ἠξιώθης, ὥστε ἄγγελον ἀποσταλῆναί σοι διδάσκαλον τῶν ἀμφισβητουμένων.
Synes en tę̄ optasią. Toutesti proseche tois legomenois ta nyn. — Toutesti logisai hoiōn ēxiōthēs, hōste angelon apostalēnai soi didaskalon tōn amphisbētoumenōn.
"Understand in the vision." That is, attend to what is being said now. — That is, consider of what you were counted worthy, that an angel was sent to you as teacher of what is disputed.
9.23Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Ἑβδομήκοντα ἑβδομάδες συνετμήθησαν. Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ διὰ τῶν προτέρων ὀπτασιῶν ἐγνώκει ὡς χείριστα πείσονται μετὰ τὴν ἄνοδον, εἰς ἀθυμίαν καταστὰς ἱκέτευε τὸν θεὸν μὴ μόνον αὐτοῖς παρασχεῖν τὴν ἄνοδον, ἀλλὰ καὶ πάντα τὰ κατὰ ἰουδαίους αὐτῷ δεῖξαι· ἴδιον γάρ ἐστι τῶν πραγμάτων ἐθέλειν λαμβάνειν τῶν ἐσομένων τὴν γνῶσιν· διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ὁ θεὸς ἐπειδὴ μάλιστα τοῦ ναοῦ ἐμνημόνευσεν, ἅπαντα αὐτῷ δείκνυσι τὰ μετὰ ταῦτα· ὅτι τε ἀνελεύσονται, καὶ ἐν πόσῳ χρόνῳ τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς ἔσται τοῦ ναοῦ· πρὸς οἷς διδάσκει τὴν εὐστηρίαν τῆς πόλεως, καὶ μέχρι ποῦ στήσεται τὰ ἰουδαίων· ὡς ἂν εἰδείη ὅτι εἰ καὶ τὰ ἰουδαίων καθαιρεθείη, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν οὐκ ἐπὶ τούτοις ἕξει τέλος ἡ εὐσέβεια. Καὶ πάλιν. Τουτέστι υγ' ἔτη περιλέλειπται, ἄχρις ὅτου ὁ λαὸς τῆς οἰκείας δόξης ἐκπεσεῖται, καὶ ἡ πόλις καθαιρεθήσεται· κρείττονος δηλονότι καταστάσεως γινομένης, διὰ τὴν τοῦ μεγαλοδώρου θεοῦ χάριν· εἰδέναι δὲ χρή, ὡς τὸν χρόνον καθολικῷ τινι τέθεικε λόγῳ, ἐν τοῖς ἐφεξῆς διακριβῶν τὰ καθέκαστον.
Hebdomēkonta hebdomades synetmēthēsan. Epeidē gar dia tōn proterōn optasiōn egnōkei hōs cheirista peisontai meta tēn anodon, eis athymian katastas hiketeue ton theon mē monon autois paraschein tēn anodon, alla kai panta ta kata ioudaious autǭ deixai; idion gar esti tōn pragmatōn ethelein lambanein tōn esomenōn tēn gnōsin; dia touto kai ho theos epeidē malista tou naou emnēmoneusen, hapanta autǭ deiknysi ta meta tauta; hoti te aneleusontai, kai en posǭ chronǭ ta tēs oikodomēs estai tou naou; pros hois didaskei tēn eustērian tēs poleōs, kai mechri pou stēsetai ta ioudaiōn; hōs an eideiē hoti ei kai ta ioudaiōn kathairetheiē, all᾽ oun ouk epi toutois hexei telos hē eusebeia. Kai palin. Toutesti yg' etē perileleiptai, achris hotou ho laos tēs oikeias doxēs ekpeseitai, kai hē polis kathairethēsetai; kreittonos dēlonoti katastaseōs ginomenēs, dia tēn tou megalodōrou theou charin; eidenai de chrē, hōs ton chronon katholikǭ tini tetheike logǭ, en tois ephexēs diakribōn ta kathekaston.
"Seventy weeks have been decreed." For since he had learned through the earlier visions that they would suffer the worst after the return, falling into despondency he begged God not only to grant them the return but also to show him everything concerning the Jews; for it is natural, in affairs, to want to receive knowledge of what is to come. For this reason God too, since he had above all mentioned the temple, shows him all that follows: that they will go up, and in how long a time the building of the temple will be; besides which he teaches the … of the city, and how far the affairs of the Jews will stand; so that he might know that, even if the affairs of the Jews were destroyed, godliness would not have its end with them. And again: That is, … years remain until the people falls from its own glory and the city is destroyed; a better state clearly coming about through the grace of the bountiful God. But one must know that he has put the time in a general way, giving the details exactly in what follows.
9.24Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Τοῦ συντελεσθῆναι ἁμαρτίαν. Ἀντὶ τοῦ, φέρει αὐτοὺς ἕως εἰς ἔσχατον ἁμαρτίας ἐλάσουσι, καὶ ἀνίατον σχῶσι τὴν νόσον.
Tou syntelesthēnai hamartian. Anti tou, pherei autous heōs eis eschaton hamartias elasousi, kai aniaton schōsi tēn noson.
"To finish sin." Meaning, it carries them until they come to the extreme of sin and have an incurable disease.
9.25Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Ἀπαλεῖψαι τὰς ἀνομίας. Ὃ δὴ παρέσχεν ἡμῖν διὰ τῆς τοῦ λουτροῦ παλιγγενεσίας, καὶ δικαιοσύνην ἡμῖν παρέχει.
Apaleipsai tas anomias. Ho dē pareschen hēmin dia tēs tou loutrou palingenesias, kai dikaiosynēn hēmin parechei.
"To wipe away iniquities." Which he has granted us through the washing of regeneration, and he grants us righteousness.
9.26Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):16
Σφραγίσαι ὅρασιν. Ἀντὶ τοῦ περαιῶσαι τὰ τῶν προφητῶν ὁράματα· ἀπὸ τῶν φησάντων, τὰ εἰρημένα σημαίνων.
Sphragisai horasin. Anti tou peraiōsai ta tōn prophētōn horamata; apo tōn phēsantōn, ta eirēmena sēmainōn.
"To seal vision." Meaning, to bring to completion the visions of the prophets: by "those who prophesy" signifying what was said.
9.28Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):17
Χρίσαι ἅγιον ἁγίων. Ἀντὶ τοῦ, τοῦ χρίσματος ἡμῖν μεταδοῦναι· ἅγιον δὲ ἁγίων ἔφη ὡς ὑπερβαίνοντος τούτου τὸν παρὰ ἰουδαίοις διὰ τοῦ χρίσματος ἁγιασμόν· ἢ ἵνα αὐτὸν χριστὸν σημάνῃ, χρίεσθαι αὐτὸν φάσκει τῷ ἁγίῳ πνεύματι· διὰ τοῦτο γάρ φησιν ὁ Δαβὶδ ἔχρισέ σε ὁ θεὸς ὁ θεός σου ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως παρὰ τοὺς μετόχους σου, τοῦτο ἐνταῦθα ἅγιον ἁγίων ἐκάλεσεν· οὐ τῷ συνήθει ἐλαίῳ χριόμενον τοῦ θεοῦ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐξαιρέτῳ δυνάμει τοῦ πνεύματος· οὐκ εἶπεν ἁγίῳ ἁγίων, ἀλλ᾽ ἅγιον ἁγίων, αὐτὸν σημαίνων τὸν χριστόν, τὸν ἁγιασμοῦ μὴ δεόμενον, ἀλλ᾽ ἁγιασμοῦ χορηγὸν ὡς θεόν, χρισθέντα δὲ διὰ τὴν οἰκονομίαν.
Chrisai hagion hagiōn. Anti tou, tou chrismatos hēmin metadounai; hagion de hagiōn ephē hōs hyperbainontos toutou ton para ioudaiois dia tou chrismatos hagiasmon; ē hina auton christon sēmanę̄, chriesthai auton phaskei tǭ hagiǭ pneumati; dia touto gar phēsin ho Dabid echrise se ho theos ho theos sou elaion agalliaseōs para tous metochous sou, touto entautha hagion hagiōn ekalesen; ou tǭ synēthei elaiǭ chriomenon tou theou, all᾽ exairetǭ dynamei tou pneumatos; ouk eipen hagiǭ hagiōn, all᾽ hagion hagiōn, auton sēmainōn ton christon, ton hagiasmou mē deomenon, all᾽ hagiasmou chorēgon hōs theon, christhenta de dia tēn oikonomian.
"To anoint a holy of holies." Meaning, to give us a share of the anointing; and he says "holy of holies" as this surpasses the sanctification among the Jews through the anointing; or so as to signify Christ himself, saying that he is anointed with the Holy Spirit; for this is why David says, "God, your God, has anointed you with the oil of gladness beyond your companions"; this he here called "holy of holies": not anointed by God with the usual oil, but with the special power of the Spirit. He did not say "to the holy of holies," but "a holy of holies," signifying Christ himself, who needs no sanctification but is the giver of sanctification as God, and was anointed because of the dispensation.
9.29Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):17
Ἀπὸ ἐξόδου λόγου τοῦ ἀποκριθῆναι. Λέγει πῶς προσήκει καὶ πόθεν τὰς ο' ἑβδομάδας ἀριθμεῖν, τουτέστι τὰ υγ' ἔτη· ἀντὶ τοῦ σημειῶσαι ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἠρξάμην λέγειν, ἀποκρινόμενος πρὸς τὴν ἐρώτησιν· ἦν δὲ πρῶτον ἔτος Δαρείου τοῦ μήδου· μᾶλλον δὲ τὸ ἕν, ὡς ἐν αὐτῇ ἐπεσημήνατο ἡ θεία γραφή, τοῦ μετὰ Βαλτάσαρ βεβασιλευκότος ὡς δέδεικται. — Τοῦ οἰκοδομῆσαι Ἱερουσαλὴμ καὶ ἕως χριστοῦ ἡγουμένου ἑβδομάδες ζ'· πρόκειταί φησι δύο διδάξαι, τὸν χρόνον τῆς τοῦ ναοῦ οἰκοδομῆς, καὶ τὸν ἕως τῆς χριστοῦ παρουσίας· ἐντεῦθεν γάρ τις φησὶν ἀριθμῶν ἄχρις οὗ περαιωθῇ τοῦ ναοῦ ἡ οἰκοδομή, καὶ εὑρήσει ἔτη μθ'· αὐτοῦ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ Δαρείου ἐνιαυτὸν ἕνα τίθησιν ὁ προφήτης μόνον, διὰ τοῦ λέγειν ἔτει ἑνὶ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ· τὸ γὰρ ἓν λέγεται ὡς οὐκ ὄντος δευτέρου· διὰ τοῦτο ἐπὶ τοῦ Βαλτάσαρ οὐχ ὁμοίως ἐχρήσατο τῇ φωνῇ· ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ γάρ φησιν ἔτει Βαλτάσαρ βασιλέως χαλδαίων· ὅπου μὲν γὰρ εὗρε δεύτερον, ἀναγκαίως πρῶτον εἶπεν· ὅπου δὲ δεύτερον οὐκ ἦν, ἁρμόζουσαν τὴν τοῦ ἑνὸς εὗρε λέξιν· οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐκεῖνο ἄν τις εἴποι, ὡς Μωϋσῆς τὴν πρώτην ἡμέραν μίαν κεκληκὼς ἥμαρτεν· ὡς γὰρ οὔπω οὐσῶν τῶν λοιπῶν ἡμερῶν, μίαν ἔφη τὴν ἐν ἀρχῇ γενομένην· τῆς δὲ ἑξῆς μνημονεύσας, δευτέραν αὐτὴν ἀκολούθως ἔφη· ὥσπερ γὰρ ταύτης οὐκ οὔσης, μία ἐκείνη ἐκαλεῖτο, οὐκ ἔχουσα τὴν πρὸς ἑτέραν συνάφειαν· οὕτως ἑτέρας παραχθείσης, ἡ πρώτη ἐλάμβανε τὴν ἐπωνυμίαν, ἔχουσα τῆς γενέσεως τὰ πρεσβεῖα. Λογίζεται τοίνυν τοῦ Δαρείου ὁ προφήτης ἔτος ἕν· τὸ δὲ εὐθὺς ἐν ἀρχῇ κεῖσθαι ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ ἔτει, ταραττέτω μηδένα· ὡς γὰρ ἐπιδιορθούμενος τῆς φωνῆς τὸ ἀδιάφορον, προσέθηκε τό, ἐν ἔτει ἑνί· ἢ εἰ δεῖ τὸ ἀκριβὲς εἰπεῖν, ἑρμηνεύων τὸ ἀδιάφορον τῆς λέξεως· ἀμέλει ἐπὶ τοῦ Βαλτάσαρ εἰρηκώς, ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ ἔτει Βαλτάσαρ, οὐκέτι προστέθεικεν ἐν ἔτει ἑνί· ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ Δαρείου, ἐπειδὴ πλὴν τοῦ ἑνὸς οὐκ ἠπίστατο, ταχέως τῇ προσθήκῃ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἐσαφήνισε τὸ πρὸς αὐτοῦ ῥηθέν. Κῦρον δέ φησι διαδέξασθαι τὴν ἀρχήν, ὃς ἀπὸ τῶν χρονικῶν φαίνεται βασιλεύσας ἔτη λ'· μεθ᾽ ὃν Καμβύσης ὀκτώ· μεθ᾽ ὃν οἱ μάγοι δύο ἀδελφοὶ ἐνιαυτόν· οὕτω γὰρ Ἰώσηπος τίθησιν ἐν τῇ ἑνδεκάτῃ αὐτοῦ ἱστορίᾳ τῆς ἰουδαϊκῆς ἀρχαιολογίας· μεθ᾽ οὓς τὸν Ὑστάσπου Δαρεῖον ἀπέδειξαν βασιλέα· ἀφ᾽ οὗ τοῦ ναοῦ οἰκοδομὴ γεγένηται, ἀρξαμένη μὲν τῷ δευτέρῳ ἔτει, καὶ κατὰ τὴν τῶν χρονικῶν σημασίαν, καὶ κατὰ τὴν τοῦ προφήτου Ζαχαρίου φωνήν, πληρωθεῖσα δὲ κατὰ τὸν ἔνατον ἔτος τοῦ αὐτοῦ Δαρείου κατὰ τὸν Ἰώσηπον· συλλογίζεται τοίνυν οὕτως τὰ μθ' ἔτη· καὶ φήσας τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τὸν χρόνον, λέγει καὶ ὅπως τὸν ἕως τοῦ χριστοῦ παρουσίας ἀπαριθμεῖν δεῖ· λέγει δὲ οὕτως, καὶ ἑβδομάδες ξβ', καὶ ἐπιστρέψει καὶ οἰκοδομηθήσεται πλατεῖα καὶ περίτειχος, καὶ ἐκκενωθήσονται οἱ καιροί· πάλιν φησὶν ἀρίθμησον ξβ' ἑβδομάδας ἅπερ γίνεται ἔτη υλδ', ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἂν πλατεῖα καὶ μεγίστη ἡ πόλις γένηται ἐκ τῆς τοῦ ναοῦ περιβολῆς. Διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ἀκριβῶς ἔφη, καὶ ἐπιστρέψει καὶ οἰκοδομηθήσεται πλατεῖα καὶ περίτειχος, τουτέστιν ἡ πόλις· τὸ δὲ ἐπιστρέψει, ἵνα εἴπῃ ὅτι μετὰ χρόνον τῆς τοῦ ναοῦ οἰκοδομῆς τὰ τῆς πόλεως ἐγερθήσεται τείχη· καὶ γὰρ οὕτως συνέβη, ἐπὶ μὲν γὰρ Κύρου τὸ θυσιαστήριον ᾠκοδομήθη μόνον, ἐπὶ δὲ Δαρείου ὁ ναὸς ἔλαβε πέρας· Ἀρταξέρξου δὲ τοῦ μακρόχειρος ἐπικληθέντος χρόνοις ὕστερον γενομένου, ἀφ᾽ οὗ Νεεμίας ᾔτησε κατὰ τὸ εἰκοστὸν ἔτος τῆς αὐτοῦ βασιλείας οἰκοδομῆσαι τὰ τείχη τῆς πόλεως, καὶ ἐπιτραπεὶς ἐπεραίωσεν αὐτὰ κατὰ τὸ β' καὶ λ' ἔτος τῆς αὐτοῦ βασιλείας· καὶ μηνύει ταῦτα ἡ τοῦ Ἔσδρα γραφή· τοῦτο δὲ οὕτως ἔχον καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν χρόνων εὑρήσει τις ἄν, ἐὰν ἀκριβῶς σκοπούμενος ἐντεῦθεν τις ψηφίζων ἀπὸ τῶν χρονικῶν εὑρήσει υλδ' ἔτη περαιούμενα κατὰ τὸ λβ' ἔτος τῆς βασιλείας Ἡρῴδου· μνησθεὶς γὰρ τῆς προκειμένης ἱστορίας ἐν τοῖς χρονικοῖς Εὐσέβιος, τίθησι κατὰ τὴν πς' ὀλυμπιάδα, δευτέρου ἔτους τῆς αὐτῆς ὀλυμπιάδος, τὸ λβ' ἔτος τῆς Ἀρταξέρξου βασιλείας· φησὶ δὲ τὸν Ἡρῴδην βεβασιλευκέναι ρπς' ὀλυμπιάδι, κατὰ τὸ δ' ἔτος τῆς αὐτῆς ὀλυμπιάδος· ἅπερ συνάγεται ἔτη υβ'· τὰ δὲ ὑπόλοιπα λβ' ἔτη ψηφιστέον τῶν χρόνων τῆς βασιλείας Ἡρῴδου, μεθ᾽ ὧν ὁ δεσπότης χριστὸς τὸ κατὰ σάρκα τεχθεὶς φαίνεται· τὰ μὲν γὰρ πάντα ἔτη ἐβασίλευσεν Ἡρῴδης λζ', φαίνεται δὲ κατὰ τὸ λβ' ἔτος τῆς αὐτοῦ βασιλείας τεχθείς· οὕτω γὰρ καὶ ὁ Εὐσέβιος συνάγει τὸν χρόνον· τούτων τοίνυν οὕτως ἐχόντων, σκοπητέον λοιπὸν τὰς λέξεις, ὅπως σύμφωνον τὴν ἔννοιαν ἔχουσι τοῖς ῥηθεῖσι.
Apo exodou logou tou apokrithēnai. Legei pōs prosēkei kai pothen tas o' hebdomadas arithmein, toutesti ta yg' etē; anti tou sēmeiōsai aph᾽ hou ērxamēn legein, apokrinomenos pros tēn erōtēsin; ēn de prōton etos Dareiou tou mēdou; mallon de to hen, hōs en autę̄ epesēmēnato hē theia graphē, tou meta Baltasar bebasileukotos hōs dedeiktai. — Tou oikodomēsai Hierousalēm kai heōs christou hēgoumenou hebdomades z'; prokeitai phēsi dyo didaxai, ton chronon tēs tou naou oikodomēs, kai ton heōs tēs christou parousias; enteuthen gar tis phēsin arithmōn achris hou peraiōthę̄ tou naou hē oikodomē, kai heurēsei etē mth'; autou men gar tou Dareiou eniauton hena tithēsin ho prophētēs monon, dia tou legein etei heni tēs basileias autou; to gar hen legetai hōs ouk ontos deuterou; dia touto epi tou Baltasar ouch homoiōs echrēsato tę̄ phōnę̄; en tǭ prōtǭ gar phēsin etei Baltasar basileōs chaldaiōn; hopou men gar heure deuteron, anankaiōs prōton eipen; hopou de deuteron ouk ēn, harmozousan tēn tou henos heure lexin; oude gar ekeino an tis eipoi, hōs Mōÿsēs tēn prōtēn hēmeran mian keklēkōs hēmarten; hōs gar oupō ousōn tōn loipōn hēmerōn, mian ephē tēn en archę̄ genomenēn; tēs de hexēs mnēmoneusas, deuteran autēn akolouthōs ephē; hōsper gar tautēs ouk ousēs, mia ekeinē ekaleito, ouk echousa tēn pros heteran synapheian; houtōs heteras parachtheisēs, hē prōtē elambane tēn epōnymian, echousa tēs geneseōs ta presbeia. Logizetai toinyn tou Dareiou ho prophētēs etos hen; to de euthys en archę̄ keisthai en tǭ prōtǭ etei, tarattetō mēdena; hōs gar epidiorthoumenos tēs phōnēs to adiaphoron, prosethēke to, en etei heni; ē ei dei to akribes eipein, hermēneuōn to adiaphoron tēs lexeōs; amelei epi tou Baltasar eirēkōs, en tǭ prōtǭ etei Baltasar, ouketi prostetheiken en etei heni; epi de tou Dareiou, epeidē plēn tou henos ouk ēpistato, tacheōs tę̄ prosthēkę̄ tou henos esaphēnise to pros autou rhēthen. Kyron de phēsi diadexasthai tēn archēn, hos apo tōn chronikōn phainetai basileusas etē l'; meth᾽ hon Kambysēs oktō; meth᾽ hon hoi magoi dyo adelphoi eniauton; houtō gar Iōsēpos tithēsin en tę̄ hendekatę̄ autou historią tēs ioudaïkēs archaiologias; meth᾽ hous ton Hystaspou Dareion apedeixan basilea; aph᾽ hou tou naou oikodomē gegenētai, arxamenē men tǭ deuterǭ etei, kai kata tēn tōn chronikōn sēmasian, kai kata tēn tou prophētou Zachariou phōnēn, plērōtheisa de kata ton enaton etos tou autou Dareiou kata ton Iōsēpon; syllogizetai toinyn houtōs ta mth' etē; kai phēsas tēs oikodomēs ton chronon, legei kai hopōs ton heōs tou christou parousias aparithmein dei; legei de houtōs, kai hebdomades xb', kai epistrepsei kai oikodomēthēsetai plateia kai periteichos, kai ekkenōthēsontai hoi kairoi; palin phēsin arithmēson xb' hebdomadas haper ginetai etē yld', aph᾽ hou an plateia kai megistē hē polis genētai ek tēs tou naou peribolēs. Dia touto kai akribōs ephē, kai epistrepsei kai oikodomēthēsetai plateia kai periteichos, toutestin hē polis; to de epistrepsei, hina eipę̄ hoti meta chronon tēs tou naou oikodomēs ta tēs poleōs egerthēsetai teichē; kai gar houtōs synebē, epi men gar Kyrou to thysiastērion ǭkodomēthē monon, epi de Dareiou ho naos elabe peras; Artaxerxou de tou makrocheiros epiklēthentos chronois hysteron genomenou, aph᾽ hou Neemias ę̄tēse kata to eikoston etos tēs autou basileias oikodomēsai ta teichē tēs poleōs, kai epitrapeis eperaiōsen auta kata to b' kai l' etos tēs autou basileias; kai mēnyei tauta hē tou Esdra graphē; touto de houtōs echon kai apo tōn chronōn heurēsei tis an, ean akribōs skopoumenos enteuthen tis psēphizōn apo tōn chronikōn heurēsei yld' etē peraioumena kata to lb' etos tēs basileias Hērǭdou; mnēstheis gar tēs prokeimenēs historias en tois chronikois Eusebios, tithēsi kata tēn ps' olympiada, deuterou etous tēs autēs olympiados, to lb' etos tēs Artaxerxou basileias; phēsi de ton Hērǭdēn bebasileukenai rps' olympiadi, kata to d' etos tēs autēs olympiados; haper synagetai etē yb'; ta de hypoloipa lb' etē psēphisteon tōn chronōn tēs basileias Hērǭdou, meth᾽ hōn ho despotēs christos to kata sarka techtheis phainetai; ta men gar panta etē ebasileusen Hērǭdēs lz', phainetai de kata to lb' etos tēs autou basileias techtheis; houtō gar kai ho Eusebios synagei ton chronon; toutōn toinyn houtōs echontōn, skopēteon loipon tas lexeis, hopōs symphōnon tēn ennoian echousi tois rhētheisi.
"From the going out of the word to answer." He says how one should proceed and from where one should count the seventy weeks, that is, the … years: in place of indicating "from when I began to speak," answering the question. It was the first year of Darius the Mede, or rather the one year, as divine Scripture itself noted, who reigned after Belshazzar, as has been shown. — "To build Jerusalem, and until an anointed leader, seven weeks": he sets out, he says, to teach two things, the time of the building of the temple and the time until the coming of Christ. For counting from here, one will find the years until the building of the temple was completed to be 49. For the prophet puts only one year of Darius himself, by saying "in the first year of his reign"; for "one" is said as there being no second. That is why for Belshazzar he did not use the same expression; for there he says "in the first year of Belshazzar king of the Chaldeans": where he found a second, he necessarily said "first"; where there was no second, he found the fitting expression "one." Nor would anyone say that Moses, calling the first day "one," erred; for since the other days did not yet exist, he called the one that came about at the beginning "one"; but, recalling the next, he consequently called it "second." For just as, when this did not exist, that one was called "one," having no connection to another, so, when another was brought in, the first received its name, having the seniority of origin. The prophet, then, reckons one year of Darius; and let no one be troubled that "in the first year" is set at the very beginning; for, as if correcting the indifference of the expression, he added "in one year," or, if one must speak exactly, interpreting the indifference of the term. Certainly in the case of Belshazzar, having said "in the first year of Belshazzar," he no longer added "in one year"; but in the case of Darius, since he knew of no more than one, he quickly made plain by the addition of "one" what he had said before. Cyrus, he says, succeeded to the rule, who from the chronicles appears to have reigned thirty years; after him Cambyses eight; after him the magi, two brothers, one year: for so Josephus puts it in the eleventh book of his history of Jewish antiquities; after whom they proclaimed Darius son of Hystaspes king, from whom the building of the temple came about, beginning in his second year according to the indication of the chronicles and the word of the prophet Zechariah, and completed in the ninth year of the same Darius according to Josephus. So he reckons the 49 years in this way. And having stated the time of the building, he also says how one must count the time until the coming of Christ; he says thus: "And sixty-two weeks, and it will return and be built, street and wall, and the times will be emptied." Again, he says, count sixty-two weeks, which make 434 years, from which the city became wide and very great through the enclosure of the temple. For this reason he also said exactly, "and it will return and be built, street and wall," that is, the city; and "it will return," to say that after the time of the building of the temple the walls of the city would be raised. And so it happened: under Cyrus only the altar was built; under Darius the temple was completed; and Artaxerxes, surnamed Longhand, coming later in time, from whom Nehemiah asked in the twentieth year of his reign to build the walls of the city, and, being permitted, finished them in the thirty-second year of his reign; Ezra's writing indicates this. And that this is so one will find from the times too: if, examining exactly, one reckons from the chronicles, he will find 434 years completed in the thirty-second year of the reign of Herod. For Eusebius, mentioning the history before us in his chronicles, puts the thirty-second year of the reign of Artaxerxes in the eighty-sixth Olympiad, the second year of that Olympiad; and he says that Herod reigned in the 186th Olympiad, in the fourth year of that Olympiad; which comes to 402 years; the remaining thirty-two years must be reckoned from the years of Herod's reign, in which the Master Christ appears to have been born according to the flesh; for Herod reigned thirty-seven years in all, and he appears to have been born in the thirty-second year of his reign; for so Eusebius too computes the time. This being so, it remains to consider the words, how they have a sense in agreement with what has been said.
9.32Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):17
Τοῦ οἰκοδομῆσαι Ἱερουσαλήμ. Τουτέστι πρόκειται εἰπεῖν τὸν χρόνον τῆς οἰκοδομίας τοῦ ναοῦ, ὅσα ἐστὶν ἔτη ἄχρι τοῦ πληρωθῆναι αὐτὸν οἰκοδομούμενον.
Tou oikodomēsai Hierousalēm. Toutesti prokeitai eipein ton chronon tēs oikodomias tou naou, hosa estin etē achri tou plērōthēnai auton oikodomoumenon.
"To build Jerusalem." That is, he sets out to state the time of the building of the temple, how many years there are until it was completed in building.
9.33Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):17
Ἕως χριστοῦ ἡγουμένου. Τουτέστι καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τοῦ ναοῦ πάλιν εἰπεῖν σοι βούλομαι τὸν χρόνον ἕως τοῦ χριστοῦ παρουσίας· αὐτὸν γὰρ χριστὸν ἡγούμενον ἐκάλεσε· χριστὸν ὡς κεχρισμένον καθὼς προέφην· ἡγούμενον δὲ ὡς δεσπόζοντα τῶν ἁπάντων. Ἑβδομάδες ἑπτά. Τουτέστιν οὗτος ὁ χρόνος τῆς οἰκοδομίας, ἔτη μθ', ὡς δέδεικται.
Heōs christou hēgoumenou. Toutesti kai apo tēs oikodomēs tou naou palin eipein soi boulomai ton chronon heōs tou christou parousias; auton gar christon hēgoumenon ekalese; christon hōs kechrismenon kathōs proephēn; hēgoumenon de hōs despozonta tōn hapantōn. Hebdomades hepta. Toutestin houtos ho chronos tēs oikodomias, etē mth', hōs dedeiktai.
"Until an anointed leader." That is, from the building of the temple, again, I want to tell you the time until the coming of Christ; for he called him "anointed leader": anointed, as anointed according to what was said before; leader, as ruling over all. "Seven weeks." That is, this is the time of the building, forty-nine years, as has been shown.
9.34Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):18
Καὶ ἑβδομάδες ἑξήκοντα δύο. Τουτέστιν υλδ' ἔτη ἀριθμεῖται μέχρι τῆς τοῦ χριστοῦ παρουσίας, ὡς εἴρηται. — Ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀριθμηθήσονται ταῦτα τὰ ἔτη, μὴ ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἀνῳκοδομήθη ὁ ναός, ἀλλ᾽ ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἂν τὸ τεῖχος γένηται τῆς πόλεως· διὰ τοῦτό φησιν ἐπιστρέψει, τουτέστι χρόνοις δὲ ὕστερον τὸ τέλειον σχῆμα ἀναλήψεται ἡ πόλις.
Kai hebdomades hexēkonta dyo. Toutestin yld' etē arithmeitai mechri tēs tou christou parousias, hōs eirētai. — Anti tou arithmēthēsontai tauta ta etē, mē aph᾽ hou anǭkodomēthē ho naos, all᾽ aph᾽ hou an to teichos genētai tēs poleōs; dia touto phēsin epistrepsei, toutesti chronois de hysteron to teleion schēma analēpsetai hē polis.
"And sixty-two weeks." That is, 434 years are counted until the coming of Christ, as has been said. — Meaning, these years will be counted not from when the temple was rebuilt, but from when the wall of the city is made; that is why he says "it will return," that is, later in time the city will receive its complete form.
9.35Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):18
Ἐκκενωθήσονται οἱ καιροί. Τότε γάρ φησιν ἀναλωθήσονται οἱ καιροὶ οὗτοι οἱ προειρημένοι· τουτέστιν ὁ τῶν υλδ' ἐτῶν χρόνος· μεθ᾽ οὓς αὐτίκα χριστὸς τὰς ἐν ἀνθρώποις ποιήσει διατριβάς.
Ekkenōthēsontai hoi kairoi. Tote gar phēsin analōthēsontai hoi kairoi houtoi hoi proeirēmenoi; toutestin ho tōn yld' etōn chronos; meth᾽ hous autika christos tas en anthrōpois poiēsei diatribas.
"The times will be emptied." For then, he says, these times mentioned before will be used up, that is, the time of the 434 years, after which Christ will at once make his sojourn among men.
9.36Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):18
Ἐξολοθρευθήσεται χρίσμα. Τουτέστι πᾶσα ἡ ἰουδαϊκὴ κατάστασις ἀφανισθήσεται· χρίσμα μὲν γὰρ λέγει τὸν ἱερέα τὸν κεχρισμένον· ὡς γὰρ Μωϋσέα καλεῖ τὸν νόμον, ἀπὸ τοῦ τεθέντος τὸ τεθὲν σημαίνων, οὕτω καὶ χρίσμα τὸν χριστὸν ἱερέα, ἀπὸ τοῦ μετεχομένου τὸν μετέχοντα γνωρίζων· ὁ γοῦν ἑβραῖος καὶ ὁ σύρος σαφῶς ἐξολοθρευθήσεται χριστὸς λέγει, τῇ μνήμῃ τοῦ ἱερέως συναιρῶν τὰς θυσίας. — Συμβήσεται δέ φησι ταῦτα ἰουδαίοις οὐχ ἅμα τοῦ πληρωθῆναι τοὺς καιροὺς τοὺς ἄχρι τῆς τοῦ χριστοῦ παρουσίας ὁρισθέντας, ἀλλὰ πλείστοις ὕστερον ἔτεσιν. — Ἵνα τὴν κατὰ ἰουδαίων διὰ τὰς αὐτῶν παρανομίας ἐμφήνῃ ὀργήν· τοὺς μὲν οὖν ἀμεταμέλητα πταίσαντας, ἔξω τῆς ἐπαγγελίας πεποίηκε, τρόπον δὲ σωτηρίας τῇ οἰκουμένῃ λυσιτελέστερον παρέδωκεν.
Exolothreuthēsetai chrisma. Toutesti pasa hē ioudaïkē katastasis aphanisthēsetai; chrisma men gar legei ton hierea ton kechrismenon; hōs gar Mōÿsea kalei ton nomon, apo tou tethentos to tethen sēmainōn, houtō kai chrisma ton christon hierea, apo tou metechomenou ton metechonta gnōrizōn; ho goun hebraios kai ho syros saphōs exolothreuthēsetai christos legei, tę̄ mnēmę̄ tou hiereōs synairōn tas thysias. — Symbēsetai de phēsi tauta ioudaiois ouch hama tou plērōthēnai tous kairous tous achri tēs tou christou parousias horisthentas, alla pleistois hysteron etesin. — Hina tēn kata ioudaiōn dia tas autōn paranomias emphēnę̄ orgēn; tous men oun ametamelēta ptaisantas, exō tēs epangelias pepoiēke, tropon de sōtērias tę̄ oikoumenę̄ lysitelesteron paredōken.
"Anointing will be destroyed." That is, the whole Jewish order will be done away with; for by "anointing" he means the anointed priest; for as he calls the law "Moses," signifying what was laid down from the one who laid it down, so too by "anointing" he makes known the anointed priest, from what is shared the one who shares in it. At any rate the Hebrew and the Syrian say plainly, "Christ will be destroyed," taking away the sacrifices together with the memory of the priest. — These things, he says, will happen to the Jews not as soon as the times fixed until the coming of Christ are fulfilled, but very many years later. — So as to show the anger against the Jews because of their lawlessness: those who stumbled without repentance he put outside the promise, but he gave the world a way of salvation more profitable.
9.37Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):18
Κρίμα οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ. Ἀντὶ τοῦ, δικαστήρια καὶ ψῆφοι καὶ νόμοι· ἅπερ πάντα τὴν βασιλικὴν εὐταξίαν δείκνυσι καὶ τὴν πολιτικὴν κατάστασιν.
Krima ouk estin en autǭ. Anti tou, dikastēria kai psēphoi kai nomoi; haper panta tēn basilikēn eutaxian deiknysi kai tēn politikēn katastasin.
"There will be no judgment in it." Meaning: law courts, votes, and laws; which all show the royal good order and the civil constitution.
9.38Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):18
Ἐκκοπήσονται ἐν κατακλυσμῷ. Οὐδὲν τῇ δυνάμει διαλλάττειν νομίζω τῆς προφητικῆς φωνῆς τὴν τοῦ κυρίου ἀπόφασιν· ὅτι γὰρ προφήτης ἐκκοπήσονταί φησι, πρόρριζον αὐτῶν ἀπώλειαν δηλῶν· καὶ ὁ κύριος μὴ μένειν λίθον ἐπὶ λίθον ἀπεφήνατο, τὴν κατὰ κράτος τῶν πολεμίων διδάσκων ἰσχύν. — Οὕτως γὰρ αὐτῶν κατὰ κράτος οἱ πολέμιοι περιέσονται ὥστε μηδὲ ἐλπίδας αὐτοῖς ἀναστάσεως ὑπολείπεσθαι· τὸ γὰρ ἕως τέλους, δηλοῖ τὴν παντελῆ ἀπώλειαν· τὸ δὲ ἀφανισμοῦ, τὸ μηδὲ μνημόσυνον αὐτῶν ὁρᾶσθαι τῆς προτέρου εὐημερίας.
Ekkopēsontai en kataklysmǭ. Ouden tę̄ dynamei diallattein nomizō tēs prophētikēs phōnēs tēn tou kyriou apophasin; hoti gar prophētēs ekkopēsontai phēsi, prorrizon autōn apōleian dēlōn; kai ho kyrios mē menein lithon epi lithon apephēnato, tēn kata kratos tōn polemiōn didaskōn ischyn. — Houtōs gar autōn kata kratos hoi polemioi periesontai hōste mēde elpidas autois anastaseōs hypoleipesthai; to gar heōs telous, dēloi tēn pantelē apōleian; to de aphanismou, to mēde mnēmosynon autōn horasthai tēs proterou euēmerias.
"They will be cut off in a flood." I think that the Lord's declaration differs in no way in force from the prophetic word; for the prophet, saying "they will be cut off," makes plain their destruction from the root; and the Lord, declaring that not a stone would remain upon a stone, teaches the strength of the enemies by force. — For the enemies will prevail over them by force so that no hope of recovery is left them; for "until the end" makes plain the complete destruction, and "of disappearance," that not even a memory of their former prosperity is seen.
9.39Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):18
Δυναμώσει διαθήκην. Ἀκριβέστατον δὲ εἶπε τὸ δυναμώσει· ἐπειδὴ πρὸ τῆς αὐτοῦ παρουσίας ἐν ἐπαγγελίαις ἦν τὰ ἀγαθά· ταῦτα οὖν φησιν αὐτὸς παραγενόμενος βεβαιώσει· καὶ ἔσται ἡ ἐπὶ τοῖς πιστοῖς συνθήκη ἀσφαλής τε καὶ ἰσχυρά, παρ᾽ οὐδενὸς σαλευθῆναι μὴ δυναμένη, οὐδὲ ληψομένη μεταβολήν.
Dynamōsei diathēkēn. Akribestaton de eipe to dynamōsei; epeidē pro tēs autou parousias en epangeliais ēn ta agatha; tauta oun phēsin autos paragenomenos bebaiōsei; kai estai hē epi tois pistois synthēkē asphalēs te kai ischyra, par᾽ oudenos saleuthēnai mē dynamenē, oude lēpsomenē metabolēn.
"He will strengthen a covenant." "He will strengthen" is said most exactly; since before his coming it was in promises, these good things, he says, he himself will confirm by his coming; and the covenant with the faithful will be secure and strong, unable to be shaken by anyone, nor to receive change.
9.40Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):18
Ἐν τῷ ἡμίσει τῆς ἑβδομάδος. Τὸν χρόνον λέγει ἐν ᾧπερ ὁ χριστὸς διδάσκων διετέλεσε· τοσοῦτον κατ᾽ αὐτὸν φήσας, ὅσον ἐνεδέχετο προφητεύοντα εἰπεῖν· διαθήκην μὲν λέγει τὴν παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ εἰς ἀνθρώπους συνθήκην· τοῦτο γὰρ ἔθος τῇ θείᾳ γραφῇ, ὡς Ἱερεμίας λέγει, ἰδοὺ διαθήσομαι ὑμῖν διαθήκην αἰώνιον καινήν. — Τούτων γάρ φησι γινομένων, βεβαιωθήσεται ἡ χριστοῦ ἐπαγγελία, ἡ πρὸς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη· ὅπερ πεποίηκεν ὁ χριστὸς ἐν τῷ ἡμίσει τῆς ἑβδομάδος, αὐτός τε παραγενόμενος, καὶ τοὺς οἰκείους ἐκθέμενος νόμους, καὶ τὸν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ὑποστὰς θάνατον, καὶ παύσας τὴν ἁμαρτίαν, καὶ χαρισάμενος τὴν ἀνάστασιν, καὶ δοὺς ἡμῖν τῶν μελλόντων ἀγαθῶν τὸν ἀρραβῶνα. — Εὔδηλον ὡς τοῦ χριστοῦ λέγει τὴν μετὰ ἀνθρώπων διαγωγήν, ἐν ᾗ τοὺς ἀποστόλους ἐξελέξατο, καὶ διδάσκων ἰουδαίους τε καὶ δι᾽ ἐκείνων ἅπαντας τοὺς λοιποὺς τὴν τελειοτάτην εὐσέβειαν.
En tǭ hēmisei tēs hebdomados. Ton chronon legei en hǭper ho christos didaskōn dietelese; tosouton kat᾽ auton phēsas, hoson enedecheto prophēteuonta eipein; diathēkēn men legei tēn para tou theou eis anthrōpous synthēkēn; touto gar ethos tę̄ theią graphę̄, hōs Hieremias legei, idou diathēsomai hymin diathēkēn aiōnion kainēn. — Toutōn gar phēsi ginomenōn, bebaiōthēsetai hē christou epangelia, hē pros panta ta ethnē; hoper pepoiēken ho christos en tǭ hēmisei tēs hebdomados, autos te paragenomenos, kai tous oikeious ekthemenos nomous, kai ton hyper hēmōn hypostas thanaton, kai pausas tēn hamartian, kai charisamenos tēn anastasin, kai dous hēmin tōn mellontōn agathōn ton arrabōna. — Eudēlon hōs tou christou legei tēn meta anthrōpōn diagōgēn, en hę̄ tous apostolous exelexato, kai didaskōn ioudaious te kai di᾽ ekeinōn hapantas tous loipous tēn teleiotatēn eusebeian.
"In the half of the week." He means the time in which Christ completed his teaching, having said as much about it as was allowed one prophesying to say. By "covenant" he means the compact of God with men; for this is the custom of divine Scripture, as Jeremiah says, "Behold, I will make with you an eternal, new covenant." — For when these things happen, he says, the promise of Christ will be confirmed, made to all the nations; which Christ did in the half of the week, both coming himself and setting out his own laws, and undergoing death for us, and putting an end to sin, and granting the resurrection, and giving us the pledge of the good things to come. — It is clear that he means Christ's life among men, in which he chose the apostles and taught the Jews, and through them all the rest, the most perfect godliness.
Chapter 10
10.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):18
Ἐν ἔτει πρώτῳ Κύρου βασιλέως. Πρόκειται μὲν αὐτῷ τὰ παρὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου γνωρισθέντα διηγήσασθαι· χρῆται δὲ καὶ κατὰ τὸ παρὸν τῷ ἰδιώματι τῆς γραφῆς· οὐ γὰρ πρότερον τὸ κατὰ μέρος λέγει, πρὶν ἢ ἐν κεφαλαίῳ περιλάβῃ τὸν ὅλων τὸν νοῦν· οὐ γὰρ ἔφη τι ἀπεκαλύφθη, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι λόγος· ἄριστον τέως ποιούμενος τῶν πραγμάτων τὴν ἀφήγησιν.
En etei prōtǭ Kyrou basileōs. Prokeitai men autǭ ta para tou angelou gnōristhenta diēgēsasthai; chrētai de kai kata to paron tǭ idiōmati tēs graphēs; ou gar proteron to kata meros legei, prin ē en kephalaiǭ perilabę̄ ton holōn ton noun; ou gar ephē ti apekalyphthē, all᾽ hoti logos; ariston teōs poioumenos tōn pragmatōn tēn aphēgēsin.
"In the first year of Cyrus the king." It was set before him to narrate what was made known by the angel; but here too he uses the manner of Scripture; for he does not first speak in detail before he has gathered the sense of the whole in a summary; for he does not say what was revealed, but that a word was revealed, making the account of the events orderly.
10.2Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):18
Ἀληθινὸς ὁ λόγος. Τουτέστιν οὐ φαντασίαν τίθεται, ἀλλ᾽ αὐτῶν τῶν πραγμάτων τὴν ἀλήθειαν.
Alēthinos ho logos. Toutestin ou phantasian tithetai, all᾽ autōn tōn pragmatōn tēn alētheian.
"The word is true." That is, he does not set down a fantasy, but the truth of the events themselves.
10.3Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):18
Δύναμις μεγάλη καὶ σύνεσις. Οὐ μόνον φησὶ τὰ ὀφθέντα ἦν παράδοξα, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὁ ἀπαγγέλλων τὰ πράγματα, ἦν φοβερός· καὶ οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἐδυνήθην τὴν ἀρχὴν δέξασθαι τοῦ διαλεγομένου τὴν ὁμιλίαν, εἰ μὴ χάριτος τυχὼν μείζονος ἢ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον ἤρκεσα πρὸς τὴν τῶν λόγων ἀκρόασιν.
Dynamis megalē kai synesis. Ou monon phēsi ta ophthenta ēn paradoxa, alla kai ho apangellōn ta pragmata, ēn phoberos; kai oud᾽ an edynēthēn tēn archēn dexasthai tou dialegomenou tēn homilian, ei mē charitos tychōn meizonos ē kata anthrōpon ērkesa pros tēn tōn logōn akroasin.
"Great power and understanding." Not only, he says, were the things seen wonderful, but the one who announced the matters was fearsome, and I could not even have begun to receive the discourse of the one speaking had I not met with a grace greater than human for the hearing of the words.
10.4Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):18
Ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις. Δηλονότι ἡνίκα οὐδεὶς νοῦν ἐβάλετο τοῦ διαφθεῖραι τὸν λαόν, ἅτε τῆς βασιλείας αὐτῷ ἀρχὴν λαβούσης καὶ διαμενούσης ἐν ἀσφαλείᾳ.
En tais hēmerais ekeinais. Dēlonoti hēnika oudeis noun ebaleto tou diaphtheirai ton laon, hate tēs basileias autǭ archēn labousēs kai diamenousēs en asphaleią.
"In those days." Clearly, when no one any longer thought of destroying the people, since the kingdom had begun to be his and remained in safety.
10.5Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):18-19
Πενθῶν τρεῖς ἑβδομάδας. Τουτέστι νηστεύων. Ἔθος γὰρ τοῖς ἰουδαίοις τὴν νηστείαν πένθος καλεῖν, ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ἀναγέγραπται· δῆλος δέ ἐστι νηστεύσας ἐφεξῆς τὰς εἴκοσι μιᾶς ἡμέρας, οὐδὲ μιᾶς τροφῆς μεταξὺ μεταλαβών, οὐδέ τι τῶν κατὰ συνήθειαν πεποιηκώς· τοῦτο γὰρ μηνύει τὸ ἕως τριῶν ἑβδομάδων ἡμερῶν· εἰ γὰρ καθ᾽ ἑκάστην διημερεύων ἐν τῇ νηστείᾳ, κατὰ τὴν ἑσπέραν ἤσθιεν, οὐδὲν ἦν θαυμαστόν· ἀλλὰ δῆλον ὡς συντόνῳ τῇ προσευχῇ χρήσασθαι βουλόμενος, καὶ πολλῷ ληφθεὶς τῷ θείῳ πόθῳ, συνῆπτε τὰς ἡμέρας· τρόπον τινὰ κρίνας, μὴ πρότερον τροφῆς μεταλαβεῖν ἄχρις οὗ τῆς ἄνωθεν ἀξιωθείη ὁμιλίας.
Penthōn treis hebdomadas. Toutesti nēsteuōn. Ethos gar tois ioudaiois tēn nēsteian penthos kalein, hōs kai en tǭ nomǭ anagegraptai; dēlos de esti nēsteusas ephexēs tas eikosi mias hēmeras, oude mias trophēs metaxy metalabōn, oude ti tōn kata synētheian pepoiēkōs; touto gar mēnyei to heōs triōn hebdomadōn hēmerōn; ei gar kath᾽ hekastēn diēmereuōn en tę̄ nēsteią, kata tēn hesperan ēsthien, ouden ēn thaumaston; alla dēlon hōs syntonǭ tę̄ proseuchę̄ chrēsasthai boulomenos, kai pollǭ lēphtheis tǭ theiǭ pothǭ, synēpte tas hēmeras; tropon tina krinas, mē proteron trophēs metalabein achris hou tēs anōthen axiōtheiē homilias.
"Mourning three weeks." That is, fasting. For it is the custom among the Jews to call fasting "mourning," as is also written in the law. It is clear that he fasted the twenty-one days in succession, taking not even one meal in between, nor doing anything according to custom; for this is what "until three weeks of days" indicates. For if he had spent each day in the fast and eaten in the evening, there would have been nothing wonderful; but it is clear that, wishing to use intense prayer and seized by great divine longing, he joined the days together, having decided, in a way, not to take food until he was counted worthy of converse from above.
10.6Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):19
Ἄλειμμα οὐκ ἠλειψάμην. Μηνύει ὡς οὐ μόνον τῆς συνήθους ἀπέσχετο τροφῆς, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἕτερόν τι τῶν κατὰ συνήθειαν πεποίηκεν· ἔθος γὰρ ἦν τοῖς ἐν τέλει τῶν περσῶν καλλωπίζειν τὴν κόμην, ἄλλοις τέ τισι, καὶ ἀλοιφῇ, ὃ ἔτι καὶ νῦν παρὰ πέρσαις ἐστὶν ἰδεῖν· λαλεῖ τοίνυν ὅτι οὐδὲ μεταστὰς τῆς ἀξίας, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ τῶν ὁμοίων τυγχάνων, οὐδὲν τῶν κατὰ συνήθειαν πεποίηκεν· ἐν γὰρ πλείστῃ εὐημερίᾳ ἐπὶ Δαρείου γεγονὼς καὶ μάλιστα μετὰ τὸ ἐπὶ τοῖς λέουσι παράδοξον, ἔμεινεν ἐπὶ τῆς ἴσης τιμῆς καὶ ἐπὶ Κύρου.
Aleimma ouk ēleipsamēn. Mēnyei hōs ou monon tēs synēthous apescheto trophēs, all᾽ oud᾽ heteron ti tōn kata synētheian pepoiēken; ethos gar ēn tois en telei tōn persōn kallōpizein tēn komēn, allois te tisi, kai aloiphę̄, ho eti kai nyn para persais estin idein; lalei toinyn hoti oude metastas tēs axias, all᾽ epi tōn homoiōn tynchanōn, ouden tōn kata synētheian pepoiēken; en gar pleistę̄ euēmerią epi Dareiou gegonōs kai malista meta to epi tois leousi paradoxon, emeinen epi tēs isēs timēs kai epi Kyrou.
"I did not anoint myself with ointment." It indicates that he not only abstained from his usual food, but did not do any of the other customary things either; for it was the custom of those in office among the Persians to beautify their hair with certain other things and with ointment, which can still be seen among the Persians today. He says, then, that he had not lost his rank, but, remaining in the same position, did none of the customary things; for he was in very great prosperity under Darius, especially after the wonder of the lions, and he remained in the same honor under Cyrus too.
10.7Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):19
Ἕως πληρώσεως τριῶν ἑβδομάδων ἡμερῶν. Ἀκριβέστατα τὸν καιρὸν ἐπισημαίνεται καθ᾽ ὃν τὴν ὀπτασίαν πεποίηται. Καὶ μετ᾽ ὀλίγα. Ἱκέτευεν τὸν θεὸν τήν τε ἄνοδον ἰουδαίοις κατὰ τὴν ὑπόσχεσιν παρασχεῖν, καὶ γνωρίσαι μοι ἀκριβῶς τὰ ὑπὸ Ἀντιόχου πραχθησόμενα· ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν εἰρημένων δηλονότι τὸ πάσχα οὐκ ἐπετέλεσε· καὶ πῶς ἐγὼ λέγω ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν ἀζύμων νηστεύειν ἰουδαίοις οὐ θέμις; οὗτος δὲ ἡμέρας κα' οὐδενὸς ὅλως μετέλαβε· καὶ πόθεν δῆλον φησί; ὅτι αὗται αἱ κ' ἡμέραι καὶ μία, κατὰ τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν ἀζύμων ἦσαν, ἐξ ὧν εἶπεν ὅτι τετάρτῃ καὶ εἰκάδι τοῦ μηνὸς τοῦ πρώτου· καί τοι γε τὸ πάσχα εἰς μίαν καὶ εἰκοστὴν τελευτᾷ· ἀρχόμενοι γὰρ ἀπὸ τῆς τετάρτης καὶ δεκάτης τοῦ πρώτου μηνός, εἶτα ζ' ἡμέρας ἑορτάσαντες, εἰς κα' ἀπαντῶσιν· ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως καὶ παρελθόντος τοῦ πάσχα, ἔμενεν οὗτος νηστεύων· ἀρξάμενος γὰρ ἀπὸ τῆς γ' ἡμέρας τοῦ πρώτου, εἶτα καὶ πληρώσας τὴν τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην, παρῆλθε καὶ μετ᾽ ἐκείνην ἑπτὰ καὶ τρεῖς ἡμέρας· πῶς οὖν οὐκ ἐρυθριῶσιν οἱ μιαροὶ ἰουδαῖοι, τῶν ἁγίων ἐκείνων οὐδὲν τῶν τοιούτων νομίμων φυλαττόντων ἐπὶ τῆς ἀλλοτρίας, αὐτοὶ τοὐναντίον ποιοῦσι πρὸς φιλονεικίαν καὶ ἔριν;
Heōs plērōseōs triōn hebdomadōn hēmerōn. Akribestata ton kairon episēmainetai kath᾽ hon tēn optasian pepoiētai. Kai met᾽ oliga. Hiketeuen ton theon tēn te anodon ioudaiois kata tēn hyposchesin paraschein, kai gnōrisai moi akribōs ta hypo Antiochou prachthēsomena; apo de tōn eirēmenōn dēlonoti to pascha ouk epetelese; kai pōs egō legō en tais hēmerais tōn azymōn nēsteuein ioudaiois ou themis? houtos de hēmeras ka' oudenos holōs metelabe; kai pothen dēlon phēsi? hoti hautai hai k' hēmerai kai mia, kata tas hēmeras tōn azymōn ēsan, ex hōn eipen hoti tetartę̄ kai eikadi tou mēnos tou prōtou; kai toi ge to pascha eis mian kai eikostēn teleutą; archomenoi gar apo tēs tetartēs kai dekatēs tou prōtou mēnos, eita z' hēmeras heortasantes, eis ka' apantōsin; all᾽ homōs kai parelthontos tou pascha, emenen houtos nēsteuōn; arxamenos gar apo tēs g' hēmeras tou prōtou, eita kai plērōsas tēn tessareskaidekatēn, parēlthe kai met᾽ ekeinēn hepta kai treis hēmeras; pōs oun ouk erythriōsin hoi miaroi ioudaioi, tōn hagiōn ekeinōn ouden tōn toioutōn nomimōn phylattontōn epi tēs allotrias, autoi tounantion poiousi pros philoneikian kai erin?
"Until three weeks of days were completed." He marks most exactly the time at which he had the vision. And a little after: He was begging God both to grant the Jews the return according to his promise, and to make known to him exactly what would be done by Antiochus. It is clear from what has been said that he did not keep the Passover. "And how," someone says, "do you say that it was not lawful for Jews to fast in the days of unleavened bread? Yet this man took nothing at all for twenty-one days. And where does it appear," he says, "that these twenty-one days were during the days of unleavened bread?" From his saying "on the twenty-fourth of the first month"; and the Passover ends on the twenty-first; for they begin from the fourteenth of the first month and, having kept the feast seven days, reach the twenty-first. But even when the Passover had passed, he remained fasting; for, beginning from the third day of the first month and then completing the fourteenth, he passed beyond it too by seven and three days. How then are the polluted Jews, who keep none of those holy ordinances in a foreign land, not ashamed, but turn the matter to contentiousness and strife?
10.10Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):19
Ἦρα τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς. Προσευχόμενός φησι καὶ ἐν ἀμηχανίᾳ καθεστώς, ὅτου περ ἕνεκ᾽ ἐπὶ τοσοῦτον προσευχόμενος οὐδὲ μιᾶς ἔτυχεν ἀποκρίσεως, ἀποτείνας τὸ ὄμμα, εἶδόν τινα ἐν ἀνδρὸς σχήματι, ἐξηλλαγμένην ἐσθῆτα παρὰ τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων συνήθειαν ἠμφιεσμένον, βαδδίν· καὶ ἔστι μὲν ἡ λέξις ἑβραϊκή· ἑρμηνεύεται δὲ παρὰ μὲν τῶν ο' βύσσινον, Ἀκύλας δὲ ἐξαίρετον λέγει.
Ēra tous ophthalmous. Proseuchomenos phēsi kai en amēchanią kathestōs, hotou per henek᾽ epi tosouton proseuchomenos oude mias etychen apokriseōs, apoteinas to omma, eidon tina en andros schēmati, exēllagmenēn esthēta para tēn tōn anthrōpōn synētheian ēmphiesmenon, baddin; kai esti men hē lexis hebraïkē; hermēneuetai de para men tōn o' byssinon, Akylas de exaireton legei.
"I lifted my eyes." While praying, he says, and being in helplessness, because though he had prayed for so long he had received not one answer, as he raised his eyes I saw one in human form, clothed in a garment unlike what men usually wear: baddin. The word is Hebrew; the Seventy render it "fine linen," while Aquila says "special."
10.11Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):19
Ἡ ὀσφὺς αὐτοῦ περιεζωσμένη ἐν χρυσίῳ ὠφάζ. Λέγει ὡς ἡ ζώνη τοῦ ὀφθέντος ἦν οἵα ἂν γένοιτο ἡ ἐκ χρυσίου καθαροῦ κατεσκευασμένη· κατὰ δὲ τοὺς ο' ὅτι τὸ λοιπὸν σῶμα παραδόξῳ τινὶ ἐσθῆτι περιβεβλημένος, εἶχέ τι καὶ φαινόμενον ἀποστίλβον καθαρῷ φωτὶ παραπλήσιον.
Hē osphys autou periezōsmenē en chrysiǭ ōphaz. Legei hōs hē zōnē tou ophthentos ēn hoia an genoito hē ek chrysiou katharou kateskeuasmenē; kata de tous o' hoti to loipon sōma paradoxǭ tini esthēti peribeblēmenos, eiche ti kai phainomenon apostilbon katharǭ phōti paraplēsion.
"His loins girded with gold of Uphaz." He says that the girdle of the one who appeared was such as one made of pure gold would be; but according to the Seventy, that the rest of his body, clothed in some wonderful garment, also had something visible flashing out, like pure light.
10.12Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):19
Ὡσεὶ ὅρασις ἀστραπῆς. Τουτέστι μαρμαῖρον ἦν καὶ ἔκλαμπρον, καὶ οἷον ἀστραπή τις ἀπεπήδα ἐδόκει τοῦ προσώπου. — Δῆλός ἐστιν ἀπορῶν τρόπον τινὰ πρὸς τὴν ἑρμηνείαν τοῦ ὀφθέντος· οὐ γὰρ ἁπλῶς διηγεῖται, ἀλλὰ τοῖς παραδείγμασι τὸ παράδοξον γνωρίζων. — Ἀντὶ τοῦ πάντα ἦν παράδοξα, τὸ ἔνδυμα, τὸ πρόσωπον, οἱ ὀφθαλμοί, τὸ σῶμα τὸ λοιπόν· ἦν δέ φησι πρὸς τοῖς λοιποῖς καὶ ἡ φωνὴ τῆς συνηθείας κρείττων· ἐδόκει γὰρ οὐχ ὡς παρ᾽ ἑνὸς ἀφίεσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ ὡς πλήθους διαθορυβοῦντος καὶ πρὸς ἀλλήλους διαλεγομένου, μᾶλλον δὲ βοῶντος καὶ παράδοξόν τινα τὸν ἦχον ἐκπέμποντος.
Hōsei horasis astrapēs. Toutesti marmairon ēn kai eklampron, kai hoion astrapē tis apepēda edokei tou prosōpou. — Dēlos estin aporōn tropon tina pros tēn hermēneian tou ophthentos; ou gar haplōs diēgeitai, alla tois paradeigmasi to paradoxon gnōrizōn. — Anti tou panta ēn paradoxa, to endyma, to prosōpon, hoi ophthalmoi, to sōma to loipon; ēn de phēsi pros tois loipois kai hē phōnē tēs synētheias kreittōn; edokei gar ouch hōs par᾽ henos aphiesthai, all᾽ hōs plēthous diathorybountos kai pros allēlous dialegomenou, mallon de boōntos kai paradoxon tina ton ēchon ekpempontos.
"Like the appearance of lightning." That is, it was gleaming and radiant, and as it were a lightning flash shone out from the face. — He is clearly at a loss in a way about the interpretation of what was seen; for he does not narrate simply, but makes known the wonder by comparisons. — Meaning: everything was wonderful, the garment, the face, the eyes, the rest of the body; and, he says, besides the rest, his voice too was above the ordinary; for it seemed to be uttered not as by one but as by a multitude making a din and talking with one another, or rather shouting and sending out a wonderful sound.
10.14Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):19
Εἶδον ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ μόνος. Δῆλός ἐστιν ὁ Δανιὴλ οὐ μόνος ποιούμενος τὴν ἱκεσίαν, ἀλλὰ συνεργοὺς καὶ ἑτέρους λαβών, ἢ τοὺς τρεῖς παῖδας, καὶ ἑτέρους πλείονας οὓς ὁμόφρονας ἠπίστατο· ὡς καὶ ἐν ἀρχῇ ἐπὶ τῇ ἀπορίᾳ τῆς τοῦ Ναβουχοδονόσορ ὄψεως, εἶχε καὶ τούτους συμπράττοντας ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ, ἰσουμένους δὲ ὅμως τοῦ προκειμένου· διό μοι καὶ μόνος δοκεῖ τὸ παράδοξον ὁρᾶν.
Eidon egō Daniēl monos. Dēlos estin ho Daniēl ou monos poioumenos tēn hikesian, alla synergous kai heterous labōn, ē tous treis paidas, kai heterous pleionas hous homophronas ēpistato; hōs kai en archę̄ epi tę̄ aporią tēs tou Nabouchodonosor opseōs, eiche kai toutous symprattontas en tę̄ proseuchę̄, isoumenous de homōs tou prokeimenou; dio moi kai monos dokei to paradoxon horan.
"I, Daniel, alone saw." It is clear that Daniel did not make the supplication alone, but took others too as fellow workers, either the three youths or several others whom he knew to be like-minded; as at the beginning, at the perplexity over Nebuchadnezzar's vision, he had these too acting with him in prayer; yet they were equal in the matter at hand; therefore he seems to me to see the wonder alone.
10.15Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):19
Εἶδον τὴν ὀπτασίαν τὴν μεγάλην. Οἱ μὲν γὰρ λοιποί φησιν εἰς φυγὴν ἐτράπησαν, ἐγὼ δὲ μόνος τῆς παραδόξου ταύτης θέας τετύχηκα. — Οὐ μὴν φησὶν ἤρκεσα πρὸς τὴν θέαν· ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ τοῦ δέους ἐκλυόμην. — Τουτέστι τοῦ προσώπου μου ὁ χρὼς μετεβλήθη, ὃ τοῖς εἰς δέος καθισταμένοις μάλιστα συμβαίνει, ὑπὸ τοῦ φόβου καὶ τοῦ ἀγῶνος ὑποστρέφοντος πολλάκις τοῦ αἵματος, καὶ ὠχρὰν τοῦ σώματος καταλιμπάνοντος τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν. — Εἰς ταύτην φησὶν ἐλήλυθα τὴν κατάστασιν, ἤκουον αὐτοῦ διαλεγομένου. — Ἵνα εἴπῃ ὑπὸ τοῦ φόβου ὅτι οὔτε ἀτενίσαι ἐτόλμων, ἀλλὰ πρηνὴς πεσὼν ἔνευον κάτω.
Eidon tēn optasian tēn megalēn. Hoi men gar loipoi phēsin eis phygēn etrapēsan, egō de monos tēs paradoxou tautēs theas tetychēka. — Ou mēn phēsin ērkesa pros tēn thean; all᾽ hypo tou deous eklyomēn. — Toutesti tou prosōpou mou ho chrōs meteblēthē, ho tois eis deos kathistamenois malista symbainei, hypo tou phobou kai tou agōnos hypostrephontos pollakis tou haimatos, kai ōchran tou sōmatos katalimpanontos tēn epiphaneian. — Eis tautēn phēsin elēlytha tēn katastasin, ēkouon autou dialegomenou. — Hina eipę̄ hypo tou phobou hoti oute atenisai etolmōn, alla prēnēs pesōn eneuon katō.
"I saw this great vision." For the others, he says, turned to flight, but I alone obtained this wonderful sight. — Yet, he says, I was not equal to the sight, but was undone by fear. — That is, the color of my face was changed, which happens above all to those who fall into fear, the blood often drawing back from fear and anguish, and a paleness leaving its mark on the surface of the body. — He says he came into this state when he heard him speaking. — To say that from fear he did not even dare to look intently, but, falling on his face, he looked down.
10.16Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):19
Ἤγειρέ με. Παρεμυθεῖτό φησι τὸ δέος ὁ ὀφθείς, καὶ ἀνίστη τοῦ πτώματος. — Τουτέστιν ὑπό τε θεοῦ ἀγαπώμενε καὶ πολλὴν περὶ τὸν λαὸν ἔχων τὴν διάθεσιν. — Τουτέστιν ἀναστὰς πρόσεχε τοῖς λεγομένοις τὸν νοῦν· εἰς τοσοῦτον δὲ δέος καταστῆναι αὐτὸν συνεχώρησεν ὁ θεός, ὡς ἂν μὴ ὑπὸ τοῦ μεγέθους τῶν φαινομένων φυσηθῇ τὴν γνώμην.
Ēgeire me. Paremytheito phēsi to deos ho ophtheis, kai anistē tou ptōmatos. — Toutestin hypo te theou agapōmene kai pollēn peri ton laon echōn tēn diathesin. — Toutestin anastas proseche tois legomenois ton noun; eis tosouton de deos katastēnai auton synechōrēsen ho theos, hōs an mē hypo tou megethous tōn phainomenōn physēthę̄ tēn gnōmēn.
"He raised me." The one who appeared, he says, calmed my fear and raised me from my fall. — That is, being loved by God and having great affection for the people. — That is, rise and attend to what is said; God allowed him to come into such fear so that his mind might not be puffed up by the greatness of the appearances.
10.17Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):19
Νῦν ἀπεστάλην πρὸς σέ. Ἥκω γάρ φησιν οὐ παρ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ, ἀλλὰ παρὰ θεοῦ ἀποσταλείς. — Τὸ μὲν οὖν κελευσθέν φησιν ἔπραττον καὶ διανιστάμην τοῦ πτώματος, οὐ μὴν ἀπηλλαττόμην τοῦ δέους. — Πρὸ τοῦ λόγου παραμυθεῖται, ἔτι τὴν ψυχὴν ταραττόμενον.
Nyn apestalēn pros se. Hēkō gar phēsin ou par᾽ emautou, alla para theou apostaleis. — To men oun keleusthen phēsin epratton kai dianistamēn tou ptōmatos, ou mēn apēllattomēn tou deous. — Pro tou logou paramytheitai, eti tēn psychēn tarattomenon.
"Now I have been sent to you." I have come, he says, not of myself, but sent from God. — What was commanded, he says, I did, and I rose from my fall, but was not freed from fear. — He comforts him before the word, since he is still troubled in soul.
10.18Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):19
Ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας. Μὴ θαυμάσῃς φησὶν εἰ μετὰ τοσαύτας ἡμέρας ἀφικόμην, τὴν τῶν ἀπορουμένων παρέξων τὴν γνῶσιν· οὐ γὰρ ἀνεβάλετο θεός· αὐτίκα γὰρ μάλα διακονησόμενον τοῖς παρά σου δεήμασιν ἀπέσταλκεν· ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τε τῶν ζητουμένων σοι παρασχεῖν τὴν διδασκαλίαν.
Apo tēs prōtēs hēmeras. Mē thaumasę̄s phēsin ei meta tosautas hēmeras aphikomēn, tēn tōn aporoumenōn parexōn tēn gnōsin; ou gar anebaleto theos; autika gar mala diakonēsomenon tois para sou deēmasin apestalken; eph᾽ hǭ te tōn zētoumenōn soi paraschein tēn didaskalian.
"From the first day." Do not wonder, he says, if I come after so many days to give the knowledge of what is in doubt; for God did not put it off; for he sent me at once to serve your entreaties, so as to give you the teaching of what you seek.
10.19Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):19
Ὁ ἄρχων βασιλείας περσῶν. Ἐν οἷς ὁ Δανιὴλ ἠξίου, καὶ ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄγγελος ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ τὴν παράστασιν ἐποιεῖτο, ἀντέτακτο καὶ ὁ πονηρός, ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ ἰσχυριζόμενος εἰς τὸ κατέχεσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπὸ περσῶν· εἴ τι γὰρ ἐν ἀνθρώπῳ κακόν, τοῦτο ἐκείνῳ δύναμις· διὸ κατὰ μόνου ἑαυτοῦ, δύναμιν οὐκ εἶναι τῷ ἄρχοντι τοῦ κόσμου φησὶν ὁ κύριος· ἔρχεται ὁ τοῦ κόσμου ἄρχων, καὶ ἔχει ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐδέν· τοῦτο ὅτι μάτην ἔπεισιν, ἔχων οὐδὲν εἰς δύναμιν· τινὲς ἄρχοντα βασιλείας περσῶν δαιμονικήν τινα λέγουσι φύσιν, σφόδρα τῆς ἀληθείας κατ᾽ ἐμὲ διαμαρτάνοντες· οὐ γὰρ ἕκαστον ἔθνος ἐφεστώσας ἔχει ἀντικειμένας δυνάμεις· ἢ γὰρ ἂν οὐδὲν χρηστὸν παρ᾽ οὐδενὶ ἐτύγχανεν· εἰ γὰρ δαίμονες μὲν ἐφεστᾶσι, κατὰ δὲ γνώμην ἅπαντα πράττουσι, βούλονται δὲ χρηστὸν οὐδέν, εὔδηλον ὡς οὐδέ τις τῶν ὑπηκόων ἔπραξεν ἄν τι κατὰ νοῦν, ἐκείνων κατ᾽ ἐξουσίαν ἀγόντων τε καὶ φερόντων τὰ πράγματα· ἄλλως τε πῶς ἂν εἴποιεν αὐτοὺς ἐφεστάναι; πότερον οἰκείᾳ γνώμῃ, ἢ τοῦ θεοῦ; καὶ πῶς; ἀλλ᾽ εἰ μὲν τοῦ θεοῦ, καὶ πῶς οὐχ ὁρῶσι τὸ ἄτοπον, εἴπερ τυραννίδι δαιμόνων τὰ ἀνθρώπινα παραδέδωκε θεός; ἀλλ᾽ ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, καὶ πῶς οὐ προνοῶν θεὸς ἐλευθέρους τοὺς ἀνθρώπους καθίστη τῆς ἐκείνων δυναστείας; Καὶ μεθ᾽ ἕτερα. Εὔδηλον τοίνυν ὡς ἄρχοντα περσῶν, ἀγγελικὴν δύναμιν λέγει· ἐπείπερ καὶ ἑκάστῳ ἔθνει καὶ ἀνθρώπῳ ἄγγελος φαίνεται ἐφεστώς τε καὶ παρεδρεύων· κατὰ τὸ ὑπὸ τοῦ Μωϋσέως εἰρημένον, ἔστησεν ὅρια ἐθνῶν κατὰ ἀριθμὸν ἀγγέλων θεοῦ. — Καὶ μεθ᾽ ἕτερα. Οὐκ εἶπεν ἐμαχήσατό μοι, ἀλλ᾽ οἱονεὶ ἐδικαιολογεῖτο πρός με· ὡς οὐκ εἶσαν ἄξιοι οἱ ἰουδαῖοι τῆς περσῶν ἀπαλλαγῆναι δουλείας· εὐσεβοῦντας μὲν γὰρ πάντων εἶναι κρείττους, ἄτοπον οὐδέν, ὡς Δανιὴλ καὶ οἱ περὶ τὸν Ἀνανίαν γεγένηνται, καὶ οἱ τούτων προπάτορες τῆς αἰγυπτιακῆς ἀπαλλαγέντες δουλείας, καὶ τῶν ἐν Παλαιστίνῃ πάντων κατεσχηκότες· παρανομοῦντας δέ τις δίκαιος ἐξαιρήσεται λόγος; ἀλλ᾽ οὐχὶ τῇ δυνάμει τῶν κρατούντων δεήσει κρίνεσθαι τὴν ἀρχήν; τούτων τοίνυν οὕτως ἐχόντων, σκοπῶμεν τὰ κατὰ μέρος· ἀρξαμένου μὲν γάρ σου τῆς ἱκεσίας, ἀπεστάλην ἐγὼ γνωρίσων σοι, ὡς τῆς περσῶν δουλείας ἀπαλλαγήσονται οἱ ἰουδαῖοι· ἄχρι δὲ τοῦ νῦν ἕτερος ἄγγελος, ὃς τῶν περσῶν τὴν ἐπιστασίαν ἐγκεχείρισται, τῇ πρὸς ἐμὲ ἐχρήσατο δικαιολογίᾳ, οὐκ ἀξίους τῆς εὐεργεσίας ἀποφαίνων ἰουδαίους.
Ho archōn basileias persōn. En hois ho Daniēl ēxiou, kai ho agathos angelos hyper autou tēn parastasin epoieito, antetakto kai ho ponēros, tais hamartiais tou Israēl ischyrizomenos eis to katechesthai auton hypo persōn; ei ti gar en anthrōpǭ kakon, touto ekeinǭ dynamis; dio kata monou heautou, dynamin ouk einai tǭ archonti tou kosmou phēsin ho kyrios; erchetai ho tou kosmou archōn, kai echei en emoi ouden; touto hoti matēn epeisin, echōn ouden eis dynamin; tines archonta basileias persōn daimonikēn tina legousi physin, sphodra tēs alētheias kat᾽ eme diamartanontes; ou gar hekaston ethnos ephestōsas echei antikeimenas dynameis; ē gar an ouden chrēston par᾽ oudeni etynchanen; ei gar daimones men ephestasi, kata de gnōmēn hapanta prattousi, boulontai de chrēston ouden, eudēlon hōs oude tis tōn hypēkoōn epraxen an ti kata noun, ekeinōn kat᾽ exousian agontōn te kai pherontōn ta pragmata; allōs te pōs an eipoien autous ephestanai? poteron oikeią gnōmę̄, ē tou theou? kai pōs? all᾽ ei men tou theou, kai pōs ouch horōsi to atopon, eiper tyrannidi daimonōn ta anthrōpina paradedōke theos? all᾽ aph᾽ heautōn, kai pōs ou pronoōn theos eleutherous tous anthrōpous kathistē tēs ekeinōn dynasteias? Kai meth᾽ hetera. Eudēlon toinyn hōs archonta persōn, angelikēn dynamin legei; epeiper kai hekastǭ ethnei kai anthrōpǭ angelos phainetai ephestōs te kai paredreuōn; kata to hypo tou Mōÿseōs eirēmenon, estēsen horia ethnōn kata arithmon angelōn theou. — Kai meth᾽ hetera. Ouk eipen emachēsato moi, all᾽ hoionei edikaiologeito pros me; hōs ouk eisan axioi hoi ioudaioi tēs persōn apallagēnai douleias; eusebountas men gar pantōn einai kreittous, atopon ouden, hōs Daniēl kai hoi peri ton Ananian gegenēntai, kai hoi toutōn propatores tēs aigyptiakēs apallagentes douleias, kai tōn en Palaistinę̄ pantōn kateschēkotes; paranomountas de tis dikaios exairēsetai logos? all᾽ ouchi tę̄ dynamei tōn kratountōn deēsei krinesthai tēn archēn? toutōn toinyn houtōs echontōn, skopōmen ta kata meros; arxamenou men gar sou tēs hikesias, apestalēn egō gnōrisōn soi, hōs tēs persōn douleias apallagēsontai hoi ioudaioi; achri de tou nyn heteros angelos, hos tōn persōn tēn epistasian enkecheiristai, tę̄ pros eme echrēsato dikaiologią, ouk axious tēs euergesias apophainōn ioudaious.
"The prince of the kingdom of the Persians." While Daniel was making his request and the good angel was standing up for him, the evil one too was ranged against him, relying on the sins of Israel so that they would be held by the Persians; for whatever evil there is in a man is power for him; which is why the Lord, speaking of himself alone, says that the ruler of the world has no power: "The ruler of the world is coming, and has nothing in me"; that is, he comes in vain, having nothing to give him power. Some say that "the prince of the kingdom of the Persians" is a demonic nature, greatly missing the truth in my view; for each nation does not have opposing powers set over it; otherwise nothing good would be found in anyone. For if demons are set over them and do everything according to their will, and want nothing good, it is clear that none of the subjects would have done anything according to their mind, since those powers lead and carry affairs by authority. Besides, how would they say these are set over them: by their own will or by God's? And how? If by God's, how do they not see the absurdity, that God has handed human affairs to the tyranny of demons? If of themselves, how does God in his providence not set men free from their domination? And after other things: It is clear, then, that by "the prince of the Persians" he means an angelic power; since an angel appears to be set over and to sit beside each nation and each man, according to what was said by Moses: "He set the bounds of the nations according to the number of the angels of God." And after other things: He did not say, "he fought against me," but rather he argued his case against me, that the Jews were not worthy to be freed from slavery to the Persians: for to say that when they are godly they are stronger than all is nothing strange, as Daniel and Hananiah's companions became, and their forefathers who were freed from slavery in Egypt and took possession of all of Palestine; but when they transgress, what just plea will rescue them? Is not their rule to be judged by the power of those who hold it? This being so, let us look at the details. When you began your supplication, I was sent to make known to you that the Jews will be freed from slavery to the Persians; but until now another angel, to whom the charge of the Persians has been entrusted, has used his plea against me, declaring the Jews unworthy of the benefit.
10.21Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Ἰδοὺ Μιχαήλ. Ἀλλ᾽ ἔσχον φησὶ Μιχαὴλ τῶν ἀρχαγγέλων ἕνα συνδικαιολογούμενόν μοι τῇ πρὸς ἐκεῖνον ἐναντιολογίᾳ· οἱ μὲν γὰρ τῷ θείῳ προστάγματι ἐκράτουν, ὁ δὲ ταῖς ἰουδαϊκαῖς ἴσχυε πράξεσι, ἑκάτεροι δὲ τῷ θείῳ ἐχρῶντο νόμῳ· τοῦ γὰρ θεοῦ εὐσεβοῦσί τε καὶ μεταγινώσκουσιν ὑποσχομένου τὴν ἄνοδον, κρατεῖν δεῖν ἔφασκε τὸ πρόσταγμα· οὐκ ἀξίους δὲ τῆς σωτηρίας, ἀλλὰ μένειν ἐπὶ ἀλλοδαπῆς.
Idou Michaēl. All᾽ eschon phēsi Michaēl tōn archangelōn hena syndikaiologoumenon moi tę̄ pros ekeinon enantiologią; hoi men gar tǭ theiǭ prostagmati ekratoun, ho de tais ioudaïkais ischye praxesi, hekateroi de tǭ theiǭ echrōnto nomǭ; tou gar theou eusebousi te kai metaginōskousin hyposchomenou tēn anodon, kratein dein ephaske to prostagma; ouk axious de tēs sōtērias, alla menein epi allodapēs.
"Behold, Michael." But I had Michael, he says, one of the archangels, arguing with me in the dispute against that one. For they relied on the divine command, and he had his strength in the deeds of the Jews, and both used the divine law: for since God had promised the return to those who were godly and repented, the one said the command should prevail; the other that they were not worthy of salvation, but should remain in a foreign land.
10.22Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Ἦλθε βοηθῆσαί μοι. Ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν φησὶν εὑρέθη τις ὁ τοῖς ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν χρησόμενος λόγοις, ἥκω τὸ προσταχθὲν εἰς πέρας ἄξων.
Ēlthe boēthēsai moi. Epeidē toinyn phēsin heurethē tis ho tois hyper hymōn chrēsomenos logois, hēkō to prostachthen eis peras axōn.
"He came to help me." Since, then, he says, one was found who would use words on your behalf, I come to bring what was commanded to its fulfilment.
10.23Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Ἤνοιξα τὸ στόμα μου καὶ ἐλάλησα. Ὡμολόγησά φησι τὴν ἀσθένειαν· οὐ γὰρ οἷός τε ἤμην ἐπακοῦσαι τῶν τοῦ ἀγγέλου λόγων, τοῦ προσπεσόντος δέους οὐ μόνον ἀφελομένου τῶν λεγομένων τὴν σύνεσιν, ἀλλὰ καὶ πᾶσάν μοι τὴν κατάστασιν τρόπον τινὰ εἰς τοὐναντίον μεταβαλόντος.
Ēnoixa to stoma mou kai elalēsa. Hōmologēsa phēsi tēn astheneian; ou gar hoios te ēmēn epakousai tōn tou angelou logōn, tou prospesontos deous ou monon aphelomenou tōn legomenōn tēn synesin, alla kai pasan moi tēn katastasin tropon tina eis tounantion metabalontos.
"I opened my mouth and spoke." I confessed, he says, my weakness; for I was not able to listen to the angel's words, since the fear that fell on me not only took away the understanding of what was said, but in a way changed my whole condition into its opposite.
10.26Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Εἰρήνη σοι. Τουτέστιν οὐ πρὸς τιμωρίαν ἥκω σοι· ἔχεις γὰρ πολλὴν τὴν πρὸς θεὸν παρρησίαν· πίστιν δὲ τῶν λεγομένων, τὴν παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ σοι διδομένην δύναμιν λάβε. — Ἤρκεσέ φησιν αὐτοῦ τὸ πρόσταγμα λῦσαι τὴν ἀσθένειαν. — Ὅθεν φησὶν οὐ μόνον οὐκ ἐπετράπην τοὺς λόγους, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἱκέτευον ἀκοῦσαι ὧν ἧκε διακονησόμενος λόγων.
Eirēnē soi. Toutestin ou pros timōrian hēkō soi; echeis gar pollēn tēn pros theon parrēsian; pistin de tōn legomenōn, tēn par᾽ emou soi didomenēn dynamin labe. — Ērkese phēsin autou to prostagma lysai tēn astheneian. — Hothen phēsin ou monon ouk epetrapēn tous logous, alla kai hiketeuon akousai hōn hēke diakonēsomenos logōn.
"Peace to you." That is, I do not come to punish you; for you have great confidence before God; and receive from me the power given to you to believe what is said. — The command, he says, was enough to dissolve his weakness. — Hence, he says, I not only permitted the words, but begged to hear what he had come to serve.
10.28Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Εἰ οἶδας ἵνα τί ἦλθον; Τουτέστιν ἄκουσον τῶν λεγομένων, ἐπειδήπερ ἀγνοεῖς, καὶ βούλει ἀκοῦσαι τὰ ἐσόμενα. — Ἴσθι φησὶν ὡς ἀληθῆ τὰ ἤδη πρότερον πρὸς ἐμοῦ εἰρημένα, ὡς ὁ τῶν περσῶν ἄρχων ἀνθίστατο.
Ei oidas hina ti ēlthon? Toutestin akouson tōn legomenōn, epeidēper agnoeis, kai boulei akousai ta esomena. — Isthi phēsin hōs alēthē ta ēdē proteron pros emou eirēmena, hōs ho tōn persōn archōn anthistato.
"Do you know why I came?" That is, listen to what is said, since you do not know and wish to hear what will be. — Know, he says, that what I said before is true: that the prince of the Persians opposed me.
10.29Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Ὁ ἄρχων τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἤρχετο. Ἀλλὰ κἀκεῖνόν φησι παρελθὼν εὕρισκον πάλιν ἀνθιστάμενον τὸν τῶν ἑλλήνων ἄρχοντα· ἦσαν γὰρ οὐ μόνον ἐν Περσίδι ἀπῳκισμένοι, ἀλλὰ καὶ κατὰ τὴν Ἑλλάδα· ἐδικαιολογοῦντο γάρ φησι πρός με, ὡς οὐ δίκαιοί εἰσιν ἐπανελθεῖν, τῆς μὲν προθεσμίας καλούσης τὴν ἐπάνοδον, ἐκείνων δὲ οὐκ ἐπιθυμούντων.
Ho archōn tōn Hellēnōn ērcheto. Alla kakeinon phēsi parelthōn heuriskon palin anthistamenon ton tōn hellēnōn archonta; ēsan gar ou monon en Persidi apǭkismenoi, alla kai kata tēn Hellada; edikaiologounto gar phēsi pros me, hōs ou dikaioi eisin epanelthein, tēs men prothesmias kalousēs tēn epanodon, ekeinōn de ouk epithymountōn.
"The prince of the Greeks was coming." But passing that one too, he says, I found again opposing me the prince of the Greeks; for they had been settled not only in Persia but also in Greece; for he argued with me that it was not just for them to return, since the appointed time was calling for the return, but they did not desire it.
10.30Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ἀπαγγελῶ σοι. Ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως φησὶ τὸ μετὰ ἀληθείας πάντως ἐσόμενον ἥκω σοι ἀπαγγέλλων. Οὐκ ἔστιν εἷς. Οὐ γὰρ εὑρίσκεταί τις ἐν τῷ λαῷ ἱκετεύων τὸν θεὸν τυχεῖν τῆς ἀνόδου, καὶ διὰ τῆς μετανοίας συμπράττων· ἀλλὰ συνεφάπτεταί μοι φησὶν ὁ Μιχαὴλ τούτων μαχομένων, ὥστε τρόπον τινὰ καὶ ἄκοντας τῆς αἰχμαλωσίας αὐτοὺς ἐξαγαγεῖν.
All᾽ ē apangelō soi. All᾽ homōs phēsi to meta alētheias pantōs esomenon hēkō soi apangellōn. Ouk estin heis. Ou gar heurisketai tis en tǭ laǭ hiketeuōn ton theon tychein tēs anodou, kai dia tēs metanoias symprattōn; alla synephaptetai moi phēsin ho Michaēl toutōn machomenōn, hōste tropon tina kai akontas tēs aichmalōsias autous exagagein.
"But I will tell you." Yet, he says, I have come to tell you what will certainly happen, in truth. "There is no one." For no one is found among the people begging God to obtain the return and working with me through repentance; but Michael fights on my side, while these resist, so as in a way to lead them out of captivity even against their will.
Chapter 11
11.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Ἐν ἔτει πρώτῳ Κύρου. Ταῦτα δέ φησιν ἐγένετο κατὰ τὸ πρῶτον ἔτος Κύρου τοῦ περσῶν ἄρξαντος· τότε γὰρ ἐγώ τε ἱκέτευα μὴ πρότερον τροφῆς μεταλαβεῖν, εἰ μὴ πρότερον τῆς ὀπτασίας ἀξιωθῶ καὶ ἔτυχον τῶν εἰρημένων· οὐκοῦν εὔδηλον ὡς οὐ κατὰ τὸ τρίτον ἔτος Κύρου, ἀλλὰ καὶ κατὰ τὸ πρῶτον τὴν ὀπτασίαν εἶδεν.
En etei prōtǭ Kyrou. Tauta de phēsin egeneto kata to prōton etos Kyrou tou persōn arxantos; tote gar egō te hiketeua mē proteron trophēs metalabein, ei mē proteron tēs optasias axiōthō kai etychon tōn eirēmenōn; oukoun eudēlon hōs ou kata to triton etos Kyrou, alla kai kata to prōton tēn optasian eiden.
"In the first year of Cyrus." These things, he says, happened in the first year of Cyrus, ruler of the Persians; for then I begged not to take food until I had first been counted worthy of the vision and obtained what was said; so it is clear that he saw the vision not in the third year of Cyrus but in the first.
11.2Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Ἀλήθειαν ἀναγγελῶ. Τουτέστι τῆς βραδύτητος τὴν αἰτίαν φήσας ὁ ἄγγελος ὑπέσχετό μοι μετὰ ἀληθείας ὧν ᾔτησα τὴν γνῶσιν εὑρεῖν.
Alētheian anangelō. Toutesti tēs bradytētos tēn aitian phēsas ho angelos hypescheto moi meta alētheias hōn ę̄tēsa tēn gnōsin heurein.
"I will tell you the truth." That is, having stated the cause of the delay, the angel promised me to find with truth the knowledge of what I asked.
11.3Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Ἔτι τρεῖς βασιλεῖς. Ἴσθι φησὶν ὡς τρεῖς ἔσονται μετὰ τοῦτον· λέγει δὲ Κῦρον καὶ Καμβύσην καὶ τῶν μάγων ἀρχήν.
Eti treis basileis. Isthi phēsin hōs treis esontai meta touton; legei de Kyron kai Kambysēn kai tōn magōn archēn.
"Three more kings." Know, he says, that there will be three after this one; he means Cyrus, Cambyses, and the rule of the magi.
11.4Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Ἀναστήσεται βασιλεὺς δυνατός. Συμφώνως ἔφασαν τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον, ὃν τράγῳ παρείκασεν ἔμπροσθεν ἐν τῇ ὀπτασίᾳ.
Anastēsetai basileus dynatos. Symphōnōs ephasan ton Alexandron, hon tragǭ pareikasen emprosthen en tę̄ optasią.
"A mighty king will arise." He spoke in agreement of Alexander, whom he likened to a he-goat earlier in the vision.
11.5Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Ποιήσει κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ. Ἅπαντα γάρ φησι διαπράξεται κατὰ βούλησιν ἰδίαν.
Poiēsei kata to thelēma autou. Hapanta gar phēsi diapraxetai kata boulēsin idian.
"He will do according to his will." For he will accomplish everything, he says, according to his own wish.
11.6Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):20
Συντριβήσεται. Ἅμα τε γὰρ κατεστήσατο τὴν βασιλείαν, πέπτωκε, καὶ ἡ βασιλεία διῃρέθη. — Ἀντὶ τοῦ, οὐ μετὰ τελευτὴν αὐτοῦ· ἔτι γὰρ ζῶν διένειμε τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ εἰς τέσσαρας ἀρχάς. — Ἀντὶ τοῦ, οὐκ εἰς αὐτὸν τὸν βασιλεύοντα δόξα ἥξει· ἐπεὶ μὴ δὲ γένει προσήκοντες ἦσαν αὐτῷ. — Τουτέστιν ἀφανισθήσεται, οὐδὲ εἰς ἐκγόνους αὐτοῦ χωρήσει.
Syntribēsetai. Hama te gar katestēsato tēn basileian, peptōke, kai hē basileia dię̄rethē. — Anti tou, ou meta teleutēn autou; eti gar zōn dieneime tēn basileian autou eis tessaras archas. — Anti tou, ouk eis auton ton basileuonta doxa hēxei; epei mē de genei prosēkontes ēsan autǭ. — Toutestin aphanisthēsetai, oude eis ekgonous autou chōrēsei.
"It will be broken." For as soon as he had established the kingdom, he fell, and the kingdom was divided. — Meaning, not after his death; for while still alive he divided his kingdom into four principalities. — Meaning, glory will not come to the one reigning; since they were not related to him by family. — That is, it will be done away with, and will not pass to his descendants.
11.8Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Ἐνισχύσει ὁ βασιλεὺς τοῦ νότου. Περὶ Πτολεμαίου λέγει τοῦ κρατήσαντος τῆς βασιλείας Ἀλεξάνδρου τοῦ γαμβροῦ αὐτοῦ, ὃς ἦν ἔγγονος Ἀντιόχου τοῦ ἐπιφανοῦς· οὗτος δὲ ἐκράτει τῆς Ἀσίας καὶ Συρίας.
Enischysei ho basileus tou notou. Peri Ptolemaiou legei tou kratēsantos tēs basileias Alexandrou tou gambrou autou, hos ēn engonos Antiochou tou epiphanous; houtos de ekratei tēs Asias kai Syrias.
"The king of the south will grow strong." He speaks of Ptolemy, who took over the kingdom of Alexander his son-in-law, who was a descendant of Antiochus Epiphanes; and this man ruled Asia and Syria.
11.9Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Εἷς τῶν ἀρχόντων. Τουτέστιν ἀπὸ τῶν ἀρχόντων Ἀλεξάνδρου τὴν ἰσχὺν ἕξει Πτολεμαῖος· πάντων γὰρ ὡς κηδεστῇ ὑποπτευόντων, τῆς ἀρχῆς ἐπελάβετο· ἵνα οὖν εἴπῃ ὅτι οὐδενὸς τῶν ἀρχόντων Ἀλεξάνδρου ἀνθισταμένου καθέξει.
Heis tōn archontōn. Toutestin apo tōn archontōn Alexandrou tēn ischyn hexei Ptolemaios; pantōn gar hōs kēdestę̄ hypopteuontōn, tēs archēs epelabeto; hina oun eipę̄ hoti oudenos tōn archontōn Alexandrou anthistamenou kathexei.
"One of the princes." That is, Ptolemy will have strength over the princes of Alexander; for as a kinsman, with all suspecting nothing, he took hold of the rule; to say that he will hold it with none of Alexander's princes resisting.
11.10Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Κυριεύσει κυρείαν πολλήν. Πρὸς γὰρ τῇ Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ τὴν Ἀσίαν κατέσχε, καὶ τὴν Ἀλεξάνδρου βασιλείαν.
Kyrieusei kyreian pollēn. Pros gar tę̄ Aigyptǭ, kai tēn Asian katesche, kai tēn Alexandrou basileian.
"He will rule a great dominion." For besides Egypt he held Asia too, and the kingdom of Alexander.
11.11Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Μετὰ τὰ ἔτη αὐτοῦ συμμιγήσονται. Χρόνοις δέ φησιν ὕστερον τὴν πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἀσπάσονται συγγένειαν· μετὰ γὰρ τὸ νικῆσαι τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον Δημήτριον, πέμψας πρὸς τὸν Πτολεμαῖον εἰς τὴν Αἴγυπτον, ἐπιγαμβρεύειν αὐτῷ ἠξίου.
Meta ta etē autou symmigēsontai. Chronois de phēsin hysteron tēn pros allēlous aspasontai syngeneian; meta gar to nikēsai ton Alexandron Dēmētrion, pempsas pros ton Ptolemaion eis tēn Aigypton, epigambreuein autǭ ēxiou.
"After his years they will make an alliance." Later in time, he says, they will embrace kinship with one another; for after Alexander had defeated Demetrius, he sent to Ptolemy in Egypt and asked to become his son-in-law.
11.12Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Ἡ θυγάτηρ βασιλέως τοῦ νότου. Οὗτος ὁ δεύτερος εἶναι δοκεῖ Πτολεμαῖος, ὁ φιλάδελφος ὀνομασθείς, ὁ τὰ βιβλία τῶν ἑλλήνων συναγαγών, καὶ τὰ ἑβραίων μετὰ τούτων, ὃς τὴν θυγατέρα Βερονίκην ἐκδίδωσιν Ἀντιόχῳ τῷ Συρίας, βασιλεὺς τρίτος ὢν ἀπὸ Σελεύκου τοῦ νικάτορος· ὃς ἐγεγαμήκει μὲν Λαοδίκην, καὶ παιδοποιεῖ τόν τε Σέλευκον καὶ Ἀντίγονον ἐξ αὐτῆς· ἐν παλλακίδος δὲ τόπῳ ταύτην ἐσχηκὼς φύσας, γάμῳ τὴν Βερονίκην ἠγάγετο κοινωνὸν τῆς βασιλείας· ἡ δὲ ἐπιγαμία πρὸς τὴν τοῦ Πτολεμαίου κατάπαυσιν ἐγίνετο. — Βασιλεία νότου Πτολεμαῖον λέγει· τοῦ δὲ βορρᾶ τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον· ἐν γὰρ Ἀντιοχείᾳ ἐκαθέζετο· ἵνα οὖν εἴπῃ ὅτι καταγγυήσει Ἀλεξάνδρῳ Πτολεμαῖος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ θυγατέρα.
Hē thygatēr basileōs tou notou. Houtos ho deuteros einai dokei Ptolemaios, ho philadelphos onomastheis, ho ta biblia tōn hellēnōn synagagōn, kai ta hebraiōn meta toutōn, hos tēn thygatera Beronikēn ekdidōsin Antiochǭ tǭ Syrias, basileus tritos ōn apo Seleukou tou nikatoros; hos egegamēkei men Laodikēn, kai paidopoiei ton te Seleukon kai Antigonon ex autēs; en pallakidos de topǭ tautēn eschēkōs physas, gamǭ tēn Beronikēn ēgageto koinōnon tēs basileias; hē de epigamia pros tēn tou Ptolemaiou katapausin egineto. — Basileia notou Ptolemaion legei; tou de borra ton Alexandron; en gar Antiocheią ekathezeto; hina oun eipę̄ hoti katangyēsei Alexandrǭ Ptolemaios tēn heautou thygatera.
"The daughter of the king of the south." This seems to be the second Ptolemy, named Philadelphus, who collected the books of the Greeks and, with them, those of the Hebrews; who gave his daughter Berenice in marriage to Antiochus of Syria, the third king from Seleucus Nicator; who had married Laodice, and had children by her, Seleucus and Antigonus; but, having kept her in the place of a concubine, he took Berenice in marriage as a partner of the kingdom; and the intermarriage brought an end to the war with Ptolemy. — He calls Ptolemy's kingdom "south" and Alexander's "north"; for he resided in Antioch; to say, then, that Ptolemy will betroth his own daughter to Alexander.
11.13Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Τοῦ ποιῆσαι συνθήκας αὐτοῦ. Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ἡττήθη ὑπὸ Δημητρίου τοῦ Σελεύκου, ἀνεμαχέσατο δὲ τὴν ἧτταν μετὰ τὴν ἐκείνου τελευτήν, καὶ τῶν ἁπάντων ἐκράτει· ὡς ἂν αὐτῷ καὶ κατὰ τῶν ἐπανισταμένων ἀκαταγώνιστος ἡ βασιλεία μόνη, τὴν πρὸς τὸν αἰγύπτιον ἑαυτῷ ἐμνηστεύσατο συγγένειαν.
Tou poiēsai synthēkas autou. Epeidē gar hēttēthē hypo Dēmētriou tou Seleukou, anemachesato de tēn hēttan meta tēn ekeinou teleutēn, kai tōn hapantōn ekratei; hōs an autǭ kai kata tōn epanistamenōn akatagōnistos hē basileia monē, tēn pros ton aigyption heautǭ emnēsteusato syngeneian.
"To make his agreements." For since he had been defeated by Demetrius son of Seleucus, but had won back the defeat after his death, and ruled over all, so that his kingdom alone would be uncontested even against those who rose up, he sought for himself kinship with the Egyptian.
11.14Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Οὐ κρατήσει ἰσχύος βραχίονος. Ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως φησὶ καὶ τούτων γινομένων, οὐχ ὁμονοήσουσιν· ἐστασίασαν γὰρ πρὸς ἀλλήλους.
Ou kratēsei ischyos brachionos. All᾽ homōs phēsi kai toutōn ginomenōn, ouch homonoēsousin; estasiasan gar pros allēlous.
"He will not retain the strength of the arm." Yet, he says, even when these things happen, they will not agree; for they fell into strife with one another.
11.15Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Οὐ στήσεται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ. Ἀλεξάνδρου λέγει ἐκ Κλεοπάτρας· ἀποσπᾶται γὰρ ἐξ αὐτοῦ, καὶ δίδοται Δημητρίῳ ἐφεδρεύοντι αὐτοῦ τῇ βασιλείᾳ. — Ὁ γὰρ Πτολεμαῖος ὡς τοῦ Ἀλεξάνδρου ὢν κηδεστής, δόλῳ κατέσχε τὴν βασιλείαν· ὡς μὲν γὰρ πρὸς φίλον καὶ γαμβρὸν ἀφικνεῖτο· ἐν ἑκάστῃ δὲ πόλει τῶν Ἀλεξάνδρου παριών, φρουρὰν ἑαυτῷ κατελίμπανεν· ἐγύμνωσε δὲ τὴν γνώμην εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν εἰσελθών.
Ou stēsetai to sperma autou. Alexandrou legei ek Kleopatras; apospatai gar ex autou, kai didotai Dēmētriǭ ephedreuonti autou tę̄ basileią. — Ho gar Ptolemaios hōs tou Alexandrou ōn kēdestēs, dolǭ katesche tēn basileian; hōs men gar pros philon kai gambron aphikneito; en hekastę̄ de polei tōn Alexandrou pariōn, phrouran heautǭ katelimpanen; egymnōse de tēn gnōmēn eis Antiocheian eiselthōn.
"His seed will not stand." He means the child of Alexander by Cleopatra; for she is taken away from him and given to Demetrius, who lay in wait for his kingdom. — For Ptolemy, being Alexander's kinsman, held the kingdom by deceit; for he came as to a friend and son-in-law, but in each city of Alexander that he passed he left a garrison for himself; and he made his intention plain when he entered Antioch.
11.16Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Ἡ νεᾶνις καὶ ὁ κατισχύων αὐτήν. Ἀντὶ τοῦ, ταύτης δὲ περιγενόμενος, καὶ τὸν ἐκ τοῦ κρατεῖν ἰσχύοντα τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον καθαιρήσει.
Hē neanis kai ho katischyōn autēn. Anti tou, tautēs de perigenomenos, kai ton ek tou kratein ischyonta ton Alexandron kathairēsei.
"The young woman and the one who strengthened her." Meaning, prevailing through her, he will also bring down Alexander, who was strong in ruling.
11.18Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Ἐν ταῖς καιροῖς. Σημαίνει τὸ μετὰ χρόνον ταῦτα συμβήσεται.
En tais kairois. Sēmainei to meta chronon tauta symbēsetai.
"In the times." It signifies that these things will happen after a time.
11.19Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Ἀναστήσεται ἐκ τοῦ ἄνθους. Ταῦτα δέ φησι διαπράξεται ὁ Πτολεμαῖος ἀπὸ τῶν κατὰ τὴν θυγατέρα· ἄνθος γὰρ ῥίζης αὐτῶν λέγει, διὰ τὴν πρὸς ἀλλήλους φιλίαν ἀπὸ τῶν γάμων.
Anastēsetai ek tou anthous. Tauta de phēsi diapraxetai ho Ptolemaios apo tōn kata tēn thygatera; anthos gar rhizēs autōn legei, dia tēn pros allēlous philian apo tōn gamōn.
"One will rise from the flower." Ptolemy, he says, will do these things on account of what concerned his daughter; for he calls her the flower of their root, because of their friendship with one another from the marriage.
11.20Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Ἐπὶ τῆς ἑτοιμασίας αὐτοῦ. Ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀπὸ τῆς περὶ τὴν ἔκδοσιν παρασκευῆς· ὡς ἡσθεὶς τῇ τοῦ Ἀλεξάνδρου κηδείᾳ Πτολεμαῖος πλείστην τὴν περὶ τοὺς γάμους παρασκευὴν ἐπεδείξατο· ἐξ ὧν καὶ πίστιν εὐνοίας παρασχόμενος, τῆς βασιλείας ἐξήλασε τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον.
Epi tēs hetoimasias autou. Anti tou apo tēs peri tēn ekdosin paraskeuēs; hōs hēstheis tę̄ tou Alexandrou kēdeią Ptolemaios pleistēn tēn peri tous gamous paraskeuēn epedeixato; ex hōn kai pistin eunoias paraschomenos, tēs basileias exēlase ton Alexandron.
"On his preparation." Meaning, from the preparation for the giving in marriage; as if pleased by the kinship with Alexander, Ptolemy displayed very great preparation for the wedding; by which, having given proof of his goodwill, he drove Alexander from the kingdom.
11.21Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Ἥξει πρὸς τὴν δύναμιν. Τουτέστιν ὁ Πτολεμαῖος κατὰ δόλον ἀφίξεται πρὸς τὰς τοῦ Ἀλεξάνδρου δυνάμεις· οὕτω γὰρ καὶ τῶν πόλεων ἐκράτησεν.
Hēxei pros tēn dynamin. Toutestin ho Ptolemaios kata dolon aphixetai pros tas tou Alexandrou dynameis; houtō gar kai tōn poleōn ekratēsen.
"He will come to the army." That is, Ptolemy will come by deceit to Alexander's forces; for so he gained control of the cities too.
11.22Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Πρὸς τὰ ὑποστηρίγματα τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ βορρᾶ. Ὑποστηρίγματα τὴν βασιλίδα πόλιν ἐκάλεσεν Ἀντιόχειαν, ἥτις ἅπαντα τόν τε βασιλικὸν πλοῦτον καὶ τὰς δυνάμεις ἐν αὐτῇ εἶχεν· ὡς γὰρ τὰς ἄλλας πόλεις διελθών, μετὰ δόλου ἐκείνης ἐπελάβετο Πτολεμαῖος, δεύτερον διάδημα περιετίθετο, ὡς καὶ τῆς Ἀσίας κρατῶν ἧς ἦρχεν ὁ Ἀλέξανδρος· ὅπερ ἐπὶ τῆς Κιλικίας ἐγνωκὼς ὁ Ἀλέξανδρος, αὐτόθι γὰρ ἔτυχε διατρίβων, σπεύδει ἐπὶ τὸν Πτολεμαῖον, καὶ μάχῃ ἡττηθείς, φυγὰς εἰς Ἀρραβίαν ἐγίνετο. — Πρὸς γὰρ τὴν ἀκοὴν ταραχθεὶς ὁ Ἀλέξανδρος, ὥρμησεν εἰς πόλεμον. — Τουτέστιν ὁ Πτολεμαῖος· νικήσας γὰρ τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον, ἄμαχον τὴν κατὰ πάντων ἔσχηκεν ἀρχήν.
Pros ta hypostērigmata tou basileōs tou borra. Hypostērigmata tēn basilida polin ekalesen Antiocheian, hētis hapanta ton te basilikon plouton kai tas dynameis en autę̄ eichen; hōs gar tas allas poleis dielthōn, meta dolou ekeinēs epelabeto Ptolemaios, deuteron diadēma perietitheto, hōs kai tēs Asias kratōn hēs ērchen ho Alexandros; hoper epi tēs Kilikias egnōkōs ho Alexandros, autothi gar etyche diatribōn, speudei epi ton Ptolemaion, kai machę̄ hēttētheis, phygas eis Arrabian egineto. — Pros gar tēn akoēn tarachtheis ho Alexandros, hōrmēsen eis polemon. — Toutestin ho Ptolemaios; nikēsas gar ton Alexandron, amachon tēn kata pantōn eschēken archēn.
"To the strongholds of the king of the north." He called the royal city of Antioch "strongholds," which had all the royal wealth and the forces in it; for having passed through the other cities, Ptolemy seized it by deceit and put on a second diadem, as ruling Asia too, over which Alexander had ruled; who was in Cilicia, for he happened to be staying there, and learning of it, hastened against Ptolemy, and, defeated in battle, fled to Arabia. — For, disturbed at the report, Alexander rushed into war. — That is, Ptolemy; for having conquered Alexander, he held unchallenged rule over all.
11.23Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Τοὺς θεοὺς αὐτῶν καταστρέψει. Ὅσα γὰρ ἦν τίμια κειμήλια, ἢ ἐν ἱεροῖς ἀποκείμενα, ἢ ὡς βασιλεῖ τεθησαυρισμένα, τῆς βασιλείας κατασχὼν ὁ Πτολεμαῖος, ἅπαντα λαβὼν εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἔπεμψεν.
Tous theous autōn katastrepsei. Hosa gar ēn timia keimēlia, ē en hierois apokeimena, ē hōs basilei tethēsaurismena, tēs basileias kataschōn ho Ptolemaios, hapanta labōn eis Aigypton epempsen.
"He will overturn their gods." For whatever valuable treasures there were, or offerings stored in temples, or treasures laid up for the king, Ptolemy, having taken the kingdom, took them all and sent them to Egypt.
11.24Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Ἀναστρέψει εἰς τὴν γῆν αὐτοῦ. Τουτέστι τοῦ Ἀλεξάνδρου. Τρύφων γὰρ Ἀντίοχον τὸν τοῦ Ἀλεξάνδρου παῖδα εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν καταστήσας κατὰ τὰς τοῦ πατρὸς ἐντολάς, συμβαλὼν τῷ Δημητρίῳ, φυγάδα πεποίηκεν.
Anastrepsei eis tēn gēn autou. Toutesti tou Alexandrou. Tryphōn gar Antiochon ton tou Alexandrou paida eis tēn basileian katastēsas kata tas tou patros entolas, symbalōn tǭ Dēmētriǭ, phygada pepoiēken.
"He will return to his land." That is, Alexander's. For Tryphon, having set Antiochus, Alexander's son, on the throne according to his father's instructions, engaged Demetrius and put him to flight.
11.25Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Καὶ οἱ υἱοὶ αὐτοῦ συνάξουσιν ὄχλον. Ἀντὶ τοῦ οἱ περὶ τὸν Ἀντίοχον καὶ Τρύφωνα· θεασάμενος γὰρ ὁ Τρύφων ὅτι τὸ στρατόπεδον πονηρῶς περὶ τὸν Δημήτριον διακείμενον, πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐστασίασε, συναγαγὼν δυνάμεις, τόν τε Ἀντίοχον ἐβασίλευσε καὶ ἐπεστράτευσε τῷ Δημητρίῳ. — Τουτέστι μετὰ πολλῆς τῆς ὁρμῆς ἐξήει ἐπὶ τὸν Δημήτριον, καὶ ἔσται αὐτῷ φοβερός.
Kai hoi huioi autou synaxousin ochlon. Anti tou hoi peri ton Antiochon kai Tryphōna; theasamenos gar ho Tryphōn hoti to stratopedon ponērōs peri ton Dēmētrion diakeimenon, pros auton estasiase, synagagōn dynameis, ton te Antiochon ebasileuse kai epestrateuse tǭ Dēmētriǭ. — Toutesti meta pollēs tēs hormēs exēei epi ton Dēmētrion, kai estai autǭ phoberos.
"And his sons will gather a multitude." Meaning, Antiochus and Tryphon; for Tryphon, seeing that the army was badly disposed toward Demetrius, raised a revolt against him, gathered forces, made Antiochus king, and marched against Demetrius. — That is, he will go out with great vigor against Demetrius, and will be fearsome to him.
11.26Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Συμπροσπλακήσεται. Τουτέστιν ἀφικόμενοι συμπλακήσονται αὐτῷ, καὶ ἡττήσαντες καθέξουσι τὴν τοῦ πατρὸς Ἀλεξάνδρου βασιλείαν.
Symprosplakēsetai. Toutestin aphikomenoi symplakēsontai autǭ, kai hēttēsantes kathexousi tēn tou patros Alexandrou basileian.
"He will engage." That is, coming, they will engage him, and, defeating him, will hold the kingdom of the father, Alexander.
11.27Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Ἕως τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ. Τουτέστι σὺν πάσῃ τῇ δυνάμει αὐτοῦ, ἤτοι ἕως πᾶσαν τὴν δύναμιν αὐτοῦ κινήσει.
Heōs tēs ischyos autou. Toutesti syn pasę̄ tę̄ dynamei autou, ētoi heōs pasan tēn dynamin autou kinēsei.
"Up to his strength." That is, with all his power, or he will move up to all his power.
11.28Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):21
Ἀγριανθήσεται βασιλεὺς τοῦ νότου. Οὗτος δέ ἐστι πατὴρ Δημητρίου τοῦ γήμαντος Κλεοπάτραν τὴν Πτολεμαίου μὲν θυγατέρα, γυναῖκα δὲ αὐτοῦ Ἀλεξάνδρου, καὶ διαδεξαμένου τούτου τὰς βασιλείας· ὁ τοίνυν, φησί, Δημήτριος ὁ Σελεύκου ἐξελεύσεται καὶ πολεμήσει μετὰ Ἀλεξάνδρου τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ βορρᾶ· πρὸ γὰρ τοῦ γῆμαι τὴν Κλεοπάτραν ὁ Ἀλέξανδρος, ἐπολέμησε μετὰ Δημητρίου τοῦ πατρὸς μὲν Δημητρίου, υἱοῦ δὲ Σελεύκου· καὶ ἡττηθεὶς ὁ Ἀλέξανδρος ἔφυγε· καὶ μετὰ τὸ ἀποθανεῖν τὸν Δημήτριον, ἀνατρέχει εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν αὐτοῦ ὁ Ἀλέξανδρος· καὶ ἄμαχον εὑρηκὼς τὴν βασιλείαν, οὕτω λαμβάνει τὴν θυγατέρα Πτολεμαίου εἰς γυναῖκα.
Agrianthēsetai basileus tou notou. Houtos de esti patēr Dēmētriou tou gēmantos Kleopatran tēn Ptolemaiou men thygatera, gynaika de autou Alexandrou, kai diadexamenou toutou tas basileias; ho toinyn, phēsi, Dēmētrios ho Seleukou exeleusetai kai polemēsei meta Alexandrou tou basileōs tou borra; pro gar tou gēmai tēn Kleopatran ho Alexandros, epolemēse meta Dēmētriou tou patros men Dēmētriou, huiou de Seleukou; kai hēttētheis ho Alexandros ephyge; kai meta to apothanein ton Dēmētrion, anatrechei eis tēn archēn autou ho Alexandros; kai amachon heurēkōs tēn basileian, houtō lambanei tēn thygatera Ptolemaiou eis gynaika.
"The king of the south will be enraged." This is the father of Demetrius who married Cleopatra, the daughter of Ptolemy and wife of Alexander; and after he succeeded to the kingdom, Demetrius son of Seleucus, he says, will go out and make war with Alexander, the king of the north. For before marrying Cleopatra, Alexander made war with Demetrius, father of Demetrius and son of Seleucus; and Alexander was defeated and fled; and after Demetrius died, Alexander ran back to his rule, and, finding the kingdom uncontested, thus took Ptolemy's daughter as wife.
11.31Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Πολεμήσει μετὰ τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ βορρᾶ. Τουτέστι Δημήτριος μετὰ πολλῆς τῆς παρασκευῆς εἰς πόλεμον καταστήσει.
Polemēsei meta tou basileōs tou borra. Toutesti Dēmētrios meta pollēs tēs paraskeuēs eis polemon katastēsei.
"He will fight with the king of the north." That is, Demetrius will make ready for war with great preparation.
11.32Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Στήσει ὄχλον πολύν. Τουτέστιν ὁ ὄχλος Ἀλεξάνδρου παραδίδοται ἐν χειρὶ Δημητρίου ὡς νικήσαντος, καὶ τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον ἐξελάσαντος τῆς χώρας.
Stēsei ochlon polyn. Toutestin ho ochlos Alexandrou paradidotai en cheiri Dēmētriou hōs nikēsantos, kai ton Alexandron exelasantos tēs chōras.
"He will raise a great multitude." That is, the multitude of Alexander is handed over into the hand of Demetrius, as he conquered and drove Alexander out of the country.
11.33Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Λήψεται ὄχλον. Τουτέστιν ἐγκρατὴς πάντων γενήσεται.
Lēpsetai ochlon. Toutestin enkratēs pantōn genēsetai.
"He will take the multitude." That is, he will become master of all.
11.34Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Ὑψωθήσεται ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ. Τουτέστι μεγάλα φρονήσει ἐπὶ τῇ νίκῃ.
Hypsōthēsetai hē kardia autou. Toutesti megala phronēsei epi tę̄ nikę̄.
"His heart will be lifted up." That is, he will think highly of himself over the victory.
11.35Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Οὐ κατισχύσει. Τουτέστιν ὁ Δημήτριος καὶ μετὰ τὴν νίκην οὐ καθέξει τὴν ἀρχήν· μετὰ γὰρ τὸ περιγενέσθαι Ἀλεξάνδρου, καὶ ἐπιλαβέσθαι τῆς ἀρχῆς τελευτᾷ οὐ πολλὰς βιώσας ἡμέρας.
Ou katischysei. Toutestin ho Dēmētrios kai meta tēn nikēn ou kathexei tēn archēn; meta gar to perigenesthai Alexandrou, kai epilabesthai tēs archēs teleutą ou pollas biōsas hēmeras.
"He will not prevail." That is, Demetrius, even after the victory, will not hold the rule; for after prevailing over Alexander and taking hold of the rule, he dies, having lived not many days.
11.36Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Ἐπιστρέψει ὁ βασιλεύς. Εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν γὰρ κατασταθεὶς ὁ Ἀλέξανδρος, συνάξας δύναμιν πολλήν, ὥρμησε κατὰ τοῦ Δημητρίου, τοῦ Δημητρίου υἱοῦ, βασιλεύσαντος μετὰ τὴν τοῦ πατρὸς τελευτήν.
Epistrepsei ho basileus. Eis tēn archēn gar katastatheis ho Alexandros, synaxas dynamin pollēn, hōrmēse kata tou Dēmētriou, tou Dēmētriou huiou, basileusantos meta tēn tou patros teleutēn.
"The king will return." For Alexander, restored to the rule, gathered a great force and rushed against Demetrius, the son of Demetrius, who reigned after his father's death.
11.37Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Εἰς τὸ τέλος τῶν καιρῶν. Τουτέστι μετὰ τὴν Δημητρίου τοῦ Σελεύκου τελευτήν, Δημήτριος ὁ τούτου υἱὸς συναγαγὼν δύναμιν ὥρμησε κατὰ τοῦ Ἀλεξάνδρου.
Eis to telos tōn kairōn. Toutesti meta tēn Dēmētriou tou Seleukou teleutēn, Dēmētrios ho toutou huios synagagōn dynamin hōrmēse kata tou Alexandrou.
"At the end of the times." That is, after the death of Demetrius son of Seleucus, Demetrius his son gathered a force and rushed against Alexander.
11.38Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Πολλοὶ ἐπαναστήσονται ἐπὶ βασιλέα τοῦ νότου. Τουτέστι τοὺς περὶ Ἰωνάθαν τοὺς μακκαβαίους πολεμήσαντας Δημητρίῳ τῷ Σελεύκου, ἐπιχειρήσαντι αὐτοὺς πολιορκῆσαι μετὰ τὸ βασιλεῦσαι· κατὰ γὰρ ἐκεῖνον τὸν καιρὸν Ἰούδας τε ὁ μακκαβαῖος ἀπέθανε· πολλὰς μὲν ἄλλας νίκας κατωρθωκώς, ἐν δὲ τῇ πρὸς Βακχίδην καὶ Ἄλκιμον μάχῃ τελευτήσας· μεθ᾽ ὃν Ἰωνάθας τὴν ἀρχὴν δεξάμενος, πολλῆς τῆς τῶν ὁμοφύλων ἐπειράσθη κακίας.
Polloi epanastēsontai epi basilea tou notou. Toutesti tous peri Iōnathan tous makkabaious polemēsantas Dēmētriǭ tǭ Seleukou, epicheirēsanti autous poliorkēsai meta to basileusai; kata gar ekeinon ton kairon Ioudas te ho makkabaios apethane; pollas men allas nikas katōrthōkōs, en de tę̄ pros Bakchidēn kai Alkimon machę̄ teleutēsas; meth᾽ hon Iōnathas tēn archēn dexamenos, pollēs tēs tōn homophylōn epeirasthē kakias.
"Many will rise up against the king of the south." That is, Jonathan and the Maccabees, who made war on Demetrius son of Seleucus when he tried to besiege them after becoming king; for at that time Judas the Maccabee died, having accomplished many other victories but ending his life in the battle against Bacchides and Alcimus; after whom Jonathan, taking over the rule, experienced much wickedness from his kinsmen.
11.39Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν λοιμῶν. Υἱοὺς λοιμῶν τοὺς ἐν τῷ λαῷ πονηροὺς λέγει· τούτων τε γὰρ γινομένων, ὡς εἶδον κατὰ νοῦν χωρήσαντα τὸν Ἰωνάθαν τὰ πράγματα, θάνατον κατεσκεύαζον τὸν Ἰωνάθαν, οὐ φέροντες τοῦ ἀνδρὸς τὴν εὐημερίαν.
Hoi huioi tōn loimōn. Huious loimōn tous en tǭ laǭ ponērous legei; toutōn te gar ginomenōn, hōs eidon kata noun chōrēsanta ton Iōnathan ta pragmata, thanaton kateskeuazon ton Iōnathan, ou pherontes tou andros tēn euēmerian.
"The sons of the pestilent." He calls "sons of the pestilent" the wicked among the people; for these, when things were happening, as they saw affairs going well for Jonathan, plotted the death of Jonathan, not bearing the man's prosperity.
11.40Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Καὶ ἀσθενήσουσι. Οὐ γὰρ κρατήσει αὐτῶν ἡ γνώμη.
Kai asthenēsousi. Ou gar kratēsei autōn hē gnōmē.
"And they will be weak." For their purpose will not prevail.
11.41Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Οἱ βραχίονες τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ νότου. Τουτέστι τοῦ Δημητρίου αἱ δυνάμεις· μετὰ γὰρ τὴν ἐκείνου τελευτήν, τοῦ Ἀλεξάνδρου γεγόνασιν.
Hoi brachiones tou basileōs tou notou. Toutesti tou Dēmētriou hai dynameis; meta gar tēn ekeinou teleutēn, tou Alexandrou gegonasin.
"The arms of the king of the south." That is, the forces of Demetrius; for after his death they came to Alexander.
11.42Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Οὐ στήσονται. Τουτέστιν οὐδένα ἔχει ὁ Ἀλέξανδρος τὸν ἀντιπίπτοντα.
Ou stēsontai. Toutestin oudena echei ho Alexandros ton antipiptonta.
"They will not stand." That is, Alexander has no one to resist him.
11.43Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Εἰσελθεῖν ἐν ἰσχύϊ πάσης τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ. Μετὰ τὸν Δημητρίου τοῦ Σελεύκου θάνατον, σπουδαζόμενος πάσης τῆς ἀρχῆς αὐτοῦ ἐν καθέξει γίνεσθαι.
Eiselthein en ischyï pasēs tēs basileias autou. Meta ton Dēmētriou tou Seleukou thanaton, spoudazomenos pasēs tēs archēs autou en kathexei ginesthai.
"To come in with the strength of all his kingdom." After the death of Demetrius son of Seleucus, eager that all his rule should be in his possession.
11.45Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Εὐθεῖα πάντα μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ποιήσει. Τουτέστι κατὰ νοῦν ἅπαντα διαπράττεται· Δημητρίου γὰρ τοῦ Σελεύκου καθαιρεθέντος, τὴν πρὸς Πτολεμαῖον συνθήκην ἐκύρωσεν.
Eutheia panta met᾽ autou poiēsei. Toutesti kata noun hapanta diaprattetai; Dēmētriou gar tou Seleukou kathairethentos, tēn pros Ptolemaion synthēkēn ekyrōsen.
"He will do everything right with him." That is, he will accomplish everything according to his mind; for when Demetrius son of Seleucus had been brought down, he ratified the treaty with Ptolemy.
11.46Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Θυγατέρα δώσει αὐτῷ. Ἀντὶ τοῦ ὁ Πτολεμαῖος ἑτοίμως δέξεται τὴν παρὰ Ἀλεξάνδρου πρεσβείαν, καὶ καταγγυήσει αὐτῷ τὴν αὐτοῦ θυγατέρα.
Thygatera dōsei autǭ. Anti tou ho Ptolemaios hetoimōs dexetai tēn para Alexandrou presbeian, kai katangyēsei autǭ tēn autou thygatera.
"He will give him a daughter." Meaning, Ptolemy will readily receive the embassy from Alexander and betroth his daughter to him.
11.47Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Εἰς τὰς νήσους. Νῆσον ὡς παράλιον οὖσαν τὴν Κιλικίαν ἐκάλεσεν. — Ἀπελεύσεταί φησιν αὐτόθι μετὰ πολλὰ κατορθώματα· κρατήσας γὰρ τοῦ Δημητρίου, καὶ τὴν λοιπὴν καταστησάμενος ἀρχήν, καὶ βεβαιωσάμενος ταύτην τῇ πρὸς Πτολεμαῖον φιλίᾳ, ὡς ᾤετο, οὕτως ὥρμησεν ἐπὶ Κιλικίας, παραστησόμενος τοὺς αὐτόθι ταράττοντας.
Eis tas nēsous. Nēson hōs paralion ousan tēn Kilikian ekalesen. — Apeleusetai phēsin autothi meta polla katorthōmata; kratēsas gar tou Dēmētriou, kai tēn loipēn katastēsamenos archēn, kai bebaiōsamenos tautēn tę̄ pros Ptolemaion philią, hōs ǭeto, houtōs hōrmēsen epi Kilikias, parastēsomenos tous autothi tarattontas.
"To the islands." He called Cilicia an island as being coastal. — He will go there, he says, after many successes; for having conquered Demetrius, settled the rest of the rule, and confirmed it, as he thought, by his friendship with Ptolemy, he then set out for Cilicia to subdue those making trouble there.
11.48Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Καταπαύσει ἄρχοντας ὀνειδισμοῦ. Παύσας γὰρ τοὺς ὀνειδίσαντας αὐτῷ τὴν ἐπὶ Δημητρίου τοῦ Σελεύκου ἧτταν, ἀφίκετο· ὡς τῇ παρούσῃ ἀνδρείᾳ κρύψων τὴν προλαβοῦσαν δυσημερίαν.
Katapausei archontas oneidismou. Pausas gar tous oneidisantas autǭ tēn epi Dēmētriou tou Seleukou hēttan, aphiketo; hōs tę̄ parousę̄ andreią krypsōn tēn prolabousan dysēmerian.
"He will stop the rulers of reproach." For he came to stop those who reproached him for his defeat by Demetrius son of Seleucus, so as to hide his earlier misfortune by his present bravery.
11.49Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Ὀνειδισμὸς αὐτοῦ ἐπιστρέψει αὐτῷ. Ἀλλ᾽ εἰ καὶ Κίλικας φησὶν ὑποτάξει ὁ Ἀλέξανδρος ὀνειδίσαντας αὐτῷ, οὐ μὴν διαφεύξεται αὐτὸς τούτων τὸν ὀνειδισμόν· ὑπὸ γὰρ Πτολεμαίου καθῃρέθη κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν ἐκεῖνον, ἐπιβάντος τε τῆς Ἀλεξάνδρου βασιλείας, καὶ ἃ προλαβὼν ἔφην διαπραξαμένου.
Oneidismos autou epistrepsei autǭ. All᾽ ei kai Kilikas phēsin hypotaxei ho Alexandros oneidisantas autǭ, ou mēn diapheuxetai autos toutōn ton oneidismon; hypo gar Ptolemaiou kathę̄rethē kata ton kairon ekeinon, epibantos te tēs Alexandrou basileias, kai ha prolabōn ephēn diapraxamenou.
"His reproach will return to him." But even if Alexander subdues the Cilicians who reproached him, he says, he himself will not escape their reproach; for he was brought down by Ptolemy at that time, as Ptolemy laid hold of Alexander's kingdom and did what I said before.
11.50Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Ἐπιστρέψει κ. τ. λ. Περὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ Ἀλεξάνδρου λέγει· ἀκούσας γὰρ ὅτι Πτολεμαῖος ὁ πενθερὸς αὐτοῦ ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ γενόμενος ἐπελάβετο αὐτοῦ τῆς ἀρχῆς, τοὺς Κίλικας ἐάσας, ἐπὶ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν ἔσπευσεν ὡς πολεμήσων τῷ Πτολεμαίῳ. — Οὐ μὴν φησὶ περιέσται τοῦ Πτολεμαίου, ἀλλ᾽ ἥττων αὐτοῦ εἰς ἰσχὺν ὀφθείς, φυγάς τε καταστασθήσεται, καὶ ἔργον τῆς ἑτέρου γενήσεται δεξιᾶς.
Epistrepsei k. t. l. Peri tou autou Alexandrou legei; akousas gar hoti Ptolemaios ho pentheros autou en Antiocheią genomenos epelabeto autou tēs archēs, tous Kilikas easas, epi tēn Antiocheian espeusen hōs polemēsōn tǭ Ptolemaiǭ. — Ou mēn phēsi periestai tou Ptolemaiou, all᾽ hēttōn autou eis ischyn ophtheis, phygas te katastasthēsetai, kai ergon tēs heterou genēsetai dexias.
"He will turn back," and so on. He speaks of the same Alexander; for hearing that Ptolemy his father-in-law had come to Antioch and taken hold of his rule, he left the Cilicians and hastened to Antioch to make war on Ptolemy. — But he will not prevail over Ptolemy, he says, but, seen to be weaker than him in strength, will be made a fugitive and will become the work of the other's right hand.
11.51Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Παραβιβάζων. Ταῦτα δέ φησι ποιήσει, παρὰ τὸ δίκαιον πράττων, καὶ παρασπονδῶν τὰς πρὸς τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον συνθήκας, ἐπιθυμίᾳ τοῦ κατασχεῖν τὴν αὐτοῦ βασιλείαν, καὶ εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ καὶ ἐκείνου μεταστῆσαι σπουδάζων δόξαν.
Parabibazōn. Tauta de phēsi poiēsei, para to dikaion prattōn, kai paraspondōn tas pros ton Alexandron synthēkas, epithymią tou kataschein tēn autou basileian, kai eis tēn heautou kai ekeinou metastēsai spoudazōn doxan.
"Passing over." He will do these things, he says, acting against what is just and violating the treaty with Alexander, out of desire to seize his kingdom, and eager to transfer that one's glory to himself.
11.52Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Συντριβήσεται. Ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέν φησιν ἀπενέγκοιτο ἂν κέρδος τοῦ δόλου· οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐπιβιώσει τοῖς κατορθώμασιν, ἀλλὰ μετ᾽ οὐ πολὺ καὶ αὐτὸς καταστρέψει τὸν βίον. — Ἀλλ᾽ ἀποθανεῖταί φησιν οὐκ ἐν παρατάξει· οὐ γὰρ ἐν πολέμῳ πληγαῖς τελευτᾷ, ἀλλὰ πεσὼν ἐκ τοῦ ἵππου καὶ συντριβείς, οἴκαδε ἀποθνήσκει.
Syntribēsetai. All᾽ ouden phēsin apenenkoito an kerdos tou dolou; oude gar epibiōsei tois katorthōmasin, alla met᾽ ou poly kai autos katastrepsei ton bion. — All᾽ apothaneitai phēsin ouk en parataxei; ou gar en polemǭ plēgais teleutą, alla pesōn ek tou hippou kai syntribeis, oikade apothnēskei.
"He will be broken." But he will gain nothing, he says, from his deceit; for he will not survive his successes, but not long after he too will end his life. — But he will die, he says, not in battle; for he does not die by blows in war, but, falling from his horse and being shattered, he dies at home.
11.53Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Ἐξουδενώθη. Περὶ τοῦ Πτολεμαίου λέγει. Ἤδη γὰρ ἑκατέρων τῶν βασιλειῶν Αἰγύπτου καὶ Ἀσίας ἐπειλῆφθαι νομίζων, μετὰ τὴν Ἀλεξάνδρου τελευτὴν καταστρέφει τὸν βίον, οὐδὲν κέρδος τῆς πονηρίας ἀπενεγκάμενος.
Exoudenōthē. Peri tou Ptolemaiou legei. Ēdē gar hekaterōn tōn basileiōn Aigyptou kai Asias epeilēphthai nomizōn, meta tēn Alexandrou teleutēn katastrephei ton bion, ouden kerdos tēs ponērias apenenkamenos.
"He was despised." He speaks of Ptolemy. For thinking he had now taken hold of both kingdoms, of Egypt and Asia, he ends his life after Alexander's death, gaining no profit from his wickedness.
11.54Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22
Οὐκ ἔδωσαν ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν δόξαν βασιλείας. Καὶ οὕτω φησὶ καταλύσας τὸν βίον, οὐκ ἀπέλαυσεν ἧς ἐνόμισε δόξης, ταχέως τῆς φύσεως ἀποδοὺς τὸ χρέος.
Ouk edōsan ep᾽ auton doxan basileias. Kai houtō phēsi katalysas ton bion, ouk apelausen hēs enomise doxēs, tacheōs tēs physeōs apodous to chreos.
"They did not give him the glory of a kingdom." And so, he says, ending his life, he did not enjoy the glory he thought, quickly paying the debt of nature.
11.55Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):22-23
Ἥξει ἐν εὐθηνίᾳ. Τουτέστιν ἀπονητὶ ἑκατέρων τῶν βασιλειῶν κρατήσει, τῆς τε Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Πτολεμαίου, οὐ μαχησάμενος οὐδὲ πονήσας· ὡς γὰρ γαμβρὸς Πτολεμαίου τοῦ τῆς Ἀσίας καὶ Αἰγύπτου κρατήσαντος βασιλείας, ἐπεισῆλθε μετὰ τὴν Πτολεμαίου τελευτήν, καὶ ἐγκρατὴς ἐγένετο ἑκατέρας βασιλείας.
Hēxei en euthēnią. Toutestin aponēti hekaterōn tōn basileiōn kratēsei, tēs te Alexandrou kai Ptolemaiou, ou machēsamenos oude ponēsas; hōs gar gambros Ptolemaiou tou tēs Asias kai Aigyptou kratēsantos basileias, epeisēlthe meta tēn Ptolemaiou teleutēn, kai enkratēs egeneto hekateras basileias.
"He will come in prosperity." That is, without toil he will rule both kingdoms, that of Alexander and that of Ptolemy, without fighting or labor; for as son-in-law of Ptolemy, who had held the kingdom of Asia and of Egypt, he came in after Ptolemy's death and became master of both kingdoms.
11.56Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Βραχίονες τοῦ κατακλύζοντος. Τουτέστιν ἡ ἰσχὺς τοῦ Πτολεμαίου ὑπὸ τοῦτον ἔσται· κατακλύζοντα γὰρ ἐκεῖνον ἐκάλεσεν, ὡς ἄρδην τὴν Ἀλεξάνδρου καθελόντα ἀρχήν· κατακλυσθήσονται οὖν, ἀντὶ τοῦ καθέξει οὗτος τὴν Πτολεμαίου ἀρχήν, ὡς ἐκεῖνος τὴν Ἀλεξάνδρου.
Brachiones tou kataklyzontos. Toutestin hē ischys tou Ptolemaiou hypo touton estai; kataklyzonta gar ekeinon ekalesen, hōs ardēn tēn Alexandrou kathelonta archēn; kataklysthēsontai oun, anti tou kathexei houtos tēn Ptolemaiou archēn, hōs ekeinos tēn Alexandrou.
"The arms of the one who floods." That is, the strength of Ptolemy will be under this one; for he called that one "the one who floods," as having taken the rule of Alexander; "they will be flooded," then, in place of "this one will hold the rule of Ptolemy, as that one held Alexander's."
11.57Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Κατακλυσθήσονται ἀπὸ προσώπου αὐτοῦ. Τουτέστι μετὰ φόβου πάντες αὐτῷ ὑπακούσονται.
Kataklysthēsontai apo prosōpou autou. Toutesti meta phobou pantes autǭ hypakousontai.
"They will be flooded before him." That is, all will obey him with fear.
11.58Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ἡγούμενος διαθήκης. Τὸν τοῦ μακκαβαίου Ἰωνάθαν λέγει, ὡς ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ ἐπὶ εὐσέβειαν αὐτὸ τὸ πλῆθος χειραγωγοῦντα· λέγει δὲ ὅτι τῆς ἀρχῆς λαβόμενος ὁ Δημήτριος βουλεύσεται καὶ τοῦτον τῆς ἀρχῆς καθελεῖν.
Hēgoumenos diathēkēs. Ton tou makkabaiou Iōnathan legei, hōs archonta tou laou, kai epi eusebeian auto to plēthos cheiragōgounta; legei de hoti tēs archēs labomenos ho Dēmētrios bouleusetai kai touton tēs archēs kathelein.
"The leader of the covenant." He means Jonathan the Maccabee, as ruler of the people and guiding the multitude to godliness; and he says that Demetrius, once he had taken the rule, will plan to remove him too from rule.
11.59Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ἐν ὀλίγῳ ἔθνει. Οἱ γὰρ τρισχίλιοι ἄνδρες οἱ παρὰ Ἰωνάθου πεμφθέντες, δώδεκα μυριάδας ἀνδρῶν τῶν ἐπαναστάντων τῷ Δημητρίῳ ἀπέκτειναν ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ.
En oligǭ ethnei. Hoi gar trischilioi andres hoi para Iōnathou pemphthentes, dōdeka myriadas andrōn tōn epanastantōn tǭ Dēmētriǭ apekteinan en Antiocheią.
"With a small nation." For the three thousand men sent by Jonathan killed a hundred and twenty thousand men who rose up against Demetrius in Antioch.
11.60Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ἐν εὐθηνίᾳ. Καταθαρρήσει φησὶν ὁ Δημήτριος ἐκ τῶν γινομένων καὶ πλείοσιν ἐπιβῆναι χώραις, ἄμαχον τῶν συμμάχων τὴν ἰσχὺν θεασάμενος.
En euthēnią. Katatharrēsei phēsin ho Dēmētrios ek tōn ginomenōn kai pleiosin epibēnai chōrais, amachon tōn symmachōn tēn ischyn theasamenos.
"In prosperity." Demetrius, he says, will take courage from what happened and set foot on more lands, seeing the strength of his allies to be invincible.
11.61Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ποιήσει ἃ οὐκ ἐποίησαν οἱ πατέρες αὐτοῦ. Παράδοξον γὰρ ὑπὲρ τοὺς προγόνους τὴν νίκην ἤρατο· εἰ γὰρ καὶ πολέμου συστάντος γενομένου πολλοὶ νενικήκασιν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐχὶ καὶ στρατόπεδον στασιάζον ἐχειρώσατο, ὃ πεποίηκε Δημήτριος, παραδοξοτέραν τὴν νίκην εἰργασμένος τῷ τάχει.
Poiēsei ha ouk epoiēsan hoi pateres autou. Paradoxon gar hyper tous progonous tēn nikēn ērato; ei gar kai polemou systantos genomenou polloi nenikēkasin, all᾽ ouchi kai stratopedon stasiazon echeirōsato, ho pepoiēke Dēmētrios, paradoxoteran tēn nikēn eirgasmenos tǭ tachei.
"He will do what his fathers did not do." For he won a victory wonderful beyond his ancestors; for even if, when a war was fought, many have won, yet no one had overcome a rebellious army, as Demetrius did, winning the victory the more wonderfully by its speed.
11.62Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Προνομὴν καὶ σκῦλα. Πολλὰ δέ φησι καὶ ἰουδαῖοι ἐκ τῶν λαφύρων λήψονται.
Pronomēn kai skyla. Polla de phēsi kai ioudaioi ek tōn laphyrōn lēpsontai.
"Plunder and spoils." And the Jews too, he says, will take much from the spoils.
11.63Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Καὶ ἐπ᾽ Αἴγυπτον λογιεῖται. Τούτων φησὶν ἐπαναστάντων περὶ τῆς ἁπάσης βασιλείας εἰς δέος καταστήσεται· τῆς δὲ Αἰγύπτου νῦν ἐμνημόνευσεν, ἐπειδὴ κἀκείνης ἐκράτησε μετὰ τὸν Πτολεμαίου θάνατον.
Kai ep᾽ Aigypton logieitai. Toutōn phēsin epanastantōn peri tēs hapasēs basileias eis deos katastēsetai; tēs de Aigyptou nyn emnēmoneusen, epeidē kakeinēs ekratēse meta ton Ptolemaiou thanaton.
"And he will plan against Egypt." When these rose up, he says, he will fall into fear about the whole kingdom; and he mentioned Egypt now since he had taken control of it too after Ptolemy's death.
11.64Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ἕως καιροῦ. Τουτέστι καὶ οὗτος ἀποθανεῖται βιώσας ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγον.
Heōs kairou. Toutesti kai houtos apothaneitai biōsas ep᾽ oligon.
"Until a time." That is, this one too will die, having lived a short while.
11.65Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ἐξεγερθήσεται ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτοῦ καὶ ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ. Τὸν Ἀντίοχον λέγει τὸν Ἀλεξάνδρου υἱόν.
Exegerthēsetai hē ischys autou kai hē kardia autou. Ton Antiochon legei ton Alexandrou huion.
"His strength and his heart will be roused." He means Antiochus, the son of Alexander.
11.66Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ἐπὶ βασιλέα τοῦ νότου. Βασιλέα νότου Ἀντίοχον νῦν λέγει τὸν Ἀλεξάνδρου υἱόν· ἥξειν δὲ μετὰ πολλῆς τῆς χειρὸς κατὰ Δημητρίου λέγει.
Epi basilea tou notou. Basilea notou Antiochon nyn legei ton Alexandrou huion; hēxein de meta pollēs tēs cheiros kata Dēmētriou legei.
"Against the king of the south." By "king of the south" he now means Antiochus, Alexander's son; and he says he will come with a great host against Demetrius.
11.67Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Συνάψει πόλεμον. Συμβαλὼν γὰρ τῷ Δημητρίῳ ὁ Ἀντίοχος μετὰ Τρύφωνος, εἰς φυγὴν αὐτὸν ἔτρεψεν.
Synapsei polemon. Symbalōn gar tǭ Dēmētriǭ ho Antiochos meta Tryphōnos, eis phygēn auton etrepsen.
"He will join battle." For engaging Demetrius, Antiochus with Tryphon put him to flight.
11.68Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Λογιοῦνται ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν λογισμούς. Περὶ Ἀντιόχου λέγει· ὁ γὰρ Τρύφων βασιλεύσας αὐτόν, συσκευασάμενος αὐτὸν ἀναιρεῖ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν εἰς ἑαυτὸν μεθίστησι.
Logiountai ep᾽ auton logismous. Peri Antiochou legei; ho gar Tryphōn basileusas auton, syskeuasamenos auton anairei, kai tēn basileian eis heauton methistēsi.
"They will devise plans against him." He speaks of Antiochus; for Tryphon, having made him king, plotted against him, killed him, and transferred the kingdom to himself.
11.69Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Φάγονται τὰ δέοντα αὐτοῦ. Ταῦτα δέ φησι διαπράξεται, ὑποκρινόμενος τὴν πρὸς αὐτὸν φιλίαν, καὶ οὐδὲ τὸ ὁμοδίαιτον ἐντραπείς.
Phagontai ta deonta autou. Tauta de phēsi diapraxetai, hypokrinomenos tēn pros auton philian, kai oude to homodiaiton entrapeis.
"Those who eat his provisions." He will do these things, he says, pretending friendship toward him, and not even respecting the shared table.
11.70Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Συντρίψουσιν αὐτόν. Τουτέστιν οἰκειώσεται τοῦ στρατοπέδου τὸ πλῆθος, καὶ τὸν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐργάσεται φόνον.
Syntripsousin auton. Toutestin oikeiōsetai tou stratopedou to plēthos, kai ton kat᾽ autou ergasetai phonon.
"They will break him." That is, he will win over the mass of the army and carry out his murder.
11.71Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Πεσοῦνται τραυματίαι. Ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τῆς Ἀντιόχου ἀναιρέσεως.
Pesountai traumatiai. En tǭ kairǭ tēs Antiochou anaireseōs.
"The wounded will fall." At the time of the killing of Antiochus.
11.72Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ψευδῆ λαλήσουσι. Τουτέστι λαλήσει· περὶ γὰρ Τρύφωνος λέγει· ἐπειδὴ συνεσθίων τῷ Ἀντιόχῳ, καὶ συγκροτεῖν αὐτῷ τῇ συμμαχίᾳ τὴν βασιλείαν ὑπισχνούμενος, ἀφυλάκτως ἐπιπεσὼν ἀνεῖλεν.
Pseudē lalēsousi. Toutesti lalēsei; peri gar Tryphōnos legei; epeidē synesthiōn tǭ Antiochǭ, kai synkrotein autǭ tę̄ symmachią tēn basileian hypischnoumenos, aphylaktōs epipesōn aneilen.
"They will speak lies." That is, he will speak; for he speaks about Tryphon: since he ate with Antiochus and promised to establish the kingdom for him by his alliance, he fell on him off guard and killed him.
11.73Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Οὐ κατευθυνεῖ. Οὐ μήν φησιν ἀποίσεται τὸ κέρδος ἐκ τῆς ὑπούλου ταύτης γνώμης· μετὰ γὰρ τὸ ἀποκτεῖναι τὸν Ἀντίοχον καὶ κρατῆσαι τῆς βασιλείας, πάλιν καὶ αὐτὸς καθῃρέθη τῆς ἀρχῆς, ὑπὸ Ἀντιόχου τοῦ υἱοῦ Δημητρίου ἀναιρεθείς.
Ou kateuthynei. Ou mēn phēsin apoisetai to kerdos ek tēs hypoulou tautēs gnōmēs; meta gar to apokteinai ton Antiochon kai kratēsai tēs basileias, palin kai autos kathę̄rethē tēs archēs, hypo Antiochou tou huiou Dēmētriou anairetheis.
"He will not prosper." Yet, he says, he will not carry off the gain from this treacherous intention; for after killing Antiochus and taking the kingdom, he too was brought down from rule, killed by Antiochus the son of Demetrius.
11.74Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ἐπιστρέψει εἰς τὴν γῆν αὐτοῦ ἐν ὑπάρξει πολλῇ. Ἢ περὶ Ἀντιόχου λέγει τοῦ Δημητρίου κρατήσαντος τῆς ἀρχῆς, καὶ μετὰ δόξης ἐρχομένου· ἢ περὶ Τρύφωνος, ὅτε τὸν υἱὸν Ἀλεξάνδρου τὸν Ἀντίοχον ἀνελών, ὑπέστρεψεν οἴκαδε.
Epistrepsei eis tēn gēn autou en hyparxei pollę̄. Ē peri Antiochou legei tou Dēmētriou kratēsantos tēs archēs, kai meta doxēs erchomenou; ē peri Tryphōnos, hote ton huion Alexandrou ton Antiochon anelōn, hypestrepsen oikade.
"He will return to his land with great wealth." Either he speaks of Antiochus son of Demetrius, who took control of the rule and came with glory; or of Tryphon, when, having killed Antiochus the son of Alexander, he returned home.
11.75Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ διαθήκην ἁγίαν. Περὶ τοῦ Τρύφωνος λέγει, ἀνελόντος μὲν τὸν Ἰωνάθαν πρὸ τοῦ βασιλεῦσαι, χείριστα δὲ μετὰ τὴν βασιλείαν διαθέντος τὸν λαὸν ἐπὶ Σίμωνος τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ Ἰωνάθου.
Hē kardia autou epi diathēkēn hagian. Peri tou Tryphōnos legei, anelontos men ton Iōnathan pro tou basileusai, cheirista de meta tēn basileian diathentos ton laon epi Simōnos tou adelphou Iōnathou.
"His heart against the holy covenant." He speaks of Tryphon, who killed Jonathan before he became king, and treated the people worst after his reign, in the time of Simon, Jonathan's brother.
11.76Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ἐπιστρέψει. Τουτέστιν ἀντὶ τοῦ ὁ Τρύφων ἀνελὼν τὸν Ἰωνάθαν εἰς τὴν γῆν αὐτοῦ ἐπανήξει· ἵνα εἴπῃ οὐκ ἐπιβήσεται τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων.
Epistrepsei. Toutestin anti tou ho Tryphōn anelōn ton Iōnathan eis tēn gēn autou epanēxei; hina eipę̄ ouk epibēsetai tōn Hierosolymōn.
"He will return." That is, Tryphon, having killed Jonathan, will go back to his own land, to say that he will not set foot in Jerusalem.
11.77Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Εἰς τὸν καιρὸν ἐπιστρέψει. Μετὰ τὸν Ἰωνάθου θάνατον· οὐ πρότερον γὰρ ἀνίστη, ἄχρις οὗ τὴν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ γνώμην ἐπλήρωσεν· ὡς γὰρ εἶδεν ὅτι τῆς Ἰουδαίας ἐγκρατὴς γενέσθαι οὐ δύναται, σφάξας τὸν Ἰωνάθαν, ἐπὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἐχώρησε χώραν.
Eis ton kairon epistrepsei. Meta ton Iōnathou thanaton; ou proteron gar anistē, achris hou tēn kat᾽ autou gnōmēn eplērōsen; hōs gar eiden hoti tēs Ioudaias enkratēs genesthai ou dynatai, sphaxas ton Iōnathan, epi tēn heautou echōrēse chōran.
"At the time he will return." After Jonathan's death; for he did not withdraw before he had fulfilled his intention against him; for when he saw that he could not become master of Judea, having slain Jonathan, he went off to his own country.
11.78Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ἥξει ἐν τῷ νότῳ. Ἀντὶ τοῦ εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείαν.
Hēxei en tǭ notǭ. Anti tou eis tēn heautou basileian.
"He will come into the south." Meaning, into his own kingdom.
11.79Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Καὶ οὐκ ἔσται ὡς ἡ πρώτη καὶ ἡ ἐσχάτη. Ὁ σύρος, καὶ ποιήσει ὡς τὰ πρῶτα καὶ τὰ ἔσχατα· τουτέστιν ᾧ δόλῳ χρήσεται κατὰ Ἀντιόχου, τούτῳ καὶ κατὰ Ἰωνάθου.
Kai ouk estai hōs hē prōtē kai hē eschatē. Ho syros, kai poiēsei hōs ta prōta kai ta eschata; toutestin hǭ dolǭ chrēsetai kata Antiochou, toutǭ kai kata Iōnathou.
"And it will not be like the first and the last." The Syriac reads, "and he will do as the first and the last things"; that is, the deceit he used against Antiochus, the same he will use against Jonathan too.
11.80Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Οἱ ἐκπορευόμενοι Κίτιοι. Ἐπὶ Τρύφωνά φησιν ἥξουσιν οἱ Κίτιοι· ἦσαν δὲ Ἀντιόχου τοῦ Δημητρίου· οὗτοι τοίνυν φησὶ μετὰ τοῦ αὐτῶν βασιλέως, ἦσαν δὲ περί που μυριάδες δώδεκα ἀνδρῶν, παραταξάμενοι ἀναιροῦσι τὸν Τρύφωνα.
Hoi ekporeuomenoi Kitioi. Epi Tryphōna phēsin hēxousin hoi Kitioi; ēsan de Antiochou tou Dēmētriou; houtoi toinyn phēsi meta tou autōn basileōs, ēsan de peri pou myriades dōdeka andrōn, parataxamenoi anairousi ton Tryphōna.
"Those who go out, the Kitians." The Kitians, he says, will come against Tryphon; they were the men of Antiochus son of Demetrius; these, then, he says, with their king, about a hundred and twenty thousand men, drew up for battle and killed Tryphon.
11.81Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Ἐπιστρέψει καὶ θυμωθήσεται ἐπὶ διαθήκην ἁγίαν. Πανταχοῦ τὰ τοῦ λαοῦ συμπλέκει· ἐπείπερ τούτων ἕνεκα καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν μέμνηται· λέγει δὲ νῦν περὶ Ἀντιόχου τοῦ Δημητρίου. — Τουτέστι νικήσας τοὺς Αἰγυπτίους ὁ Ἀντίοχος ἐπανήξει· λέγει δὲ πρότερον τὴν αἰτίαν, ἀφ᾽ ἧς ζέων τοῖς θυμοῖς εἰς τὰ Ἱεροσόλυμα ἐπανῄει, τὸν πάντα τρόπον τοῦ Ἀντιόχου διαβάλλων.
Epistrepsei kai thymōthēsetai epi diathēkēn hagian. Pantachou ta tou laou symplekei; epeiper toutōn heneka kai tōn loipōn memnētai; legei de nyn peri Antiochou tou Dēmētriou. — Toutesti nikēsas tous Aigyptious ho Antiochos epanēxei; legei de proteron tēn aitian, aph᾽ hēs zeōn tois thymois eis ta Hierosolyma epanę̄ei, ton panta tropon tou Antiochou diaballōn.
"He will turn back and be enraged against the holy covenant." Everywhere he weaves in what concerns the people; for their sake he mentions the rest too; and now he speaks of Antiochus son of Demetrius. — That is, having conquered the Egyptians, Antiochus will come back; and he first states the cause from which, seething with rage, he came back to Jerusalem, exposing the whole character of Antiochus.
11.82Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Συνήσει ἐπὶ τοὺς καταλείποντας διαθήκην ἁγίαν. Ἀντίοχος γὰρ τῆς ἀρχῆς λαβόμενος, λήμματι τὴν χεῖρα ὑποσχών, Ἰάσονι τὴν ἀρχιερωσύνην δίδωσι· συνήσει οὖν, τουτέστι προσάξει τοὺς ἀποστάτας τὸν νοῦν.
Synēsei epi tous kataleipontas diathēkēn hagian. Antiochos gar tēs archēs labomenos, lēmmati tēn cheira hyposchōn, Iasoni tēn archierōsynēn didōsi; synēsei oun, toutesti prosaxei tous apostatas ton noun.
"He will have understanding with those who forsake the holy covenant." For Antiochus, on taking the rule, holding out his hand for a bribe, gives the high priesthood to Jason; "he will have understanding," then, that is, he will attach the apostates to himself in mind.
11.83Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Βραχίονες καὶ σπέρματα ἐξ αὐτοῦ. Τουτέστιν ἐκ τῆς τοῦ βασιλέως ἐπιτροπῆς ἰσχυροὶ κατὰ τῶν ὁμοεθνῶν καὶ εὐσεβεῖν βουλομένων οἱ παράνομοι γενήσονται.
Brachiones kai spermata ex autou. Toutestin ek tēs tou basileōs epitropēs ischyroi kata tōn homoethnōn kai eusebein boulomenōn hoi paranomoi genēsontai.
"Arms and seeds from him." That is, by the king's commission the lawless will become strong against those of the same faith who want to be godly.
11.84Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):23
Βεβηλώσουσι τὸ ἁγίασμα τῆς δυναστείας. Ἵνα εἴπῃ καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν ναὸν τοῦ δυνατοῦ θεοῦ κοινόν τινα ἀποδείξουσι τῇ παρ᾽ ἑαυτῶν μιαιφονίᾳ· βέβηλον τὸ οὐκ ἐξαίρετον λέγει, ἀλλ᾽ ὁμοίως τοῖς πᾶσι προκείμενον· ὡς τὸ οὐκ εἰσὶν ἄρτοι βέβηλοι ὑπὸ τὴν χεῖρά μου.
Bebēlōsousi to hagiasma tēs dynasteias. Hina eipę̄ kai auton ton naon tou dynatou theou koinon tina apodeixousi tę̄ par᾽ heautōn miaiphonią; bebēlon to ouk exaireton legei, all᾽ homoiōs tois pasi prokeimenon; hōs to ouk eisin artoi bebēloi hypo tēn cheira mou.
"They will profane the sanctuary of power." To say that they will show even the very temple of the mighty God to be something common by their own pollution; he calls "profane" what is not set apart, but lies open alike to all; as in "they are not profane bread under my hand."
11.86Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Μεταστήσουσι τὸν ἐνδελεχισμόν. Ἀπὸ γὰρ τῆς προειρημένης αἰτίας ὁ Ἀντίοχος τὴν κατὰ τῶν ἰουδαίων ἐπιτείνων μανίαν, καὶ τὰς συνήθεις θυσίας ἐκώλυσε προσφέρεσθαι τῷ θεῷ.
Metastēsousi ton endelechismon. Apo gar tēs proeirēmenēs aitias ho Antiochos tēn kata tōn ioudaiōn epiteinōn manian, kai tas synētheis thysias ekōlyse prospheresthai tǭ theǭ.
"They will remove the continual sacrifice." For from the cause mentioned before, Antiochus, intensifying his madness against the Jews, also prevented the usual sacrifices from being offered to God.
11.87Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Λαὸς γινώσκοντες θεὸν αὐτοῦ. Τοὺς μακκαβαίους λέγει κατισχύειν τῶν ἐχθρῶν αὐτῶν· εἰ γὰρ καὶ τῆς ἐνεγκούσης ἔδοξαν ἐλαύνεσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν τῇ τοῦ θεοῦ συμμαχίᾳ ἀμείνους τοῦ Ἀντιόχου πεφήνασι, τήν τε οἰκείαν ἀπολαβόντες, καὶ τῷ ἱερῷ τὴν εὐκοσμίαν ἀποδεδωκότες.
Laos ginōskontes theon autou. Tous makkabaious legei katischyein tōn echthrōn autōn; ei gar kai tēs enenkousēs edoxan elaunesthai, all᾽ oun tę̄ tou theou symmachią ameinous tou Antiochou pephēnasi, tēn te oikeian apolabontes, kai tǭ hierǭ tēn eukosmian apodedōkotes.
"A people that knows its God." He means the Maccabees, who overcame their enemies; for even if they seemed to be driven out of their homeland, yet with God's help they proved stronger than Antiochus, recovering their own land and restoring the good order of the temple.
11.88Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Οἱ συνετοὶ τοῦ λαοῦ. Συνετοὺς καλεῖ τοὺς τὸν θεῖον κεκτημένους ζῆλον· οἷος γέγονεν ὁ Ματθίας καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, μαχησάμενοι μὲν τῷ βασιλικῷ προστάγματι, τὴν δὲ ἐπ᾽ ἐρήμῳ δίαιταν μετ᾽ εὐσεβείας ἀμείνω κρίναντες τῆς ἐν βασιλείοις τρυφῆς.
Hoi synetoi tou laou. Synetous kalei tous ton theion kektēmenous zēlon; hoios gegonen ho Matthias kai hoi syn autǭ, machēsamenoi men tǭ basilikǭ prostagmati, tēn de ep᾽ erēmǭ diaitan met᾽ eusebeias ameinō krinantes tēs en basileiois tryphēs.
"The wise of the people." He calls "wise" those who possess divine zeal, such as Mattathias and those with him became, fighting against the royal command, and judging the life in the desert with godliness better than the luxury of the palace.
11.89Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Ἀσθενήσουσιν ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ. Ταῦτα δέ φησιν ἔσται παρὰ τῶν δικαίων ἐπὶ τῶν ἔργων αὐτῶν δειξάντων τὴν ἀνδρείαν· ὁ γὰρ Ἀντίοχος πλεῖστα κατ᾽ αὐτῶν βουλεύσεται, ὥστε τοὺς μὲν πυρί, τοὺς δὲ ξίφει ἀνελεῖν, τοὺς δὲ ἀποικίσαι τῆς ἐνεγκούσης· πλεῖστα δὲ καὶ περὶ τὴν ἁγίαν ἐργάσεται.
Asthenēsousin en rhomphaią. Tauta de phēsin estai para tōn dikaiōn epi tōn ergōn autōn deixantōn tēn andreian; ho gar Antiochos pleista kat᾽ autōn bouleusetai, hōste tous men pyri, tous de xiphei anelein, tous de apoikisai tēs enenkousēs; pleista de kai peri tēn hagian ergasetai.
"They will be weakened by the sword." These things, he says, will come upon the righteous who showed their courage in deeds; for Antiochus will plan very many things against them, so as to kill some by fire, others by the sword, and to deport others from their homeland; and very many things he will do concerning the holy city as well.
11.90Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Βοηθήσονται βοήθειαν μικράν. Τούτων δέ φησιν ὑπὸ Ἀντιόχου οὕτω γενομένων, τεύξονται τῆς παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ συμμαχίας· τὸ δὲ μικράν, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἄρξεται αὐτοῖς βοηθεῖν ὁ θεός· αἰνίττεται δὲ τοῦ Ἰούδα τὴν κατὰ Ἀπολλωνίου πρώτην νίκην, ἀφ᾽ ἧς φοβερός τε τοῖς λοιποῖς κατέστη, καὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς ἐπανισταμένους ἐτροπώσατο.
Boēthēsontai boētheian mikran. Toutōn de phēsin hypo Antiochou houtō genomenōn, teuxontai tēs para tou theou symmachias; to de mikran, anti tou arxetai autois boēthein ho theos; ainittetai de tou Iouda tēn kata Apollōniou prōtēn nikēn, aph᾽ hēs phoberos te tois loipois katestē, kai tous loipous epanistamenous etropōsato.
"They will be helped with a little help." When these things are done by Antiochus, he says, they will obtain alliance from God; and "little" means "God begins to help them"; he hints at Judas's first victory, over Apollonius, by which he became fearsome to the rest and routed the others who rose up.
11.91Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Προστεθήσονται ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς. Ὁ γὰρ Ματθίας καὶ Ἰούδας ἐν τῇ ἀποστάσει ἐκλιπόντες τὴν πόλιν, πολλοὺς εἰς εὐσέβειαν ἀνέρρωσαν λόγῳ καὶ παρακλήσει· ἔστι δὲ ὅτε καὶ κολάζων τοὺς παρανόμους ὁ Ματθίας τοὺς λοιποὺς εὐσεβεῖν ἠνάγκαζεν.
Prostethēsontai ep᾽ autous. Ho gar Matthias kai Ioudas en tę̄ apostasei eklipontes tēn polin, pollous eis eusebeian anerrōsan logǭ kai paraklēsei; esti de hote kai kolazōn tous paranomous ho Matthias tous loipous eusebein ēnankazen.
"They will be added to them." For Mattathias and Judas, having left the city in the revolt, strengthened many in godliness by word and exhortation; and at times Mattathias, punishing the lawless, compelled the rest to be godly.
11.92Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Ἐν ὀλισθήμασι. Ἀντὶ τοῦ ἐκ τῶν ὀλισθησάντων καὶ εἰς ἀσέβειαν ἐκτραπέντων.
En olisthēmasi. Anti tou ek tōn olisthēsantōn kai eis asebeian ektrapentōn.
"In slipperiness." Meaning, from those who slipped and turned aside to impiety.
11.93Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Ἀπὸ τῶν συνιέντων. Τουτέστιν οἱ μὲν δίκαιοι τεύξονται τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ βοηθείας· οἶδε γὰρ πολλοὺς καὶ πεισομένους πλεῖστα, τῆς ἀσεβείας τὴν ἀπόδοσιν τοῖς ἔργοις δώσοντας· λέγει δὲ τοὺς ὑπὲρ ὀρθότητος ἀποθανόντας, οἵ εἰσιν οἱ περὶ τὸν Ἐλεάζαρον καὶ οἱ ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοὶ ἅμα τῇ μητρί.
Apo tōn synientōn. Toutestin hoi men dikaioi teuxontai tēs tou theou boētheias; oide gar pollous kai peisomenous pleista, tēs asebeias tēn apodosin tois ergois dōsontas; legei de tous hyper orthotētos apothanontas, hoi eisin hoi peri ton Eleazaron kai hoi hepta adelphoi hama tę̄ mētri.
"Some of those who understand." That is, the righteous will obtain God's help; for he knows that many will suffer very much, paying the price of impiety by their deeds; and he speaks of those who died for orthodoxy, who are Eleazar and the seven brothers with their mother.
11.94Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Ἕως καιροῦ πέρας. Τουτέστι κρατήσουσι δὲ εἰς τοσοῦτον οἱ περὶ τὸν Ἀντίοχον, καὶ ταῦτα περὶ τὸν ναὸν ποιήσουσιν, ἄχρις οὗ πληρωθῇ ὁ χρόνος, ὃν δὴ πρότερον εἶπε τῶν δισχιλίων τριακοσίων ἡμερῶν. — Ἔσται δέ φησι ταῦτα χρόνοις ὕστερον· δέκατος γὰρ ἀπὸ Ἀλεξάνδρου ὁ Ἀντίοχος, ὡς δέδεικται.
Heōs kairou peras. Toutesti kratēsousi de eis tosouton hoi peri ton Antiochon, kai tauta peri ton naon poiēsousin, achris hou plērōthę̄ ho chronos, hon dē proteron eipe tōn dischiliōn triakosiōn hēmerōn. — Estai de phēsi tauta chronois hysteron; dekatos gar apo Alexandrou ho Antiochos, hōs dedeiktai.
"Until a time of the end." That is, Antiochus and his men will prevail so far, and will do these things concerning the temple, until the time is fulfilled which he stated before, of the two thousand three hundred days. — These things, he says, will happen in later times; for Antiochus is the tenth from Alexander, as has been shown.
11.96Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Ὁ βασιλεὺς ὑψωθήσεται. Τουτέστι καταφρονήσει αἰγυπτίων καὶ τῆς ἐκείνων δεισιδαιμονίας.
Ho basileus hypsōthēsetai. Toutesti kataphronēsei aigyptiōn kai tēs ekeinōn deisidaimonias.
"The king will be exalted." That is, he will despise the Egyptians and their superstition.
11.97Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Μεγαλυνθήσεται ἐπὶ πάντα θεόν. Τουτέστι καὶ κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦ δεσπότου ἀλαζονεύσεται· πεφυσημένος γὰρ τοῖς ῥηθεῖσι κατορθώμασι, καὶ εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν εἰσελθεῖν κατετόλμησεν, ἡγουμένου τοῦ Μενελάου, καὶ συλῆσαι τὰ ἱερὰ κειμήλιά τε, καὶ … εἰς τὴν ἑλλήνων μεταστῆσαι ἠπείλει· ἰσοθεΐαν τι φανταζόμενος, καὶ ἰσχύειν τῷ δεσπότῃ παραπλήσιον.
Megalynthēsetai epi panta theon. Toutesti kai kat᾽ autou tou despotou alazoneusetai; pephysēmenos gar tois rhētheisi katorthōmasi, kai eis to hieron eiselthein katetolmēsen, hēgoumenou tou Menelaou, kai sylēsai ta hiera keimēlia te, kai … eis tēn hellēnōn metastēsai ēpeilei; isotheïan ti phantazomenos, kai ischyein tǭ despotę̄ paraplēsion.
"He will be magnified above every god." That is, he will boast even against the Master himself; for, puffed up by the successes mentioned, he dared even to enter the temple, with Menelaus leading him, and to plunder the sacred treasures, and threatened to transfer … to the Greek way, imagining himself equal to God and like the Master in strength.
11.98Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Κατευθυνεῖ. Τουτέστι καὶ ταῦτα ποιήσας, οὐδὲν πείσεται.
Kateuthynei. Toutesti kai tauta poiēsas, ouden peisetai.
"He will prosper." That is, even doing these things, he will suffer nothing.
11.99Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Μέχρις οὗ συντελεσθῇ ἡ ὀργή. Τουτέστι καὶ ἐκ τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ μακροθυμίας, οὐ μεταβληθήσεται τὴν γνώμην, ἄχρις οὗ πληγαῖς ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ, ἄκων ὁμολογήσει ὃν ἠρνεῖτο δεσπότην, ἐπιγνώμων τῆς ἑαυτοῦ ἀσθενείας γενόμενος.
Mechris hou syntelesthę̄ hē orgē. Toutesti kai ek tēs tou theou makrothymias, ou metablēthēsetai tēn gnōmēn, achris hou plēgais hypo tou theou, akōn homologēsei hon ērneito despotēn, epignōmōn tēs heautou astheneias genomenos.
"Until the wrath is accomplished." That is, even from God's patience he will not change his mind, until, through blows from God, he confesses against his will the Master whom he had denied, having come to know his own weakness.
11.100Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Εἰς γὰρ συντέλειαν καὶ σπουδὴν γίνεται. Τουτέστιν ὅταν δόξῃ πάντα κατορθοῦσθαι, τότε δίκην δώσει· τότε δὲ καὶ σπουδὴν καὶ τάχος.
Eis gar synteleian kai spoudēn ginetai. Toutestin hotan doxę̄ panta katorthousthai, tote dikēn dōsei; tote de kai spoudēn kai tachos.
"For it comes to completion and haste." That is, when he thinks he is succeeding in everything, then he will pay the penalty; then too with haste and speed.
11.101Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Ἐπὶ πάντας θεοὺς τῶν πατέρων αὐτοῦ. Τῶν γὰρ πρὸ αὐτοῦ πάντων τετιμηκότων τὸν τόπον, ὥστε καὶ πολὺν πλοῦτον ἐκ τῶν ἀναθημάτων αὐτόθι κεῖσθαι, αὐτός τε μόνος τήν τε πόλιν πορθῆσαι, καὶ τὸν ναὸν τῶν ἐνόντων κενῶσαι ἐπεχείρησεν.
Epi pantas theous tōn paterōn autou. Tōn gar pro autou pantōn tetimēkotōn ton topon, hōste kai polyn plouton ek tōn anathēmatōn autothi keisthai, autos te monos tēn te polin porthēsai, kai ton naon tōn enontōn kenōsai epecheirēsen.
"Against all the gods of his fathers." For when all before him had honored the place, so that much wealth from the offerings lay there, he alone tried to sack the city and to empty the temple of its contents.
11.102Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Ἐπὶ πάντα θεὸν οὐ συνήσει. Τουτέστι τῶν παρὰ πάντων τῶν ἐγχωρίων ὡς θεῶν ὀνομαζομένων (οὐκ) ἐγκαλεῖται· οὐχ ὅτι τοῦ ξοάνου κατεφρόνησεν, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι ἰσοθεΐαν φαντασθείς, καταφρονεῖ παντὸς οὑτινοσοῦν λεγομένου θεοῦ. — Τουτέστιν οὐ θαυμαστόν, ὅπου γε καὶ αὐτοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ κατεφρόνει τοῦ πάντων κυρίου.
Epi panta theon ou synēsei. Toutesti tōn para pantōn tōn enchōriōn hōs theōn onomazomenōn (ouk) enkaleitai; ouch hoti tou xoanou katephronēsen, all᾽ hoti isotheïan phantastheis, kataphronei pantos houtinosoun legomenou theou. — Toutestin ou thaumaston, hopou ge kai autou tou theou katephronei tou pantōn kyriou.
"He will not have understanding of any god." That is, he accuses the gods named as gods by all the native peoples; not because he despised the idol, but because, imagining himself equal to God, he despises whatever is called god. — That is, it is no wonder, seeing that he despised even God himself, the Lord of all.
11.103Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Θεὸν Μαωζείν. Ἰσχυρὸν σημαίνει· βούλεται δὲ εἰπεῖν, ὅτι ἴσεται θεὸν τὸν ἁπάντων κύριον, καθ᾽ ὃν τὴν γλῶσσαν ἐκόπησε· ληφθεὶς γὰρ ἀφορήτοις ταῖς ἀλγηδόσι, καὶ προσέτι τοῦ ἅρματος πεσών, καὶ σκωλήκων γέμων τὸ σῶμα, καὶ δυσωδίας ἐμπλέως καθεστώς, ὡς καὶ βαρὺς γενέσθαι τοῖς προσεγγίζουσιν, ἔγνω καὶ ἄκων τὸν ἁπάντων κύριον· ἀναθήματα γοῦν πολλὰ πέμψας εἰς Ἱερουσαλήμ, ἠξίου δέησιν ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ γενέσθαι ὑπὸ τοῦ λαοῦ πρὸς τὸν θεόν. — Ὁ γὰρ ἰσοθεΐαν φαντασθείς, οὐ τοῦ φρονήματος κατῆλθε μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς τῶν πατέρων ἀσεβείας ἀπέστη, παλινῳδίαν ᾄσας.
Theon Maōzein. Ischyron sēmainei; bouletai de eipein, hoti isetai theon ton hapantōn kyrion, kath᾽ hon tēn glōssan ekopēse; lēphtheis gar aphorētois tais algēdosi, kai proseti tou harmatos pesōn, kai skōlēkōn gemōn to sōma, kai dysōdias empleōs kathestōs, hōs kai barys genesthai tois prosengizousin, egnō kai akōn ton hapantōn kyrion; anathēmata goun polla pempsas eis Hierousalēm, ēxiou deēsin hyper autou genesthai hypo tou laou pros ton theon. — Ho gar isotheïan phantastheis, ou tou phronēmatos katēlthe monon, alla kai tēs tōn paterōn asebeias apestē, palinǭdian ąsas.
"The god Maozim." It signifies "strong"; and he wants to say that he will know the God who is Lord of all, at the time when he cut out his tongue; for, seized by unbearable pains, falling from his chariot, and his body full of worms, and in such a state from the stench that he became heavy to those who came near, he came to know the Lord of all, even against his will; at any rate, sending many offerings to Jerusalem, he asked that supplication be made by the people to God on his behalf. — For he who imagined himself equal to God not only came down from that pride, but also departed from the impiety of his fathers, singing a recantation.
11.104Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Ποιήσει τοῖς ὀχυρώμασι. Τουτέστι σπείσεται μετὰ ἰουδαίων φιλίαν, ἰσχυρῶν αὐτῷ φανέντων, διὰ τὸ ἐπὶ θεὸν καταφυγεῖν. — Τουτέστι διὰ τιμῆς ἕξει ἰουδαίους τε καὶ τὸ ἱερόν· γράμμασι γὰρ ἐτίμησε τὸ ἔθνος, καὶ τὴν αὐτῶν μετεδίωκεν ὁμόνοιαν.
Poiēsei tois ochyrōmasi. Toutesti speisetai meta ioudaiōn philian, ischyrōn autǭ phanentōn, dia to epi theon kataphygein. — Toutesti dia timēs hexei ioudaious te kai to hieron; grammasi gar etimēse to ethnos, kai tēn autōn metediōken homonoian.
"He will act for the strongholds." That is, he will make a treaty of friendship with the Jews, as they appeared strong to him through their taking refuge in God. — That is, he will hold the Jews and the temple in honor; for he honored the nation by letters, and sought their concord.
11.105Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Ὑποτάξει αὐτοῖς πολλούς. Τουτέστι παύσει τοὺς κατ᾽ αὐτῶν πολέμους.
Hypotaxei autois pollous. Toutesti pausei tous kat᾽ autōn polemous.
"He will subject many to them." That is, he will stop the wars against them.
11.106Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Γῆν διελεῖ ἐν δώροις. Τουτέστι συγχωρήσει αὐτοῖς τὴν ἑαυτῶν διοικεῖν γῆν, καὶ δώροις τὸν ναὸν τιμῆσαι.
Gēn dielei en dōrois. Toutesti synchōrēsei autois tēn heautōn dioikein gēn, kai dōrois ton naon timēsai.
"He will divide land with gifts." That is, he will allow them to administer their own land, and will honor the temple with gifts.
11.107Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24
Ἐν καιροῦ πέρατι. Τουτέστι καὶ ταῦτα ποιήσας ἀποθανεῖται, δίκην τῶν πραχθέντων ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ εἰσπραχθείς.
En kairou perati. Toutesti kai tauta poiēsas apothaneitai, dikēn tōn prachthentōn hyp᾽ autou eisprachtheis.
"At the end of a time." That is, even having done these things he will die, paying the penalty for what he did.
11.109Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):24-25
Συγκερατισθήσεται μετὰ τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ νότου κ. τ. λ. Τουτέστι δύναμιν ἀθροίσας ἐπιστρατεύσει αἰγυπτίοις. — Τουτέστι κατὰ τοῦ Πτολεμαίου ὁ Ἀντίοχος ἐπελεύσεται, πλείστην ἑαυτῷ συναγαγὼν τὴν δύναμιν. — Τουτέστιν εἰς τὴν Αἴγυπτον ὁ Ἀντίοχος μετὰ πλήθους· οὕτω γὰρ φαίνεται συμβαλών. — Τουτέστι νικήσας ὑποστρέψει· ἐξήλασε γὰρ τῆς ἀρχῆς τὸν Πτολεμαῖον.
Synkeratisthēsetai meta tou basileōs tou notou k. t. l. Toutesti dynamin athroisas epistrateusei aigyptiois. — Toutesti kata tou Ptolemaiou ho Antiochos epeleusetai, pleistēn heautǭ synagagōn tēn dynamin. — Toutestin eis tēn Aigypton ho Antiochos meta plēthous; houtō gar phainetai symbalōn. — Toutesti nikēsas hypostrepsei; exēlase gar tēs archēs ton Ptolemaion.
"He will butt with the king of the south," and so on. That is, gathering a force he will march against the Egyptians. — That is, Antiochus will come against Ptolemy, having gathered a very great force for himself. — That is, Antiochus into Egypt with a multitude; for so he appears to have engaged. — That is, having conquered he will return; for he drove Ptolemy from his rule.
11.110Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Εἰς τὴν γῆν τοῦ Σαβαείν. Ἀντὶ τοῦ εἰς τὴν γῆν τοῦ σεβασμίου θεοῦ· ἐκεῖθεν γὰρ ὑποστρέψας, κατὰ ἰουδαίων ὥρμησεν.
Eis tēn gēn tou Sabaein. Anti tou eis tēn gēn tou sebasmiou theou; ekeithen gar hypostrepsas, kata ioudaiōn hōrmēsen.
"Into the land of Sabaein." Meaning, into the land of the God who is worshipped; for, returning from there, he rushed against the Jews.
11.111Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Καὶ πολλοὶ ἀσθενήσουσι. Τότε γὰρ τῇ πόλει ἐπιστὰς ὁ Ἀντίοχος, τοὺς μὲν οἰκήτορας ἔθλιψε, τὰ δὲ τοῦ ἱεροῦ σκεύη λαβών, ᾤχετο, καὶ τὸν ναὸν τῷ βωμῷ ἔστησε καὶ ἐμόλυνεν.
Kai polloi asthenēsousi. Tote gar tę̄ polei epistas ho Antiochos, tous men oikētoras ethlipse, ta de tou hierou skeuē labōn, ǭcheto, kai ton naon tǭ bōmǭ estēse kai emolynen.
"And many will be weakened." For then Antiochus, coming upon the city, oppressed the inhabitants, took the vessels of the temple and went off, and set an altar in the temple and defiled it.
11.112Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Ἐκτενεῖ τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ. κ. τ. λ. Τουτέστι πολλοὺς ἀναιρήσει, καὶ τὸν λαὸν συλήσει. — Ταῦτα δέ φησιν ἔσται, ἐπειδὰν καταστρέψηται τὴν Αἴγυπτον. — Τούτων φησὶ κατεσχηκὼς τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἅπαντα αὐτῶν τὸν πλοῦτον λήψεται.
Ektenei tēn cheira autou. k. t. l. Toutesti pollous anairēsei, kai ton laon sylēsei. — Tauta de phēsin estai, epeidan katastrepsētai tēn Aigypton. — Toutōn phēsi kateschēkōs tōn ethnōn, hapanta autōn ton plouton lēpsetai.
"He will stretch out his hand," and so on. That is, he will kill many and plunder the people. — These things, he says, will happen after he has subdued Egypt. — Having held these nations, he says, he will take all their wealth.
11.113Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Ἀκοαὶ καὶ σπουδαὶ ταράξουσιν αὐτόν. Γνωρίζων τὴν ἐν τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ γενομένην ταραχὴν ὑπὸ τῆς εἰς ἀλλήλους φιλονεικίας Ἰάσονος καὶ Μενελάου· ἀκούσας γὰρ ταῦτα μετὰ σπουδῆς ὑπέστρεψεν. — Δείκνυσιν ὅτι περὶ τῆς ὅλης ἀρχῆς ἠγωνίασε· κατεῖχε γὰρ καὶ τῆς Περσίδος ἣν βορρᾶν λέγει.
Akoai kai spoudai taraxousin auton. Gnōrizōn tēn en tę̄ Ioudaią genomenēn tarachēn hypo tēs eis allēlous philoneikias Iasonos kai Menelaou; akousas gar tauta meta spoudēs hypestrepsen. — Deiknysin hoti peri tēs holēs archēs ēgōniase; kateiche gar kai tēs Persidos hēn borran legei.
"Reports and haste will trouble him." Making known the disturbance in Judea from the rivalry with one another of Jason and Menelaus; for, hearing this, he returned in haste. — He shows that he feared for his whole rule; for he held Persia too, which he calls "north."
11.114Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Ἥξει ἐν θυμῷ πολλῷ. Τουτέστι ζέων τῷ θυμῷ ὁ Ἀντίοχος, ἀπὸ τῆς Αἰγύπτου εἰς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν ἀφίξεται.
Hēxei en thymǭ pollǭ. Toutesti zeōn tǭ thymǭ ho Antiochos, apo tēs Aigyptou eis tēn Ioudaian aphixetai.
"He will come in great rage." That is, Antiochus, seething with rage, will come from Egypt into Judea.
11.115Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Τοῦ ἀφανίσαι. Πανγενῇ γὰρ αὐτοὺς ἀπολέσαι ἐβουλεύσατο.
Tou aphanisai. Pangenę̄ gar autous apolesai ebouleusato.
"To destroy." For he planned to destroy them root and branch.
11.116Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Πήξει τὴν σκηνὴν αὐτοῦ Ἀφαδανῷ. Τὸ ἐν Ἀφαδανῷ τόπον λέγει· θάλασσαν δὲ μεταφορικῶς τὸ πλῆθος· ἵνα οὖν εἴπῃ, ὅτι ἐπὶ τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων γενόμενος, μεταξὺ τοῦ πλήθους αὐλισθήσεται, προσδεχθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν τὰ αὐτοῦ φρονούντων· διὰ γὰρ τοῦτο καὶ σκηνὴν εἶπεν, ἐπειδὴ μὴ αὐτόθι ᾤκισε· συλήσας γὰρ τὸν ναόν, εἰς τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν ἔσπευσεν.
Pēxei tēn skēnēn autou Aphadanǭ. To en Aphadanǭ topon legei; thalassan de metaphorikōs to plēthos; hina oun eipę̄, hoti epi tōn Hierosolymōn genomenos, metaxy tou plēthous aulisthēsetai, prosdechtheis hypo tōn ta autou phronountōn; dia gar touto kai skēnēn eipen, epeidē mē autothi ǭkise; sylēsas gar ton naon, eis tēn Antiocheian espeusen.
"He will pitch his tent at Aphadano." He means the place at Aphadano; and by "sea" he means the multitude metaphorically; to say, then, that coming to Jerusalem he will encamp in the midst of the multitude, welcomed by those who held his views; for this reason he also said "tent," since he did not stay there; for, having plundered the temple, he hastened to Antioch.
11.117Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Οὐκ ἔσται ὁ ῥυόμενος αὐτόν. Τουτέστι συγχωρήσει θεός, τούτων γινομένων, οὐ παραχρῆμα εἰσπραττόμενος αὐτὸν τὴν δίκην.
Ouk estai ho rhyomenos auton. Toutesti synchōrēsei theos, toutōn ginomenōn, ou parachrēma eisprattomenos auton tēn dikēn.
"There will be no one to rescue him." That is, God will allow these things to happen, not exacting the penalty from him at once.
Chapter 12
12.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Ἀναστήσεται Μιχαήλ. Καὶ μὴν ὅτι τῆς ἄνωθεν γενομένης ῥοπῆς, οἱ μὲν ἀσεβήσαντες αἰσχυνθήσονται, οἱ δὲ ἐγκαρτερήσαντες τῷ ὑπὲρ τοῦ νόμου, παρρησίᾳ λαμπροὶ καὶ περίβλεπτοι φανοῦνται, ὡς ἡρμήνευται· ἐπειδὴ ἡ τοῦ ἀγγέλου βοήθεια μάλιστα ἐδείκνυτο ἐν τοῖς πολέμοις, οὓς κατώρθωσεν Ἰούδας ὁ μακκαβαῖος ἐν τοῖς πρὸς τοὺς Ἀντιόχου στρατηγούς.
Anastēsetai Michaēl. Kai mēn hoti tēs anōthen genomenēs rhopēs, hoi men asebēsantes aischynthēsontai, hoi de enkarterēsantes tǭ hyper tou nomou, parrēsią lamproi kai peribleptoi phanountai, hōs hērmēneutai; epeidē hē tou angelou boētheia malista edeiknyto en tois polemois, hous katōrthōsen Ioudas ho makkabaios en tois pros tous Antiochou stratēgous.
"Michael will arise." Indeed, the help from above coming, those who acted impiously will be put to shame, while those who persevered for the law will appear radiant and famous with boldness, as has been interpreted; since the angel's help was shown above all in the wars which Judas the Maccabee won against the generals of Antiochus.
12.2Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Ἔσται καιρὸς θλίψεων κ. τ. λ. Τουτέστιν οὔτε παρ᾽ αἰγυπτίοις τοιαῦτα πεπόνθατε· τοσαύτη γὰρ ἦν ἡ βαρύτης, ὥστε καὶ νύμφην ἐκ τοῦ παστοῦ ἐξελθοῦσαν θρηνεῖν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἡλικίαν ἐν θρήνοις εἶναι· καὶ ὡς ἂν μὴ δόξῃ ἀγνοεῖν θεὸς τὴν γνώμην τῶν τε εὐσεβούντων καὶ παρανομούντων, πρὸ τοῦ τέλους καλῶς ἐπάγει.
Estai kairos thlipseōn k. t. l. Toutestin oute par᾽ aigyptiois toiauta peponthate; tosautē gar ēn hē barytēs, hōste kai nymphēn ek tou pastou exelthousan thrēnein, kai pasan hēlikian en thrēnois einai; kai hōs an mē doxę̄ agnoein theos tēn gnōmēn tōn te eusebountōn kai paranomountōn, pro tou telous kalōs epagei.
"There will be a time of affliction," and so on. That is, not even in Egypt did you suffer such things; for so great was the oppression that even a bride, leaving the bridal chamber, mourned, and every age was in lamentation. And lest God seem not to know the intention of the godly and the lawless, he fittingly adds, before the end, ...
12.4Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Σωθήσεται ὁ λαός σου πᾶς. Τουτέστιν ὅσους οἶδε θεὸς δικαίους, οὗτοι διαμενοῦσιν ἐν εὐσεβείᾳ· καὶ μυρία ποιήσας ὁ Ἀντίοχος, αὐτῶν οὐ περιέσται.
Sōthēsetai ho laos sou pas. Toutestin hosous oide theos dikaious, houtoi diamenousin en eusebeią; kai myria poiēsas ho Antiochos, autōn ou periestai.
"Your people will be saved, all of them." That is, those whom God knows to be righteous, these will remain in godliness; and though Antiochus does countless things, he will not prevail over them.
12.5Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Πολλοὶ τῶν καθευδόντων ἐν γῆς χώματι ἐξεγερθήσονται. Οἴδαμεν ὡς πολλοὶ περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως ταῦτα λέγουσι· δεῖ δὲ μὴ τῷ προχείρῳ προσέχειν, ἀλλὰ τῆς ἀληθείας πανταχοῦ φροντίζειν· οἶδε γὰρ ἡ γραφὴ πολλάκις νεκροὺς τοὺς ἐν αἰχμαλωσίᾳ καλεῖν· ὡς καὶ Ἡσαΐας λέγει, ἀναστήσονται οἱ νεκροὶ καὶ ἐγερθήσονται οἱ ἐν τοῖς μνημείοις· καὶ τὰ ἑξῆς.
Polloi tōn katheudontōn en gēs chōmati exegerthēsontai. Oidamen hōs polloi peri tēs anastaseōs tauta legousi; dei de mē tǭ procheirǭ prosechein, alla tēs alētheias pantachou phrontizein; oide gar hē graphē pollakis nekrous tous en aichmalōsią kalein; hōs kai Hēsaïas legei, anastēsontai hoi nekroi kai egerthēsontai hoi en tois mnēmeiois; kai ta hexēs.
"Many of those who sleep in the dust of the earth will be roused." We know that many say these things about the resurrection; but one must not hold to the obvious meaning, but care for the truth everywhere; for Scripture often calls those in captivity dead; as Isaiah too says: "The dead will rise, and those in the tombs will be raised," and what follows.
12.6Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Οἱ συνιέντες ἐκλάμψουσιν. Συνιέντας γὰρ ἐκάλεσε τοὺς εὐσεβήσαντας, καὶ τῇ φυλακῇ τῶν νόμων ἐγκαρτερήσαντας· τῷ δὲ παραδείγματι τὸ διάφορον αὐτῶν καὶ περιφανὲς ἐμήνυσεν.
Hoi synientes eklampsousin. Synientas gar ekalese tous eusebēsantas, kai tę̄ phylakę̄ tōn nomōn enkarterēsantas; tǭ de paradeigmati to diaphoron autōn kai periphanes emēnysen.
"Those who understand will shine." For he called "understanding" those who were godly and persevered in keeping the laws; and by the comparison he made known their distinction and renown.
12.7Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Ὡς οἱ ἀστέρες εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας, καὶ ἔτι. Ἀστέρας πάλιν κατὰ τὸ τῆς γραφῆς ἰδίωμα τοὺς λαμπροὺς καὶ περιφανεῖς ἐκάλεσεν· ἵνα οὖν εἴπῃ ὅτι οἱ εὐσεβήσαντες πρὸ τῆς παρανομίας τὸ δίκαιον τετιμηκότες, ἀδιάλειπτον ἕξουσι τὴν τιμὴν διὰ παντὸς τοῦ βίου· τὸ δὲ καὶ ἔτι, ἔμφασιν ἔχει ὅτι ἀτελεύτητος ἔσται αὐτῶν ἡ τιμή.
Hōs hoi asteres eis tous aiōnas, kai eti. Asteras palin kata to tēs graphēs idiōma tous lamprous kai periphaneis ekalesen; hina oun eipę̄ hoti hoi eusebēsantes pro tēs paranomias to dikaion tetimēkotes, adialeipton hexousi tēn timēn dia pantos tou biou; to de kai eti, emphasin echei hoti ateleutētos estai autōn hē timē.
"Like the stars for ever, and beyond." Again, according to the manner of Scripture, he called the radiant and renowned "stars"; to say, then, that those who were godly, honoring what is just above lawlessness, will have undying honor throughout life; and "and beyond" indicates that their honor will be without end.
12.8Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Σφράγισον τὸ βιβλίον. Τουτέστι καὶ γράψας ἔασον ἐν ἀφανεῖ· τὸ γὰρ σφράγισον σημαίνει τοῦτο οἶμαι, τὸ μὴ δεῖν αὐτὰ σαφῆ γραφῆναι.
Sphragison to biblion. Toutesti kai grapsas eason en aphanei; to gar sphragison sēmainei touto oimai, to mē dein auta saphē graphēnai.
"Seal the book." That is, having written, leave it in obscurity; for "seal" signifies this, I think: that the things need not be written plainly.
12.9Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Ἕως καιροῦ συντελείας. Ἄχρις οὗ ὁ καιρὸς ἐπιστῇ καθ᾽ ὃν περαιωθῆναι ταῦτα δεῖ· ὥστε ἐκ τῶν πραγμάτων ἀνάγεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν τῶν λεγομένων ἀλήθειαν.
Heōs kairou synteleias. Achris hou ho kairos epistę̄ kath᾽ hon peraiōthēnai tauta dei; hōste ek tōn pragmatōn anagesthai epi tēn tōn legomenōn alētheian.
"Until the time of the end." Until the time comes at which these things must be completed; so that from the events one is led to the truth of what is said.
12.10Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Ἕως διδαχθῶσι πολλοί. Πρὸ μὲν γὰρ τῆς πείρας τῶν πραγμάτων συνέφερεν ἡ ἄγνοια, ὥστε μὴ φόβῳ αὐτοὺς κατασχεθέντας ἐθελοκακῆσαι πρὸς τὴν ἄνοδον· μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἔκβασιν, λυσιτελὴς ἡ εἴδησις.
Heōs didachthōsi polloi. Pro men gar tēs peiras tōn pragmatōn synepheren hē agnoia, hōste mē phobǭ autous kataschethentas ethelokakēsai pros tēn anodon; meta de tēn ekbasin, lysitelēs hē eidēsis.
"Until many are taught." For before the experience of the events, ignorance was profitable, so that they would not, held back by fear, willingly lose heart about the return; but after the outcome, knowledge is profitable.
12.11Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Πληθυνθῇ ἡ γνῶσις. Ὅτι μὲν οὖν πέρας ἔχει τὰ εἰρημένα τῆς τοῦ προφήτου ἀποκαλύψεως, εὔδηλον καὶ πρὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου λόγου· ταῦτα δὲ προστίθεται οὐχ ἁπλῶς, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπειδὴ τὰ κατὰ τὸν λαὸν ἀκριβῶς ἀκούσας ὁ Δανιήλ, καὶ ὅτι χείριστα πείσονται ὑπὸ Ἀντιόχου, ὥστε καλύψαι πᾶσαν τὴν πώποτε αὐτοῖς ἐπενεχθεῖσαν συμφοράν, εἰς ἀθυμίαν κατέστη, καὶ οὐδὲ ἐρωτᾶν οἷός τε ἦν, ὁ θεὸς οὐκ ἀπαραμύθητον αὐτὸν καταλιμπάνων, ἀπὸ τοῦ χρόνου ἀνίησι τῆς φροντίδος· καὶ ἤδη τοῦ ἀγγέλου τοῦ προσδιαλεγομένου, ὡς τετελεκότος τοὺς τῆς διακονίας λόγους, οἰχομένου τε καὶ τὸν ποταμὸν περάσαντος, δείκνυσιν αὐτῷ ἑτέρους δύο ἀγγέλους ἑστῶτας ἑκατέρωθεν τοῦ ποταμοῦ, καὶ πυνθανομένους τίς ὁ χρόνος τῶν ῥηθέντων· οἱ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ ἐρωτᾶν ἴσως εἶχον τὴν ἐξουσίαν· ὁ δὲ ἅτε ἄρχων ἂν τῶν ἀγγέλων, καὶ τὰ κεκρυμμένα εἰδώς, ἀνήγγελλεν· ἢ ἴσως ἅπαντα ἐσχηματίζετο πρὸς τὸ λυσιτελὲς καὶ διδασκαλίαν τοῦ προφήτου.
Plēthynthę̄ hē gnōsis. Hoti men oun peras echei ta eirēmena tēs tou prophētou apokalypseōs, eudēlon kai pro tou heterou logou; tauta de prostithetai ouch haplōs, all᾽ epeidē ta kata ton laon akribōs akousas ho Daniēl, kai hoti cheirista peisontai hypo Antiochou, hōste kalypsai pasan tēn pōpote autois epenechtheisan symphoran, eis athymian katestē, kai oude erōtan hoios te ēn, ho theos ouk aparamythēton auton katalimpanōn, apo tou chronou aniēsi tēs phrontidos; kai ēdē tou angelou tou prosdialegomenou, hōs tetelekotos tous tēs diakonias logous, oichomenou te kai ton potamon perasantos, deiknysin autǭ heterous dyo angelous hestōtas hekaterōthen tou potamou, kai pynthanomenous tis ho chronos tōn rhēthentōn; hoi men gar tou erōtan isōs eichon tēn exousian; ho de hate archōn an tōn angelōn, kai ta kekrymmena eidōs, anēngellen; ē isōs hapanta eschēmatizeto pros to lysiteles kai didaskalian tou prophētou.
"And knowledge will be multiplied." That the things said in the prophet's revelation have an end is clear even before the other word; but these are added not simply, but because Daniel, having heard exactly what concerned the people, and that they would suffer the worst under Antiochus, so as to surpass every misfortune that had ever overtaken them, fell into despondency and was not even able to ask; and God, not leaving him without comfort, relieves him of the care about the time. And when the angel who was speaking with him had now completed the words of his ministry, and was going away and had passed over the river, he shows him two other angels standing on either side of the river and asking what the time of the things said would be; for perhaps they had the authority to ask, while the other, being perhaps the chief of the angels and knowing hidden things, announced it; or perhaps everything was shaped for the profit and teaching of the prophet.
12.12Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):25
Ἕως πότε τὸ πέρας; Τουτέστι τῶν συμβησομένων τῷ ἔθνει. — Οὐ τὸν χρόνον μόνον καθ᾽ ὃν συμβήσεται τὰ εἰρημένα, ἠβουλήθη τὸν προφήτην διδάξαι ὁ ἄγγελος, ἀλλὰ καὶ πιστώσασθαι περὶ τῆς ἀληθείας τῶν λεγομένων· διὰ τοῦτο πρὸς πληροφορίαν ἀνατείνας εἰς οὐρανὸν τὰς χεῖρας, ὅρκῳ τῷ κατὰ θεοῦ πιστοῦται περὶ τῶν λεγομένων.
Heōs pote to peras? Toutesti tōn symbēsomenōn tǭ ethnei. — Ou ton chronon monon kath᾽ hon symbēsetai ta eirēmena, ēboulēthē ton prophētēn didaxai ho angelos, alla kai pistōsasthai peri tēs alētheias tōn legomenōn; dia touto pros plērophorian anateinas eis ouranon tas cheiras, horkǭ tǭ kata theou pistoutai peri tōn legomenōn.
"How long until the end?" That is, of the things that will happen to the nation. — The angel wished to teach the prophet not only the time at which the things said will happen, but also to give assurance about the truth of what was said; for this reason, raising his hands to heaven for full assurance, he gives his pledge about what was said by an oath by God.
12.14Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Ἐν τῷ συντελεσθῆναι διασκορπισμόν. Μετὰ τὸ δεινά φησι τὸν λαὸν παθεῖν, καὶ τῆς ἐνεγκούσης γενέσθαι φυγάδας τοὺς ὑπὸ θεοῦ ἡγιασμένους, ἅπαντα παυθήσεται τὰ τῶν παρανόμων· καὶ οἵ τε εὐσεβεῖς ἐν ἀδείᾳ διάξουσι· καὶ ὁ ναὸς τὸ πρέπον ἀπολήψεται σχῆμα.
En tǭ syntelesthēnai diaskorpismon. Meta to deina phēsi ton laon pathein, kai tēs enenkousēs genesthai phygadas tous hypo theou hēgiasmenous, hapanta pauthēsetai ta tōn paranomōn; kai hoi te eusebeis en adeią diaxousi; kai ho naos to prepon apolēpsetai schēma.
"When the scattering is completed." After the people have suffered terribly, he says, and those sanctified by God have become exiles from the land that bore them, all the doings of the lawless will cease; the godly will live in safety, and the temple will regain its fitting form.
12.15Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Ἤκουσα καὶ συνῆκα. Τουτέστιν ὑπομνησθεὶς τῶν ἤδη ῥηθέντων, ἔγνων ὡς ἀληθῆ τὰ λεγόμενα.
Ēkousa kai synēka. Toutestin hypomnēstheis tōn ēdē rhēthentōn, egnōn hōs alēthē ta legomena.
"I heard and understood." That is, recalling what had already been said, I knew that the things said are true.
12.16Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Τί τὰ ἔσχατα τούτων; Δῆλός ἐστιν ὁ Δανιὴλ ὑπὸ πολλῆς τῆς περὶ τὸ θεῖον ἐπιθυμίας πάντα ἐθέλειν μανθάνειν ἀκριβῶς τὰ μετὰ ταῦτα.
Ti ta eschata toutōn? Dēlos estin ho Daniēl hypo pollēs tēs peri to theion epithymias panta ethelein manthanein akribōs ta meta tauta.
"What are the last of these things?" It is clear that Daniel, from great desire for divine things, wishes to learn exactly everything that comes after.
12.17Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Δεῦρο Δανιήλ. Τουτέστι παῦσαι φιλοπευστῶν περαιτέρω τῶν ῥηθέντων· ἀσαφεῖς γὰρ ἐκείνους τοὺς λόγους εἶναι προσήκει, καὶ ἀποῤῥήτους μένειν παρὰ θεῷ ἄχρις τῆς τῶν χρόνων ἐκβάσεως. — Τὸ ἀσαφὲς τῶν εἰρημένων αἰνιττόμενος.
Deuro Daniēl. Toutesti pausai philopeustōn peraiterō tōn rhēthentōn; asapheis gar ekeinous tous logous einai prosēkei, kai aporrhētous menein para theǭ achris tēs tōn chronōn ekbaseōs. — To asaphes tōn eirēmenōn ainittomenos.
"Go, Daniel." That is, stop eagerly inquiring beyond what has been said; for those words must be obscure and remain unspoken with God until the outcome of the times. — Hinting at the obscurity of what was said.
12.18Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Ἐκλεγῶσι κ. τ. λ. Τοσοῦτον μόνον ἴσθι ὡς πάντα τὰ κάλλιστα κατὰ τὴν τοῦ χριστοῦ ἔσται παρουσίαν· ἐξελέγησαν γὰρ οἱ ἀπόστολοι· ἐκλευκαίνονται δὲ οἱ καθαιρόμενοι, καὶ τῷ βαπτίσματι τῷ ἁγίῳ φωτιζόμενοι· πυροῦνται δὲ οἱ δόκιμοι, διὰ τῆς πίστεως γιγνόμενοι δόκιμοι.
Eklegōsi k. t. l. Tosouton monon isthi hōs panta ta kallista kata tēn tou christou estai parousian; exelegēsan gar hoi apostoloi; ekleukainontai de hoi kathairomenoi, kai tǭ baptismati tǭ hagiǭ phōtizomenoi; pyrountai de hoi dokimoi, dia tēs pisteōs gignomenoi dokimoi.
"They will be chosen," and so on. Know this much only: that all the best things will come at the coming of Christ; for the apostles were chosen; those who are cleansed and enlightened by holy baptism are made white; and the approved are refined by fire, becoming approved through faith.
12.19Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Ἀνομήσουσιν ἄνομοι. Τὰ μὲν οὖν περὶ τοῦ χριστοῦ ἔσται ταῦτα· ἴσθι δὲ ὡς ἔσονταί τινες οἳ τότε πλείστην τὴν ἀσέβειαν ἐπιδείξονται· λέγει δὲ τοὺς περὶ τὸν φόνον τοῦ χριστοῦ σπεύσαντας· ἀορίστως δὲ λέγει, ταῦτά τε κἀκεῖνα παντάπασι κρύπτειν διεγνωκώς, ὡς ἔφην· τήν τε τῶν ἰουδαίων ἀποβολὴν τήν τε τῶν ἐθνῶν κλῆσιν.
Anomēsousin anomoi. Ta men oun peri tou christou estai tauta; isthi de hōs esontai tines hoi tote pleistēn tēn asebeian epideixontai; legei de tous peri ton phonon tou christou speusantas; aoristōs de legei, tauta te kakeina pantapasi kryptein diegnōkōs, hōs ephēn; tēn te tōn ioudaiōn apobolēn tēn te tōn ethnōn klēsin.
"The lawless will act lawlessly." These things, then, will concern Christ; but know that there will be some who will then display the greatest impiety; he means those who hastened to the murder of Christ. He speaks indefinitely, having resolved, as I said, to hide altogether both these things and those: the rejection of the Jews and the calling of the Gentiles.
12.20Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Οὐ συνήσουσι πάντες ἄνομοι. Πολλοί φησιν οὐκ εἴσονται δεσπότην τὸν παραγινόμενον· αἰνίττεται δὲ ἰουδαίους καὶ τοὺς περὶ τὸν Ἡρώδην καὶ Πιλάτον· περὶ ὧν καὶ ὁ μακάριος Παῦλος λέγει, εἰ γὰρ ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν τὸν κύριον τῆς δόξης ἐσταύρωσαν.
Ou synēsousi pantes anomoi. Polloi phēsin ouk eisontai despotēn ton paraginomenon; ainittetai de ioudaious kai tous peri ton Hērōdēn kai Pilaton; peri hōn kai ho makarios Paulos legei, ei gar egnōsan, ouk an ton kyrion tēs doxēs estaurōsan.
"None of the lawless will understand." Many, he says, will not know the Master who comes; he hints at the Jews and those around Herod and Pilate, of whom the blessed Paul also says: "For if they had known, they would not have crucified the Lord of glory."
12.21Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Οἱ νοήμονες συνήσουσι. Ἀλλὰ καὶ τούτων ταύτην ἐπιδειξαμένων τὴν γνώμην, οἱ περὶ τὴν εὐσέβειαν ὀρθοὶ πιστεύσουσι· τοῦτο μὲν ἀπὸ τῶν σημείων δυσωπούμενοι, τοῦτο δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν τοῦ χριστοῦ ὑπὸ τῶν προφητῶν προῤῥηθέντων τε καὶ ἐκβάντων.
Hoi noēmones synēsousi. Alla kai toutōn tautēn epideixamenōn tēn gnōmēn, hoi peri tēn eusebeian orthoi pisteusousi; touto men apo tōn sēmeiōn dysōpoumenoi, touto de apo tōn tou christou hypo tōn prophētōn prorrhēthentōn te kai ekbantōn.
"Those with insight will understand." But though these showed this attitude, those who are upright in godliness will believe, moved partly by the signs, partly by what the prophets foretold of Christ and what came to pass.
12.22Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Ἀπὸ καιροῦ παραλλάξεως τοῦ ἐνδελεχισμοῦ. Ἐνδελεχισμὸν μὲν οὖν καλεῖ τὴν καθημερινὴν θυσίαν· παράλλαξιν δὲ τὴν παρατροπήν, ἀπὸ τοῦ παραλλάττεσθαι καὶ εἰς τὸ ἐναντίον μεθίστασθαι.
Apo kairou parallaxeōs tou endelechismou. Endelechismon men oun kalei tēn kathēmerinēn thysian; parallaxin de tēn paratropēn, apo tou parallattesthai kai eis to enantion methistasthai.
"From the time of the change of the continual offering." By "continual offering" he means the daily sacrifice; by "change" the perversion, from being changed and turned into its opposite.
12.23Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Τοῦ δοθῆναι τὸ βδέλυγμα. Τὸν βωμὸν ὃν ἐπὶ καθαιρέσει τοῦ ναοῦ καὶ τιμῇ τοῦ ὀλυμπίου Διὸς ἔστησεν· βούλεται οὖν εἰπεῖν ὅτι μετὰ τὸ τὴν παράνομον θρησκείαν περὶ τὸν ναὸν τελεσθῆναι, καὶ δεινὰ τοὺς ὁμοφύλους τοὺς σοὺς παθεῖν ὡς εἴρηται, ἄρξεταί τις εἶναι μεταβολὴ τῆς ἐκείνων εὐημερίας.
Tou dothēnai to bdelygma. Ton bōmon hon epi kathairesei tou naou kai timę̄ tou olympiou Dios estēsen; bouletai oun eipein hoti meta to tēn paranomon thrēskeian peri ton naon telesthēnai, kai deina tous homophylous tous sous pathein hōs eirētai, arxetai tis einai metabolē tēs ekeinōn euēmerias.
"For the abomination to be set up." The altar which he set up for the overthrow of the temple and in honor of Olympian Zeus. He means, then, that after the lawless worship has been performed at the temple, and your kinsmen have suffered terribly, as has been said, some change in their prosperity will begin.
12.24Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Ἡμέραι χίλιαι σϙʹ. Ἀπὸ τοίνυν ἐκείνου τοῦ καιροῦ καθ᾽ ὃν μετάπτωσίς τε ἔσται ἐπὶ τὸ ἐναντίον, τῶν ἐν δυσκολίαις μὲν ἐξεταζομένων, μελλόντων δὲ ἀπολαμβάνειν τὴν οἰκείαν κατάστασιν, ἔσονται ἡμέραι χίλιαι σϙʹ.
Hēmerai chiliai sϙʹ. Apo toinyn ekeinou tou kairou kath᾽ hon metaptōsis te estai epi to enantion, tōn en dyskoliais men exetazomenōn, mellontōn de apolambanein tēn oikeian katastasin, esontai hēmerai chiliai sϙʹ.
"One thousand two hundred and ninety days." From that time, then, at which there will be a turn to the opposite, when those who were tried in hardships are about to regain their own condition, there will be one thousand two hundred and ninety days.
12.26Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Μακάριος ὁ ὑπομένων καὶ φθάσας εἰς ἡμέρας κτλ. Μακαρίζει τοίνυν τοὺς δεινοῖς ὑπὲρ τῆς εὐσεβείας ἐγκαρτερήσαντας, καὶ διηνυκότας τὸν πρότερον χρόνον, λέγω δὲ τῶν ‚ασϙʹ ἡμερῶν, ἐν αἷς ἔτ᾽ ἀμφίβολος ἦν ἡ τῶν εὐσεβῶν πρὸς τοὺς παρανόμους διαφορά· καὶ φθάσαντας εἰς τὸν χρόνον τῶν ‚ατλεʹ ἡμερῶν· ἐν αἷς λοιπὸν μετὰ τὴν κατὰ τοῦ Ἀντιόχου νίκην, λαμπρά τε τοῦ θεοῦ ἐδείκνυτο ἡ βοήθεια· καὶ μακαριστοὶ οἱ ἐπὶ τὸν θεὸν ἠλπικότες εὐφραίνοντο οὐκέτι ἐν λόγοις τὴν ἄνωθεν ἔχοντες ῥοπήν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ τῶν ἔργων δειχθέντες ἀμείνους τε τῶν παρανόμων καὶ θεῷ ἀνακείμενοι διὰ τὴν εὐσέβειαν· ὥσπερ γὰρ τὸ πρότερον μετεώρων ἔτι τῶν πραγμάτων κειμένων, καὶ τῆς συμφορᾶς ἐπηρτημένης τοῖς εὐσεβέσιν, ἐγκωμίων οἱ θεραπεύειν τὴν βασιλικὴν ἐξουσίαν βουλόμενοι, οὕτω μετὰ τὴν νίκην τῶν περὶ τὸν Ἰούδαν, οὗτοί τε μακαρισμοῦ ἄξιοι ἐφαίνοντο, κἀκεῖνοι σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ἀθλίους ἐνόμιζον.
Makarios ho hypomenōn kai phthasas eis hēmeras ktl. Makarizei toinyn tous deinois hyper tēs eusebeias enkarterēsantas, kai diēnykotas ton proteron chronon, legō de tōn ‚asϙʹ hēmerōn, en hais et᾽ amphibolos ēn hē tōn eusebōn pros tous paranomous diaphora; kai phthasantas eis ton chronon tōn ‚atleʹ hēmerōn; en hais loipon meta tēn kata tou Antiochou nikēn, lampra te tou theou edeiknyto hē boētheia; kai makaristoi hoi epi ton theon ēlpikotes euphrainonto ouketi en logois tēn anōthen echontes rhopēn, all᾽ epi tōn ergōn deichthentes ameinous te tōn paranomōn kai theǭ anakeimenoi dia tēn eusebeian; hōsper gar to proteron meteōrōn eti tōn pragmatōn keimenōn, kai tēs symphoras epērtēmenēs tois eusebesin, enkōmiōn hoi therapeuein tēn basilikēn exousian boulomenoi, houtō meta tēn nikēn tōn peri ton Ioudan, houtoi te makarismou axioi ephainonto, kakeinoi sphas autous athlious enomizon.
"Blessed is the one who endures and reaches the days," and so on. He calls blessed, then, those who persevered through terrible things for godliness and lived through the earlier time, I mean the 1,290 days, in which the difference between the godly and the lawless was still uncertain, and who reached the time of the 1,335 days, in which, after the victory over Antiochus, the help of God was shown brilliantly; and those who had hoped in God, deemed blessed, rejoiced, no longer having the help from above only in words, but shown in deeds to be better than the lawless and devoted to God for their godliness. For just as before, while affairs still hung in suspense and calamity threatened the godly, those who wished to court the royal power were thought worthy of praise, so after the victory of Judas and his men, these appeared worthy of being called blessed, and the others thought themselves wretched.
12.27Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Σὺ δεῦρο καὶ ἀναπαύου. Τουτέστι ταῦτα ἐγνωκώς, ἀπαλλάγηθι τῆς φροντίδος, μηδὲν πλέον τῶν εἰρημένων πολυπραγμονῶν.
Sy deuro kai anapauou. Toutesti tauta egnōkōs, apallagēthi tēs phrontidos, mēden pleon tōn eirēmenōn polypragmonōn.
"But you, go and rest." That is, now that you know these things, be rid of anxiety, inquiring no further than what has been said.
12.28Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Ἔτι γὰρ ἡμέραι. Καὶ γὰρ χρόνοις ὕστερον ἔσται τὰ ῥηθέντα.
Eti gar hēmerai. Kai gar chronois hysteron estai ta rhēthenta.
"For there are still days." For indeed the things said will happen at later times.
12.29Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Ἀναπαύσῃ. Ἀντὶ τοῦ, σὺ δὲ μεταλλάξεις τὸν βίον.
Anapausę̄. Anti tou, sy de metallaxeis ton bion.
"You will rest." Meaning, you will depart this life.
12.30Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26
Ἀναστήσῃ εἰς τὸν κλῆρόν σου. Ἴσθι δέ φησιν, ὡς πᾶσα τοῦ βίου κατάστασις αὕτη παυθήσεται, καὶ ἔσται πάντων ἀνάστασις, ἐν ᾗ τῶν βεβιωμένων ἕκαστος ἕξει τὰς ἀμοιβάς· τὸ τηνικαῦτα δὲ καὶ αὐτὸς τῶν τῆς ἀρετῆς πόνων λήψῃ τὰ ἔπαθλα.
Anastēsę̄ eis ton klēron sou. Isthi de phēsin, hōs pasa tou biou katastasis hautē pauthēsetai, kai estai pantōn anastasis, en hę̄ tōn bebiōmenōn hekastos hexei tas amoibas; to tēnikauta de kai autos tōn tēs aretēs ponōn lēpsę̄ ta epathla.
"You will rise to your lot." Know, he says, that this whole condition of life will cease, and there will be a resurrection of all, in which each will receive the recompense for the life he has lived; and at that time you too will receive the prizes for your labors of virtue.
Chapter 13
13.1Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):26-27
Ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἀστυάγης. Ὑποπτεύσειεν ἄν τις ἐκ τῶν κειμένων τὸν Ἀστυάγην μῆδον βεβασιλευκέναι μετὰ τὸν Δαρεῖον· ἔχει δὲ οὐχ οὕτως· ἢ γὰρ ἂν ὁ προφήτης ἐμνημόνευσεν ἐν ποίᾳ τινὶ καταστάσει ἐν τοῖς τούτου γέγονε χρόνοις, ὃ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν λοιπῶν φαίνεται πεποιηκώς· εὕροι τοίνυν ἄν τις τοῦτο ἀποδεδωκότα τὸν προφήτην τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν εἰρημένοις· φήσας γὰρ ἐν τῇ ἑρμηνείᾳ τῆς γραφῆς τῆς ἐπὶ τοῦ Βαλτάσαρ ἐπὶ τοῦ τοίχου δειχθείσης, ὡς παραλήψονται μῆδοι τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ πέρσαι, ὡς κατὰ ταύτην μὲν ἀρξάντων Δαρείου τε τοῦ μήδου καὶ Κύρου τοῦ πέρσου, μεταστησομένης δὲ ὅσον οὐδέπω τῆς ἀρχῆς εἰς πέρσας ὡς ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν εἴρηται· μνημονεύσας τοίνυν τοῦ Δαρείου, ὡς διαδεξαμένου τὸν Βαλτάσαρ, ἐν αὐτῇ γάρ φησι τῇ νυκτὶ ἀνῃρέθη Βαλτάσαρ ὁ βασιλεύς, καὶ παρέλαβε Δαρεῖος ὁ μῆδος τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπισυνάψας τὰς ὀπτασίας ἑαυτοῦ, ἅς ἔν τε τῷ πρώτῳ ἔτει τοῦ Βαλτάσαρ ἐθεάσατο, καὶ ἐν τῷ τρίτῳ, καὶ μὴν ἃς εἶδεν αὐτοῦ βεβασιλευκότος Δαρείου, καὶ ἃς εἶδεν ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ ἔτει Κύρου τοῦ βασιλέως· ἐπειδὴ τὴν ἀρχὴν αὐτοῦ τοῦ Κύρου οὐκ ἔφη, ἀλλ᾽ ἁπλῶς ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ ἔτει εἶδε τὰ καὶ τά, τὸ ἐλλεῖπον τῇ γραφῇ ἀποδιδούς, ἔφη τὸν μὲν Ἀστυάγην τετελευτηκέναι, βεβασιλευκέναι δὲ τὸν Κῦρον· ἦν δὲ οὗτος ὁ Ἀστυάγης βασιλεὺς μὲν περσῶν, πάππος δὲ τοῦ Κύρου, ὡς αἱ ἑλληνικαὶ διδάσκουσι γραφαί, ὃς τεχθέντα ἀνελεῖν ἐβουλήθη· ὁ δὲ Κῦρος σωθεὶς προνοίᾳ θείᾳ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἐπελάβετο, καθελὼν τὸν Ἀστυάγην. Νῦν οὖν τὴν μὲν Ἀστυάγους τελευτὴν ἔφη· τοῦ δὲ Κύρου τὴν ἀρχὴν δεικνὺς τὴν ἀληθῆ γραφήν, τὴν ἐπὶ Βαλτάσαρ δειχθεῖσαν, ἣν αὐτὸς ἡρμήνευσε· καὶ ὅτι ὁ θεὸς κηδόμενος τοῦ λαοῦ, σώζειν αὐτὸν διέγνω· τήν τε αὐτοῦ πρόῤῥησιν εἰς πέρας ἄγων, καὶ τῷ πλήθει κατὰ τὰς ὑποσχέσεις τὴν ἄνοδον χαριζόμενος· εἰ δὲ ἡ γραφὴ μετὰ τὸν Δαρεῖον τὸν Κῦρον ἔφη βεβασιλευκέναι, οὐ ξενιστέον· εὔδηλον γὰρ ὡς τὸ τηνικαῦτα τοπαρχίαι αἱ βασιλεῖαι ἐτύγχανον· καὶ ἡ τῶν περσῶν βασιλεία πολλῶν ἐθνῶν ἄρχουσα, διαφόρους ἔχει κατὰ τὸ παλαιὸν τοὺς βασιλεύοντας· ἄλλη γὰρ ἦν ἡ ἀσσυρίων βασιλεία, καὶ ἑτέρα ἡ μήδων, καὶ ἄλλη βαβυλωνίων, καὶ ἑτέρα ἡ περσῶν· εἰκὸς οὖν τὸν μὲν Δαρεῖον, μήδων ἄρξαι· ὁμόρου δὲ ἔθνους τὸν Ἀστυάγην, καὶ δεξάμενον τὴν Δαρείου ἀρχὴν Κῦρον, ὡς φρονοῦντα κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ καθελεῖν τὸν Ἀστυάγην. Τοῦτο γὰρ συλλογίσαιτό τις ἔκ τε τῶν ἐν τῇ θείᾳ φερομένων γραφῇ, καὶ ἐξ ὧν ἐκ τῶν ἑλληνικῶν ἱστοριῶν διδασκόμεθα.
Ho basileus Astyagēs. Hypopteuseien an tis ek tōn keimenōn ton Astyagēn mēdon bebasileukenai meta ton Dareion; echei de ouch houtōs; ē gar an ho prophētēs emnēmoneusen en poią tini katastasei en tois toutou gegone chronois, ho kai epi tōn loipōn phainetai pepoiēkōs; heuroi toinyn an tis touto apodedōkota ton prophētēn tois emprosthen eirēmenois; phēsas gar en tę̄ hermēneią tēs graphēs tēs epi tou Baltasar epi tou toichou deichtheisēs, hōs paralēpsontai mēdoi tēn basileian kai persai, hōs kata tautēn men arxantōn Dareiou te tou mēdou kai Kyrou tou persou, metastēsomenēs de hoson oudepō tēs archēs eis persas hōs en tois emprosthen eirētai; mnēmoneusas toinyn tou Dareiou, hōs diadexamenou ton Baltasar, en autę̄ gar phēsi tę̄ nykti anę̄rethē Baltasar ho basileus, kai parelabe Dareios ho mēdos tēn basileian autou, kai euthys episynapsas tas optasias heautou, has en te tǭ prōtǭ etei tou Baltasar etheasato, kai en tǭ tritǭ, kai mēn has eiden autou bebasileukotos Dareiou, kai has eiden en tǭ prōtǭ etei Kyrou tou basileōs; epeidē tēn archēn autou tou Kyrou ouk ephē, all᾽ haplōs en tǭ prōtǭ etei eide ta kai ta, to elleipon tę̄ graphę̄ apodidous, ephē ton men Astyagēn teteleutēkenai, bebasileukenai de ton Kyron; ēn de houtos ho Astyagēs basileus men persōn, pappos de tou Kyrou, hōs hai hellēnikai didaskousi graphai, hos techthenta anelein eboulēthē; ho de Kyros sōtheis pronoią theią tēs archēs epelabeto, kathelōn ton Astyagēn. Nyn oun tēn men Astyagous teleutēn ephē; tou de Kyrou tēn archēn deiknys tēn alēthē graphēn, tēn epi Baltasar deichtheisan, hēn autos hērmēneuse; kai hoti ho theos kēdomenos tou laou, sōzein auton diegnō; tēn te autou prorrhēsin eis peras agōn, kai tǭ plēthei kata tas hyposcheseis tēn anodon charizomenos; ei de hē graphē meta ton Dareion ton Kyron ephē bebasileukenai, ou xenisteon; eudēlon gar hōs to tēnikauta toparchiai hai basileiai etynchanon; kai hē tōn persōn basileia pollōn ethnōn archousa, diaphorous echei kata to palaion tous basileuontas; allē gar ēn hē assyriōn basileia, kai hetera hē mēdōn, kai allē babylōniōn, kai hetera hē persōn; eikos oun ton men Dareion, mēdōn arxai; homorou de ethnous ton Astyagēn, kai dexamenon tēn Dareiou archēn Kyron, hōs phronounta kat᾽ autou kathelein ton Astyagēn. Touto gar syllogisaito tis ek te tōn en tę̄ theią pheromenōn graphę̄, kai ex hōn ek tōn hellēnikōn historiōn didaskometha.
"King Astyages." One might suspect from the text that Astyages the Mede reigned after Darius; but it is not so. For otherwise the prophet would have recorded in what condition he was during his times, as he evidently did in the other cases. One would find, then, that the prophet has accounted for this in what was said earlier. For he said, in the interpretation of the writing shown on the wall under Belshazzar, that the Medes and Persians would take over the kingdom, since under it Darius the Mede and Cyrus the Persian would rule, and the rule would very soon pass to the Persians, as was said earlier. Having mentioned Darius, then, as succeeding Belshazzar (for he says, "That very night Belshazzar the king was killed, and Darius the Mede received his kingdom"), and having at once added his own visions, which he saw in the first year of Belshazzar and in the third, and those he saw when Darius was reigning, and those he saw in the first year of King Cyrus; since he did not state the beginning of Cyrus's reign, but simply said that in the first year he saw such and such things, he now supplies what was lacking in the writing and says that Astyages had died and Cyrus had become king. This Astyages was king of the Persians and grandfather of Cyrus, as the Greek writings teach, who wished to kill him at birth; but Cyrus, saved by divine providence, seized the rule and overthrew Astyages. Now, then, he stated the death of Astyages and, showing the beginning of Cyrus's reign, showed the writing shown under Belshazzar, which he himself had interpreted, to be true, and that God, caring for the people, resolved to save them, bringing his own prediction to fulfillment and granting the multitude the return according to his promises. If Scripture said that Cyrus reigned after Darius, it is no cause for surprise; for clearly the kingdoms at that time were local principalities, and the kingdom of the Persians, ruling many nations, had different rulers in ancient times; for the kingdom of the Assyrians was one, that of the Medes another, that of the Babylonians another, and that of the Persians another. It is likely, then, that Darius ruled the Medes, Astyages a neighboring nation, and that Cyrus, having received Darius's rule, overthrew Astyages as one who plotted against him. One may infer this both from what is contained in divine Scripture and from what we are taught by the Greek histories.
13.4Mai Script. vet. nova coll. 1 (1831):27
Ἦν Δανιὴλ συμβιωτὴς τοῦ βασιλέως. Τουτέστιν ὡς ἐπὶ Δαρείου καὶ Κύρου παραλαβόντος τὴν ἐκείνου ἀρχήν. — Ἔνδοξος ὑπὲρ πάντας τοὺς φίλους αὐτοῦ. Πανταχοῦ φαίνεται τὴν τοῦ προφήτου τιμὴν διδάσκων ὁ συγγραφεύς, μεγίστην τὴν περὶ αὐτοῦ πρόνοιαν τοῦ θεοῦ δι᾽ ὅλου δεῖξαι φιλοτιμούμενος· τοῦτο γὰρ ὁμοῦ λαμπρὸν ἐδείκνυ τὸν προφήτην, καὶ τοῖς λοιποῖς προτροπὴ μεγίστη εἰς ἀρετὴν καθίστατο πρὸς τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων φαντασίαν κεχηνόσιν.
Ēn Daniēl symbiōtēs tou basileōs. Toutestin hōs epi Dareiou kai Kyrou paralabontos tēn ekeinou archēn. — Endoxos hyper pantas tous philous autou. Pantachou phainetai tēn tou prophētou timēn didaskōn ho syngrapheus, megistēn tēn peri autou pronoian tou theou di᾽ holou deixai philotimoumenos; touto gar homou lampron edeikny ton prophētēn, kai tois loipois protropē megistē eis aretēn kathistato pros tēn tōn anthrōpōn phantasian kechēnosin.
"Daniel was a companion of the king." That is, as under Darius, and under Cyrus who took over his rule. — "Honored above all his friends." Everywhere the writer is seen teaching the prophet's honor, striving throughout to show God's very great providence for him; for this at once showed the prophet illustrious, and became the greatest incentive to virtue for the rest, who gape at what impresses men.